Initial revision

FossilOrigin-Name: 2bf55ca9aa942b581137b9f474da5ad9c1480de4

32 files changed, 20422 insertions, 0 deletions

diff --git a/unix/Makefile.in b/unix/Makefile.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..51b9723
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/Makefile.in
@@ -0,0 +1,1003 @@
+#
+# This file is a Makefile for Tk.  If it has the name "Makefile.in"
+# then it is a template for a Makefile;  to generate the actual Makefile,
+# run "./configure", which is a configuration script generated by the
+# "autoconf" program (constructs like "@foo@" will get replaced in the
+# actual Makefile.
+#
+# SCCS: @(#) Makefile.in 1.146 97/11/05 11:10:45
+
+# Current Tk version;  used in various names.
+
+TCLVERSION = @TCL_VERSION@
+VERSION = @TK_VERSION@
+
+#----------------------------------------------------------------
+# Things you can change to personalize the Makefile for your own
+# site (you can make these changes in either Makefile.in or
+# Makefile, but changes to Makefile will get lost if you re-run
+# the configuration script).
+#----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+# Default top-level directories in which to install architecture-
+# specific files (exec_prefix) and machine-independent files such
+# as scripts (prefix).  The values specified here may be overridden
+# at configure-time with the --exec-prefix and --prefix options
+# to the "configure" script.
+
+prefix =		@prefix@
+exec_prefix =		@exec_prefix@
+
+# The following definition can be set to non-null for special systems
+# like AFS with replication.  It allows the pathnames used for installation
+# to be different than those used for actually reference files at
+# run-time.  INSTALL_ROOT is prepended to $prefix and $exec_prefix
+# when installing files.
+INSTALL_ROOT =
+
+# Directory from which applications will reference the library of Tcl
+# scripts (note: you can set the TK_LIBRARY environment variable at
+# run-time to override the compiled-in location):
+TK_LIBRARY =		$(prefix)/lib/tk$(VERSION)
+
+# Path name to use when installing library scripts:
+SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR =	$(INSTALL_ROOT)$(TK_LIBRARY)
+
+# Directory in which to install the .a or .so binary for the Tk library:
+LIB_INSTALL_DIR =	$(INSTALL_ROOT)$(exec_prefix)/lib
+
+# Path to use at runtime to refer to LIB_INSTALL_DIR:
+LIB_RUNTIME_DIR =	$(exec_prefix)/lib
+
+# Directory in which to install the program wish:
+BIN_INSTALL_DIR =	$(INSTALL_ROOT)$(exec_prefix)/bin
+
+# Directory from which the program wish should be referenced by scripts:
+BIN_DIR =		$(exec_prefix)/bin
+
+# Directory in which to install the include file tk.h:
+INCLUDE_INSTALL_DIR =	$(INSTALL_ROOT)$(prefix)/include
+
+# Top-level directory for manual entries:
+MAN_INSTALL_DIR =	$(INSTALL_ROOT)$(prefix)/man
+
+# Directory in which to install manual entry for wish:
+MAN1_INSTALL_DIR =	$(MAN_INSTALL_DIR)/man1
+
+# Directory in which to install manual entries for Tk's C library
+# procedures:
+MAN3_INSTALL_DIR =	$(MAN_INSTALL_DIR)/man3
+
+# Directory in which to install manual entries for the built-in
+# Tcl commands implemented by Tk:
+MANN_INSTALL_DIR =	$(MAN_INSTALL_DIR)/mann
+
+# The directory containing the Tcl sources and headers appropriate
+# for this version of Tk ("srcdir" will be replaced or has already
+# been replaced by the configure script):
+TCL_GENERIC_DIR =	@TCL_SRC_DIR@/generic
+
+# The directory containing the Tcl library archive file appropriate
+# for this version of Tk:
+TCL_BIN_DIR =		@TCL_BIN_DIR@
+
+# A "-I" switch that can be used when compiling to make all of the
+# X11 include files accessible (the configure script will try to
+# set this value, and will cause it to be an empty string if the
+# include files are accessible via /usr/include).
+X11_INCLUDES =		@XINCLUDES@
+
+# Linker switch(es) to use to link with the X11 library archive (the
+# configure script will try to set this value automatically, but you
+# can override it).
+X11_LIB_SWITCHES =	@XLIBSW@
+
+# Libraries to use when linking.  This definition is determined by the
+# configure script.
+LIBS = @TCL_BUILD_LIB_SPEC@ @LIBS@ $(X11_LIB_SWITCHES) @DL_LIBS@ @MATH_LIBS@ -lc
+
+# To change the compiler switches, for example to change from -O
+# to -g, change the following line:
+CFLAGS = -O
+
+# To turn off the security checks that disallow incoming sends when
+# the X server appears to be insecure, reverse the comments on the
+# following lines:
+SECURITY_FLAGS =
+#SECURITY_FLAGS = -DTK_NO_SECURITY
+
+# To disable ANSI-C procedure prototypes reverse the comment characters
+# on the following lines:
+PROTO_FLAGS =
+#PROTO_FLAGS = -DNO_PROTOTYPE
+
+# To enable memory debugging reverse the comment characters on the following
+# lines.  Warning:  if you enable memory debugging, you must do it
+# *everywhere*, including all the code that calls Tcl, and you must use
+# ckalloc and ckfree everywhere instead of malloc and free.
+MEM_DEBUG_FLAGS =
+#MEM_DEBUG_FLAGS = -DTCL_MEM_DEBUG
+
+# If your X server is X11R4 or earlier, then you may wish to reverse
+# the comment characters on the following two lines.  This will enable
+# extra code to speed up XStringToKeysym.  In X11R5 and later releases
+# XStringToKeysym is plenty fast, so you needn't define REDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP.
+KEYSYM_FLAGS =
+#KEYSYM_FLAGS = -DREDO_KEYSYM_LOOKUP
+
+# Some versions of make, like SGI's, use the following variable to
+# determine which shell to use for executing commands:
+SHELL =		/bin/sh
+
+# Tk used to let the configure script choose which program to use
+# for installing, but there are just too many different versions of
+# "install" around;  better to use the install-sh script that comes
+# with the distribution, which is slower but guaranteed to work.
+
+INSTALL = @srcdir@/install-sh -c
+INSTALL_PROGRAM =	${INSTALL}
+INSTALL_DATA =		${INSTALL} -m 644
+
+
+# The symbols below provide support for dynamic loading and shared
+# libraries.  The values of the symbols are normally set by the
+# configure script.  You shouldn't normally need to modify any of
+# these definitions by hand.
+
+TK_SHLIB_CFLAGS = @TK_SHLIB_CFLAGS@
+
+TK_LIB_FILE = @TK_LIB_FILE@
+#TK_LIB_FILE = libtk.a
+
+# The symbol below provides support for dynamic loading and shared
+# libraries.  See configure.in for a description of what it means.
+# The values of the symbolis normally set by the configure script.
+
+SHLIB_LD = @SHLIB_LD@
+
+# Additional search flags needed to find the various shared libraries
+# at run-time.  The first symbol is for use when creating a binary
+# with cc, and the second is for use when running ld directly.
+TK_CC_SEARCH_FLAGS = @TK_CC_SEARCH_FLAGS@
+TK_LD_SEARCH_FLAGS = @TK_LD_SEARCH_FLAGS@
+
+#----------------------------------------------------------------
+# The information below is modified by the configure script when
+# Makefile is generated from Makefile.in.  You shouldn't normally
+# modify any of this stuff by hand.
+#----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_FLAGS =		@DEFS@
+RANLIB =		@RANLIB@
+SRC_DIR =		@srcdir@/..
+TOP_DIR =		@srcdir@/..
+GENERIC_DIR =		$(TOP_DIR)/generic
+UNIX_DIR = 		@srcdir@
+BMAP_DIR =		$(TOP_DIR)/bitmaps
+TOOL_DIR =		@TCL_SRC_DIR@/tools
+
+#----------------------------------------------------------------
+# The information below should be usable as is.  The configure
+# script won't modify it and you shouldn't need to modify it
+# either.
+#----------------------------------------------------------------
+
+
+CC =		@CC@
+CC_SWITCHES =	${CFLAGS} ${TK_SHLIB_CFLAGS} -I${UNIX_DIR} -I${GENERIC_DIR} \
+-I${BMAP_DIR} -I${TCL_GENERIC_DIR} ${X11_INCLUDES} ${AC_FLAGS} ${PROTO_FLAGS} \
+${SECURITY_FLAGS} ${MEM_DEBUG_FLAGS} ${KEYSYM_FLAGS}
+
+DEPEND_SWITCHES = ${CFLAGS} -I${UNIX_DIR} -I${GENERIC_DIR} \
+-I${BMAP_DIR} \
+-I${TCL_GENERIC_DIR} ${X11_INCLUDES} \
+${AC_FLAGS} ${PROTO_FLAGS} ${SECURITY_FLAGS} ${MEM_DEBUG_FLAGS} \
+${KEYSYM_FLAGS}
+
+WISH_OBJS = tkAppInit.o
+
+TKTEST_OBJS = tkTestInit.o tkTest.o tkSquare.o
+
+WIDGOBJS = tkButton.o tkEntry.o tkFrame.o tkListbox.o \
+	tkMenu.o tkMenubutton.o tkMenuDraw.o tkMessage.o tkScale.o \
+	tkScrollbar.o
+
+CANVOBJS = tkCanvas.o tkCanvArc.o tkCanvBmap.o tkCanvImg.o \
+	tkCanvLine.o tkCanvPoly.o tkCanvPs.o tkCanvText.o \
+	tkCanvUtil.o tkCanvWind.o tkRectOval.o tkTrig.o
+
+IMAGEOBJS = tkImage.o tkImgBmap.o tkImgGIF.o tkImgPPM.o tkImgPhoto.o
+
+TEXTOBJS = tkText.o tkTextBTree.o tkTextDisp.o tkTextImage.o tkTextIndex.o \
+	tkTextMark.o tkTextTag.o tkTextWind.o
+
+UNIXOBJS = tkUnix.o tkUnix3d.o tkUnixButton.o tkUnixColor.o tkUnixCursor.o \
+	tkUnixDialog.o tkUnixDraw.o \
+	tkUnixEmbed.o tkUnixEvent.o tkUnixFocus.o tkUnixFont.o tkUnixInit.o \
+	tkUnixMenu.o tkUnixMenubu.o tkUnixScale.o tkUnixScrlbr.o \
+	tkUnixSelect.o tkUnixSend.o tkUnixWm.o tkUnixXId.o
+
+OBJS =  tk3d.o tkArgv.o tkAtom.o tkBind.o tkBitmap.o tkClipboard.o tkCmds.o \
+	tkColor.o tkConfig.o tkCursor.o tkError.o tkEvent.o \
+	tkFocus.o tkFont.o tkGet.o tkGC.o tkGeometry.o tkGrab.o tkGrid.o \
+	tkMain.o tkOption.o tkPack.o tkPlace.o \
+	tkSelect.o tkUtil.o tkVisual.o tkWindow.o \
+	$(UNIXOBJS) $(WIDGOBJS) $(CANVOBJS) $(IMAGEOBJS) $(TEXTOBJS)
+
+SRCS = \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tk3d.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkArgv.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkAtom.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkBind.c	\
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkBitmap.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkClipboard.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCmds.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkColor.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkConfig.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCursor.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkError.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkEvent.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkFocus.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkFont.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGet.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGC.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGeometry.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGrab.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGrid.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMain.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkOption.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkPack.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkPlace.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkSelect.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkUtil.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkVisual.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkWindow.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkButton.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkEntry.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkFrame.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkListbox.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMenu.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMenubutton.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMenuDraw.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMessage.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkScale.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkScrollbar.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvas.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvArc.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvBmap.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvImg.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvLine.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvPoly.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvPs.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvText.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvUtil.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvWind.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkRectOval.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTrig.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImage.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgBmap.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgGIF.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPPM.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkText.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextBTree.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextDisp.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextImage.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextIndex.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextMark.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextTag.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextWind.c \
+	$(GENERIC_DIR)/tkSquare.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTest.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkAppInit.c $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnix.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnix3d.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixButton.c $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixColor.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixCursor.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixDialog.c $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixDraw.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixEmbed.c $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixEvent.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixFocus.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixFont.c $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixInit.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixMenu.c $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixMenubu.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixScale.c $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixScrlbr.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixSelect.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixSend.c $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixWm.c \
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixXId.c
+
+
+HDRS = bltList.h \
+	default.h ks_names.h tkPatch.h tk.h tkButton.h tkCanvas.h tkInt.h  \
+	tkPort.h tkScrollbar.h tkText.h
+
+DEMOPROGS = browse hello ixset rmt rolodex square tcolor timer widget
+
+all: wish
+
+# The following target is configured by autoconf to generate either
+# a shared library or non-shared library for Tk.
+@TK_LIB_FILE@: ${OBJS}
+	rm -f @TK_LIB_FILE@
+	@MAKE_LIB@
+	$(RANLIB) @TK_LIB_FILE@
+
+# Make target which outputs the list of the .o contained in the Tk lib
+# usefull to build a single big shared library containing Tcl/Tk and other
+# extensions.  used for the Tcl Plugin.  -- dl
+tkLibObjs:
+	@echo ${OBJS}
+# This targets actually build the objects needed for the lib in the above
+# case
+objs: ${OBJS}
+
+
+wish: $(WISH_OBJS) $(TK_LIB_FILE)
+	$(CC) @LD_FLAGS@ $(WISH_OBJS) @TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC@ $(LIBS) \
+		$(TK_CC_SEARCH_FLAGS) -o wish
+
+tktest: $(TKTEST_OBJS) $(TK_LIB_FILE)
+	${CC} @LD_FLAGS@ $(TKTEST_OBJS) @TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC@ $(LIBS) \
+		$(TK_CC_SEARCH_FLAGS) -o tktest
+
+xttest: test.o tkTest.o tkSquare.o $(TK_LIB_FILE)
+	${CC} @LD_FLAGS@ test.o tkTest.o tkSquare.o \
+		@TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC@ $(LIBS) \
+		@TK_LD_SEARCH_FLAGS@ -lXt -o xttest
+
+# Note, in the target below TCL_LIBRARY needs to be set or else
+# "make test" won't work in the case where the compilation directory
+# isn't the same as the source directory.
+
+test: tktest
+	LD_LIBRARY_PATH=`pwd`:${TCL_BIN_DIR}:${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}; \
+	export LD_LIBRARY_PATH; \
+	TCL_LIBRARY=@TCL_SRC_DIR@/library; export TCL_LIBRARY; \
+	TK_LIBRARY=$(TOP_DIR)/library; export TK_LIBRARY; \
+	( echo cd $(TOP_DIR)/tests\; source all\; exit ) \
+	| ./tktest -geometry +0+0
+
+
+# Useful target to launch a built tktest with the proper path,...
+runtest:
+	LD_LIBRARY_PATH=`pwd`:${TCL_BIN_DIR}:${LD_LIBRARY_PATH}; \
+	export LD_LIBRARY_PATH; \
+	TCL_LIBRARY=@TCL_SRC_DIR@/library; export TCL_LIBRARY; \
+	TK_LIBRARY=$(TOP_DIR)/library; export TK_LIBRARY; \
+	./tktest
+
+install: install-binaries install-libraries install-demos install-man
+
+# Note: before running ranlib below, must cd to target directory because
+# some ranlibs write to current directory, and this might not always be
+# possible (e.g. if installing as root).
+
+install-binaries: $(TK_LIB_FILE) wish
+	@for i in $(LIB_INSTALL_DIR) $(BIN_INSTALL_DIR) ; \
+	    do \
+	    if [ ! -d $$i ] ; then \
+		echo "Making directory $$i"; \
+		mkdir $$i; \
+		chmod 755 $$i; \
+		else true; \
+		fi; \
+	    done;
+	@echo "Installing $(TK_LIB_FILE)"
+	@$(INSTALL_DATA) $(TK_LIB_FILE) $(LIB_INSTALL_DIR)/$(TK_LIB_FILE)
+	@(cd $(LIB_INSTALL_DIR); $(RANLIB) $(TK_LIB_FILE))
+	@chmod 555 $(LIB_INSTALL_DIR)/$(TK_LIB_FILE)
+	@echo "Installing wish"
+	@$(INSTALL_PROGRAM) wish $(BIN_INSTALL_DIR)/wish$(VERSION)
+	@echo "Installing tkConfig.sh"
+	@$(INSTALL_DATA) tkConfig.sh $(LIB_INSTALL_DIR)/tkConfig.sh
+
+install-libraries:
+	@for i in $(INSTALL_ROOT)$(prefix)/lib $(INCLUDE_INSTALL_DIR) \
+		$(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR) $(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)/images; \
+	    do \
+	    if [ ! -d $$i ] ; then \
+		echo "Making directory $$i"; \
+		mkdir $$i; \
+		chmod 755 $$i; \
+		else true; \
+		fi; \
+	    done;
+	@echo "Installing tk.h"
+	@$(INSTALL_DATA) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tk.h $(INCLUDE_INSTALL_DIR)/tk.h
+	for i in $(SRC_DIR)/library/*.tcl $(SRC_DIR)/library/tclIndex $(SRC_DIR)/library/prolog.ps $(UNIX_DIR)/tkAppInit.c; \
+	    do \
+	    echo "Installing $$i"; \
+	    $(INSTALL_DATA) $$i $(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR); \
+	    done;
+	for i in $(SRC_DIR)/library/images/*; \
+	    do \
+	    if [ -f $$i ] ; then \
+		echo "Installing $$i"; \
+		$(INSTALL_DATA) $$i $(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)/images; \
+	    fi; \
+	    done;
+
+install-demos:
+	@for i in $(INSTALL_ROOT)$(prefix)/lib $(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR) \
+		$(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)/demos \
+		$(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)/demos/images ; \
+	    do \
+	    if [ ! -d $$i ] ; then \
+		echo "Making directory $$i"; \
+		mkdir $$i; \
+		chmod 755 $$i; \
+		else true; \
+		fi; \
+	    done;
+	@for i in $(SRC_DIR)/library/demos/*; \
+	    do \
+	    if [ -f $$i ] ; then \
+		echo "Installing $$i"; \
+		sed -e '3 s|exec wish|exec wish$(VERSION)|' \
+			$$i > $(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)/demos/`basename $$i`; \
+	    fi; \
+	    done;
+	@for i in $(DEMOPROGS); \
+	    do \
+	    chmod 755 $(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)/demos/$$i; \
+	    done;
+	@for i in $(SRC_DIR)/library/demos/images/*; \
+	    do \
+	    if [ -f $$i ] ; then \
+		echo "Installing $$i"; \
+		$(INSTALL_DATA) $$i $(SCRIPT_INSTALL_DIR)/demos/images; \
+		fi; \
+	    done;
+
+install-man:
+	@for i in $(MAN_INSTALL_DIR) $(MAN1_INSTALL_DIR) $(MAN3_INSTALL_DIR) $(MANN_INSTALL_DIR) ; \
+	    do \
+	    if [ ! -d $$i ] ; then \
+		echo "Making directory $$i"; \
+		mkdir $$i; \
+		chmod 755 $$i; \
+		else true; \
+		fi; \
+	    done;
+	@cd $(SRC_DIR)/doc; for i in *.1; \
+	    do \
+	    echo "Installing doc/$$i"; \
+	    rm -f $(MAN1_INSTALL_DIR)/$$i; \
+	    sed -e '/man\.macros/r man.macros' -e '/man\.macros/d' \
+		    $$i > $(MAN1_INSTALL_DIR)/$$i; \
+	    chmod 444 $(MAN1_INSTALL_DIR)/$$i; \
+	    done;
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/mkLinks $(MAN1_INSTALL_DIR)
+	@cd $(SRC_DIR)/doc; for i in *.3; \
+	    do \
+	    echo "Installing doc/$$i"; \
+	    rm -f $(MAN3_INSTALL_DIR)/$$i; \
+	    sed -e '/man\.macros/r man.macros' -e '/man\.macros/d' \
+		    $$i > $(MAN3_INSTALL_DIR)/$$i; \
+	    chmod 444 $(MAN3_INSTALL_DIR)/$$i; \
+	    done;
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/mkLinks $(MAN3_INSTALL_DIR)
+	@cd $(SRC_DIR)/doc; for i in *.n; \
+	    do \
+	    echo "Installing doc/$$i"; \
+	    rm -f $(MANN_INSTALL_DIR)/$$i; \
+	    sed -e '/man\.macros/r man.macros' -e '/man\.macros/d' \
+		    $$i > $(MANN_INSTALL_DIR)/$$i; \
+	    chmod 444 $(MANN_INSTALL_DIR)/$$i; \
+	    done;
+	$(UNIX_DIR)/mkLinks $(MANN_INSTALL_DIR)
+
+Makefile: $(UNIX_DIR)/Makefile.in
+	$(SHELL) config.status
+
+clean:
+	rm -f *.a *.o libtk* core errs *~ \#* TAGS *.E a.out errors \
+		tktest wish config.info lib.exp
+
+distclean: clean
+	rm -f Makefile config.status config.cache config.log tkConfig.sh \
+		SUNWtk.* prototype
+
+depend:
+	makedepend -- $(DEPEND_SWITCHES) -- $(SRCS)
+
+# Test binaries.  The rule for tkTestInit.o is complicated because
+# it is is compiled from tkAppInit.c.  Can't use the "-o" option
+# because this doesn't work on some strange compilers (e.g. UnixWare).
+
+tkTestInit.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkAppInit.c
+	@if test -f tkAppInit.o ; then \
+	    rm -f tkAppInit.sav; \
+	    mv tkAppInit.o tkAppInit.sav; \
+	fi;
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) -DTK_TEST $(UNIX_DIR)/tkAppInit.c
+	rm -f tkTestInit.o
+	mv tkAppInit.o tkTestInit.o
+	@if test -f tkAppInit.sav ; then \
+	    mv tkAppInit.sav tkAppInit.o; \
+	fi;
+
+tk3d.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tk3d.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tk3d.c
+
+tkAppInit.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkAppInit.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkAppInit.c
+
+tkArgv.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkArgv.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkArgv.c
+
+tkAtom.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkAtom.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkAtom.c
+
+tkBind.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkBind.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkBind.c
+
+tkBitmap.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkBitmap.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkBitmap.c
+
+tkClipboard.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkClipboard.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkClipboard.c
+
+tkCmds.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCmds.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCmds.c
+
+tkColor.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkColor.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkColor.c
+
+tkConfig.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkConfig.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkConfig.c
+
+tkCursor.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCursor.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCursor.c
+
+tkError.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkError.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkError.c
+
+tkEvent.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkEvent.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkEvent.c
+
+tkFocus.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkFocus.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkFocus.c
+
+tkFont.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkFont.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkFont.c
+
+tkGet.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGet.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGet.c
+
+tkGC.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGC.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGC.c
+
+tkGeometry.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGeometry.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGeometry.c
+
+tkGrab.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGrab.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGrab.c
+
+tkGrid.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGrid.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkGrid.c
+
+tkMain.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMain.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMain.c
+
+tkOption.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkOption.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkOption.c
+
+tkPack.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkPack.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkPack.c
+
+tkPlace.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkPlace.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkPlace.c
+
+tkSelect.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkSelect.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkSelect.c
+
+tkUtil.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkUtil.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkUtil.c
+
+tkVisual.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkVisual.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkVisual.c
+
+tkWindow.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkWindow.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkWindow.c
+
+tkButton.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkButton.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkButton.c
+
+tkEntry.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkEntry.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkEntry.c
+
+tkFrame.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkFrame.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkFrame.c
+
+tkListbox.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkListbox.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkListbox.c
+
+tkMenu.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMenu.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMenu.c
+
+tkMenubutton.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMenubutton.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMenubutton.c
+
+tkMenuDraw.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMenuDraw.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMenuDraw.c
+
+tkMessage.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMessage.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkMessage.c
+
+tkScale.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkScale.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkScale.c
+
+tkScrollbar.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkScrollbar.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkScrollbar.c
+
+tkSquare.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkSquare.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkSquare.c
+
+tkCanvas.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvas.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvas.c
+
+tkCanvArc.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvArc.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvArc.c
+
+tkCanvBmap.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvBmap.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvBmap.c
+
+tkCanvImg.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvImg.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvImg.c
+
+tkCanvLine.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvLine.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvLine.c
+
+tkCanvPoly.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvPoly.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvPoly.c
+
+tkCanvPs.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvPs.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvPs.c
+
+tkCanvText.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvText.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvText.c
+
+tkCanvUtil.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvUtil.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvUtil.c
+
+tkCanvWind.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvWind.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkCanvWind.c
+
+tkRectOval.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkRectOval.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkRectOval.c
+
+tkTrig.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTrig.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTrig.c
+
+tkImage.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImage.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImage.c
+
+tkImgBmap.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgBmap.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgBmap.c
+
+tkImgGIF.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgGIF.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgGIF.c
+
+tkImgPPM.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPPM.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPPM.c
+
+tkImgPhoto.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkImgPhoto.c
+
+tkTest.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTest.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTest.c
+
+tkText.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkText.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkText.c
+
+tkTextBTree.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextBTree.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextBTree.c
+
+tkTextDisp.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextDisp.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextDisp.c
+
+tkTextImage.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextImage.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextImage.c
+
+tkTextIndex.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextIndex.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextIndex.c
+
+tkTextMark.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextMark.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextMark.c
+
+tkTextTag.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextTag.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextTag.c
+
+tkTextWind.o: $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextWind.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkTextWind.c
+
+tkUnix.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnix.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnix.c
+
+tkUnix3d.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnix3d.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnix3d.c
+
+tkUnixButton.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixButton.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixButton.c
+
+tkUnixColor.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixColor.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixColor.c
+
+tkUnixCursor.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixCursor.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixCursor.c
+
+tkUnixDialog.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixDialog.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixDialog.c
+
+tkUnixDraw.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixDraw.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixDraw.c
+
+tkUnixEmbed.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixEmbed.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixEmbed.c
+
+tkUnixEvent.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixEvent.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixEvent.c
+
+tkUnixFocus.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixFocus.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixFocus.c
+
+tkUnixFont.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixFont.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixFont.c
+
+tkUnixInit.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixInit.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/tkInitScript.h tkConfig.sh
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) -DTK_LIBRARY=\"${TK_LIBRARY}\" \
+	    $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixInit.c
+
+tkUnixMenu.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixMenu.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixMenu.c
+
+tkUnixMenubu.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixMenubu.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixMenubu.c
+
+tkUnixScale.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixScale.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixScale.c
+
+tkUnixScrlbr.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixScrlbr.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixScrlbr.c
+
+tkUnixSelect.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixSelect.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixSelect.c
+
+tkUnixSend.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixSend.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixSend.c
+
+tkUnixWm.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixWm.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixWm.c
+
+tkUnixXId.o: $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixXId.c
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $(UNIX_DIR)/tkUnixXId.c
+
+.c.o:
+	$(CC) -c $(CC_SWITCHES) $<
+
+#
+# Target to check for proper usage of UCHAR macro.
+#
+
+checkuchar:
+	-egrep isalnum\|isalpha\|iscntrl\|isdigit\|islower\|isprint\|ispunct\|isspace\|isupper\|isxdigit\|toupper\|tolower $(SRCS) | grep -v UCHAR
+
+#
+# Target to make sure that only symbols with "Tk" prefixes are
+# exported.
+#
+
+checkexports: $(TK_LIB_FILE)
+	-nm -p $(TK_LIB_FILE) | awk '$$2 ~ /[TDB]/ { print $$3 }' | sort -n | grep -v '^[Tt]k'
+
+#
+# Target to create a proper Tk distribution from information in the
+# master source directory.  DISTDIR must be defined to indicate where
+# to put the distribution.  DISTDIR must be an absolute path name.
+#
+
+DISTNAME =	tk@TK_VERSION@@TK_PATCH_LEVEL@
+ZIPNAME =	tk@TK_MAJOR_VERSION@@TK_MINOR_VERSION@@TK_PATCH_LEVEL@.zip
+DISTDIR =	/proj/tcl/dist/$(DISTNAME)
+TCLDIR = 	@TCL_SRC_DIR@
+$(UNIX_DIR)/configure: $(UNIX_DIR)/configure.in
+	autoconf $(UNIX_DIR)/configure.in > $(UNIX_DIR)/configure
+
+dist:   $(UNIX_DIR)/configure
+	rm -rf $(DISTDIR)
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/unix
+	cp -p $(UNIX_DIR)/*.c $(UNIX_DIR)/*.h $(DISTDIR)/unix
+	cp $(TOP_DIR)/license.terms $(UNIX_DIR)/Makefile.in $(DISTDIR)/unix
+	chmod 664 $(DISTDIR)/unix/Makefile.in
+	cp $(UNIX_DIR)/configure $(UNIX_DIR)/configure.in \
+		$(UNIX_DIR)/tkConfig.sh.in $(TCLDIR)/unix/install-sh \
+		$(UNIX_DIR)/porting.notes $(UNIX_DIR)/porting.old \
+		$(UNIX_DIR)/README $(DISTDIR)/unix
+	chmod 775 $(DISTDIR)/unix/configure $(DISTDIR)/unix/configure.in
+	chmod +x $(DISTDIR)/unix/install-sh
+	tclsh $(TCLDIR)/unix/mkLinks.tcl $(TOP_DIR)/doc/*.[13n] \
+		> $(DISTDIR)/unix/mkLinks
+	chmod +x $(DISTDIR)/unix/mkLinks
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/bitmaps
+	@(cd $(TOP_DIR); for i in bitmaps/* ; do \
+	    if [ -f $$i ] ; then \
+		sed -e 's/static char/static unsigned char/' \
+		       $$i > $(DISTDIR)/$$i; \
+	    fi; \
+	done;)
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/generic
+	cp -p $(GENERIC_DIR)/*.c $(GENERIC_DIR)/*.h $(DISTDIR)/generic
+	cp -p $(GENERIC_DIR)/README $(DISTDIR)/generic
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/changes $(TOP_DIR)/README $(TOP_DIR)/license.terms \
+		$(DISTDIR)
+	rm -f $(DISTDIR)/generic/blt*.[ch]
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/win
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/win/*.c $(TOP_DIR)/win/*.h $(DISTDIR)/win
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/win/makefile.* $(DISTDIR)/win
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/win/README $(DISTDIR)/win
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/license.terms $(DISTDIR)/win
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/win/rc
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/win/rc/*.rc $(TOP_DIR)/win/rc/*.cur \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/win/rc/*.ico $(TOP_DIR)/win/rc/*.bmp \
+		$(DISTDIR)/win/rc
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/mac
+	sccs edit -s $(TOP_DIR)/mac/tkMacProjects.sit.hqx
+	cp -p tkMacProjects.sit.hqx $(DISTDIR)/mac
+	sccs unedit $(TOP_DIR)/mac/tkMacProjects.sit.hqx
+	rm -f tkMacProjects.sit.hqx
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/mac/*.c $(TOP_DIR)/mac/*.h $(TOP_DIR)/mac/*.r \
+		$(DISTDIR)/mac
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/mac/README $(DISTDIR)/mac
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/license.terms $(DISTDIR)/mac
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/mac/*.pch $(DISTDIR)/mac
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/mac/*.doc $(DISTDIR)/mac
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/mac/*.exp $(DISTDIR)/mac
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/mac/*.tcl $(DISTDIR)/mac
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/compat
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/license.terms $(TCLDIR)/compat/unistd.h \
+		$(TCLDIR)/compat/stdlib.h $(TCLDIR)/compat/limits.h \
+		$(DISTDIR)/compat
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/xlib
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/xlib/*.h $(TOP_DIR)/xlib/*.c $(DISTDIR)/xlib
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/license.terms $(DISTDIR)/xlib
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/xlib/X11
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/xlib/X11/*.h $(DISTDIR)/xlib/X11
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/license.terms $(DISTDIR)/xlib/X11
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/library
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/license.terms $(TOP_DIR)/library/*.tcl \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/library/tclIndex $(TOP_DIR)/library/prolog.ps \
+		$(DISTDIR)/library
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/library/images
+	@(cd $(TOP_DIR); for i in library/images/* ; do \
+	    if [ -f $$i ] ; then \
+		cp $$i $(DISTDIR)/$$i; \
+	    fi; \
+	done;)
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/library/demos
+	cp -pr $(TOP_DIR)/library/demos/*.tcl \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/library/demos/tclIndex \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/library/demos/browse \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/library/demos/hello $(TOP_DIR)/library/demos/ixset \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/library/demos/rmt $(TOP_DIR)/library/demos/rolodex \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/library/demos/square \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/library/demos/tcolor \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/library/demos/timer \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/library/demos/widget \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/library/demos/README \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/license.terms $(DISTDIR)/library/demos
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/library/demos/images
+	@(cd $(TOP_DIR); for i in library/demos/images/* ; do \
+	    if [ -f $$i ] ; then \
+		cp $$i $(DISTDIR)/$$i; \
+	    fi; \
+	done;)
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/doc
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/license.terms $(TOP_DIR)/doc/*.[13n] \
+		$(TCLDIR)/doc/man.macros $(DISTDIR)/doc
+	cp /home/ouster/papers/tk4.0/tk4.0.ps $(DISTDIR)/doc
+	mkdir $(DISTDIR)/tests
+	cp -p $(TOP_DIR)/license.terms $(TOP_DIR)/tests/*.test \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/tests/visual $(TOP_DIR)/tests/*.tcl \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/tests/README $(TOP_DIR)/tests/all \
+		$(TOP_DIR)/tests/defs $(TOP_DIR)/tests/option.file* \
+		$(DISTDIR)/tests
+
+#
+# The following target can only be used for non-patch releases.  Use
+# the "allpatch" target below for patch releases.
+#
+
+alldist: dist
+	rm -f /proj/tcl/dist/$(DISTNAME).tar.Z \
+		/proj/tcl/dist/$(DISTNAME).tar.gz \
+		/proj/tcl/dist/$(ZIPNAME)
+	cd /proj/tcl/dist; tar cf $(DISTNAME).tar $(DISTNAME); \
+		gzip -9 -c $(DISTNAME).tar > $(DISTNAME).tar.gz; \
+		compress $(DISTNAME).tar; zip -r8 $(ZIPNAME) $(DISTNAME)
+
+#
+# The target below is similar to "alldist" except it works for patch
+# releases.  It is needed because patch releases are peculiar: the
+# patch designation appears in the name of the compressed file
+# (e.g. tcl8.0p1.tar.gz) but the extracted source directory doesn't
+# include the patch designation (e.g. tcl8.0).
+#
+
+allpatch: dist
+	rm -f /proj/tcl/dist/$(DISTNAME).tar.Z \
+		/proj/tcl/dist/$(DISTNAME).tar.gz \
+		/proj/tcl/dist/$(ZIPNAME)
+	mv /proj/tcl/dist/tk${VERSION} /proj/tcl/dist/old
+	mv /proj/tcl/dist/$(DISTNAME) /proj/tcl/dist/tk${VERSION}
+	cd /proj/tcl/dist; tar cf $(DISTNAME).tar tk${VERSION}; \
+		gzip -9 -c $(DISTNAME).tar > $(DISTNAME).tar.gz; \
+		compress $(DISTNAME).tar; zip -r8 $(ZIPNAME) tk${VERSION}
+	mv /proj/tcl/dist/tk${VERSION} /proj/tcl/dist/$(DISTNAME)
+	mv /proj/tcl/dist/old /proj/tcl/dist/tk${VERSION}
+
+#
+# Target to create a Macintosh version of the distribution.  This will
+# do a normal distribution and then massage the output to prepare it
+# for moving to the Mac platform.  This requires a few scripts and
+# programs found only in the Tcl greoup's tool workspace.
+#
+
+macdist: dist
+	rm -f $(DISTDIR)/mac/tkMacProjects.sit.hqx
+	tclsh $(TOOL_DIR)/man2html.tcl $(DISTDIR)/tmp ../.. tk$(VERSION)
+	mv $(DISTDIR)/tmp/tk$(VERSION) $(DISTDIR)/html
+	rm -rf $(DISTDIR)/doc
+	rm -rf $(DISTDIR)/tmp
+	tclsh $(TOOL_DIR)/cvtEOL.tcl $(DISTDIR)
+
+#
+# Targets to build Solaris package of the distribution for the current
+# architecture.  To build stream packages for both sun4 and i86pc
+# architectures: 
+#
+#   On the sun4 machine, execute the following:
+#     make distclean; ./configure
+#     make DISTDIR=<distdir> package
+#
+#   Once the build is complete, execute the following on the i86pc
+#   machine:
+#     make DISTDIR=<distdir> package-quick
+#
+# <distdir> is the absolute path to a directory where the build should
+# take place.  These steps will generate the SUNWtk.sun4 and
+# SUNWtk.i86pc stream packages.  It is important that the packages be
+# built in this fashion in order to ensure that the architecture
+# independent files are exactly the same, including timestamps, in
+# both packages.
+#
+
+package: dist package-config package-common package-binaries package-generate
+package-quick: package-config package-binaries package-generate
+
+#
+# Configure for the current architecture in the dist directory.
+#
+package-config:
+	mkdir -p $(DISTDIR)/unix/`arch`
+	cd $(DISTDIR)/unix/`arch`; \
+        ../configure --prefix=/opt/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION) \
+		--exec_prefix=/opt/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)/`arch` \
+		--with-tcl=$(DISTDIR)/../tcl$(TCLVERSION)/unix/`arch` \
+		--enable-shared
+	mkdir -p $(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)
+	mkdir -p $(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)/`arch`
+
+#
+# Build and install the architecture independent files in the dist directory.
+#
+
+package-common:
+	cd $(DISTDIR)/unix/`arch`;\
+	$(MAKE); \
+	$(MAKE) install-libraries install-man \
+		prefix=$(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION) \
+		exec_prefix=$(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)/`arch`
+	mkdir -p $(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)/bin
+	sed -e "s/TCLVERSION/$(TCLVERSION)/g" \
+		-e "s/TKVERSION/$(VERSION)/g" < $(UNIX_DIR)/wish.sh \
+		> $(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)/bin/wish$(VERSION)
+	chmod 755 $(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)/bin/wish$(VERSION)
+
+#
+# Build and install the architecture specific files in the dist directory.
+#
+
+package-binaries: 
+	cd $(DISTDIR)/unix/`arch`; \
+	$(MAKE); \
+	$(MAKE) install-binaries prefix=$(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION) \
+		exec_prefix=$(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)/`arch`
+
+#
+# Generate a package from the installed files in the dist directory for the
+# current architecture.
+#
+
+package-generate:
+	pkgproto $(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)/bin=bin \
+		 $(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)/include=include \
+		 $(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)/lib=lib \
+		 $(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)/man=man \
+		 $(DISTDIR)/SUNWtcl/$(TCLVERSION)/`arch`=`arch` \
+	| tclsh $(TCLDIR)/unix/mkProto.tcl $(TCLVERSION) \
+		$(UNIX_DIR) > prototype
+	pkgmk -o -d . -f prototype -a `arch`
+	pkgtrans -s . SUNWtk.`arch` SUNWtk
+	rm -rf SUNWtk
+
+# DO NOT DELETE THIS LINE -- make depend depends on it.
diff --git a/unix/README b/unix/README
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..bb06d21
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/README
@@ -0,0 +1,125 @@
+This is the directory where you configure, compile, test, and install
+UNIX versions of Tk.  This directory also contains source files for Tk
+that are specific to UNIX.
+
+The rest of this file contains instructions on how to do this.  The
+release should compile and run either "out of the box" or with trivial
+changes on any UNIX-like system that approximates POSIX, BSD, or System
+V.  We know that it runs on workstations from Sun, H-P, DEC, IBM, and
+SGI, as well as PCs running Linux, BSDI, and SCO UNIX.  To compile for
+a PC running Windows, see the README file in the directory ../win.  To
+compile for a Macintosh, see the README file in the directory ../mac.
+
+SCCS: @(#) README 1.24 97/08/13 17:31:19
+
+How To Compile And Install Tk:
+------------------------------
+
+(a) Make sure that the Tcl 8.0 release is present in the directory
+    ../../tcl8.0 (or else use the "--with-tcl" switch described below). 
+    This release of Tk will only work with Tcl 8.0. Also, be sure that
+    you have configured Tcl before you configure Tk.
+
+(b) Check for patches as described in ../README.
+
+(c) If you have already compiled Tk once in this directory and are now
+    preparing to compile again in the same directory but for a different
+    platform, or if you have applied patches, type "make distclean" to
+    discard all the configuration information computed previously.
+
+(d) Type "./configure".  This runs a configuration script created by GNU
+    autoconf, which configures Tcl for your system and creates a
+    Makefile.  The configure script allows you to customize the Tcl
+    configuration for your site; for details on how you can do this,
+    type "./configure -help" or refer to the autoconf documentation (not
+    included here).  Tk's "configure" script supports the following
+    special switches in addition to the standard ones:
+	--enable-gcc		If this switch is set, Tk will configure
+				itself to use gcc if it is available on your
+				system.  Note:  it is not safe to modify the
+				Makefile to use gcc after configure is run.
+	--with-tcl=DIR		Specifies the directory containing the Tcl
+				binaries and Tcl's platform-dependent
+				configuration information.  By default
+				the Tcl directory is assumed to be in the
+				location given by (a) above.
+	--enable-shared		If this switch is specified, Tk will compile
+				itself as a shared library if it can figure
+				out how to do that on this platform.
+    Note: be sure to use only absolute path names (those starting with "/")
+    in the --prefix and --exec_prefix options.
+
+(e) Type "make".  This will create a library archive called "libtk.a"
+    or "libtk.so" and an interpreter application called "wish" that
+    allows you to type Tcl commands interactively or execute script files.
+
+(f) If the make fails then you'll have to personalize the Makefile
+    for your site or possibly modify the distribution in other ways.
+    First check the file "porting.notes" to see if there are hints
+    for compiling on your system.  Then look at the porting Web page
+    described later in this file.  If you need to modify Makefile,
+    there are comments at the beginning of it that describe the things
+    you might want to change and how to change them.
+    
+(g) Type "make install" to install Tk's binaries and script files in
+    standard places.  You'll need write permission on the installation
+    directoryies to do this.  The installation directories are
+    determined by the "configure" script and may be specified with
+    the --prefix and --exec_prefix options to "configure".  See the
+    Makefile for information on what directories were chosen; you
+    can override these choices by modifying the "prefix" and
+    "exec_prefix" variables in the Makefile.
+
+(h) At this point you can play with Tk by invoking the "wish"
+    program and typing Tcl commands.  However, if you haven't installed
+    Tk then you'll first need to set your TK_LIBRARY environment
+    variable to hold the full path name of the "library" subdirectory.
+    If you haven't installed Tcl either then you'll need to set your
+    TCL_LIBRARY environment variable as well (see the Tcl README file
+    for information on this).  Note that installed versions of wish,
+    libtk.a, libtk.so, and the Tk library have a version number in their
+    names, such as "wish8.0" or "libtk8.0.so"; to use the installed
+    versions, either specify the version number or create a symbolic
+    link (e.g. from "wish" to "wish8.0").
+
+If you have trouble compiling Tk, read through the file "porting.notes".
+It contains information that people have provided about changes they had
+to make to compile Tcl in various environments.  Or, check out the
+following Web URL:
+    http://www.sunlabs.com/cgi-bin/tcl/info.8.0
+This is an on-line database of porting information.  We make no guarantees
+that this information is accurate, complete, or up-to-date, but you may
+find it useful.  If you get Tk running on a new configuration and had to
+make non-trivial changes to do it, we'd be happy to receive new information
+to add to "porting.notes".  You can also make a new entry into the
+on-line Web database.  We're also interested in hearing how to change the
+configuration setup so that Tcl compiles on additional platforms "out of
+the box".
+
+Test suite
+----------
+
+Tk has a substantial self-test suite, consisting of a set of scripts in
+the subdirectory "tests".  To run the test suite just type "make test"
+in this directory.  You should then see a printout of the test files
+processed.  If any errors occur, you'll see a much more substantial
+printout for each error.  In order to avoid false error reports, be sure
+to run the tests with an empty resource database (e.g., remove your
+.Xdefaults file or delete any entries starting with *).  Also, don't
+try to do anything else with your display or keyboard whlie the tests
+are running, or you may get false violations.  See the README file in
+the "tests" directory for more information on the test suite.
+
+If the test suite generates errors, most likely they are due to non-
+portable tests that are interacting badly with your system configuration.
+We are gradually eliminating the non-portable tests, but this release
+includes many new tests so there will probably be some portability
+problems.  As long as the test suite doesn't core dump, it's probably
+safe to conclude that any errors represent portability problems in the
+test suite and not fundamental flaws with Tk.
+
+There are also a number of visual tests for things such as screen layout,
+Postscript generation, etc.  These tests all have to be run manually and
+the results have to be verified visually.  To run the tests, cd to the
+"tests" directory and run the script "visual".  It will present a main
+window with a bunch of menus, which you can use to select various tests.
diff --git a/unix/configure.in b/unix/configure.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..7f3c15f
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/configure.in
@@ -0,0 +1,407 @@
+dnl	This file is an input file used by the GNU "autoconf" program to
+dnl	generate the file "configure", which is run during Tk installation
+dnl	to configure the system for the local environment.
+AC_INIT(../generic/tk.h)
+# SCCS: @(#) configure.in 1.90 97/11/20 12:45:45
+
+TK_VERSION=8.0
+TK_MAJOR_VERSION=8
+TK_MINOR_VERSION=0
+TK_PATCH_LEVEL="p2"
+VERSION=${TK_VERSION}
+
+if test "${prefix}" = "NONE"; then
+    prefix=/usr/local
+fi
+if test "${exec_prefix}" = "NONE"; then
+    exec_prefix=$prefix
+fi
+TK_SRC_DIR=`cd $srcdir/..; pwd`
+
+AC_PROG_RANLIB
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(gcc, [  --enable-gcc            allow use of gcc if available],
+    [tk_ok=$enableval], [tkl_ok=no])
+if test "$tk_ok" = "yes"; then
+    AC_PROG_CC
+else
+    CC=${CC-cc}
+AC_SUBST(CC)
+fi
+AC_C_CROSS
+AC_HAVE_HEADERS(unistd.h limits.h)
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	See if there was a command-line option for where Tcl is;  if
+#	not, assume that its top-level directory is a sibling of ours.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_ARG_WITH(tcl, [  --with-tcl=DIR          use Tcl 8.0 binaries from DIR],
+	TCL_BIN_DIR=$withval, TCL_BIN_DIR=`cd ../../tcl8.0/unix; pwd`)
+if test ! -d $TCL_BIN_DIR; then
+    AC_MSG_ERROR(Tcl directory $TCL_BIN_DIR doesn't exist)
+fi
+if test ! -f $TCL_BIN_DIR/Makefile; then
+    AC_MSG_ERROR(There's no Makefile in $TCL_BIN_DIR;  perhaps you didn't specify the Tcl *build* directory (not the toplevel Tcl directory) or you forgot to configure Tcl?)
+fi
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	Read in configuration information generated by Tcl for shared
+#	libraries, and arrange for it to be substituted into our
+#	Makefile.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+file=$TCL_BIN_DIR/tclConfig.sh
+. $file
+SHLIB_CFLAGS=$TCL_SHLIB_CFLAGS
+SHLIB_LD=$TCL_SHLIB_LD
+SHLIB_LD_LIBS=$TCL_SHLIB_LD_LIBS
+SHLIB_SUFFIX=$TCL_SHLIB_SUFFIX
+SHLIB_VERSION=$TCL_SHLIB_VERSION
+DL_LIBS=$TCL_DL_LIBS
+LD_FLAGS=$TCL_LD_FLAGS
+
+LIB_RUNTIME_DIR='${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'
+
+# If Tcl and Tk are installed in different places, adjust the library
+# search path to reflect this.
+
+if test "$TCL_EXEC_PREFIX" != "$exec_prefix"; then
+    LIB_RUNTIME_DIR="${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}:${TCL_EXEC_PREFIX}"
+fi
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	Supply a substitute for stdlib.h if it doesn't define strtol,
+#	strtoul, or strtod (which it doesn't in some versions of SunOS).
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_MSG_CHECKING(stdlib.h)
+AC_HEADER_EGREP(strtol, stdlib.h, tk_ok=yes, tk_ok=no)
+AC_HEADER_EGREP(strtoul, stdlib.h, , tk_ok=no)
+AC_HEADER_EGREP(strtod, stdlib.h, , tk_ok=no)
+if test $tk_ok = no; then
+    AC_DEFINE(NO_STDLIB_H)
+fi
+AC_MSG_RESULT($tk_ok)
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	Include sys/select.h if it exists and if it supplies things
+#	that appear to be useful and aren't already in sys/types.h.
+#	This appears to be true only on the RS/6000 under AIX.  Some
+#	systems like OSF/1 have a sys/select.h that's of no use, and
+#	other systems like SCO UNIX have a sys/select.h that's
+#	pernicious.  If "fd_set" isn't defined anywhere then set a
+#	special flag.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_MSG_CHECKING([fd_set and sys/select])
+AC_TRY_COMPILE([#include <sys/types.h>],
+	[fd_set readMask, writeMask;], tk_ok=yes, tk_ok=no)
+if test $tk_ok = no; then
+    AC_HEADER_EGREP(fd_mask, sys/select.h, tk_ok=yes)
+    if test $tk_ok = yes; then
+	AC_DEFINE(HAVE_SYS_SELECT_H)
+    fi
+fi
+AC_MSG_RESULT($tk_ok)
+if test $tk_ok = no; then
+    AC_DEFINE(NO_FD_SET)
+fi
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	Check for various typedefs and provide substitutes if
+#	they don't exist.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_MODE_T
+AC_PID_T
+AC_SIZE_T
+AC_UID_T
+
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+#       Find out about time handling differences.
+#------------------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_CHECK_HEADERS(sys/time.h)
+AC_HEADER_TIME
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	Locate the X11 header files and the X11 library archive.  Try
+#	the ac_path_x macro first, but if it doesn't find the X stuff
+#	(e.g. because there's no xmkmf program) then check through
+#	a list of possible directories.  Under some conditions the
+#	autoconf macro will return an include directory that contains
+#	no include files, so double-check its result just to be safe.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_PATH_X
+not_really_there=""
+if test "$no_x" = ""; then
+    if test "$x_includes" = ""; then
+	AC_TRY_CPP([#include <X11/XIntrinsic.h>], , not_really_there="yes")
+    else
+	if test ! -r $x_includes/X11/Intrinsic.h; then
+	    not_really_there="yes"
+	fi
+    fi
+fi
+if test "$no_x" = "yes" -o "$not_really_there" = "yes"; then
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING(for X11 header files)
+    XINCLUDES="# no special path needed"
+    AC_TRY_CPP([#include <X11/Intrinsic.h>], , XINCLUDES="nope")
+    if test "$XINCLUDES" = nope; then
+        dirs="/usr/unsupported/include /usr/local/include /usr/X386/include /usr/X11R6/include /usr/X11R5/include /usr/include/X11R5 /usr/include/X11R4 /usr/openwin/include /usr/X11/include /usr/sww/include"
+        for i in $dirs ; do
+	    if test -r $i/X11/Intrinsic.h; then
+		AC_MSG_RESULT($i)
+	        XINCLUDES=" -I$i"
+		break
+	    fi
+        done
+    fi
+else
+    if test "$x_includes" != ""; then
+	XINCLUDES=-I$x_includes
+    else
+	XINCLUDES="# no special path needed"
+    fi
+fi
+if test "$XINCLUDES" = nope; then
+    AC_MSG_RESULT(couldn't find any!)
+    XINCLUDES="# no include files found"
+fi
+
+if test "$no_x" = yes; then
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING(for X11 libraries)
+    XLIBSW=nope
+    dirs="/usr/unsupported/lib /usr/local/lib /usr/X386/lib /usr/X11R6/lib /usr/X11R5/lib /usr/lib/X11R5 /usr/lib/X11R4 /usr/openwin/lib /usr/X11/lib /usr/sww/X11/lib"
+    for i in $dirs ; do
+	if test -r $i/libX11.a -o -r $i/libX11.so -o -r $i/libX11.sl; then
+	    AC_MSG_RESULT($i)
+	    XLIBSW="-L$i -lX11"
+	    x_libraries="$i"
+	    break
+	fi
+    done
+else
+    if test "$x_libraries" = ""; then
+	XLIBSW=-lX11
+    else
+	XLIBSW="-L$x_libraries -lX11"
+    fi
+fi
+if test "$XLIBSW" = nope ; then
+    AC_CHECK_LIB(Xwindow, XCreateWindow, XLIBSW=-lXwindow)
+fi
+if test "$XLIBSW" = nope ; then
+    AC_MSG_RESULT(couldn't find any!  Using -lX11.)
+    XLIBSW=-lX11
+fi
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	Various manipulations on the search path used at runtime to
+#	find shared libraries:
+#	1. If the X library binaries are in a non-standard directory,
+#	   add the X library location into that search path.
+#	2. On systems such as AIX and Ultrix that use "-L" as the
+#	   search path option, colons cannot be used to separate
+#	   directories from each other. Change colons to " -L".
+#	3. Create two sets of search flags, one for use in cc lines
+#	   and the other for when the linker is invoked directly.  In
+#	   the second case, '-Wl,' must be stripped off and commas must
+#	   be replaced by spaces.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+if test "x${x_libraries}" != "x"; then
+    LIB_RUNTIME_DIR="${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}:${x_libraries}"
+fi
+if test "${TCL_LD_SEARCH_FLAGS}" = '-L${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR}'; then
+    LIB_RUNTIME_DIR=`echo ${LIB_RUNTIME_DIR} |sed -e 's/:/ -L/g'`
+fi
+
+# The statement below is very tricky!  It actually *evaluates* the
+# string in TCL_LD_SEARCH_FLAGS, which causes a substitution of the
+# variable LIB_RUNTIME_DIR.
+
+eval "TK_CC_SEARCH_FLAGS=\"$TCL_LD_SEARCH_FLAGS\""
+TK_LD_SEARCH_FLAGS=`echo ${TK_CC_SEARCH_FLAGS} |sed -e "s|-Wl,||g" -e "s|,| |g"`
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	Check for the existence of various libraries.  The order here
+#	is important, so that then end up in the right order in the
+#	command line generated by make.  The -lsocket and -lnsl libraries
+#	require a couple of special tricks:
+#	1. Use "connect" and "accept" to check for -lsocket, and
+#	   "gethostbyname" to check for -lnsl.
+#	2. Use each function name only once:  can't redo a check because
+#	   autoconf caches the results of the last check and won't redo it.
+#	3. Use -lnsl and -lsocket only if they supply procedures that
+#	   aren't already present in the normal libraries.  This is because
+#	   IRIX 5.2 has libraries, but they aren't needed and they're
+#	   bogus:  they goof up name resolution if used.
+#	4. On some SVR4 systems, can't use -lsocket without -lnsl too.
+#	   To get around this problem, check for both libraries together
+#	   if -lsocket doesn't work by itself.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_CHECK_LIB(Xbsd, main, [LIBS="$LIBS -lXbsd"])
+
+tk_checkBoth=0
+AC_CHECK_FUNC(connect, tk_checkSocket=0, tk_checkSocket=1)
+if test "$tk_checkSocket" = 1; then
+    AC_CHECK_LIB(socket, main, LIBS="$LIBS -lsocket", tk_checkBoth=1)
+fi
+if test "$tk_checkBoth" = 1; then
+    tk_oldLibs=$LIBS
+    LIBS="$LIBS -lsocket -lnsl"
+    AC_CHECK_FUNC(accept, tk_checkNsl=0, [LIBS=$tk_oldLibs])
+fi
+AC_CHECK_FUNC(gethostbyname, , AC_CHECK_LIB(nsl, main, [LIBS="$LIBS -lnsl"]))
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+# One more check related to the X libraries.  The standard releases
+# of Ultrix don't support the "xauth" mechanism, so send won't work
+# unless TK_NO_SECURITY is defined.  However, there are usually copies
+# of the MIT X server available as well, which do support xauth.
+# Check for the MIT stuff and use it if it exists.
+#
+# Note: can't use ac_check_lib macro (at least, not in Autoconf 2.1)
+# because it can't deal with the "-" in the library name.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+if test -d /usr/include/mit ; then
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([MIT X libraries])
+    tk_oldCFlags=$CFLAGS
+    CFLAGS="$CFLAGS -I/usr/include/mit"
+    tk_oldLibs=$LIBS
+    LIBS="$LIBS -lX11-mit"
+    AC_TRY_LINK([
+	#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+    ], [
+	XOpenDisplay(0);
+    ], [
+	AC_MSG_RESULT(yes)
+	XLIBSW="-lX11-mit"
+	XINCLUDES="-I/usr/include/mit"
+    ], AC_MSG_RESULT(no))
+    CFLAGS=$tk_oldCFlags
+    LIBS=$tk_oldLibs
+fi
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	On a few very rare systems, all of the libm.a stuff is
+#	already in libc.a.  Set compiler flags accordingly.
+#	Also, Linux requires the "ieee" library for math to
+#	work right (and it must appear before "-lm").
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+MATH_LIBS=""
+AC_CHECK_FUNC(sin, , MATH_LIBS="-lm")
+AC_CHECK_LIB(ieee, main, [MATH_LIBS="-lieee $MATH_LIBS"])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	If this system doesn't have a memmove procedure, use memcpy
+#	instead.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_CHECK_FUNC(memmove, , [AC_DEFINE(memmove, memcpy)])
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	Figure out whether "char" is unsigned.  If so, set a
+#	#define for __CHAR_UNSIGNED__.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_C_CHAR_UNSIGNED
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	Under Solaris 2.4, strtod returns the wrong value for the
+#	terminating character under some conditions.  Check for this
+#	and if the problem exists use a substitute procedure
+#	"fixstrtod" (provided by Tcl) that corrects the error.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_CHECK_FUNC(strtod, tk_strtod=1, tk_strtod=0)
+if test "$tk_strtod" = 1; then
+    AC_MSG_CHECKING([for Solaris 2.4 strtod bug])
+    AC_TRY_RUN([
+	extern double strtod();
+	int main()
+	{
+	    char *string = "NaN";
+	    char *term;
+	    strtod(string, &term);
+	    if ((term != string) && (term[-1] == 0)) {
+		exit(1);
+	    }
+	    exit(0);
+	}], tk_ok=1, tk_ok=0, tk_ok=0)
+    if test "$tk_ok" = 1; then
+	AC_MSG_RESULT(ok)
+    else
+	AC_MSG_RESULT(buggy)
+	AC_DEFINE(strtod, fixstrtod)
+    fi
+fi
+
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+#	The statements below define a collection of symbols related to
+#	building libtk as a shared library instead of a static library.
+#--------------------------------------------------------------------
+
+AC_ARG_ENABLE(shared,
+    [  --enable-shared         build libtk as a shared library],
+    [ok=$enableval], [ok=no])
+if test "$ok" = "yes" -a "${SHLIB_SUFFIX}" != ""; then
+    TK_SHARED_BUILD=1
+    TK_SHLIB_CFLAGS="${SHLIB_CFLAGS}"
+    eval "TK_LIB_FILE=libtk${TCL_SHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+    MAKE_LIB="\${SHLIB_LD} -o ${TK_LIB_FILE} \${OBJS} \$(TK_LD_SEARCH_FLAGS) ${SHLIB_LD_LIBS}"
+    RANLIB=":"
+else
+    TK_SHARED_BUILD=0
+    TK_SHLIB_CFLAGS=""
+    eval "TK_LIB_FILE=libtk${TCL_UNSHARED_LIB_SUFFIX}"
+    MAKE_LIB="ar cr ${TK_LIB_FILE} \${OBJS}"
+fi
+
+# Note:  in the following variable, it's important to use the absolute
+# path name of the Tcl directory rather than "..":  this is because
+# AIX remembers this path and will attempt to use it at run-time to look
+# up the Tcl library.
+
+if test "${TCL_LIB_VERSIONS_OK}" = "ok"; then
+    TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC="-L`pwd` -ltk${VERSION}"
+    TK_LIB_SPEC="-L${exec_prefix}/lib -ltk${VERSION}"
+else
+    TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC="-L`pwd` -ltk`echo ${VERSION} | tr -d .`"
+    TK_LIB_SPEC="-L${exec_prefix}/lib -ltk`echo ${VERSION} | tr -d .`"
+fi
+
+AC_SUBST(DL_LIBS)
+AC_SUBST(LD_FLAGS)
+AC_SUBST(MATH_LIBS)
+AC_SUBST(MAKE_LIB)
+AC_SUBST(SHLIB_CFLAGS)
+AC_SUBST(SHLIB_LD)
+AC_SUBST(SHLIB_LD_LIBS)
+AC_SUBST(SHLIB_SUFFIX)
+AC_SUBST(SHLIB_VERSION)
+AC_SUBST(TCL_BIN_DIR)
+AC_SUBST(TCL_BUILD_LIB_SPEC)
+AC_SUBST(TCL_SRC_DIR)
+AC_SUBST(TCL_VERSION)
+AC_SUBST(TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC)
+AC_SUBST(TK_CC_SEARCH_FLAGS)
+AC_SUBST(TK_LD_SEARCH_FLAGS)
+AC_SUBST(TK_LIB_FILE)
+AC_SUBST(TK_LIB_SPEC)
+AC_SUBST(TK_MAJOR_VERSION)
+AC_SUBST(TK_MINOR_VERSION)
+AC_SUBST(TK_PATCH_LEVEL)
+AC_SUBST(TK_SHLIB_CFLAGS)
+AC_SUBST(TK_SRC_DIR)
+AC_SUBST(TK_VERSION)
+AC_SUBST(XINCLUDES)
+AC_SUBST(XLIBSW)
+AC_SUBST(TK_SHARED_BUILD)
+
+AC_OUTPUT(Makefile tkConfig.sh)
diff --git a/unix/install-sh b/unix/install-sh
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0ff4b6a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/install-sh
@@ -0,0 +1,119 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+
+#
+# install - install a program, script, or datafile
+# This comes from X11R5; it is not part of GNU.
+#
+# $XConsortium: install.sh,v 1.2 89/12/18 14:47:22 jim Exp $
+#
+# This script is compatible with the BSD install script, but was written
+# from scratch.
+#
+
+
+# set DOITPROG to echo to test this script
+
+# Don't use :- since 4.3BSD and earlier shells don't like it.
+doit="${DOITPROG-}"
+
+
+# put in absolute paths if you don't have them in your path; or use env. vars.
+
+mvprog="${MVPROG-mv}"
+cpprog="${CPPROG-cp}"
+chmodprog="${CHMODPROG-chmod}"
+chownprog="${CHOWNPROG-chown}"
+chgrpprog="${CHGRPPROG-chgrp}"
+stripprog="${STRIPPROG-strip}"
+rmprog="${RMPROG-rm}"
+
+instcmd="$mvprog"
+chmodcmd=""
+chowncmd=""
+chgrpcmd=""
+stripcmd=""
+rmcmd="$rmprog -f"
+mvcmd="$mvprog"
+src=""
+dst=""
+
+while [ x"$1" != x ]; do
+    case $1 in
+	-c) instcmd="$cpprog"
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-m) chmodcmd="$chmodprog $2"
+	    shift
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-o) chowncmd="$chownprog $2"
+	    shift
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-g) chgrpcmd="$chgrpprog $2"
+	    shift
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	-s) stripcmd="$stripprog"
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+
+	*)  if [ x"$src" = x ]
+	    then
+		src=$1
+	    else
+		dst=$1
+	    fi
+	    shift
+	    continue;;
+    esac
+done
+
+if [ x"$src" = x ]
+then
+	echo "install:  no input file specified"
+	exit 1
+fi
+
+if [ x"$dst" = x ]
+then
+	echo "install:  no destination specified"
+	exit 1
+fi
+
+
+# If destination is a directory, append the input filename; if your system
+# does not like double slashes in filenames, you may need to add some logic
+
+if [ -d $dst ]
+then
+	dst="$dst"/`basename $src`
+fi
+
+# Make a temp file name in the proper directory.
+
+dstdir=`dirname $dst`
+dsttmp=$dstdir/#inst.$$#
+
+# Move or copy the file name to the temp name
+
+$doit $instcmd $src $dsttmp
+
+# and set any options; do chmod last to preserve setuid bits
+
+if [ x"$chowncmd" != x ]; then $doit $chowncmd $dsttmp; fi
+if [ x"$chgrpcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chgrpcmd $dsttmp; fi
+if [ x"$stripcmd" != x ]; then $doit $stripcmd $dsttmp; fi
+if [ x"$chmodcmd" != x ]; then $doit $chmodcmd $dsttmp; fi
+
+# Now rename the file to the real destination.
+
+$doit $rmcmd $dst
+$doit $mvcmd $dsttmp $dst
+
+
+exit 0
diff --git a/unix/mkLinks b/unix/mkLinks
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d817703
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/mkLinks
@@ -0,0 +1,878 @@
+#!/bin/sh
+# This script is invoked when installing manual entries.  It generates
+# additional links to manual entries, corresponding to the procedure
+# and command names described by the manual entry.  For example, the
+# Tcl manual entry Hash.3 describes procedures Tcl_InitHashTable,
+# Tcl_CreateHashEntry, and many more.  This script will make hard
+# links so that Tcl_InitHashTable.3, Tcl_CreateHashEntry.3, and so
+# on all refer to Hash.3 in the installed directory.
+#
+# Because of the length of command and procedure names, this mechanism
+# only works on machines that support file names longer than 14 characters.
+# This script checks to see if long file names are supported, and it
+# doesn't make any links if they are not.
+#
+# The script takes one argument, which is the name of the directory
+# where the manual entries have been installed.
+
+if test $# != 1; then
+    echo "Usage: mkLinks dir"
+    exit 1
+fi
+
+cd $1
+echo foo > xyzzyTestingAVeryLongFileName.foo
+x=`echo xyzzyTe*`
+rm xyzzyTe*
+if test "$x" != "xyzzyTestingAVeryLongFileName.foo"; then
+    exit
+fi
+if test -r 3DBorder.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_3DBorderColor.3
+    ln 3DBorder.3 Tk_3DBorderColor.3
+fi
+if test -r 3DBorder.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_3DBorderGC.3
+    ln 3DBorder.3 Tk_3DBorderGC.3
+fi
+if test -r 3DBorder.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3
+    ln 3DBorder.3 Tk_3DHorizontalBevel.3
+fi
+if test -r 3DBorder.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_3DVerticalBevel.3
+    ln 3DBorder.3 Tk_3DVerticalBevel.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Attributes.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_Attributes.3
+fi
+if test -r BindTable.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_BindEvent.3
+    ln BindTable.3 Tk_BindEvent.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvTkwin.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3
+    ln CanvTkwin.3 Tk_CanvasDrawableCoords.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvTkwin.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw.3
+    ln CanvTkwin.3 Tk_CanvasEventuallyRedraw.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvTkwin.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasGetCoord.3
+    ln CanvTkwin.3 Tk_CanvasGetCoord.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvPsY.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasPsBitmap.3
+    ln CanvPsY.3 Tk_CanvasPsBitmap.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvPsY.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasPsColor.3
+    ln CanvPsY.3 Tk_CanvasPsColor.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvPsY.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasPsFont.3
+    ln CanvPsY.3 Tk_CanvasPsFont.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvPsY.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasPsPath.3
+    ln CanvPsY.3 Tk_CanvasPsPath.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvPsY.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3
+    ln CanvPsY.3 Tk_CanvasPsStipple.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvPsY.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasPsY.3
+    ln CanvPsY.3 Tk_CanvasPsY.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvTkwin.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin.3
+    ln CanvTkwin.3 Tk_CanvasSetStippleOrigin.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvTkwin.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasTagsOption.3
+    ln CanvTkwin.3 Tk_CanvasTagsOption.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvTxtInfo.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasTextInfo.3
+    ln CanvTxtInfo.3 Tk_CanvasTextInfo.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvTkwin.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasTkwin.3
+    ln CanvTkwin.3 Tk_CanvasTkwin.3
+fi
+if test -r CanvTkwin.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CanvasWindowCoords.3
+    ln CanvTkwin.3 Tk_CanvasWindowCoords.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Changes.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_Changes.3
+fi
+if test -r TextLayout.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CharBbox.3
+    ln TextLayout.3 Tk_CharBbox.3
+fi
+if test -r SetClass.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Class.3
+    ln SetClass.3 Tk_Class.3
+fi
+if test -r ClrSelect.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ClearSelection.3
+    ln ClrSelect.3 Tk_ClearSelection.3
+fi
+if test -r Clipboard.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ClipboardAppend.3
+    ln Clipboard.3 Tk_ClipboardAppend.3
+fi
+if test -r Clipboard.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ClipboardClear.3
+    ln Clipboard.3 Tk_ClipboardClear.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Colormap.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_Colormap.3
+fi
+if test -r TextLayout.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ComputeTextLayout.3
+    ln TextLayout.3 Tk_ComputeTextLayout.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWidg.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ConfigureInfo.3
+    ln ConfigWidg.3 Tk_ConfigureInfo.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWidg.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ConfigureValue.3
+    ln ConfigWidg.3 Tk_ConfigureValue.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWidg.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ConfigureWidget.3
+    ln ConfigWidg.3 Tk_ConfigureWidget.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ConfigureWindow.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_ConfigureWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r CoordToWin.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CoordsToWindow.3
+    ln CoordToWin.3 Tk_CoordsToWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r BindTable.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CreateBinding.3
+    ln BindTable.3 Tk_CreateBinding.3
+fi
+if test -r BindTable.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CreateBindingTable.3
+    ln BindTable.3 Tk_CreateBindingTable.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtErrHdlr.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CreateErrorHandler.3
+    ln CrtErrHdlr.3 Tk_CreateErrorHandler.3
+fi
+if test -r EventHndlr.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CreateEventHandler.3
+    ln EventHndlr.3 Tk_CreateEventHandler.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtGenHdlr.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CreateGenericHandler.3
+    ln CrtGenHdlr.3 Tk_CreateGenericHandler.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtImgType.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CreateImageType.3
+    ln CrtImgType.3 Tk_CreateImageType.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtItemType.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CreateItemType.3
+    ln CrtItemType.3 Tk_CreateItemType.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtPhImgFmt.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat.3
+    ln CrtPhImgFmt.3 Tk_CreatePhotoImageFormat.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtSelHdlr.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CreateSelHandler.3
+    ln CrtSelHdlr.3 Tk_CreateSelHandler.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtWindow.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CreateWindow.3
+    ln CrtWindow.3 Tk_CreateWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtWindow.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_CreateWindowFromPath.3
+    ln CrtWindow.3 Tk_CreateWindowFromPath.3
+fi
+if test -r GetBitmap.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DefineBitmap.3
+    ln GetBitmap.3 Tk_DefineBitmap.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DefineCursor.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_DefineCursor.3
+fi
+if test -r BindTable.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DeleteAllBindings.3
+    ln BindTable.3 Tk_DeleteAllBindings.3
+fi
+if test -r BindTable.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DeleteBinding.3
+    ln BindTable.3 Tk_DeleteBinding.3
+fi
+if test -r BindTable.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DeleteBindingTable.3
+    ln BindTable.3 Tk_DeleteBindingTable.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtErrHdlr.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DeleteErrorHandler.3
+    ln CrtErrHdlr.3 Tk_DeleteErrorHandler.3
+fi
+if test -r EventHndlr.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DeleteEventHandler.3
+    ln EventHndlr.3 Tk_DeleteEventHandler.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtGenHdlr.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DeleteGenericHandler.3
+    ln CrtGenHdlr.3 Tk_DeleteGenericHandler.3
+fi
+if test -r DeleteImg.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DeleteImage.3
+    ln DeleteImg.3 Tk_DeleteImage.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtSelHdlr.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DeleteSelHandler.3
+    ln CrtSelHdlr.3 Tk_DeleteSelHandler.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Depth.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_Depth.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtWindow.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DestroyWindow.3
+    ln CrtWindow.3 Tk_DestroyWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Display.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_Display.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DisplayName.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_DisplayName.3
+fi
+if test -r TextLayout.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DistanceToTextLayout.3
+    ln TextLayout.3 Tk_DistanceToTextLayout.3
+fi
+if test -r 3DBorder.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Draw3DPolygon.3
+    ln 3DBorder.3 Tk_Draw3DPolygon.3
+fi
+if test -r 3DBorder.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Draw3DRectangle.3
+    ln 3DBorder.3 Tk_Draw3DRectangle.3
+fi
+if test -r MeasureChar.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DrawChars.3
+    ln MeasureChar.3 Tk_DrawChars.3
+fi
+if test -r DrawFocHlt.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DrawFocusHighlight.3
+    ln DrawFocHlt.3 Tk_DrawFocusHighlight.3
+fi
+if test -r TextLayout.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_DrawTextLayout.3
+    ln TextLayout.3 Tk_DrawTextLayout.3
+fi
+if test -r 3DBorder.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Fill3DPolygon.3
+    ln 3DBorder.3 Tk_Fill3DPolygon.3
+fi
+if test -r 3DBorder.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Fill3DRectangle.3
+    ln 3DBorder.3 Tk_Fill3DRectangle.3
+fi
+if test -r FindPhoto.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FindPhoto.3
+    ln FindPhoto.3 Tk_FindPhoto.3
+fi
+if test -r FontId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FontId.3
+    ln FontId.3 Tk_FontId.3
+fi
+if test -r FontId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FontMetrics.3
+    ln FontId.3 Tk_FontMetrics.3
+fi
+if test -r 3DBorder.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Free3DBorder.3
+    ln 3DBorder.3 Tk_Free3DBorder.3
+fi
+if test -r GetBitmap.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FreeBitmap.3
+    ln GetBitmap.3 Tk_FreeBitmap.3
+fi
+if test -r GetColor.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FreeColor.3
+    ln GetColor.3 Tk_FreeColor.3
+fi
+if test -r GetClrmap.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FreeColormap.3
+    ln GetClrmap.3 Tk_FreeColormap.3
+fi
+if test -r GetCursor.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FreeCursor.3
+    ln GetCursor.3 Tk_FreeCursor.3
+fi
+if test -r GetFont.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FreeFont.3
+    ln GetFont.3 Tk_FreeFont.3
+fi
+if test -r GetGC.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FreeGC.3
+    ln GetGC.3 Tk_FreeGC.3
+fi
+if test -r GetImage.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FreeImage.3
+    ln GetImage.3 Tk_FreeImage.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWidg.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FreeOptions.3
+    ln ConfigWidg.3 Tk_FreeOptions.3
+fi
+if test -r GetPixmap.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FreePixmap.3
+    ln GetPixmap.3 Tk_FreePixmap.3
+fi
+if test -r TextLayout.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FreeTextLayout.3
+    ln TextLayout.3 Tk_FreeTextLayout.3
+fi
+if test -r FreeXId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_FreeXId.3
+    ln FreeXId.3 Tk_FreeXId.3
+fi
+if test -r GeomReq.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GeometryRequest.3
+    ln GeomReq.3 Tk_GeometryRequest.3
+fi
+if test -r 3DBorder.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Get3DBorder.3
+    ln 3DBorder.3 Tk_Get3DBorder.3
+fi
+if test -r BindTable.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetAllBindings.3
+    ln BindTable.3 Tk_GetAllBindings.3
+fi
+if test -r GetAnchor.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetAnchor.3
+    ln GetAnchor.3 Tk_GetAnchor.3
+fi
+if test -r InternAtom.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetAtomName.3
+    ln InternAtom.3 Tk_GetAtomName.3
+fi
+if test -r BindTable.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetBinding.3
+    ln BindTable.3 Tk_GetBinding.3
+fi
+if test -r GetBitmap.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetBitmap.3
+    ln GetBitmap.3 Tk_GetBitmap.3
+fi
+if test -r GetBitmap.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetBitmapFromData.3
+    ln GetBitmap.3 Tk_GetBitmapFromData.3
+fi
+if test -r GetCapStyl.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetCapStyle.3
+    ln GetCapStyl.3 Tk_GetCapStyle.3
+fi
+if test -r GetColor.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetColor.3
+    ln GetColor.3 Tk_GetColor.3
+fi
+if test -r GetColor.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetColorByValue.3
+    ln GetColor.3 Tk_GetColorByValue.3
+fi
+if test -r GetClrmap.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetColormap.3
+    ln GetClrmap.3 Tk_GetColormap.3
+fi
+if test -r GetCursor.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetCursor.3
+    ln GetCursor.3 Tk_GetCursor.3
+fi
+if test -r GetCursor.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetCursorFromData.3
+    ln GetCursor.3 Tk_GetCursorFromData.3
+fi
+if test -r GetFont.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetFont.3
+    ln GetFont.3 Tk_GetFont.3
+fi
+if test -r GetGC.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetGC.3
+    ln GetGC.3 Tk_GetGC.3
+fi
+if test -r GetImage.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetImage.3
+    ln GetImage.3 Tk_GetImage.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtImgType.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetImageMasterData.3
+    ln CrtImgType.3 Tk_GetImageMasterData.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtItemType.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetItemTypes.3
+    ln CrtItemType.3 Tk_GetItemTypes.3
+fi
+if test -r GetJoinStl.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetJoinStyle.3
+    ln GetJoinStl.3 Tk_GetJoinStyle.3
+fi
+if test -r GetJustify.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetJustify.3
+    ln GetJustify.3 Tk_GetJustify.3
+fi
+if test -r GetOption.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetOption.3
+    ln GetOption.3 Tk_GetOption.3
+fi
+if test -r GetPixels.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetPixels.3
+    ln GetPixels.3 Tk_GetPixels.3
+fi
+if test -r GetPixmap.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetPixmap.3
+    ln GetPixmap.3 Tk_GetPixmap.3
+fi
+if test -r GetRelief.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetRelief.3
+    ln GetRelief.3 Tk_GetRelief.3
+fi
+if test -r GetRootCrd.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetRootCoords.3
+    ln GetRootCrd.3 Tk_GetRootCoords.3
+fi
+if test -r GetPixels.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetScreenMM.3
+    ln GetPixels.3 Tk_GetScreenMM.3
+fi
+if test -r GetScroll.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetScrollInfo.3
+    ln GetScroll.3 Tk_GetScrollInfo.3
+fi
+if test -r GetSelect.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetSelection.3
+    ln GetSelect.3 Tk_GetSelection.3
+fi
+if test -r GetUid.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetUid.3
+    ln GetUid.3 Tk_GetUid.3
+fi
+if test -r GetVRoot.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetVRootGeometry.3
+    ln GetVRoot.3 Tk_GetVRootGeometry.3
+fi
+if test -r GetVisual.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_GetVisual.3
+    ln GetVisual.3 Tk_GetVisual.3
+fi
+if test -r HandleEvent.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_HandleEvent.3
+    ln HandleEvent.3 Tk_HandleEvent.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Height.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_Height.3
+fi
+if test -r IdToWindow.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_IdToWindow.3
+    ln IdToWindow.3 Tk_IdToWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r ImgChanged.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ImageChanged.3
+    ln ImgChanged.3 Tk_ImageChanged.3
+fi
+if test -r InternAtom.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_InternAtom.3
+    ln InternAtom.3 Tk_InternAtom.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_InternalBorderWidth.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_InternalBorderWidth.3
+fi
+if test -r TextLayout.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_IntersectTextLayout.3
+    ln TextLayout.3 Tk_IntersectTextLayout.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_IsMapped.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_IsMapped.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_IsTopLevel.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_IsTopLevel.3
+fi
+if test -r MainLoop.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_MainLoop.3
+    ln MainLoop.3 Tk_MainLoop.3
+fi
+if test -r MainWin.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_MainWindow.3
+    ln MainWin.3 Tk_MainWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r MaintGeom.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_MaintainGeometry.3
+    ln MaintGeom.3 Tk_MaintainGeometry.3
+fi
+if test -r CrtWindow.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_MakeWindowExist.3
+    ln CrtWindow.3 Tk_MakeWindowExist.3
+fi
+if test -r ManageGeom.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ManageGeometry.3
+    ln ManageGeom.3 Tk_ManageGeometry.3
+fi
+if test -r MapWindow.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_MapWindow.3
+    ln MapWindow.3 Tk_MapWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r MeasureChar.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_MeasureChars.3
+    ln MeasureChar.3 Tk_MeasureChars.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_MoveResizeWindow.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_MoveResizeWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r MoveToplev.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_MoveToplevelWindow.3
+    ln MoveToplev.3 Tk_MoveToplevelWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_MoveWindow.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_MoveWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r Name.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Name.3
+    ln Name.3 Tk_Name.3
+fi
+if test -r 3DBorder.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_NameOf3DBorder.3
+    ln 3DBorder.3 Tk_NameOf3DBorder.3
+fi
+if test -r GetAnchor.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_NameOfAnchor.3
+    ln GetAnchor.3 Tk_NameOfAnchor.3
+fi
+if test -r GetBitmap.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_NameOfBitmap.3
+    ln GetBitmap.3 Tk_NameOfBitmap.3
+fi
+if test -r GetCapStyl.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_NameOfCapStyle.3
+    ln GetCapStyl.3 Tk_NameOfCapStyle.3
+fi
+if test -r GetColor.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_NameOfColor.3
+    ln GetColor.3 Tk_NameOfColor.3
+fi
+if test -r GetCursor.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_NameOfCursor.3
+    ln GetCursor.3 Tk_NameOfCursor.3
+fi
+if test -r GetFont.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_NameOfFont.3
+    ln GetFont.3 Tk_NameOfFont.3
+fi
+if test -r NameOfImg.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_NameOfImage.3
+    ln NameOfImg.3 Tk_NameOfImage.3
+fi
+if test -r GetJoinStl.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_NameOfJoinStyle.3
+    ln GetJoinStl.3 Tk_NameOfJoinStyle.3
+fi
+if test -r GetJustify.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_NameOfJustify.3
+    ln GetJustify.3 Tk_NameOfJustify.3
+fi
+if test -r GetRelief.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_NameOfRelief.3
+    ln GetRelief.3 Tk_NameOfRelief.3
+fi
+if test -r Name.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_NameToWindow.3
+    ln Name.3 Tk_NameToWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWidg.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Offset.3
+    ln ConfigWidg.3 Tk_Offset.3
+fi
+if test -r OwnSelect.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_OwnSelection.3
+    ln OwnSelect.3 Tk_OwnSelection.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Parent.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_Parent.3
+fi
+if test -r ParseArgv.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ParseArgv.3
+    ln ParseArgv.3 Tk_ParseArgv.3
+fi
+if test -r Name.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_PathName.3
+    ln Name.3 Tk_PathName.3
+fi
+if test -r FindPhoto.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_PhotoBlank.3
+    ln FindPhoto.3 Tk_PhotoBlank.3
+fi
+if test -r FindPhoto.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_PhotoExpand.3
+    ln FindPhoto.3 Tk_PhotoExpand.3
+fi
+if test -r FindPhoto.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_PhotoGetImage.3
+    ln FindPhoto.3 Tk_PhotoGetImage.3
+fi
+if test -r FindPhoto.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_PhotoGetSize.3
+    ln FindPhoto.3 Tk_PhotoGetSize.3
+fi
+if test -r FindPhoto.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3
+    ln FindPhoto.3 Tk_PhotoPutBlock.3
+fi
+if test -r FindPhoto.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock.3
+    ln FindPhoto.3 Tk_PhotoPutZoomedBlock.3
+fi
+if test -r FindPhoto.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_PhotoSetSize.3
+    ln FindPhoto.3 Tk_PhotoSetSize.3
+fi
+if test -r TextLayout.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_PointToChar.3
+    ln TextLayout.3 Tk_PointToChar.3
+fi
+if test -r FontId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_PostscriptFontName.3
+    ln FontId.3 Tk_PostscriptFontName.3
+fi
+if test -r QWinEvent.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_QueueWindowEvent.3
+    ln QWinEvent.3 Tk_QueueWindowEvent.3
+fi
+if test -r GetImage.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_RedrawImage.3
+    ln GetImage.3 Tk_RedrawImage.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ReqHeight.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_ReqHeight.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ReqWidth.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_ReqWidth.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ResizeWindow.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_ResizeWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r Restack.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_RestackWindow.3
+    ln Restack.3 Tk_RestackWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r RestrictEv.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_RestrictEvents.3
+    ln RestrictEv.3 Tk_RestrictEvents.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Screen.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_Screen.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_ScreenNumber.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_ScreenNumber.3
+fi
+if test -r SetAppName.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SetAppName.3
+    ln SetAppName.3 Tk_SetAppName.3
+fi
+if test -r 3DBorder.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder.3
+    ln 3DBorder.3 Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder.3
+fi
+if test -r SetClass.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SetClass.3
+    ln SetClass.3 Tk_SetClass.3
+fi
+if test -r SetGrid.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SetGrid.3
+    ln SetGrid.3 Tk_SetGrid.3
+fi
+if test -r GeomReq.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SetInternalBorder.3
+    ln GeomReq.3 Tk_SetInternalBorder.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SetWindowBackground.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_SetWindowBackground.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_SetWindowBackgroundPixmap.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SetWindowBorder.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_SetWindowBorder.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_SetWindowBorderPixmap.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_SetWindowBorderWidth.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SetWindowColormap.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_SetWindowColormap.3
+fi
+if test -r SetVisual.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SetWindowVisual.3
+    ln SetVisual.3 Tk_SetWindowVisual.3
+fi
+if test -r GetBitmap.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SizeOfBitmap.3
+    ln GetBitmap.3 Tk_SizeOfBitmap.3
+fi
+if test -r GetImage.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_SizeOfImage.3
+    ln GetImage.3 Tk_SizeOfImage.3
+fi
+if test -r StrictMotif.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_StrictMotif.3
+    ln StrictMotif.3 Tk_StrictMotif.3
+fi
+if test -r TextLayout.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3
+    ln TextLayout.3 Tk_TextLayoutToPostscript.3
+fi
+if test -r MeasureChar.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_TextWidth.3
+    ln MeasureChar.3 Tk_TextWidth.3
+fi
+if test -r GetUid.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Uid.3
+    ln GetUid.3 Tk_Uid.3
+fi
+if test -r ConfigWind.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_UndefineCursor.3
+    ln ConfigWind.3 Tk_UndefineCursor.3
+fi
+if test -r MeasureChar.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_UnderlineChars.3
+    ln MeasureChar.3 Tk_UnderlineChars.3
+fi
+if test -r TextLayout.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_UnderlineTextLayout.3
+    ln TextLayout.3 Tk_UnderlineTextLayout.3
+fi
+if test -r MaintGeom.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_UnmaintainGeometry.3
+    ln MaintGeom.3 Tk_UnmaintainGeometry.3
+fi
+if test -r MapWindow.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_UnmapWindow.3
+    ln MapWindow.3 Tk_UnmapWindow.3
+fi
+if test -r SetGrid.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_UnsetGrid.3
+    ln SetGrid.3 Tk_UnsetGrid.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Visual.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_Visual.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Width.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_Width.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_WindowId.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_WindowId.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_X.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_X.3
+fi
+if test -r WindowId.3; then
+    rm -f Tk_Y.3
+    ln WindowId.3 Tk_Y.3
+fi
+if test -r menubar.n; then
+    rm -f tk_bindForTraversal.n
+    ln menubar.n tk_bindForTraversal.n
+fi
+if test -r palette.n; then
+    rm -f tk_bisque.n
+    ln palette.n tk_bisque.n
+fi
+if test -r chooseColor.n; then
+    rm -f tk_chooseColor.n
+    ln chooseColor.n tk_chooseColor.n
+fi
+if test -r dialog.n; then
+    rm -f tk_dialog.n
+    ln dialog.n tk_dialog.n
+fi
+if test -r focusNext.n; then
+    rm -f tk_focusFollowsMouse.n
+    ln focusNext.n tk_focusFollowsMouse.n
+fi
+if test -r focusNext.n; then
+    rm -f tk_focusNext.n
+    ln focusNext.n tk_focusNext.n
+fi
+if test -r focusNext.n; then
+    rm -f tk_focusPrev.n
+    ln focusNext.n tk_focusPrev.n
+fi
+if test -r getOpenFile.n; then
+    rm -f tk_getOpenFile.n
+    ln getOpenFile.n tk_getOpenFile.n
+fi
+if test -r getOpenFile.n; then
+    rm -f tk_getSaveFile.n
+    ln getOpenFile.n tk_getSaveFile.n
+fi
+if test -r menubar.n; then
+    rm -f tk_menuBar.n
+    ln menubar.n tk_menuBar.n
+fi
+if test -r messageBox.n; then
+    rm -f tk_messageBox.n
+    ln messageBox.n tk_messageBox.n
+fi
+if test -r optionMenu.n; then
+    rm -f tk_optionMenu.n
+    ln optionMenu.n tk_optionMenu.n
+fi
+if test -r popup.n; then
+    rm -f tk_popup.n
+    ln popup.n tk_popup.n
+fi
+if test -r palette.n; then
+    rm -f tk_setPalette.n
+    ln palette.n tk_setPalette.n
+fi
+exit 0
diff --git a/unix/porting.notes b/unix/porting.notes
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ecb395d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/porting.notes
@@ -0,0 +1,86 @@
+This file contains a collection of notes that various people have
+provided about porting Tk to various machines and operating systems.
+I don't have personal access to any of these machines, so I make
+no guarantees that the notes are correct, complete, or up-to-date.
+If you see the word "I" in any explanations, it refers to the person
+who contributed the information, not to me;  this means that I
+probably can't answer any questions about any of this stuff. In
+some cases, a person has volunteered to act as a contact point for
+questions about porting Tcl to a particular machine;  in these
+cases the person's name and e-mail address are listed.  I'm very
+interested in getting new porting information to add to the file;
+please mail updates to "john.ousterhout@eng.sun.com".
+
+This file reflects information provided for Tk 4.0 and later releases.
+If there is no information for your configuration in this file, check
+the file "porting.old" too;  it contains information that was
+submitted for Tk 3.6 and earlier releases, and some of that information
+may still be valid.
+
+A new porting database has recently become available on the Web at
+the following URL:
+    http://www.sunlabs.com/cgi-bin/tcl/info.4.0
+This page provides information about the platforms on which Tcl 7.4
+and Tk 4.0 have been compiled and what changes were needed to get Tcl
+and Tk to compile.  You can also add new entries to that database
+when you install Tcl and Tk on a new platform.  The Web database is
+likely to be more up-to-date than this file.
+
+sccsid = SCCS: @(#) porting.notes 1.10 96/04/10 15:38:54
+
+--------------------------------------------
+Solaris, various versions
+--------------------------------------------
+
+1. If typing "make test" results in an error message saying that
+there are no "*.test" files, or you get lots of globbing errors,
+it's probably because your system doesn't have cc installed and
+you used gcc.  In order for this to work, you have to set your
+CC environment variable to gcc and your CPP environment variable
+to "gcc -E" before running the configure script.
+
+2. Make sure that /usr/ucb is not in your PATH or LD_LIBRARY_PATH
+environment variables;  this will cause confusion between the new
+Solaris libraries and older UCB versions (Tk will expect one version
+and get another).
+
+3. On 486 PCs with Solaris 2.4, when compiling with gcc 2.6.0,
+tkMessage.c appears to hang gcc.  If the -O switch is removed
+then it compiles fine.
+
+--------------------------------------------
+486 PCs, Solaris 2.4
+--------------------------------------------
+
+When compiling with gcc 2.6.0, tkMessage.c appears to hang gcc.
+If the -O switch is removed then it compiles fine.
+
+--------------------------------------------
+SGI machines, IRIX 5.2, 5.3, IRIX64 6.0.1
+--------------------------------------------
+
+1. Add "-D_BSD_TIME" to CFLAGS in Makefile.  This avoids type conflicts
+in the prototype for the gettimeofday procedure.
+
+2. If you're running under Irix 6.x and wish dumps core, try
+removing -O from the CFLAGS in Makefile and recompiling;  compiler
+optimizations seem to cause problems on some machines.
+
+--------------------------------------------
+QNX 4.22
+--------------------------------------------
+
+All of the source files built as is.  All I had to do was edit the
+Makefile generated by ./configure to specify where the X11 libraries
+were (ie, I added in -L/usr/X11/lib)
+
+--------------------------------------------
+HP-UX
+--------------------------------------------
+
+There are problems compiling Tk gcc (version 2.7.2) and the HP assembler.
+The problem is that if static functions are called using a pointer reference,
+double arguments are not transferred correctly into the function. That can
+be fixed by making all those functions global. This happens with the
+ScaleXxx() and TranslateXxx() functions for all canvas item types.
+The simplest fix is configure gcc to use the GNU assembler.
diff --git a/unix/porting.old b/unix/porting.old
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ea8aa5c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/porting.old
@@ -0,0 +1,324 @@
+This is an old version of the file "porting.notes".  It contains
+porting information that people submitted for Tk releases numbered
+3.6 and earlier.  You may find information in this file useful if
+there is no information available for your machine in the current
+version of "porting.notes".
+
+I don't have personal access to any of these machines, so I make
+no guarantees that the notes are correct, complete, or up-to-date.
+If you see the word "I" in any explanations, it refers to the person
+who contributed the information, not to me;  this means that I
+probably can't answer any questions about any of this stuff. In
+some cases, a person has volunteered to act as a contact point for
+questions about porting Tcl to a particular machine;  in these
+cases the person's name and e-mail address are listed.  I'd be
+happy to receive corrections or updates.
+
+sccsid = SCCS: @(#) porting.old 1.2 96/02/16 10:27:30
+
+---------------------------------------------
+DEC Alphas:
+---------------------------------------------
+
+1. There appears to be a compiler/library bug that prevents tkTrig.c
+from compiling unless you turn off optimization (remove the -O compiler
+switch).  The problem appears to have been fixed in the 1.3-4 version
+of the compiler.
+
+---------------------------------------------
+HP-UX systems:
+---------------------------------------------
+
+1. Configuration:
+	    HP-UX Release 7.05 on a series 300 (68k) machine.
+	    The native cc has been used for production.
+	    X11r4 libraries and include files were taken from
+	    internet archives, where as the server came with HPUX release 7.05.
+    
+    Problems:
+	    Symbol table space for cc had to be increased with: -Wc,-Ns3000
+	    tkBind.c did not compile under -O:
+		    C1 internal error in "GetField": Set Error Detected
+		    *** Error code 1
+	    tkBind.c did compile without optimization (no -O).
+
+2. Note: if you have trouble getting xauth-style access control to work
+(and you'll need xauth if you want to use "send"), be sure to uncomment
+the line
+
+# Vuelogin*authorize:         True
+
+in the file /usr/vue/config/Xconfig, so that the server starts up with
+authorization enabled.  Also, you may have to reboot the machine in
+order to force the server to restart.
+
+---------------------------------------------
+SCO Unix:
+---------------------------------------------
+
+Getting Tk to run under SCO Unix:
+
+Add a "#undef select" to tkEvent.c, and remove the reference to TK_EXCEPTION
+around line 460 of main.c.
+
+Tk uses its own scheme for allocating the border colors for its 3D widgets,
+which causes problems when running TK on a system with "PseudoColor"
+display class, and a 16-cell colormap.
+
+If you can't go to eight bitplanes, you can instead start the server with a
+"-static" (Xsco) or "-analog" (Xsight) option, making the display class 
+become "StaticColor".  This makes the entire colormap read-only, and it will
+return the color that most closely maps to the desired color as possible.
+
+---------------------------------------------
+Silicon Graphics systems:
+---------------------------------------------
+
+1. Change the CC variable in the Makefile to:
+
+CC =		cc -xansi -D__STDC__ -signed
+
+2. Change the LIBS variable in the Makefile to use the X11 shared library
+   ("-lX11_s" instead of "-lX11").
+
+3. Under some versions of IRIX (e.g. 4.0.1) you have to turn off
+   optimization (e.g.  change "-O" in CFLAGS to "-O0" or remove it
+   entirely) because of faulty code generation.  If the Tcl or Tk test
+   suites fail, turn off optimization.
+
+4. Add a "-lsun" switch just before "-lm" in the LIBS definition.
+   Under some versions of IRIX (5.1.1.3?) you'll need to omit the
+   "-lsun" switch, plus remove the "-lsocket" and "-lnsl" switches
+   added by the configure script;  otherwise you won't be able to
+   use symbolic host names for the display, only numerical Internet
+   addresses.
+
+5. Rumor has it that you'll also need a "-lmalloc" switch in the
+   LIBS definition.
+
+6. In IRIX 5.2 you'll have to modify Makefile to fix the following problems:
+    - The "-c" option is illegal with this version of install, but
+      the "-F" switch is needed instead.  Change this in the "INSTALL ="
+      definition line.
+    - The order of file and directory have to be changed in all the
+      invocations of INSTALL_DATA or INSTALL_PROGRAM.
+
+---------------------------------------------
+IBM RS/6000's:
+---------------------------------------------
+1. To allow ALT- sequences to work on the RS-6000, the following
+line should be changed in tkBind.c:
+
+    OLD LINE:
+     {"Alt",	Mod2Mask, 	0},
+    NEW LINE:
+     {"Alt",	Mod1Mask, 	0},
+
+---------------------------------------------
+AT&T SVR4:
+---------------------------------------------
+
+1. The first major hurdle is that SVR4's select() subtly differs
+from BSD select.  This impacts Tk in two ways, some of the Xlib calls
+make use of select() and are inherently broken and Tk itself makes
+extensive use of select().  The first problem can't be fixed without
+rebuilding one's Xlib, but can be avoided.  I intend to submit part
+of my work the XFree86 guys so that the next version of XFree86 for
+SVR4 will not be broken.  Until then, it is necessary to comment out
+this section of code from Tk_DoOneEvent() (which is near line 1227):
+
+#if !defined(SVR4)
+                    void (*oldHandler)();
+
+                    oldHandler = (void (*)()) signal(SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN);
+                    XNoOp(display);
+                    XFlush(display);
+                    (void) signal(SIGPIPE, oldHandler);
+#endif /* SVR4 */
+
+if you don't comment it out, some scripts cause wish to go into
+an infinite loop of sending no-ops to the X server.
+
+2. As for fixing Tk's calls to select(), I've taken the simple
+approach of writing a wrapper for select and then using #define to
+replace all calls to select with the wrapper.  I chose tkConfig.h
+to load the wrapper.  So at the very end of tkConfig.h, it now looks
+like:
+
+#if defined(SVR4)
+#  include "BSDselect.h"
+#endif 
+
+#endif /* _TKCONFIG */
+
+The file BSDselect.h looks like this:
+
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/time.h>
+#include <sys/select.h>
+
+/*  This is a fix for the difference between BSD's select() and
+ *  SVR4's select().  SVR4's select() can never return a value larger
+ *  than the total number of file descriptors being checked.  So, if
+ *  you select for read and write on one file descriptor, and both
+ *  are true, SVR4 select() will only return 1.  BSD select in the
+ *  same situation will return 2.
+ *
+ *	Additionally, BSD select() on timing out, will zero the masks,
+ *	while SVR4 does not.  This is fixed here as well.
+ *
+ *	Set your tabstops to 4 characters to have this code nicely formatted.
+ *
+ *	Jerry Whelan, guru@bradley.edu, June 12th, 1993
+ */
+
+
+int
+BSDselect(nfds, readfds, writefds, exceptfds, timeout)
+int nfds;
+fd_set *readfds, *writefds, *exceptfds;
+struct timeval *timeout;
+{
+	int		rval,
+			i;
+
+	rval = select(nfds, readfds, writefds, exceptfds, timeout);
+
+	switch(rval) {
+		case -1:	return(rval);
+					break;
+
+		case 0:		if(readfds != NULL)
+						FD_ZERO(readfds);
+					if(writefds != NULL)
+						FD_ZERO(writefds);
+					if(exceptfds != NULL)
+						FD_ZERO(exceptfds);
+
+					return(rval);
+					break;
+
+		default:	for(i=0, rval=0; i < nfds; i++) {
+						if((readfds != NULL) && FD_ISSET
+(i, readfds)) rval++;
+						if((writefds != NULL) && FD_ISSE
+T(i, writefds)) rval++;
+						if((writefds != NULL) && FD_ISSE
+T(i, exceptfds)) rval++;
+					}
+					return(rval);
+		}
+/* Should never get here */
+}
+
+---------------------------------------------
+CDC 4680MP, EP/IX 1.4.3:
+---------------------------------------------
+
+The installation was done in the System V environment (-systype sysv)
+with the BSD extensions available (-I/usr/include/bsd and -lbsd).  It was
+built with the 2.20 level C compiler.  The 2.11 level can be used, but
+it is better to match what TCL is built with, which must be 2.20 or
+higher (see the porting notes with TCL for the details).
+
+To make the configure script find the BSD extensions, I set environment
+variable DEFS to "-I/usr/include/bsd" and LIBS to "-lbsd" before
+running it.  I would have also set CC to "cc2.20", but that compiler
+driver has a bug that loader errors (e.g. not finding a library routine,
+which the script uses to tell what is available) do not cause an error
+status to be returned to the shell (but see the Tcl 2.1.1 porting notes
+for comments about using "-non_shared").
+
+After running configure, I changed the CC definition line in Makefile
+from:
+	CC=cc
+to
+	CC=cc2.20
+to match the TCL build.  Skip this if the default compiler is already 2.20
+(or later).
+
+---------------------------------------------
+CDC 4680MP, EP/IX 2.1.1:
+---------------------------------------------
+
+The installation was done in the System V environment (-systype sysv)
+with the BSD extensions available (-I/usr/include/bsd and -lbsd).  It was
+built with the 3.11 level C compiler.  Earlier levels can be used, but it
+is better to match what TCL is built with, which must be 2.20 or higher
+(see the porting notes with TCL for the details).
+
+To make the configure script find the BSD extensions, I set environment
+variable DEFS to "-I/usr/include/bsd -non_shared" and LIBS to "-lbsd"
+before running it.
+
+See the Tcl porting notes for comments on why "-non_shared" is needed
+during the configuration step.  It was removed from AC_FLAGS before
+building.
+
+-------------------------------------------------
+Pyramid, OSx 5.1a (UCB universe, GCC installed):
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+Instead of typing "./configure" to configure, type
+
+    DEFS="-I/usr/include/X11/attinc" ./configure
+
+to sh to do the configuration.
+
+-------------------------------------------------
+NextSTEP 3.1:
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+1. Run configure with predefined CPP:
+	CPP='cc -E' ./configure
+   (If your shell is [t]csh, do a "setenv CPP 'cc -E'")
+
+2. Edit Makefile: 
+  -add the following to AC_FLAGS:
+	-Dstrtod=tcl_strtod
+
+Note: Tk's raise test may fail when running the tvtwm window manager.
+Changing to either twm or even better fvwm ensures that this test will
+succeed. 
+
+-------------------------------------------------
+Encore 91, UMAX V 3.0.9.3:
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+1. Modify the CFLAGS definition in Makefile to include -DENCORE:
+
+    CFLAGS = -O -DENCORE
+
+2. "mkdir" does not by default create the parent directories.  The mkdir
+directives should be modified to "midir -p".
+
+3. An error of a redeclaration of read, can be resolved by conditionally
+not compiling if an ENCORE system.
+
+#ifndef ENCORE
+extern int              read _ANSI_ARGS_((int fd, char *buf, size_t size));
+#endif
+
+-------------------------------------------------
+Sequent machines running Dynix:
+Contact: Andrew Swan (aswan@soda.berkeley.edu)
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+1. Use gcc instead of the cc distributed by Sequent
+
+2. There are problems with the distributed version of
+   <stddef.h>.  The easiest solution is probably to create a
+   copy of stddef.h, make sure it comes early in the include
+   path and then edit it as need be to eliminate conflicts
+   with the X11 header files.
+
+3. The same comments about the tanh function from the notes on
+   porting Tcl apply to Tk.
+
+-------------------------------------------------
+Systems running Interactive 4.0:
+-------------------------------------------------
+
+1. Add "-posix" to CFLAGS in Makefile (or Makefile.in).
+
+2. Add "-lnsl_s" to LIBS in Makefile (or Makefile.in).
diff --git a/unix/tkAppInit.c b/unix/tkAppInit.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..6b6b2e2
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkAppInit.c
@@ -0,0 +1,120 @@
+/* 
+ * tkAppInit.c --
+ *
+ *	Provides a default version of the Tcl_AppInit procedure for
+ *	use in wish and similar Tk-based applications.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkAppInit.c 1.22 96/05/29 09:47:08
+ */
+
+#include "tk.h"
+
+/*
+ * The following variable is a special hack that is needed in order for
+ * Sun shared libraries to be used for Tcl.
+ */
+
+extern int matherr();
+int *tclDummyMathPtr = (int *) matherr;
+
+#ifdef TK_TEST
+EXTERN int		Tktest_Init _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp));
+#endif /* TK_TEST */
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * main --
+ *
+ *	This is the main program for the application.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None: Tk_Main never returns here, so this procedure never
+ *	returns either.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Whatever the application does.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+main(argc, argv)
+    int argc;			/* Number of command-line arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Values of command-line arguments. */
+{
+    Tk_Main(argc, argv, Tcl_AppInit);
+    return 0;			/* Needed only to prevent compiler warning. */
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tcl_AppInit --
+ *
+ *	This procedure performs application-specific initialization.
+ *	Most applications, especially those that incorporate additional
+ *	packages, will have their own version of this procedure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl completion code, and leaves an error
+ *	message in interp->result if an error occurs.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Depends on the startup script.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tcl_AppInit(interp)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for application. */
+{
+    if (Tcl_Init(interp) == TCL_ERROR) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (Tk_Init(interp) == TCL_ERROR) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_StaticPackage(interp, "Tk", Tk_Init, Tk_SafeInit);
+#ifdef TK_TEST
+    if (Tktest_Init(interp) == TCL_ERROR) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tcl_StaticPackage(interp, "Tktest", Tktest_Init,
+            (Tcl_PackageInitProc *) NULL);
+#endif /* TK_TEST */
+
+
+    /*
+     * Call the init procedures for included packages.  Each call should
+     * look like this:
+     *
+     * if (Mod_Init(interp) == TCL_ERROR) {
+     *     return TCL_ERROR;
+     * }
+     *
+     * where "Mod" is the name of the module.
+     */
+
+    /*
+     * Call Tcl_CreateCommand for application-specific commands, if
+     * they weren't already created by the init procedures called above.
+     */
+
+    /*
+     * Specify a user-specific startup file to invoke if the application
+     * is run interactively.  Typically the startup file is "~/.apprc"
+     * where "app" is the name of the application.  If this line is deleted
+     * then no user-specific startup file will be run under any conditions.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_SetVar(interp, "tcl_rcFileName", "~/.wishrc", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkConfig.sh.in b/unix/tkConfig.sh.in
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..544d658
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkConfig.sh.in
@@ -0,0 +1,68 @@
+# tkConfig.sh --
+# 
+# This shell script (for sh) is generated automatically by Tk's
+# configure script.  It will create shell variables for most of
+# the configuration options discovered by the configure script.
+# This script is intended to be included by the configure scripts
+# for Tk extensions so that they don't have to figure this all
+# out for themselves.  This file does not duplicate information
+# already provided by tclConfig.sh, so you may need to use that
+# file in addition to this one.
+#
+# The information in this file is specific to a single platform.
+#
+# SCCS: @(#) tkConfig.sh.in 1.11 97/10/30 13:29:13
+
+# Tk's version number.
+TK_VERSION='@TK_VERSION@'
+TK_MAJOR_VERSION='@TK_MAJOR_VERSION@'
+TK_MINOR_VERSION='@TK_MINOR_VERSION@'
+TK_PATCH_LEVEL='@TK_PATCH_LEVEL@'
+
+# -D flags for use with the C compiler.
+TK_DEFS='@DEFS@'
+
+# Flag, 1: we built a shared lib, 0 we didn't
+TK_SHARED_BUILD=@TK_SHARED_BUILD@
+
+# The name of the Tk library (may be either a .a file or a shared library):
+TK_LIB_FILE=@TK_LIB_FILE@
+
+# Additional libraries to use when linking Tk.
+TK_LIBS='@XLIBSW@ @DL_LIBS@ @LIBS@ @MATH_LIBS@'
+
+# Top-level directory in which Tcl's platform-independent files are
+# installed.
+TK_PREFIX='@prefix@'
+
+# Top-level directory in which Tcl's platform-specific files (e.g.
+# executables) are installed.
+TK_EXEC_PREFIX='@exec_prefix@'
+
+# -I switch(es) to use to make all of the X11 include files accessible:
+TK_XINCLUDES='@XINCLUDES@'
+
+# Linker switch(es) to use to link with the X11 library archive.
+TK_XLIBSW='@XLIBSW@'
+
+# String to pass to linker to pick up the Tk library from its
+# build directory.
+TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC='@TK_BUILD_LIB_SPEC@'
+
+# String to pass to linker to pick up the Tk library from its
+# installed directory.
+TK_LIB_SPEC='@TK_LIB_SPEC@'
+
+# Location of the top-level source directory from which Tk was built.
+# This is the directory that contains a README file as well as
+# subdirectories such as generic, unix, etc.  If Tk was compiled in a
+# different place than the directory containing the source files, this
+# points to the location of the sources, not the location where Tk was
+# compiled.
+TK_SRC_DIR='@TK_SRC_DIR@'
+
+# Needed if you want to make a 'fat' shared library library
+# containing tk objects or link a different wish.
+TK_CC_SEARCH_FLAGS='@TK_CC_SEARCH_FLAGS@'
+TK_LD_SEARCH_FLAGS='@TK_LD_SEARCH_FLAGS@'
+
diff --git a/unix/tkUnix.c b/unix/tkUnix.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ca6fa07
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnix.c
@@ -0,0 +1,79 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnix.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains procedures that are UNIX/X-specific, and
+ *	will probably have to be written differently for Windows or
+ *	Macintosh platforms.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnix.c 1.5 97/01/07 11:41:39
+ */
+
+#include <tkInt.h>
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkGetServerInfo --
+ *
+ *	Given a window, this procedure returns information about
+ *	the window server for that window.  This procedure provides
+ *	the guts of the "winfo server" command.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkGetServerInfo(interp, tkwin)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* The server information is returned in
+				 * this interpreter's result. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window;  this selects a
+				 * particular display and server. */
+{
+    char buffer[50], buffer2[50];
+
+    sprintf(buffer, "X%dR%d ", ProtocolVersion(Tk_Display(tkwin)),
+	    ProtocolRevision(Tk_Display(tkwin)));
+    sprintf(buffer2, " %d", VendorRelease(Tk_Display(tkwin)));
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, buffer, ServerVendor(Tk_Display(tkwin)),
+	    buffer2, (char *) NULL);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkGetDefaultScreenName --
+ *
+ *	Returns the name of the screen that Tk should use during
+ *	initialization.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the argument or a string that should not be freed by
+ *	the caller.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+char *
+TkGetDefaultScreenName(interp, screenName)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interp used to find environment variables. */
+    char *screenName;		/* Screen name from command line, or NULL. */
+{
+    if ((screenName == NULL) || (screenName[0] == '\0')) {
+	screenName = Tcl_GetVar2(interp, "env", "DISPLAY", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    }
+    return screenName;
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnix3d.c b/unix/tkUnix3d.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..e7584ce
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnix3d.c
@@ -0,0 +1,448 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnix3d.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains the platform specific routines for
+ *	drawing 3d borders in the Motif style.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnix3d.c 1.3 96/11/20 14:24:38
+ */
+
+#include <tk3d.h>
+
+/*
+ * This structure is used to keep track of the extra colors used
+ * by Unix 3d borders.
+ */
+
+typedef struct {
+    TkBorder info;
+    GC solidGC;		/* Used to draw solid relief. */
+} UnixBorder;
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetBorder --
+ *
+ *	This function allocates a new TkBorder structure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated TkBorder.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkBorder *
+TkpGetBorder()
+{
+    UnixBorder *borderPtr = (UnixBorder *) ckalloc(sizeof(UnixBorder));
+    borderPtr->solidGC = None;
+    return (TkBorder *) borderPtr;
+}
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpFreeBorder --
+ *
+ *	This function frees any colors allocated by the platform
+ *	specific part of this module.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May deallocate some colors.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpFreeBorder(borderPtr)
+    TkBorder *borderPtr;
+{
+    UnixBorder *unixBorderPtr = (UnixBorder *) borderPtr;
+    Display *display = DisplayOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+
+    if (unixBorderPtr->solidGC != None) {
+	Tk_FreeGC(display, unixBorderPtr->solidGC);
+    }
+}
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_3DVerticalBevel --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws a vertical bevel along one side of
+ *	an object.  The bevel is always rectangular in shape:
+ *			|||
+ *			|||
+ *			|||
+ *			|||
+ *			|||
+ *			|||
+ *	An appropriate shadow color is chosen for the bevel based
+ *	on the leftBevel and relief arguments.  Normally this
+ *	procedure is called first, then Tk_3DHorizontalBevel is
+ *	called next to draw neat corners.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Graphics are drawn in drawable.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_3DVerticalBevel(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
+	leftBevel, relief)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
+    Drawable drawable;		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border to draw. */
+    int x, y, width, height;	/* Area of vertical bevel. */
+    int leftBevel;		/* Non-zero means this bevel forms the
+				 * left side of the object;  0 means it
+				 * forms the right side. */
+    int relief;			/* Kind of bevel to draw.  For example,
+				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED means interior of
+				 * object should appear higher than
+				 * exterior. */
+{
+    TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) border;
+    GC left, right;
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+
+    if ((borderPtr->lightGC == None) && (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT)) {
+	TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin);
+    }
+
+    if (relief == TK_RELIEF_RAISED) {
+	XFillRectangle(display, drawable, 
+		(leftBevel) ? borderPtr->lightGC : borderPtr->darkGC,
+		x, y, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
+    } else if (relief == TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN) {
+	XFillRectangle(display, drawable, 
+		(leftBevel) ? borderPtr->darkGC : borderPtr->lightGC,
+		x, y, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
+    } else if (relief == TK_RELIEF_RIDGE) {
+	int half;
+
+	left = borderPtr->lightGC;
+	right = borderPtr->darkGC;
+	ridgeGroove:
+	half = width/2;
+	if (!leftBevel && (width & 1)) {
+	    half++;
+	}
+	XFillRectangle(display, drawable, left, x, y, (unsigned) half,
+		(unsigned) height);
+	XFillRectangle(display, drawable, right, x+half, y,
+		(unsigned) (width-half), (unsigned) height);
+    } else if (relief == TK_RELIEF_GROOVE) {
+	left = borderPtr->darkGC;
+	right = borderPtr->lightGC;
+	goto ridgeGroove;
+    } else if (relief == TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
+	XFillRectangle(display, drawable, borderPtr->bgGC, x, y,
+		(unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
+    } else if (relief == TK_RELIEF_SOLID) {
+	UnixBorder *unixBorderPtr = (UnixBorder *) borderPtr;
+	if (unixBorderPtr->solidGC == None) {
+	    XGCValues gcValues;
+
+	    gcValues.foreground = BlackPixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+	    unixBorderPtr->solidGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+	}
+	XFillRectangle(display, drawable, unixBorderPtr->solidGC, x, y,
+		(unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_3DHorizontalBevel --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws a horizontal bevel along one side of
+ *	an object.  The bevel has mitered corners (depending on
+ *	leftIn and rightIn arguments).
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_3DHorizontalBevel(tkwin, drawable, border, x, y, width, height,
+	leftIn, rightIn, topBevel, relief)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which border was allocated. */
+    Drawable drawable;		/* X window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    Tk_3DBorder border;		/* Token for border to draw. */
+    int x, y, width, height;	/* Bounding box of area of bevel.  Height
+				 * gives width of border. */
+    int leftIn, rightIn;	/* Describes whether the left and right
+				 * edges of the bevel angle in or out as
+				 * they go down.  For example, if "leftIn"
+				 * is true, the left side of the bevel
+				 * looks like this:
+				 *	___________
+				 *	 __________
+				 *	  _________
+				 *	   ________
+				 */
+    int topBevel;		/* Non-zero means this bevel forms the
+				 * top side of the object;  0 means it
+				 * forms the bottom side. */
+    int relief;			/* Kind of bevel to draw.  For example,
+				 * TK_RELIEF_RAISED means interior of
+				 * object should appear higher than
+				 * exterior. */
+{
+    TkBorder *borderPtr = (TkBorder *) border;
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    int bottom, halfway, x1, x2, x1Delta, x2Delta;
+    UnixBorder *unixBorderPtr = (UnixBorder *) borderPtr;
+    GC topGC = None, bottomGC = None;
+				/* Initializations needed only to prevent
+				 * compiler warnings. */
+
+    if ((borderPtr->lightGC == None) && (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) &&
+	    (relief != TK_RELIEF_SOLID)) {
+	TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Compute a GC for the top half of the bevel and a GC for the
+     * bottom half (they're the same in many cases).
+     */
+
+    switch (relief) {
+	case TK_RELIEF_FLAT:
+	    topGC = bottomGC = borderPtr->bgGC;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_GROOVE:
+	    topGC = borderPtr->darkGC;
+	    bottomGC = borderPtr->lightGC;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_RAISED:
+	    topGC = bottomGC =
+		    (topBevel) ? borderPtr->lightGC : borderPtr->darkGC;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_RIDGE:
+	    topGC = borderPtr->lightGC;
+	    bottomGC = borderPtr->darkGC;
+	    break;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SOLID:
+	    if (unixBorderPtr->solidGC == None) {
+		XGCValues gcValues;
+
+		gcValues.foreground = BlackPixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+		unixBorderPtr->solidGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground,
+			&gcValues);
+	    }
+	    XFillRectangle(display, drawable, unixBorderPtr->solidGC, x, y,
+		(unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
+	    return;
+	case TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN:
+	    topGC = bottomGC =
+		    (topBevel) ? borderPtr->darkGC : borderPtr->lightGC;
+	    break;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Compute various other geometry-related stuff.
+     */
+
+    x1 = x;
+    if (!leftIn) {
+	x1 += height;
+    }
+    x2 = x+width;
+    if (!rightIn) {
+	x2 -= height;
+    }
+    x1Delta = (leftIn) ? 1 : -1;
+    x2Delta = (rightIn) ? -1 : 1;
+    halfway = y + height/2;
+    if (!topBevel && (height & 1)) {
+	halfway++;
+    }
+    bottom = y + height;
+
+    /*
+     * Draw one line for each y-coordinate covered by the bevel.
+     */
+
+    for ( ; y < bottom; y++) {
+	/*
+	 * In some weird cases (such as large border widths for skinny
+	 * rectangles) x1 can be >= x2.  Don't draw the lines
+	 * in these cases.
+	 */
+
+	if (x1 < x2) {
+	    XFillRectangle(display, drawable,
+		(y < halfway) ? topGC : bottomGC, x1, y,
+		(unsigned) (x2-x1), (unsigned) 1);
+	}
+	x1 += x1Delta;
+	x2 += x2Delta;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetShadows --
+ *
+ *	This procedure computes the shadow colors for a 3-D border
+ *	and fills in the corresponding fields of the Border structure.
+ *	It's called lazily, so that the colors aren't allocated until
+ *	something is actually drawn with them.  That way, if a border
+ *	is only used for flat backgrounds the shadow colors will
+ *	never be allocated.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The lightGC and darkGC fields in borderPtr get filled in,
+ *	if they weren't already.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpGetShadows(borderPtr, tkwin)
+    TkBorder *borderPtr;		/* Information about border. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window where border will be used for
+				 * drawing. */
+{
+    XColor lightColor, darkColor;
+    int stressed, tmp1, tmp2;
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+
+    if (borderPtr->lightGC != None) {
+	return;
+    }
+    stressed = TkpCmapStressed(tkwin, borderPtr->colormap);
+
+    /*
+     * First, handle the case of a color display with lots of colors.
+     * The shadow colors get computed using whichever formula results
+     * in the greatest change in color:
+     * 1. Lighter shadow is half-way to white, darker shadow is half
+     *    way to dark.
+     * 2. Lighter shadow is 40% brighter than background, darker shadow
+     *    is 40% darker than background.
+     */
+
+    if (!stressed && (Tk_Depth(tkwin) >= 6)) {
+	/*
+	 * This is a color display with lots of colors.  For the dark
+	 * shadow, cut 40% from each of the background color components.
+	 * For the light shadow, boost each component by 40% or half-way
+	 * to white, whichever is greater (the first approach works
+	 * better for unsaturated colors, the second for saturated ones).
+	 */
+
+	darkColor.red = (60 * (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->red)/100;
+	darkColor.green = (60 * (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->green)/100;
+	darkColor.blue = (60 * (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->blue)/100;
+	borderPtr->darkColorPtr = Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin, &darkColor);
+	gcValues.foreground = borderPtr->darkColorPtr->pixel;
+	borderPtr->darkGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+
+	/*
+	 * Compute the colors using integers, not using lightColor.red
+	 * etc.: these are shorts and may have problems with integer
+	 * overflow.
+	 */
+
+	tmp1 = (14 * (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->red)/10;
+	if (tmp1 > MAX_INTENSITY) {
+	    tmp1 = MAX_INTENSITY;
+	}
+	tmp2 = (MAX_INTENSITY + (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->red)/2;
+	lightColor.red = (tmp1 > tmp2) ? tmp1 : tmp2;
+	tmp1 = (14 * (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->green)/10;
+	if (tmp1 > MAX_INTENSITY) {
+	    tmp1 = MAX_INTENSITY;
+	}
+	tmp2 = (MAX_INTENSITY + (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->green)/2;
+	lightColor.green = (tmp1 > tmp2) ? tmp1 : tmp2;
+	tmp1 = (14 * (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->blue)/10;
+	if (tmp1 > MAX_INTENSITY) {
+	    tmp1 = MAX_INTENSITY;
+	}
+	tmp2 = (MAX_INTENSITY + (int) borderPtr->bgColorPtr->blue)/2;
+	lightColor.blue = (tmp1 > tmp2) ? tmp1 : tmp2;
+	borderPtr->lightColorPtr = Tk_GetColorByValue(tkwin, &lightColor);
+	gcValues.foreground = borderPtr->lightColorPtr->pixel;
+	borderPtr->lightGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (borderPtr->shadow == None) {
+	borderPtr->shadow = Tk_GetBitmap((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, tkwin,
+		Tk_GetUid("gray50"));
+	if (borderPtr->shadow == None) {
+	    panic("TkpGetShadows couldn't allocate bitmap for border");
+	}
+    }
+    if (borderPtr->visual->map_entries > 2) {
+	/*
+	 * This isn't a monochrome display, but the colormap either
+	 * ran out of entries or didn't have very many to begin with.
+	 * Generate the light shadows with a white stipple and the
+	 * dark shadows with a black stipple.
+	 */
+
+	gcValues.foreground = borderPtr->bgColorPtr->pixel;
+	gcValues.background = BlackPixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+	gcValues.stipple = borderPtr->shadow;
+	gcValues.fill_style = FillOpaqueStippled;
+	borderPtr->darkGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin,
+		GCForeground|GCBackground|GCStipple|GCFillStyle, &gcValues);
+	gcValues.background = WhitePixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+	borderPtr->lightGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin,
+		GCForeground|GCBackground|GCStipple|GCFillStyle, &gcValues);
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * This is just a measly monochrome display, hardly even worth its
+     * existence on this earth.  Make one shadow a 50% stipple and the
+     * other the opposite of the background.
+     */
+
+    gcValues.foreground = WhitePixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+    gcValues.background = BlackPixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+    gcValues.stipple = borderPtr->shadow;
+    gcValues.fill_style = FillOpaqueStippled;
+    borderPtr->lightGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin,
+	    GCForeground|GCBackground|GCStipple|GCFillStyle, &gcValues);
+    if (borderPtr->bgColorPtr->pixel
+	    == WhitePixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen)) {
+	gcValues.foreground = BlackPixelOfScreen(borderPtr->screen);
+	borderPtr->darkGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+    } else {
+	borderPtr->darkGC = borderPtr->lightGC;
+	borderPtr->lightGC = Tk_GetGC(tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+    }
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixButton.c b/unix/tkUnixButton.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8c74dcb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixButton.c
@@ -0,0 +1,478 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixButton.c --
+ *
+ *	This file implements the Unix specific portion of the button
+ *	widgets.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixButton.c 1.4 97/06/06 11:21:40
+ */
+
+#include "tkButton.h"
+
+/*
+ * Declaration of Unix specific button structure.
+ */
+
+typedef struct UnixButton {
+    TkButton info;		/* Generic button info. */
+} UnixButton;
+
+/*
+ * The class procedure table for the button widgets.
+ */
+
+TkClassProcs tkpButtonProcs = { 
+    NULL,			/* createProc. */
+    TkButtonWorldChanged,	/* geometryProc. */
+    NULL			/* modalProc. */
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpCreateButton --
+ *
+ *	Allocate a new TkButton structure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated TkButton structure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Registers an event handler for the widget.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkButton *
+TkpCreateButton(tkwin)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+{
+    UnixButton *butPtr = (UnixButton *)ckalloc(sizeof(UnixButton));
+    return (TkButton *) butPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDisplayButton --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to display a button widget.  It is
+ *	normally invoked as an idle handler.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the button in its
+ *	current mode.  The REDRAW_PENDING flag is cleared.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDisplayButton(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about widget. */
+{
+    register TkButton *butPtr = (TkButton *) clientData;
+    GC gc;
+    Tk_3DBorder border;
+    Pixmap pixmap;
+    int x = 0;			/* Initialization only needed to stop
+				 * compiler warning. */
+    int y, relief;
+    register Tk_Window tkwin = butPtr->tkwin;
+    int width, height;
+    int offset;			/* 0 means this is a label widget.  1 means
+				 * it is a flavor of button, so we offset
+				 * the text to make the button appear to
+				 * move up and down as the relief changes. */
+
+    butPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
+    if ((butPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    border = butPtr->normalBorder;
+    if ((butPtr->state == tkDisabledUid) && (butPtr->disabledFg != NULL)) {
+	gc = butPtr->disabledGC;
+    } else if ((butPtr->state == tkActiveUid)
+	    && !Tk_StrictMotif(butPtr->tkwin)) {
+	gc = butPtr->activeTextGC;
+	border = butPtr->activeBorder;
+    } else {
+	gc = butPtr->normalTextGC;
+    }
+    if ((butPtr->flags & SELECTED) && (butPtr->state != tkActiveUid)
+	    && (butPtr->selectBorder != NULL) && !butPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	border = butPtr->selectBorder;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Override the relief specified for the button if this is a
+     * checkbutton or radiobutton and there's no indicator.
+     */
+
+    relief = butPtr->relief;
+    if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && !butPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	relief = (butPtr->flags & SELECTED) ? TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN
+		: TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    }
+
+    offset = (butPtr->type == TYPE_BUTTON) && !Tk_StrictMotif(butPtr->tkwin);
+
+    /*
+     * In order to avoid screen flashes, this procedure redraws
+     * the button in a pixmap, then copies the pixmap to the
+     * screen in a single operation.  This means that there's no
+     * point in time where the on-sreen image has been cleared.
+     */
+
+    pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(butPtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+	    Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin));
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin),
+	    Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+
+    /*
+     * Display image or bitmap or text for button.
+     */
+
+    if (butPtr->image != None) {
+	Tk_SizeOfImage(butPtr->image, &width, &height);
+
+	imageOrBitmap:
+	TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, 0, 0,
+		butPtr->indicatorSpace + width, height, &x, &y);
+	x += butPtr->indicatorSpace;
+
+	x += offset;
+	y += offset;
+	if (relief == TK_RELIEF_RAISED) {
+	    x -= offset;
+	    y -= offset;
+	} else if (relief == TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN) {
+	    x += offset;
+	    y += offset;
+	}
+	if (butPtr->image != NULL) {
+	    if ((butPtr->selectImage != NULL) && (butPtr->flags & SELECTED)) {
+		Tk_RedrawImage(butPtr->selectImage, 0, 0, width, height, pixmap,
+			x, y);
+	    } else {
+		Tk_RedrawImage(butPtr->image, 0, 0, width, height, pixmap,
+			x, y);
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, x, y);
+	    XCopyPlane(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, pixmap, gc, 0, 0,
+		    (unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height, x, y, 1);
+	    XSetClipOrigin(butPtr->display, gc, 0, 0);
+	}
+	y += height/2;
+    } else if (butPtr->bitmap != None) {
+	Tk_SizeOfBitmap(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, &width, &height);
+	goto imageOrBitmap;
+    } else {
+	TkComputeAnchor(butPtr->anchor, tkwin, butPtr->padX, butPtr->padY,
+		butPtr->indicatorSpace + butPtr->textWidth, butPtr->textHeight,
+		&x, &y);
+
+	x += butPtr->indicatorSpace;
+
+	x += offset;
+	y += offset;
+	if (relief == TK_RELIEF_RAISED) {
+	    x -= offset;
+	    y -= offset;
+	} else if (relief == TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN) {
+	    x += offset;
+	    y += offset;
+	}
+	Tk_DrawTextLayout(butPtr->display, pixmap, gc, butPtr->textLayout,
+		x, y, 0, -1);
+	Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(butPtr->display, pixmap, gc,
+		butPtr->textLayout, x, y, butPtr->underline);
+	y += butPtr->textHeight/2;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Draw the indicator for check buttons and radio buttons.  At this
+     * point x and y refer to the top-left corner of the text or image
+     * or bitmap.
+     */
+
+    if ((butPtr->type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && butPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	int dim;
+
+	dim = butPtr->indicatorDiameter;
+	x -= butPtr->indicatorSpace;
+	y -= dim/2;
+	if (dim > 2*butPtr->borderWidth) {
+	    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, x, y, dim, dim,
+		    butPtr->borderWidth, 
+		    (butPtr->flags & SELECTED) ? TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN :
+		    TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+	    x += butPtr->borderWidth;
+	    y += butPtr->borderWidth;
+	    dim -= 2*butPtr->borderWidth;
+	    if (butPtr->flags & SELECTED) {
+		GC gc;
+
+		gc = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin,(butPtr->selectBorder != NULL)
+			? butPtr->selectBorder : butPtr->normalBorder,
+			TK_3D_FLAT_GC);
+		XFillRectangle(butPtr->display, pixmap, gc, x, y,
+			(unsigned int) dim, (unsigned int) dim);
+	    } else {
+		Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, butPtr->normalBorder, x, y,
+			dim, dim, butPtr->borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+	    }
+	}
+    } else if ((butPtr->type == TYPE_RADIO_BUTTON) && butPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	XPoint points[4];
+	int radius;
+
+	radius = butPtr->indicatorDiameter/2;
+	points[0].x = x - butPtr->indicatorSpace;
+	points[0].y = y;
+	points[1].x = points[0].x + radius;
+	points[1].y = points[0].y + radius;
+	points[2].x = points[1].x + radius;
+	points[2].y = points[0].y;
+	points[3].x = points[1].x;
+	points[3].y = points[0].y - radius;
+	if (butPtr->flags & SELECTED) {
+	    GC gc;
+
+	    gc = Tk_3DBorderGC(tkwin, (butPtr->selectBorder != NULL)
+		    ? butPtr->selectBorder : butPtr->normalBorder,
+		    TK_3D_FLAT_GC);
+	    XFillPolygon(butPtr->display, pixmap, gc, points, 4, Convex,
+		    CoordModeOrigin);
+	} else {
+	    Tk_Fill3DPolygon(tkwin, pixmap, butPtr->normalBorder, points,
+		    4, butPtr->borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+	}
+	Tk_Draw3DPolygon(tkwin, pixmap, border, points, 4, butPtr->borderWidth,
+		(butPtr->flags & SELECTED) ? TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN :
+		TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If the button is disabled with a stipple rather than a special
+     * foreground color, generate the stippled effect.  If the widget
+     * is selected and we use a different background color when selected,
+     * must temporarily modify the GC.
+     */
+
+    if ((butPtr->state == tkDisabledUid)
+	    && ((butPtr->disabledFg == NULL) || (butPtr->image != NULL))) {
+	if ((butPtr->flags & SELECTED) && !butPtr->indicatorOn
+		&& (butPtr->selectBorder != NULL)) {
+	    XSetForeground(butPtr->display, butPtr->disabledGC,
+		    Tk_3DBorderColor(butPtr->selectBorder)->pixel);
+	}
+	XFillRectangle(butPtr->display, pixmap, butPtr->disabledGC,
+		butPtr->inset, butPtr->inset,
+		(unsigned) (Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*butPtr->inset),
+		(unsigned) (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*butPtr->inset));
+	if ((butPtr->flags & SELECTED) && !butPtr->indicatorOn
+		&& (butPtr->selectBorder != NULL)) {
+	    XSetForeground(butPtr->display, butPtr->disabledGC,
+		    Tk_3DBorderColor(butPtr->normalBorder)->pixel);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Draw the border and traversal highlight last.  This way, if the
+     * button's contents overflow they'll be covered up by the border.
+     * This code is complicated by the possible combinations of focus
+     * highlight and default rings.  We draw the focus and highlight rings
+     * using the highlight border and highlight foreground color.
+     */
+
+    if (relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
+	int inset = butPtr->highlightWidth;
+	if (butPtr->defaultState == tkActiveUid) {
+	    /*
+	     * Draw the default ring with 2 pixels of space between the
+	     * default ring and the button and the default ring and the
+	     * focus ring.  Note that we need to explicitly draw the space
+	     * in the highlightBorder color to ensure that we overwrite any
+	     * overflow text and/or a different button background color.
+	     */
+
+	    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, butPtr->highlightBorder, inset,
+		    inset, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*inset,
+		    Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*inset, 2, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+	    inset += 2;
+	    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, butPtr->highlightBorder, inset,
+		    inset, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*inset,
+		    Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*inset, 1, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+	    inset++;
+	    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, butPtr->highlightBorder, inset,
+		    inset, Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*inset,
+		    Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*inset, 2, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+
+	    inset += 2;
+	} else if (butPtr->defaultState == tkNormalUid) {
+	    /*
+	     * Leave room for the default ring and write over any text or
+	     * background color.
+	     */
+
+	    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, butPtr->highlightBorder, 0,
+		    0, Tk_Width(tkwin),
+		    Tk_Height(tkwin), 5, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+	    inset += 5;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Draw the button border.
+	 */
+
+	Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, inset, inset,
+		Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*inset, Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*inset,
+		butPtr->borderWidth, relief);
+    }
+    if (butPtr->highlightWidth != 0) {
+	GC gc;
+
+	if (butPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
+	    gc = Tk_GCForColor(butPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap);
+	} else {
+	    gc = Tk_GCForColor(Tk_3DBorderColor(butPtr->highlightBorder),
+		    pixmap);
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Make sure the focus ring shrink-wraps the actual button, not the
+	 * padding space left for a default ring.
+	 */
+
+	if (butPtr->defaultState == tkNormalUid) {
+	    TkDrawInsetFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, butPtr->highlightWidth,
+		    pixmap, 5);
+	} else {
+	    Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, butPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen,
+     * then delete the pixmap.
+     */
+
+    XCopyArea(butPtr->display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+	    butPtr->copyGC, 0, 0, (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin),
+	    (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, 0);
+    Tk_FreePixmap(butPtr->display, pixmap);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpComputeButtonGeometry --
+ *
+ *	After changes in a button's text or bitmap, this procedure
+ *	recomputes the button's geometry and passes this information
+ *	along to the geometry manager for the window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The button's window may change size.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpComputeButtonGeometry(butPtr)
+    register TkButton *butPtr;	/* Button whose geometry may have changed. */
+{
+    int width, height, avgWidth;
+    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+
+    if (butPtr->highlightWidth < 0) {
+	butPtr->highlightWidth = 0;
+    }
+    butPtr->inset = butPtr->highlightWidth + butPtr->borderWidth;
+
+    /*
+     * Leave room for the default ring if needed.
+     */
+
+    if (butPtr->defaultState != tkDisabledUid) {
+	butPtr->inset += 5;
+    }
+    butPtr->indicatorSpace = 0;
+    if (butPtr->image != NULL) {
+	Tk_SizeOfImage(butPtr->image, &width, &height);
+	imageOrBitmap:
+	if (butPtr->width > 0) {
+	    width = butPtr->width;
+	}
+	if (butPtr->height > 0) {
+	    height = butPtr->height;
+	}
+	if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && butPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	    butPtr->indicatorSpace = height;
+	    if (butPtr->type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) {
+		butPtr->indicatorDiameter = (65*height)/100;
+	    } else {
+		butPtr->indicatorDiameter = (75*height)/100;
+	    }
+	}
+    } else if (butPtr->bitmap != None) {
+	Tk_SizeOfBitmap(butPtr->display, butPtr->bitmap, &width, &height);
+	goto imageOrBitmap;
+    } else {
+	Tk_FreeTextLayout(butPtr->textLayout);
+	butPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(butPtr->tkfont,
+		butPtr->text, -1, butPtr->wrapLength, butPtr->justify, 0,
+		&butPtr->textWidth, &butPtr->textHeight);
+
+	width = butPtr->textWidth;
+	height = butPtr->textHeight;
+	avgWidth = Tk_TextWidth(butPtr->tkfont, "0", 1);
+	Tk_GetFontMetrics(butPtr->tkfont, &fm);
+
+	if (butPtr->width > 0) {
+	    width = butPtr->width * avgWidth;
+	}
+	if (butPtr->height > 0) {
+	    height = butPtr->height * fm.linespace;
+	}
+	if ((butPtr->type >= TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) && butPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	    butPtr->indicatorDiameter = fm.linespace;
+	    if (butPtr->type == TYPE_CHECK_BUTTON) {
+		butPtr->indicatorDiameter = (80*butPtr->indicatorDiameter)/100;
+	    }
+	    butPtr->indicatorSpace = butPtr->indicatorDiameter + avgWidth;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * When issuing the geometry request, add extra space for the indicator,
+     * if any, and for the border and padding, plus two extra pixels so the
+     * display can be offset by 1 pixel in either direction for the raised
+     * or lowered effect.
+     */
+
+    if ((butPtr->image == NULL) && (butPtr->bitmap == None)) {
+	width += 2*butPtr->padX;
+	height += 2*butPtr->padY;
+    }
+    if ((butPtr->type == TYPE_BUTTON) && !Tk_StrictMotif(butPtr->tkwin)) {
+	width += 2;
+	height += 2;
+    }
+    Tk_GeometryRequest(butPtr->tkwin, (int) (width + butPtr->indicatorSpace
+	    + 2*butPtr->inset), (int) (height + 2*butPtr->inset));
+    Tk_SetInternalBorder(butPtr->tkwin, butPtr->inset);
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixColor.c b/unix/tkUnixColor.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d3a5a27
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixColor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,424 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixColor.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains the platform specific color routines
+ *	needed for X support.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixColor.c 1.1 96/10/22 16:52:31
+ */
+
+#include <tkColor.h>
+
+/*
+ * If a colormap fills up, attempts to allocate new colors from that
+ * colormap will fail.  When that happens, we'll just choose the
+ * closest color from those that are available in the colormap.
+ * One of the following structures will be created for each "stressed"
+ * colormap to keep track of the colors that are available in the
+ * colormap (otherwise we would have to re-query from the server on
+ * each allocation, which would be very slow).  These entries are
+ * flushed after a few seconds, since other clients may release or
+ * reallocate colors over time.
+ */
+
+struct TkStressedCmap {
+    Colormap colormap;			/* X's token for the colormap. */
+    int numColors;			/* Number of entries currently active
+					 * at *colorPtr. */
+    XColor *colorPtr;			/* Pointer to malloc'ed array of all
+					 * colors that seem to be available in
+					 * the colormap.  Some may not actually
+					 * be available, e.g. because they are
+					 * read-write for another client;  when
+					 * we find this out, we remove them
+					 * from the array. */
+    struct TkStressedCmap *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all stressed
+					 * colormaps for the display. */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ */
+
+static void		DeleteStressedCmap _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
+			    Colormap colormap));
+static void		FindClosestColor _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+			    XColor *desiredColorPtr, XColor *actualColorPtr));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpFreeColor --
+ *
+ *	Release the specified color back to the system.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Invalidates the colormap cache for the colormap associated with
+ *	the given color.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpFreeColor(tkColPtr)
+    TkColor *tkColPtr;		/* Color to be released.  Must have been
+				 * allocated by TkpGetColor or
+				 * TkpGetColorByValue. */
+{
+    Visual *visual;
+    Screen *screen = tkColPtr->screen;
+
+    /*
+     * Careful!  Don't free black or white, since this will
+     * make some servers very unhappy.  Also, there is a bug in
+     * some servers (such Sun's X11/NeWS server) where reference
+     * counting is performed incorrectly, so that if a color is
+     * allocated twice in different places and then freed twice,
+     * the second free generates an error (this bug existed as of
+     * 10/1/92).  To get around this problem, ignore errors that
+     * occur during the free operation.
+     */
+
+    visual = tkColPtr->visual;
+    if ((visual->class != StaticGray) && (visual->class != StaticColor)
+	    && (tkColPtr->color.pixel != BlackPixelOfScreen(screen))
+	    && (tkColPtr->color.pixel != WhitePixelOfScreen(screen))) {
+	Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
+
+	handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(DisplayOfScreen(screen),
+		-1, -1, -1, (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	XFreeColors(DisplayOfScreen(screen), tkColPtr->colormap,
+		&tkColPtr->color.pixel, 1, 0L);
+	Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+    }
+    DeleteStressedCmap(DisplayOfScreen(screen), tkColPtr->colormap);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetColor --
+ *
+ *	Allocate a new TkColor for the color with the given name.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated TkColor, or NULL on failure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May invalidate the colormap cache associated with tkwin upon
+ *	allocating a new colormap entry.  Allocates a new TkColor
+ *	structure.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkColor *
+TkpGetColor(tkwin, name)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which color will be used. */
+    Tk_Uid name;		/* Name of color to allocated (in form
+				 * suitable for passing to XParseColor). */
+{
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    Colormap colormap = Tk_Colormap(tkwin);
+    XColor color;
+    TkColor *tkColPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Map from the name to a pixel value.  Call XAllocNamedColor rather than
+     * XParseColor for non-# names: this saves a server round-trip for those
+     * names.
+     */
+
+    if (*name != '#') {
+	XColor screen;
+
+	if (XAllocNamedColor(display, colormap, name, &screen,
+		&color) != 0) {
+	    DeleteStressedCmap(display, colormap);
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * Couldn't allocate the color.  Try translating the name to
+	     * a color value, to see whether the problem is a bad color
+	     * name or a full colormap.  If the colormap is full, then
+	     * pick an approximation to the desired color.
+	     */
+
+	    if (XLookupColor(display, colormap, name, &color,
+		    &screen) == 0) {
+		return (TkColor *) NULL;
+	    }
+	    FindClosestColor(tkwin, &screen, &color);
+	}
+    } else {
+	if (XParseColor(display, colormap, name, &color) == 0) {
+	    return (TkColor *) NULL;
+	}
+	if (XAllocColor(display, colormap, &color) != 0) {
+	    DeleteStressedCmap(display, colormap);
+	} else {
+	    FindClosestColor(tkwin, &color, &color);
+	}
+    }
+
+    tkColPtr = (TkColor *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkColor));
+    tkColPtr->color = color;
+
+    return tkColPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetColorByValue --
+ *
+ *	Given a desired set of red-green-blue intensities for a color,
+ *	locate a pixel value to use to draw that color in a given
+ *	window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is a pointer to an TkColor structure that
+ *	indicates the closest red, blue, and green intensities available
+ *	to those specified in colorPtr, and also specifies a pixel
+ *	value to use to draw in that color.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	May invalidate the colormap cache for the specified window.
+ *	Allocates a new TkColor structure.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkColor *
+TkpGetColorByValue(tkwin, colorPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which color will be used. */
+    XColor *colorPtr;		/* Red, green, and blue fields indicate
+				 * desired color. */
+{
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    Colormap colormap = Tk_Colormap(tkwin);
+    TkColor *tkColPtr = (TkColor *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkColor));
+
+    tkColPtr->color.red = colorPtr->red;
+    tkColPtr->color.green = colorPtr->green;
+    tkColPtr->color.blue = colorPtr->blue;
+    if (XAllocColor(display, colormap, &tkColPtr->color) != 0) {
+	DeleteStressedCmap(display, colormap);
+    } else {
+	FindClosestColor(tkwin, &tkColPtr->color, &tkColPtr->color);
+    }
+
+    return tkColPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * FindClosestColor --
+ *
+ *	When Tk can't allocate a color because a colormap has filled
+ *	up, this procedure is called to find and allocate the closest
+ *	available color in the colormap.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	There is no return value, but *actualColorPtr is filled in
+ *	with information about the closest available color in tkwin's
+ *	colormap.  This color has been allocated via X, so it must
+ *	be released by the caller when the caller is done with it.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A color is allocated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+FindClosestColor(tkwin, desiredColorPtr, actualColorPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Window where color will be used. */
+    XColor *desiredColorPtr;		/* RGB values of color that was
+					 * wanted (but unavailable). */
+    XColor *actualColorPtr;		/* Structure to fill in with RGB and
+					 * pixel for closest available
+					 * color. */
+{
+    TkStressedCmap *stressPtr;
+    double tmp, distance, closestDistance;
+    int i, closest, numFound;
+    XColor *colorPtr;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
+    Colormap colormap = Tk_Colormap(tkwin);
+    XVisualInfo template, *visInfoPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Find the TkStressedCmap structure for this colormap, or create
+     * a new one if needed.
+     */
+
+    for (stressPtr = dispPtr->stressPtr; ; stressPtr = stressPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (stressPtr == NULL) {
+	    stressPtr = (TkStressedCmap *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkStressedCmap));
+	    stressPtr->colormap = colormap;
+	    template.visualid = XVisualIDFromVisual(Tk_Visual(tkwin));
+	    visInfoPtr = XGetVisualInfo(Tk_Display(tkwin),
+		    VisualIDMask, &template, &numFound);
+	    if (numFound < 1) {
+		panic("FindClosestColor couldn't lookup visual");
+	    }
+	    stressPtr->numColors = visInfoPtr->colormap_size;
+	    XFree((char *) visInfoPtr);
+	    stressPtr->colorPtr = (XColor *) ckalloc((unsigned)
+		    (stressPtr->numColors * sizeof(XColor)));
+	    for (i = 0; i  < stressPtr->numColors; i++) {
+		stressPtr->colorPtr[i].pixel = (unsigned long) i;
+	    }
+	    XQueryColors(dispPtr->display, colormap, stressPtr->colorPtr,
+		    stressPtr->numColors);
+	    stressPtr->nextPtr = dispPtr->stressPtr;
+	    dispPtr->stressPtr = stressPtr;
+	    break;
+	}
+	if (stressPtr->colormap == colormap) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Find the color that best approximates the desired one, then
+     * try to allocate that color.  If that fails, it must mean that
+     * the color was read-write (so we can't use it, since it's owner
+     * might change it) or else it was already freed.  Try again,
+     * over and over again, until something succeeds.
+     */
+
+    while (1)  {
+	if (stressPtr->numColors == 0) {
+	    panic("FindClosestColor ran out of colors");
+	}
+	closestDistance = 1e30;
+	closest = 0;
+	for (colorPtr = stressPtr->colorPtr, i = 0; i < stressPtr->numColors;
+		colorPtr++, i++) {
+	    /*
+	     * Use Euclidean distance in RGB space, weighted by Y (of YIQ)
+	     * as the objective function;  this accounts for differences
+	     * in the color sensitivity of the eye.
+	     */
+    
+	    tmp = .30*(((int) desiredColorPtr->red) - (int) colorPtr->red);
+	    distance = tmp*tmp;
+	    tmp = .61*(((int) desiredColorPtr->green) - (int) colorPtr->green);
+	    distance += tmp*tmp;
+	    tmp = .11*(((int) desiredColorPtr->blue) - (int) colorPtr->blue);
+	    distance += tmp*tmp;
+	    if (distance < closestDistance) {
+		closest = i;
+		closestDistance = distance;
+	    }
+	}
+	if (XAllocColor(dispPtr->display, colormap,
+		&stressPtr->colorPtr[closest]) != 0) {
+	    *actualColorPtr = stressPtr->colorPtr[closest];
+	    return;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Couldn't allocate the color.  Remove it from the table and
+	 * go back to look for the next best color.
+	 */
+
+	stressPtr->colorPtr[closest] =
+		stressPtr->colorPtr[stressPtr->numColors-1];
+	stressPtr->numColors -= 1;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DeleteStressedCmap --
+ *
+ *	This procedure releases the information cached for "colormap"
+ *	so that it will be refetched from the X server the next time
+ *	it is needed.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The TkStressedCmap structure for colormap is deleted;  the
+ *	colormap is no longer considered to be "stressed".
+ *
+ * Note:
+ *	This procedure is invoked whenever a color in a colormap is
+ *	freed, and whenever a color allocation in a colormap succeeds.
+ *	This guarantees that TkStressedCmap structures are always
+ *	deleted before the corresponding Colormap is freed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DeleteStressedCmap(display, colormap)
+    Display *display;		/* Xlib's handle for the display
+				 * containing the colormap. */
+    Colormap colormap;		/* Colormap to flush. */
+{
+    TkStressedCmap *prevPtr, *stressPtr;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
+
+    for (prevPtr = NULL, stressPtr = dispPtr->stressPtr; stressPtr != NULL;
+	    prevPtr = stressPtr, stressPtr = stressPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (stressPtr->colormap == colormap) {
+	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+		dispPtr->stressPtr = stressPtr->nextPtr;
+	    } else {
+		prevPtr->nextPtr = stressPtr->nextPtr;
+	    }
+	    ckfree((char *) stressPtr->colorPtr);
+	    ckfree((char *) stressPtr);
+	    return;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpCmapStressed --
+ *
+ *	Check to see whether a given colormap is known to be out
+ *	of entries.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	1 is returned if "colormap" is stressed (i.e. it has run out
+ *	of entries recently), 0 otherwise.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpCmapStressed(tkwin, colormap)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that identifies the display
+				 * containing the colormap. */
+    Colormap colormap;		/* Colormap to check for stress. */
+{
+    TkStressedCmap *stressPtr;
+
+    for (stressPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr->stressPtr;
+	    stressPtr != NULL; stressPtr = stressPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (stressPtr->colormap == colormap) {
+	    return 1;
+	}
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixCursor.c b/unix/tkUnixCursor.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..da75ac6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixCursor.c
@@ -0,0 +1,407 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixCursor.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains X specific cursor manipulation routines.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixCursor.c 1.4 96/10/08 09:33:08
+ */
+
+#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * The following data structure is a superset of the TkCursor structure
+ * defined in tkCursor.c.  Each system specific cursor module will define
+ * a different cursor structure.  All of these structures must have the
+ * same header consisting of the fields in TkCursor.
+ */
+
+
+
+typedef struct {
+    TkCursor info;		/* Generic cursor info used by tkCursor.c */
+    Display *display;		/* Display for which cursor is valid. */
+} TkUnixCursor;
+
+/*
+ * The table below is used to map from the name of a cursor to its
+ * index in the official cursor font:
+ */
+
+static struct CursorName {
+    char		*name;
+    unsigned int	shape;
+} cursorNames[] = {
+    {"X_cursor",		XC_X_cursor},
+    {"arrow",			XC_arrow},
+    {"based_arrow_down",	XC_based_arrow_down},
+    {"based_arrow_up",		XC_based_arrow_up},
+    {"boat",			XC_boat},
+    {"bogosity",		XC_bogosity},
+    {"bottom_left_corner",	XC_bottom_left_corner},
+    {"bottom_right_corner",	XC_bottom_right_corner},
+    {"bottom_side",		XC_bottom_side},
+    {"bottom_tee",		XC_bottom_tee},
+    {"box_spiral",		XC_box_spiral},
+    {"center_ptr",		XC_center_ptr},
+    {"circle",			XC_circle},
+    {"clock",			XC_clock},
+    {"coffee_mug",		XC_coffee_mug},
+    {"cross",			XC_cross},
+    {"cross_reverse",		XC_cross_reverse},
+    {"crosshair",		XC_crosshair},
+    {"diamond_cross",		XC_diamond_cross},
+    {"dot",			XC_dot},
+    {"dotbox",			XC_dotbox},
+    {"double_arrow",		XC_double_arrow},
+    {"draft_large",		XC_draft_large},
+    {"draft_small",		XC_draft_small},
+    {"draped_box",		XC_draped_box},
+    {"exchange",		XC_exchange},
+    {"fleur",			XC_fleur},
+    {"gobbler",			XC_gobbler},
+    {"gumby",			XC_gumby},
+    {"hand1",			XC_hand1},
+    {"hand2",			XC_hand2},
+    {"heart",			XC_heart},
+    {"icon",			XC_icon},
+    {"iron_cross",		XC_iron_cross},
+    {"left_ptr",		XC_left_ptr},
+    {"left_side",		XC_left_side},
+    {"left_tee",		XC_left_tee},
+    {"leftbutton",		XC_leftbutton},
+    {"ll_angle",		XC_ll_angle},
+    {"lr_angle",		XC_lr_angle},
+    {"man",			XC_man},
+    {"middlebutton",		XC_middlebutton},
+    {"mouse",			XC_mouse},
+    {"pencil",			XC_pencil},
+    {"pirate",			XC_pirate},
+    {"plus",			XC_plus},
+    {"question_arrow",		XC_question_arrow},
+    {"right_ptr",		XC_right_ptr},
+    {"right_side",		XC_right_side},
+    {"right_tee",		XC_right_tee},
+    {"rightbutton",		XC_rightbutton},
+    {"rtl_logo",		XC_rtl_logo},
+    {"sailboat",		XC_sailboat},
+    {"sb_down_arrow",		XC_sb_down_arrow},
+    {"sb_h_double_arrow",	XC_sb_h_double_arrow},
+    {"sb_left_arrow",		XC_sb_left_arrow},
+    {"sb_right_arrow",		XC_sb_right_arrow},
+    {"sb_up_arrow",		XC_sb_up_arrow},
+    {"sb_v_double_arrow",	XC_sb_v_double_arrow},
+    {"shuttle",			XC_shuttle},
+    {"sizing",			XC_sizing},
+    {"spider",			XC_spider},
+    {"spraycan",		XC_spraycan},
+    {"star",			XC_star},
+    {"target",			XC_target},
+    {"tcross",			XC_tcross},
+    {"top_left_arrow",		XC_top_left_arrow},
+    {"top_left_corner",		XC_top_left_corner},
+    {"top_right_corner",	XC_top_right_corner},
+    {"top_side",		XC_top_side},
+    {"top_tee",			XC_top_tee},
+    {"trek",			XC_trek},
+    {"ul_angle",		XC_ul_angle},
+    {"umbrella",		XC_umbrella},
+    {"ur_angle",		XC_ur_angle},
+    {"watch",			XC_watch},
+    {"xterm",			XC_xterm},
+    {NULL,			0}
+};
+
+/*
+ * Font to use for cursors:
+ */
+
+#ifndef CURSORFONT
+#define CURSORFONT "cursor"
+#endif
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkGetCursorByName --
+ *
+ *	Retrieve a cursor by name.  Parse the cursor name into fields
+ *	and create a cursor, either from the standard cursor font or
+ *	from bitmap files.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a new cursor, or NULL on errors.  
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Allocates a new cursor.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkCursor *
+TkGetCursorByName(interp, tkwin, string)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
+    Tk_Uid string;		/* Description of cursor.  See manual entry
+				 * for details on legal syntax. */
+{
+    TkUnixCursor *cursorPtr = NULL;
+    Cursor cursor = None;
+    int argc;
+    char **argv = NULL;
+    Pixmap source = None;
+    Pixmap mask = None;
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+
+    if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, string, &argc, &argv) != TCL_OK) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+    if (argc == 0) {
+	goto badString;
+    }
+    if (argv[0][0] != '@') {
+	XColor fg, bg;
+	unsigned int maskIndex;
+	register struct CursorName *namePtr;
+	TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+
+	/*
+	 * The cursor is to come from the standard cursor font.  If one
+	 * arg, it is cursor name (use black and white for fg and bg).
+	 * If two args, they are name and fg color (ignore mask).  If
+	 * three args, they are name, fg, bg.  Some of the code below
+	 * is stolen from the XCreateFontCursor Xlib procedure.
+	 */
+
+	if (argc > 3) {
+	    goto badString;
+	}
+	for (namePtr = cursorNames; ; namePtr++) {
+	    if (namePtr->name == NULL) {
+		goto badString;
+	    }
+	    if ((namePtr->name[0] == argv[0][0])
+		    && (strcmp(namePtr->name, argv[0]) == 0)) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+	maskIndex = namePtr->shape + 1;
+	if (argc == 1) {
+	    fg.red = fg.green = fg.blue = 0;
+	    bg.red = bg.green = bg.blue = 65535;
+	} else {
+	    if (XParseColor(display, Tk_Colormap(tkwin), argv[1],
+		    &fg) == 0) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid color name \"", argv[1],
+			"\"", (char *) NULL);
+		goto cleanup;
+	    }
+	    if (argc == 2) {
+		bg.red = bg.green = bg.blue = 0;
+		maskIndex = namePtr->shape;
+	    } else {
+		if (XParseColor(display, Tk_Colormap(tkwin), argv[2],
+			&bg) == 0) {
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid color name \"", argv[2],
+			    "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		    goto cleanup;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+	dispPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->dispPtr;
+	if (dispPtr->cursorFont == None) {
+	    dispPtr->cursorFont = XLoadFont(display, CURSORFONT);
+	    if (dispPtr->cursorFont == None) {
+		interp->result = "couldn't load cursor font";
+		goto cleanup;
+	    }
+	}
+	cursor = XCreateGlyphCursor(display, dispPtr->cursorFont,
+		dispPtr->cursorFont, namePtr->shape, maskIndex,
+		&fg, &bg);
+    } else {
+	int width, height, maskWidth, maskHeight;
+	int xHot, yHot, dummy1, dummy2;
+	XColor fg, bg;
+
+        /*
+         * Prevent file system access in safe interpreters.
+         */
+
+        if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+            Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't get cursor from a file in",
+                    " a safe interpreter", (char *) NULL);
+            cursorPtr = NULL;
+            goto cleanup;
+        }
+        
+	/*
+	 * The cursor is to be created by reading bitmap files.  There
+	 * should be either two elements in the list (source, color) or
+	 * four (source mask fg bg).
+	 */
+
+	if ((argc != 2) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    goto badString;
+	}
+	if (XReadBitmapFile(display,
+		RootWindowOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)), &argv[0][1],
+		(unsigned int *) &width, (unsigned int *) &height,
+		&source, &xHot, &yHot) != BitmapSuccess) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "cleanup reading bitmap file \"",
+		    &argv[0][1], "\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    goto cleanup;
+	}
+	if ((xHot < 0) || (yHot < 0) || (xHot >= width) || (yHot >= height)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad hot spot in bitmap file \"",
+		    &argv[0][1], "\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    goto cleanup;
+	}
+	if (argc == 2) {
+	    if (XParseColor(display, Tk_Colormap(tkwin), argv[1],
+		    &fg) == 0) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid color name \"",
+			argv[1], "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		goto cleanup;
+	    }
+	    cursor = XCreatePixmapCursor(display, source, source,
+		    &fg, &fg, (unsigned) xHot, (unsigned) yHot);
+	} else {
+	    if (XReadBitmapFile(display,
+		    RootWindowOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)), argv[1],
+		    (unsigned int *) &maskWidth, (unsigned int *) &maskHeight,
+		    &mask, &dummy1, &dummy2) != BitmapSuccess) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "cleanup reading bitmap file \"",
+			argv[1], "\"", (char *) NULL);
+		goto cleanup;
+	    }
+	    if ((maskWidth != width) && (maskHeight != height)) {
+		interp->result =
+			"source and mask bitmaps have different sizes";
+		goto cleanup;
+	    }
+	    if (XParseColor(display, Tk_Colormap(tkwin), argv[2],
+		    &fg) == 0) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid color name \"", argv[2],
+			"\"", (char *) NULL);
+		goto cleanup;
+	    }
+	    if (XParseColor(display, Tk_Colormap(tkwin), argv[3],
+		    &bg) == 0) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "invalid color name \"", argv[3],
+			"\"", (char *) NULL);
+		goto cleanup;
+	    }
+	    cursor = XCreatePixmapCursor(display, source, mask,
+		    &fg, &bg, (unsigned) xHot, (unsigned) yHot);
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (cursor != None) {
+	cursorPtr = (TkUnixCursor *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkUnixCursor));
+	cursorPtr->info.cursor = (Tk_Cursor) cursor;
+	cursorPtr->display = display;
+    }
+
+    cleanup:
+    if (argv != NULL) {
+	ckfree((char *) argv);
+    }
+    if (source != None) {
+	Tk_FreePixmap(display, source);
+    }
+    if (mask != None) {
+	Tk_FreePixmap(display, mask);
+    }
+    return (TkCursor *) cursorPtr;
+
+
+    badString:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad cursor spec \"", string, "\"",
+	    (char *) NULL);
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkCreateCursorFromData --
+ *
+ *	Creates a cursor from the source and mask bits.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a new cursor, or NULL on errors.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Allocates a new cursor.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkCursor *
+TkCreateCursorFromData(tkwin, source, mask, width, height, xHot, yHot,
+	fgColor, bgColor)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window in which cursor will be used. */
+    char *source;		/* Bitmap data for cursor shape. */
+    char *mask;			/* Bitmap data for cursor mask. */
+    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of cursor. */
+    int xHot, yHot;		/* Location of hot-spot in cursor. */
+    XColor fgColor;		/* Foreground color for cursor. */
+    XColor bgColor;		/* Background color for cursor. */
+{
+    Cursor cursor;
+    Pixmap sourcePixmap, maskPixmap;
+    TkUnixCursor *cursorPtr = NULL;
+    Display *display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+
+    sourcePixmap = XCreateBitmapFromData(display,
+	    RootWindowOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)), source, (unsigned) width,
+	    (unsigned) height);
+    maskPixmap = XCreateBitmapFromData(display, 
+	    RootWindowOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin)), mask, (unsigned) width,
+	    (unsigned) height);
+    cursor = XCreatePixmapCursor(display, sourcePixmap,
+	    maskPixmap, &fgColor, &bgColor, (unsigned) xHot, (unsigned) yHot);
+    Tk_FreePixmap(display, sourcePixmap);
+    Tk_FreePixmap(display, maskPixmap);
+
+    if (cursor != None) {
+	cursorPtr = (TkUnixCursor *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkUnixCursor));
+	cursorPtr->info.cursor = (Tk_Cursor) cursor;
+	cursorPtr->display = display;
+    }
+    return (TkCursor *) cursorPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkFreeCursor --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to release a cursor allocated by
+ *	TkGetCursorByName.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The cursor data structure is deallocated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkFreeCursor(cursorPtr)
+    TkCursor *cursorPtr;
+{
+    TkUnixCursor *unixCursorPtr = (TkUnixCursor *) cursorPtr;
+    XFreeCursor(unixCursorPtr->display, (Cursor) unixCursorPtr->info.cursor);
+    Tk_FreeXId(unixCursorPtr->display, (XID) unixCursorPtr->info.cursor);
+    ckfree((char *) unixCursorPtr);
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixDefault.h b/unix/tkUnixDefault.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f895d63
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixDefault.h
@@ -0,0 +1,450 @@
+/*
+ * tkUnixDefault.h --
+ *
+ *	This file defines the defaults for all options for all of
+ *	the Tk widgets.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixDefault.h 1.105 97/10/09 17:45:10
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TKUNIXDEFAULT
+#define _TKUNIXDEFAULT
+
+/*
+ * The definitions below provide symbolic names for the default colors.
+ * NORMAL_BG -		Normal background color.
+ * ACTIVE_BG -		Background color when widget is active.
+ * SELECT_BG -		Background color for selected text.
+ * TROUGH -		Background color for troughs in scales and scrollbars.
+ * INDICATOR -		Color for indicator when button is selected.
+ * DISABLED -		Foreground color when widget is disabled.
+ */
+
+#define BLACK		"Black"
+#define WHITE		"White"
+
+#define NORMAL_BG	"#d9d9d9"
+#define ACTIVE_BG	"#ececec"
+#define SELECT_BG	"#c3c3c3"
+#define TROUGH		"#c3c3c3"
+#define INDICATOR	"#b03060"
+#define DISABLED	"#a3a3a3"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for labels, buttons, checkbuttons, and radiobuttons:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_BUTTON_ANCHOR		"center"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR	ACTIVE_BG
+#define DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO	BLACK
+#define DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR	BLACK
+#define DEF_CHKRAD_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR	DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR
+#define DEF_BUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_MONO	WHITE
+#define DEF_BUTTON_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_BUTTON_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_BUTTON_BITMAP		""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_BORDER_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_COMMAND		""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_DEFAULT		"disabled"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR	DISABLED
+#define DEF_BUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO	""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_FG			BLACK
+#define DEF_CHKRAD_FG			DEF_BUTTON_FG
+#define DEF_BUTTON_FONT			"Helvetica -12 bold"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_HEIGHT		"0"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT		BLACK
+#define DEF_LABEL_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"1"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_IMAGE		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_BUTTON_INDICATOR		"1"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_JUSTIFY		"center"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_OFF_VALUE		"0"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_ON_VALUE		"1"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_PADX			"3m"
+#define DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADX		"1"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_PADY			"1m"
+#define DEF_LABCHKRAD_PADY		"1"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_RELIEF		"raised"
+#define DEF_LABCHKRAD_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_COLOR		INDICATOR
+#define DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_BUTTON_SELECT_IMAGE		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_BUTTON_STATE		"normal"
+#define DEF_LABEL_TAKE_FOCUS		"0"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_TAKE_FOCUS		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_BUTTON_TEXT			""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE	""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_UNDERLINE		"-1"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_VALUE		""
+#define DEF_BUTTON_WIDTH		"0"
+#define DEF_BUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH		"0"
+#define DEF_RADIOBUTTON_VARIABLE	"selectedButton"
+#define DEF_CHECKBUTTON_VARIABLE	""
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for canvases:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_CANVAS_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_CANVAS_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_CANVAS_BORDER_WIDTH		"0"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_CLOSE_ENOUGH		"1"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_CONFINE		"1"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_CANVAS_HEIGHT		"7c"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_HIGHLIGHT_BG		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_CANVAS_HIGHLIGHT		BLACK
+#define DEF_CANVAS_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"1"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_BG		BLACK
+#define DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_BD_COLOR	"0"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_BD_MONO	"0"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_OFF_TIME	"300"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_ON_TIME	"600"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_INSERT_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SCROLL_REGION	""
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_COLOR		SELECT_BG
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_BD_COLOR	"1"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_BD_MONO	"0"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_FG_COLOR	BLACK
+#define DEF_CANVAS_SELECT_FG_MONO	WHITE
+#define DEF_CANVAS_TAKE_FOCUS		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_CANVAS_WIDTH		"10c"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_X_SCROLL_CMD		""
+#define DEF_CANVAS_X_SCROLL_INCREMENT	"0"
+#define DEF_CANVAS_Y_SCROLL_CMD		""
+#define DEF_CANVAS_Y_SCROLL_INCREMENT	"0"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for entries:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_ENTRY_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_ENTRY_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_ENTRY_BORDER_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_CURSOR		"xterm"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_EXPORT_SELECTION	"1"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_FONT			"Helvetica -12"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_FG			BLACK
+#define DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_BG		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT		BLACK
+#define DEF_ENTRY_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"1"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BG		BLACK
+#define DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_COLOR	"0"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_BD_MONO	"0"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_OFF_TIME	"300"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_ON_TIME	"600"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_INSERT_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_JUSTIFY		"left"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_RELIEF		"sunken"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SCROLL_COMMAND	""
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_COLOR		SELECT_BG
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_COLOR	"1"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_BD_MONO	"0"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_COLOR	BLACK
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SELECT_FG_MONO	WHITE
+#define DEF_ENTRY_SHOW			(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_ENTRY_STATE			"normal"
+#define DEF_ENTRY_TAKE_FOCUS		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_ENTRY_TEXT_VARIABLE		""
+#define DEF_ENTRY_WIDTH			"20"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for frames:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_FRAME_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_FRAME_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_FRAME_BORDER_WIDTH		"0"
+#define DEF_FRAME_CLASS			"Frame"
+#define DEF_FRAME_COLORMAP		""
+#define DEF_FRAME_CONTAINER		"0"
+#define DEF_FRAME_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_FRAME_HEIGHT		"0"
+#define DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT_BG		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT		BLACK
+#define DEF_FRAME_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_FRAME_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_FRAME_TAKE_FOCUS		"0"
+#define DEF_FRAME_USE			""
+#define DEF_FRAME_VISUAL		""
+#define DEF_FRAME_WIDTH			"0"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for listboxes:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_BORDER_WIDTH	"2"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_EXPORT_SELECTION	"1"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_FONT		"Helvetica -12 bold"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_FG			BLACK
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_HEIGHT		"10"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT_BG	NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT		BLACK
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"1"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_RELIEF		"sunken"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SCROLL_COMMAND	""
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_COLOR	SELECT_BG
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_BD		"1"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_FG_COLOR	BLACK
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_FG_MONO	WHITE
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SELECT_MODE		"browse"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_SET_GRID		"0"
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_TAKE_FOCUS		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_LISTBOX_WIDTH		"20"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for individual entries of menus:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_BG	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACTIVE_FG	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ACCELERATOR	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BG		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_BITMAP		None
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COLUMN_BREAK	"0"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_COMMAND		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_FG		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_FONT		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_HIDE_MARGIN	"0"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_IMAGE		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_INDICATOR	"1"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_LABEL		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_MENU		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_OFF_VALUE	"0"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_ON_VALUE		"1"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT_IMAGE	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_STATE		"normal"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_VALUE		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_CHECK_VARIABLE	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_RADIO_VARIABLE	"selectedButton"
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_SELECT	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_ENTRY_UNDERLINE	"-1"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for menus overall:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR	ACTIVE_BG
+#define DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BG_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_BORDER_WIDTH	"2"
+#define DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR	BLACK
+#define DEF_MENU_ACTIVE_FG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_MENU_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_MENU_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_MENU_BORDER_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_MENU_CURSOR			"arrow"
+#define DEF_MENU_DISABLED_FG_COLOR	DISABLED
+#define DEF_MENU_DISABLED_FG_MONO	""
+#define DEF_MENU_FONT			"Helvetica -12 bold"
+#define DEF_MENU_FG			BLACK
+#define DEF_MENU_POST_COMMAND		""
+#define DEF_MENU_RELIEF			"raised"
+#define DEF_MENU_SELECT_COLOR		INDICATOR
+#define DEF_MENU_SELECT_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_MENU_TAKE_FOCUS		"0"
+#define DEF_MENU_TEAROFF		"1"
+#define DEF_MENU_TEAROFF_CMD		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENU_TITLE			""
+#define DEF_MENU_TYPE			"normal"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for menubuttons:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_ANCHOR		"center"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR	ACTIVE_BG
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_BG_MONO	BLACK
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_COLOR	BLACK
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_ACTIVE_FG_MONO	WHITE
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_BITMAP		""
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_BORDER_WIDTH	"2"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_DIRECTION	"below"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_DISABLED_FG_COLOR DISABLED
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_DISABLED_FG_MONO	""
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_FONT		"Helvetica -12 bold"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_FG		BLACK
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_HEIGHT		"0"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_BG	NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT	BLACK
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_IMAGE		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_INDICATOR	"0"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_JUSTIFY		"center"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_MENU		""
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_PADX		"4p"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_PADY		"3p"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_STATE		"normal"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_TAKE_FOCUS	"0"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_TEXT		""
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_TEXT_VARIABLE	""
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_UNDERLINE	"-1"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_WIDTH		"0"
+#define DEF_MENUBUTTON_WRAP_LENGTH	"0"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for messages:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_ANCHOR		"center"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_ASPECT		"150"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_BORDER_WIDTH	"2"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_FG			BLACK
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_FONT		"Helvetica -12 bold"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_BG	NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT		BLACK
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"0"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_JUSTIFY		"left"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_PADX		"-1"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_PADY		"-1"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_TAKE_FOCUS		"0"
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT		""
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_TEXT_VARIABLE	""
+#define DEF_MESSAGE_WIDTH		"0"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for scales:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_SCALE_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR	ACTIVE_BG
+#define DEF_SCALE_ACTIVE_BG_MONO	BLACK
+#define DEF_SCALE_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_SCALE_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_SCALE_BIG_INCREMENT		"0"
+#define DEF_SCALE_BORDER_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_SCALE_COMMAND		""
+#define DEF_SCALE_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_SCALE_DIGITS		"0"
+#define DEF_SCALE_FONT			"Helvetica -12 bold"
+#define DEF_SCALE_FG_COLOR		BLACK
+#define DEF_SCALE_FG_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_SCALE_FROM			"0"
+#define DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_BG		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT		BLACK
+#define DEF_SCALE_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"1"
+#define DEF_SCALE_LABEL			""
+#define DEF_SCALE_LENGTH		"100"
+#define DEF_SCALE_ORIENT		"vertical"
+#define DEF_SCALE_RELIEF		"flat"
+#define DEF_SCALE_REPEAT_DELAY	"300"
+#define DEF_SCALE_REPEAT_INTERVAL	"100"
+#define DEF_SCALE_RESOLUTION		"1"
+#define DEF_SCALE_TROUGH_COLOR		TROUGH
+#define DEF_SCALE_TROUGH_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_SCALE_SHOW_VALUE		"1"
+#define DEF_SCALE_SLIDER_LENGTH		"30"
+#define DEF_SCALE_SLIDER_RELIEF		"raised"
+#define DEF_SCALE_STATE			"normal"
+#define DEF_SCALE_TAKE_FOCUS		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_SCALE_TICK_INTERVAL		"0"
+#define DEF_SCALE_TO			"100"
+#define DEF_SCALE_VARIABLE		""
+#define DEF_SCALE_WIDTH			"15"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for scrollbars:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_BG_COLOR	ACTIVE_BG
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_BG_MONO	BLACK
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ACTIVE_RELIEF	"raised"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_BORDER_WIDTH	"2"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_COMMAND		""
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_CURSOR		""
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_EL_BORDER_WIDTH	"-1"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT_BG	NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT		BLACK
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"1"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_JUMP		"0"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_ORIENT		"vertical"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_RELIEF		"sunken"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_REPEAT_DELAY	"300"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_REPEAT_INTERVAL	"100"
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_TAKE_FOCUS	(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_TROUGH_COLOR	TROUGH
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_TROUGH_MONO	WHITE
+#define DEF_SCROLLBAR_WIDTH		"15"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for texts:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_TEXT_BG_COLOR		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_TEXT_BG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_TEXT_BORDER_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_TEXT_CURSOR			"xterm"
+#define DEF_TEXT_FG			BLACK
+#define DEF_TEXT_EXPORT_SELECTION	"1"
+#define DEF_TEXT_FONT			"Courier -12"
+#define DEF_TEXT_HEIGHT			"24"
+#define DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_BG		NORMAL_BG
+#define DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT		BLACK
+#define DEF_TEXT_HIGHLIGHT_WIDTH	"1"
+#define DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BG		BLACK
+#define DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_COLOR	"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_INSERT_BD_MONO		"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_INSERT_OFF_TIME	"300"
+#define DEF_TEXT_INSERT_ON_TIME		"600"
+#define DEF_TEXT_INSERT_WIDTH		"2"
+#define DEF_TEXT_PADX			"1"
+#define DEF_TEXT_PADY			"1"
+#define DEF_TEXT_RELIEF			"sunken"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_COLOR		SELECT_BG
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_MONO		BLACK
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_COLOR	"1"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_BD_MONO		"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_FG_COLOR	BLACK
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_FG_MONO		WHITE
+#define DEF_TEXT_SELECT_RELIEF		"raised"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SET_GRID		"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SPACING1		"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SPACING2		"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_SPACING3		"0"
+#define DEF_TEXT_STATE			"normal"
+#define DEF_TEXT_TABS			""
+#define DEF_TEXT_TAKE_FOCUS		(char *) NULL
+#define DEF_TEXT_WIDTH			"80"
+#define DEF_TEXT_WRAP			"char"
+#define DEF_TEXT_XSCROLL_COMMAND	""
+#define DEF_TEXT_YSCROLL_COMMAND	""
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for canvas text:
+ */
+
+#define DEF_CANVTEXT_FONT		"Helvetica -12"
+
+/*
+ * Defaults for toplevels (most of the defaults for frames also apply
+ * to toplevels):
+ */
+
+#define DEF_TOPLEVEL_CLASS		"Toplevel"
+#define DEF_TOPLEVEL_MENU		""
+#define DEF_TOPLEVEL_SCREEN		""
+
+#endif /* _TKUNIXDEFAULT */
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixDialog.c b/unix/tkUnixDialog.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b8a1ab0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixDialog.c
@@ -0,0 +1,207 @@
+/*
+ * tkUnixDialog.c --
+ *
+ *	Contains the Unix implementation of the common dialog boxes:
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixDialog.c 1.5 96/08/28 21:21:01
+ *
+ */
+ 
+#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#include "tkUnixInt.h"
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EvalArgv --
+ *
+ *	Invokes the Tcl procedure with the arguments. argv[0] is set by
+ *	the caller of this function. It may be different than cmdName.
+ *	The TCL command will see argv[0], not cmdName, as its name if it
+ *	invokes [lindex [info level 0] 0]
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	TCL_ERROR if the command does not exist and cannot be autoloaded.
+ *	Otherwise, return the result of the evaluation of the command.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The command may be autoloaded.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int EvalArgv(interp, cmdName, argc, argv)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    char * cmdName;		/* Name of the TCL command to call */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    Tcl_CmdInfo cmdInfo;
+
+    if (!Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, cmdName, &cmdInfo)) {
+	char * cmdArgv[2];
+
+	/*
+	 * This comand is not in the interpreter yet -- looks like we
+	 * have to auto-load it
+	 */
+	if (!Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, "auto_load", &cmdInfo)) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "cannot execute command \"auto_load\"",
+		NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	cmdArgv[0] = "auto_load";
+	cmdArgv[1] = cmdName;
+
+	if ((*cmdInfo.proc)(cmdInfo.clientData, interp, 2, cmdArgv)!= TCL_OK){ 
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+
+	if (!Tcl_GetCommandInfo(interp, cmdName, &cmdInfo)) {
+	    Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "cannot auto-load command \"",
+		cmdName, "\"",NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return (*cmdInfo.proc)(cmdInfo.clientData, interp, argc, argv);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_ChooseColorCmd --
+ *
+ *	This procedure implements the color dialog box for the Unix
+ *	platform. See the user documentation for details on what it
+ *	does.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	See user documentation.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A dialog window is created the first time this procedure is called.
+ *	This window is not destroyed and will be reused the next time the
+ *	application invokes the "tk_chooseColor" command.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tk_ChooseColorCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    return EvalArgv(interp, "tkColorDialog", argc, argv);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetOpenFileCmd --
+ *
+ *	This procedure implements the "open file" dialog box for the
+ *	Unix platform. See the user documentation for details on what
+ *	it does.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	See user documentation.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A dialog window is created the first this procedure is called.
+ *	This window is not destroyed and will be reused the next time
+ *	the application invokes the "tk_getOpenFile" or
+ *	"tk_getSaveFile" command.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tk_GetOpenFileCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
+
+    if (Tk_StrictMotif(tkwin)) {
+	return EvalArgv(interp, "tkMotifFDialog", argc, argv);
+    } else {
+	return EvalArgv(interp, "tkFDialog", argc, argv);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetSaveFileCmd --
+ *
+ *	Same as Tk_GetOpenFileCmd but opens a "save file" dialog box
+ *	instead
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Same as Tk_GetOpenFileCmd.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Same as Tk_GetOpenFileCmd.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tk_GetSaveFileCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window)clientData;
+
+    if (Tk_StrictMotif(tkwin)) {
+	return EvalArgv(interp, "tkMotifFDialog", argc, argv);
+    } else {
+	return EvalArgv(interp, "tkFDialog", argc, argv);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_MessageBoxCmd --
+ *
+ *	This procedure implements the MessageBox window for the
+ *	Unix platform. See the user documentation for details on what
+ *	it does.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	See user documentation.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None. The MessageBox window will be destroy before this procedure
+ *	returns.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tk_MessageBoxCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    return EvalArgv(interp, "tkMessageBox", argc, argv);
+}
+
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixDraw.c b/unix/tkUnixDraw.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..65bf2e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixDraw.c
@@ -0,0 +1,171 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixDraw.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains X specific drawing routines.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixDraw.c 1.9 97/03/21 11:16:18
+ */
+
+#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * The following structure is used to pass information to
+ * ScrollRestrictProc from TkScrollWindow.
+ */
+
+typedef struct ScrollInfo {
+    int done;			/* Flag is 0 until filtering is done. */
+    Display *display;		/* Display to filter. */
+    Window window;		/* Window to filter. */
+    TkRegion region;		/* Region into which damage is accumulated. */
+    int dx, dy;			/* Amount by which window was shifted. */
+} ScrollInfo;
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for procedures declared later in this file:
+ */
+
+static Tk_RestrictAction	ScrollRestrictProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
+    				    ClientData arg, XEvent *eventPtr));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkScrollWindow --
+ *
+ *	Scroll a rectangle of the specified window and accumulate
+ *	damage information in the specified Region.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns 0 if no damage additional damage was generated.  Sets
+ *	damageRgn to contain the damaged areas and returns 1 if
+ *	GraphicsExpose events were detected.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Scrolls the bits in the window and enters the event loop
+ *	looking for damage events.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkScrollWindow(tkwin, gc, x, y, width, height, dx, dy, damageRgn)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* The window to be scrolled. */
+    GC gc;			/* GC for window to be scrolled. */
+    int x, y, width, height;	/* Position rectangle to be scrolled. */
+    int dx, dy;			/* Distance rectangle should be moved. */
+    TkRegion damageRgn;		/* Region to accumulate damage in. */
+{
+    Tk_RestrictProc *oldProc;
+    ClientData oldArg, dummy;
+    ScrollInfo info;
+    
+    XCopyArea(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_WindowId(tkwin), Tk_WindowId(tkwin), gc,
+	    x, y, (unsigned int) width, (unsigned int) height, x + dx, y + dy);
+
+    info.done = 0;
+    info.window = Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
+    info.display = Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    info.region = damageRgn;
+    info.dx = dx;
+    info.dy = dy;
+
+    /*
+     * Sync the event stream so all of the expose events will be on the
+     * Tk event queue before we start filtering.  This avoids busy waiting
+     * while we filter events.
+     */
+
+    TkpSync(info.display);
+    oldProc = Tk_RestrictEvents(ScrollRestrictProc, (ClientData) &info,
+	    &oldArg);
+    while (!info.done) {
+	Tcl_ServiceEvent(TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS);
+    }
+    Tk_RestrictEvents(oldProc, oldArg, &dummy);
+
+    return XEmptyRegion((Region) damageRgn) ? 0 : 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ScrollRestrictProc --
+ *
+ *	A Tk_RestrictProc used by TkScrollWindow to gather up Expose
+ *	information into a single damage region.  It accumulates damage
+ *	events on the specified window until a NoExpose or the last
+ *	GraphicsExpose event is detected.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Discards Expose events after accumulating damage information
+ *	for a particular window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static Tk_RestrictAction
+ScrollRestrictProc(arg, eventPtr)
+    ClientData arg;
+    XEvent *eventPtr;
+{
+    ScrollInfo *info = (ScrollInfo *) arg;
+    XRectangle rect;
+
+    /*
+     * Defer events which aren't for the specified window.
+     */
+
+    if (info->done || (eventPtr->xany.display != info->display)
+	    || (eventPtr->xany.window != info->window)) {
+	return TK_DEFER_EVENT;
+    }
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == NoExpose) {
+	info->done = 1;
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == GraphicsExpose) {
+	rect.x = eventPtr->xgraphicsexpose.x;
+	rect.y = eventPtr->xgraphicsexpose.y;
+	rect.width = eventPtr->xgraphicsexpose.width;
+	rect.height = eventPtr->xgraphicsexpose.height;
+	XUnionRectWithRegion(&rect, (Region) info->region,
+		(Region) info->region);
+
+	if (eventPtr->xgraphicsexpose.count == 0) {
+	    info->done = 1;
+	}
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == Expose) {
+
+	/*
+	 * This case is tricky.  This event was already queued before
+	 * the XCopyArea was issued.  If this area overlaps the area
+	 * being copied, then some of the copied area may be invalid.
+	 * The easiest way to handle this case is to mark both the
+	 * original area and the shifted area as damaged.
+	 */
+
+	rect.x = eventPtr->xexpose.x;
+	rect.y = eventPtr->xexpose.y;
+	rect.width = eventPtr->xexpose.width;
+	rect.height = eventPtr->xexpose.height;
+	XUnionRectWithRegion(&rect, (Region) info->region,
+		(Region) info->region);
+	rect.x += info->dx;
+	rect.y += info->dy;
+	XUnionRectWithRegion(&rect, (Region) info->region,
+		(Region) info->region);
+    } else {
+	return TK_DEFER_EVENT;
+    }
+    return TK_DISCARD_EVENT;
+}
+
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixEmbed.c b/unix/tkUnixEmbed.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..fd20a34
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixEmbed.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1001 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixEmbed.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains platform-specific procedures for UNIX to provide
+ *	basic operations needed for application embedding (where one
+ *	application can use as its main window an internal window from
+ *	some other application).
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixEmbed.c 1.22 97/08/13 11:15:51
+ */
+
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#include "tkUnixInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * One of the following structures exists for each container in this
+ * application.  It keeps track of the container window and its
+ * associated embedded window.
+ */
+
+typedef struct Container {
+    Window parent;			/* X's window id for the parent of
+					 * the pair (the container). */
+    Window parentRoot;			/* Id for the root window of parent's
+					 * screen. */
+    TkWindow *parentPtr;		/* Tk's information about the container,
+					 * or NULL if the container isn't
+					 * in this process. */
+    Window wrapper;			/* X's window id for the wrapper
+					 * window for the embedded window.
+					 * Starts off as None, but gets
+					 * filled in when the window is
+					 * eventually created. */
+    TkWindow *embeddedPtr;		/* Tk's information about the embedded
+					 * window, or NULL if the embedded
+					 * application isn't in this process.
+					 * Note that this is *not* the
+					 * same window as wrapper: wrapper is
+					 * the parent of embeddedPtr. */
+    struct Container *nextPtr;		/* Next in list of all containers in
+					 * this process. */
+} Container;
+
+static Container *firstContainerPtr = NULL;
+					/* First in list of all containers
+					 * managed by this process.  */
+
+/*
+ * Prototypes for static procedures defined in this file:
+ */
+
+static void		ContainerEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		EmbeddedEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr));
+static int		EmbedErrorProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    XErrorEvent *errEventPtr));
+static void		EmbedFocusProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		EmbedGeometryRequest _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    Container * containerPtr, int width, int height));
+static void		EmbedSendConfigure _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    Container *containerPtr));
+static void		EmbedStructureProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		EmbedWindowDeleted _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpUseWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure causes a Tk window to use a given X window as
+ *	its parent window, rather than the root window for the screen.
+ *	It is invoked by an embedded application to specify the window
+ *	in which it is embedded.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is normally TCL_OK.  If an error occurs (such
+ *	as string not being a valid window spec), then the return value
+ *	is TCL_ERROR and an error message is left in interp->result if
+ *	interp is non-NULL.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Changes the colormap and other visual information to match that
+ *	of the parent window given by "string".
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpUseWindow(interp, tkwin, string)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* If not NULL, used for error reporting
+				 * if string is bogus. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Tk window that does not yet have an
+				 * associated X window. */
+    char *string;		/* String identifying an X window to use
+				 * for tkwin;  must be an integer value. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    int id, anyError;
+    Window parent;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
+    Container *containerPtr;
+    XWindowAttributes parentAtts;
+
+    if (winPtr->window != None) {
+	panic("TkUseWindow: X window already assigned");
+    }
+    if (Tcl_GetInt(interp, string, &id) != TCL_OK) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    parent = (Window) id;
+
+    /*
+     * Tk sets the window colormap to the screen default colormap in
+     * tkWindow.c:AllocWindow. This doesn't work well for embedded
+     * windows. So we override the colormap and visual settings to be
+     * the same as the parent window (which is in the container app).
+     */
+
+    anyError = 0;
+    handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(winPtr->display, -1, -1, -1,
+	    EmbedErrorProc, (ClientData) &anyError);
+    if (!XGetWindowAttributes(winPtr->display, parent, &parentAtts)) {
+        anyError =  1;
+    }
+    XSync(winPtr->display, False);
+    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+    if (anyError) {
+	if (interp != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "couldn't create child of window \"",
+		    string, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+	}
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    Tk_SetWindowVisual(tkwin, parentAtts.visual, parentAtts.depth,
+	    parentAtts.colormap);
+
+    /*
+     * Create an event handler to clean up the Container structure when
+     * tkwin is eventually deleted.
+     */
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, EmbeddedEventProc,
+	    (ClientData) winPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Save information about the container and the embedded window
+     * in a Container structure.  If there is already an existing
+     * Container structure, it means that both container and embedded
+     * app. are in the same process.
+     */
+
+    for (containerPtr = firstContainerPtr; containerPtr != NULL;
+	    containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (containerPtr->parent == parent) {
+	    winPtr->flags |= TK_BOTH_HALVES;
+	    containerPtr->parentPtr->flags |= TK_BOTH_HALVES;
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    if (containerPtr == NULL) {
+	containerPtr = (Container *) ckalloc(sizeof(Container));
+	containerPtr->parent = parent;
+	containerPtr->parentRoot = parentAtts.root;
+	containerPtr->parentPtr = NULL;
+	containerPtr->wrapper = None;
+	containerPtr->nextPtr = firstContainerPtr;
+	firstContainerPtr = containerPtr;
+    }
+    containerPtr->embeddedPtr = winPtr;
+    winPtr->flags |= TK_EMBEDDED;
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpMakeWindow --
+ *
+ *	Create an actual window system window object based on the
+ *	current attributes of the specified TkWindow.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the handle to the new window, or None on failure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Creates a new X window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Window
+TkpMakeWindow(winPtr, parent)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Tk's information about the window that
+				 * is to be instantiated. */
+    Window parent;		/* Window system token for the parent in
+				 * which the window is to be created. */
+{
+    Container *containerPtr;
+
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+	/*
+	 * This window is embedded.  Don't create the new window in the
+	 * given parent; instead, create it as a child of the root window
+	 * of the container's screen.  The window will get reparented
+	 * into a wrapper window later.
+	 */
+
+	for (containerPtr = firstContainerPtr; ;
+		containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (containerPtr == NULL) {
+		panic("TkMakeWindow couldn't find container for window");
+	    }
+	    if (containerPtr->embeddedPtr == winPtr) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+	parent = containerPtr->parentRoot;
+    }
+
+    return XCreateWindow(winPtr->display, parent, winPtr->changes.x,
+	    winPtr->changes.y, (unsigned) winPtr->changes.width,
+	    (unsigned) winPtr->changes.height,
+	    (unsigned) winPtr->changes.border_width, winPtr->depth,
+	    InputOutput, winPtr->visual, winPtr->dirtyAtts,
+	    &winPtr->atts);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpMakeContainer --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to indicate that a particular window
+ *	will be a container for an embedded application.  This changes
+ *	certain aspects of the window's behavior, such as whether it
+ *	will receive events anymore.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpMakeContainer(tkwin)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for a window that is about to
+				 * become a container. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    Container *containerPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Register the window as a container so that, for example, we can
+     * find out later if the embedded app. is in the same process.
+     */
+
+    Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin);
+    containerPtr = (Container *) ckalloc(sizeof(Container));
+    containerPtr->parent = Tk_WindowId(tkwin);
+    containerPtr->parentRoot = RootWindowOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+    containerPtr->parentPtr = winPtr;
+    containerPtr->wrapper = None;
+    containerPtr->embeddedPtr = NULL;
+    containerPtr->nextPtr = firstContainerPtr;
+    firstContainerPtr = containerPtr;
+    winPtr->flags |= TK_CONTAINER;
+
+    /*
+     * Request SubstructureNotify events so that we can find out when
+     * the embedded application creates its window or attempts to
+     * resize it.  Also watch Configure events on the container so that
+     * we can resize the child to match.
+     */
+
+    winPtr->atts.event_mask |= SubstructureRedirectMask|SubstructureNotifyMask;
+    XSelectInput(winPtr->display, winPtr->window, winPtr->atts.event_mask);
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin,
+	    SubstructureNotifyMask|SubstructureRedirectMask,
+	    ContainerEventProc, (ClientData) winPtr);
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, StructureNotifyMask, EmbedStructureProc,
+	    (ClientData) containerPtr);
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, FocusChangeMask, EmbedFocusProc,
+	    (ClientData) containerPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EmbedErrorProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked if an error occurs while creating
+ *	an embedded window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Always returns 0 to indicate that the error has been properly
+ *	handled.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The integer pointed to by the clientData argument is set to 1.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+EmbedErrorProc(clientData, errEventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Points to integer to set. */
+    XErrorEvent *errEventPtr;	/* Points to information about error
+				 * (not used). */
+{
+    int *iPtr = (int *) clientData;
+
+    *iPtr = 1;
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EmbeddedEventProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher when various
+ *	useful events are received for a window that is embedded in
+ *	another application.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Our internal state gets cleaned up when an embedded window is
+ *	destroyed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+EmbeddedEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Token for container window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* ResizeRequest event. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
+	EmbedWindowDeleted(winPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ContainerEventProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher when various
+ *	useful events are received for the children of a container
+ *	window.  It forwards relevant information, such as geometry
+ *	requests, from the events into the container's application.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Depends on the event.  For example, when ConfigureRequest events
+ *	occur, geometry information gets set for the container window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ContainerEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Token for container window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* ResizeRequest event. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
+    Container *containerPtr;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler errHandler;
+
+    /*
+     * Ignore any X protocol errors that happen in this procedure
+     * (almost any operation could fail, for example, if the embedded
+     * application has deleted its window).
+     */
+
+    errHandler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(eventPtr->xfocus.display, -1,
+	    -1, -1, (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * Find the Container structure associated with the parent window.
+     */
+
+    for (containerPtr = firstContainerPtr;
+	    containerPtr->parent != eventPtr->xmaprequest.parent;
+	    containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (containerPtr == NULL) {
+	    panic("ContainerEventProc couldn't find Container record");
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == CreateNotify) {
+	/*
+	 * A new child window has been created in the container. Record
+	 * its id in the Container structure (if more than one child is
+	 * created, just remember the last one and ignore the earlier
+	 * ones).  Also set the child's size to match the container.
+	 */
+
+	containerPtr->wrapper = eventPtr->xcreatewindow.window;
+	XMoveResizeWindow(eventPtr->xcreatewindow.display,
+		containerPtr->wrapper, 0, 0,
+		(unsigned int) Tk_Width(
+			(Tk_Window) containerPtr->parentPtr),
+		(unsigned int) Tk_Height(
+			(Tk_Window) containerPtr->parentPtr));
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureRequest) {
+	if ((eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.x != 0)
+		|| (eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.y != 0)) {
+	    /*
+	     * The embedded application is trying to move itself, which
+	     * isn't legal.  At this point, the window hasn't actually
+	     * moved, but we need to send it a ConfigureNotify event to
+	     * let it know that its request has been denied.  If the
+	     * embedded application was also trying to resize itself, a
+	     * ConfigureNotify will be sent by the geometry management
+	     * code below, so we don't need to do anything.  Otherwise,
+	     * generate a synthetic event.
+	     */
+
+	    if ((eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.width == winPtr->changes.width)
+		    && (eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.height
+		    == winPtr->changes.height)) {
+		EmbedSendConfigure(containerPtr);
+	    }
+	}
+	EmbedGeometryRequest(containerPtr,
+		eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.width,
+		eventPtr->xconfigurerequest.height);
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == MapRequest) {
+	/*
+	 * The embedded application's map request was ignored and simply
+	 * passed on to us, so we have to map the window for it to appear
+	 * on the screen.
+	 */
+
+	XMapWindow(eventPtr->xmaprequest.display,
+		eventPtr->xmaprequest.window);
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
+	/*
+	 * The embedded application is gone.  Destroy the container window.
+	 */
+
+	Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) winPtr);
+    }
+    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(errHandler);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EmbedStructureProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher when
+ *	a container window owned by this application gets resized
+ *	(and also at several other times that we don't care about).
+ *	This procedure reflects the size change in the embedded
+ *	window that corresponds to the container.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The embedded window gets resized to match the container.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+EmbedStructureProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Token for container window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* ResizeRequest event. */
+{
+    Container *containerPtr = (Container *) clientData;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler errHandler;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
+	if (containerPtr->wrapper != None) {
+	    /*
+	     * Ignore errors, since the embedded application could have
+	     * deleted its window.
+	     */
+
+	    errHandler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(eventPtr->xfocus.display, -1,
+		    -1, -1, (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	    XMoveResizeWindow(eventPtr->xconfigure.display,
+		    containerPtr->wrapper, 0, 0,
+		    (unsigned int) Tk_Width(
+			    (Tk_Window) containerPtr->parentPtr),
+		    (unsigned int) Tk_Height(
+			    (Tk_Window) containerPtr->parentPtr));
+	    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(errHandler);
+	}
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
+	EmbedWindowDeleted(containerPtr->parentPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EmbedFocusProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk event dispatcher when
+ *	FocusIn and FocusOut events occur for a container window owned
+ *	by this application.  It is responsible for moving the focus
+ *	back and forth between a container application and an embedded
+ *	application.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The X focus may change.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+EmbedFocusProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Token for container window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* ResizeRequest event. */
+{
+    Container *containerPtr = (Container *) clientData;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler errHandler;
+    Display *display;
+
+    display = Tk_Display(containerPtr->parentPtr);
+    if (eventPtr->type == FocusIn) {
+	/*
+	 * The focus just arrived at the container.  Change the X focus
+	 * to move it to the embedded application, if there is one. 
+	 * Ignore X errors that occur during this operation (it's
+	 * possible that the new focus window isn't mapped).
+	 */
+    
+	if (containerPtr->wrapper != None) {
+	    errHandler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(eventPtr->xfocus.display, -1,
+		    -1, -1, (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	    XSetInputFocus(display, containerPtr->wrapper, RevertToParent,
+		    CurrentTime);
+	    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(errHandler);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EmbedGeometryRequest --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when an embedded application requests
+ *	a particular size.  It processes the request (which may or may
+ *	not actually honor the request) and reflects the results back
+ *	to the embedded application.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If we deny the child's size change request, a Configure event
+ *	is synthesized to let the child know how big it ought to be.
+ *	Events get processed while we're waiting for the geometry
+ *	managers to do their thing.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+EmbedGeometryRequest(containerPtr, width, height)
+    Container *containerPtr;	/* Information about the embedding. */
+    int width, height;		/* Size that the child has requested. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = containerPtr->parentPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Forward the requested size into our geometry management hierarchy
+     * via the container window.  We need to send a Configure event back
+     * to the embedded application if we decide not to honor its
+     * request; to make this happen, process all idle event handlers
+     * synchronously here (so that the geometry managers have had a
+     * chance to do whatever they want to do), and if the window's size
+     * didn't change then generate a configure event.
+     */
+
+    Tk_GeometryRequest((Tk_Window) winPtr, width, height);
+    while (Tcl_DoOneEvent(TCL_IDLE_EVENTS)) {
+	/* Empty loop body. */
+    }
+    if ((winPtr->changes.width != width)
+	    || (winPtr->changes.height != height)) {
+	EmbedSendConfigure(containerPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EmbedSendConfigure --
+ *
+ *	This procedure synthesizes a ConfigureNotify event to notify an
+ *	embedded application of its current size and location.  This
+ *	procedure is called when the embedded application made a
+ *	geometry request that we did not grant, so that the embedded
+ *	application knows that its geometry didn't change after all.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+EmbedSendConfigure(containerPtr)
+    Container *containerPtr;	/* Information about the embedding. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = containerPtr->parentPtr;
+    XEvent event;
+
+    event.xconfigure.type = ConfigureNotify;
+    event.xconfigure.serial =
+	    LastKnownRequestProcessed(winPtr->display);
+    event.xconfigure.send_event = True;
+    event.xconfigure.display = winPtr->display;
+    event.xconfigure.event = containerPtr->wrapper;
+    event.xconfigure.window = containerPtr->wrapper;
+    event.xconfigure.x = 0;
+    event.xconfigure.y = 0;
+    event.xconfigure.width = winPtr->changes.width;
+    event.xconfigure.height = winPtr->changes.height;
+    event.xconfigure.above = None;
+    event.xconfigure.override_redirect = False;
+
+    /*
+     * Note:  when sending the event below, the ButtonPressMask
+     * causes the event to be sent only to applications that have
+     * selected for ButtonPress events, which should be just the
+     * embedded application.
+     */
+
+    XSendEvent(winPtr->display, containerPtr->wrapper, False,
+	    0, &event);
+
+    /*
+     * The following needs to be done if the embedded window is
+     * not in the same application as the container window.
+     */
+
+    if (containerPtr->embeddedPtr == NULL) {
+	XMoveResizeWindow(winPtr->display, containerPtr->wrapper, 0, 0,
+	    (unsigned int) winPtr->changes.width,
+	    (unsigned int) winPtr->changes.height);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetOtherWindow --
+ *
+ *	If both the container and embedded window are in the same
+ *	process, this procedure will return either one, given the other.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	If winPtr is a container, the return value is the token for the
+ *	embedded window, and vice versa.  If the "other" window isn't in
+ *	this process, NULL is returned.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkWindow *
+TkpGetOtherWindow(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Tk's structure for a container or
+				 * embedded window. */
+{
+    Container *containerPtr;
+
+    for (containerPtr = firstContainerPtr; containerPtr != NULL;
+	    containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (containerPtr->embeddedPtr == winPtr) {
+	    return containerPtr->parentPtr;
+	} else if (containerPtr->parentPtr == winPtr) {
+	    return containerPtr->embeddedPtr;
+	}
+    }
+    panic("TkpGetOtherWindow couldn't find window");
+    return NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpRedirectKeyEvent --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a key press or release event
+ *	arrives for an application that does not believe it owns the
+ *	input focus.  This can happen because of embedding; for example,
+ *	X can send an event to an embedded application when the real
+ *	focus window is in the container application and is an ancestor
+ *	of the container.  This procedure's job is to forward the event
+ *	back to the application where it really belongs.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The event may get sent to a different application.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpRedirectKeyEvent(winPtr, eventPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to which the event was originally
+				 * reported. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X event to redirect (should be KeyPress
+				 * or KeyRelease). */
+{
+    Container *containerPtr;
+    Window saved;
+
+    /*
+     * First, find the top-level window corresponding to winPtr.
+     */
+
+    while (1) {
+	if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * This window is being deleted.  This is too confusing a
+	     * case to handle so discard the event.
+	     */
+
+	    return;
+	}
+	if (winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr;
+    }
+
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+	/*
+	 * This application is embedded.  If we got a key event without
+	 * officially having the focus, it means that the focus is
+	 * really in the container, but the mouse was over the embedded
+	 * application.  Send the event back to the container.
+	 */
+
+	for (containerPtr = firstContainerPtr;
+		containerPtr->embeddedPtr != winPtr;
+		containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    /* Empty loop body. */
+	}
+	saved = eventPtr->xkey.window;
+	eventPtr->xkey.window = containerPtr->parent;
+	XSendEvent(eventPtr->xkey.display, eventPtr->xkey.window, False,
+	    KeyPressMask|KeyReleaseMask, eventPtr);
+	eventPtr->xkey.window = saved;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpClaimFocus --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when someone asks or the input focus
+ *	to be put on a window in an embedded application, but the
+ *	application doesn't currently have the focus.  It requests the
+ *	input focus from the container application.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The input focus may change.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpClaimFocus(topLevelPtr, force)
+    TkWindow *topLevelPtr;		/* Top-level window containing desired
+					 * focus window; should be embedded. */
+    int force;				/* One means that the container should
+					 * claim the focus if it doesn't
+					 * currently have it. */
+{
+    XEvent event;
+    Container *containerPtr;
+
+    if (!(topLevelPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    for (containerPtr = firstContainerPtr;
+	    containerPtr->embeddedPtr != topLevelPtr;
+	    containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr) {
+	/* Empty loop body. */
+    }
+
+    event.xfocus.type = FocusIn;
+    event.xfocus.serial = LastKnownRequestProcessed(topLevelPtr->display);
+    event.xfocus.send_event = 1;
+    event.xfocus.display = topLevelPtr->display;
+    event.xfocus.window = containerPtr->parent;
+    event.xfocus.mode = EMBEDDED_APP_WANTS_FOCUS;
+    event.xfocus.detail = force;
+    XSendEvent(event.xfocus.display, event.xfocus.window, False, 0, &event);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpTestembedCmd --
+ *
+ *	This procedure implements the "testembed" command.  It returns
+ *	some or all of the information in the list pointed to by
+ *	firstContainerPtr.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpTestembedCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Main window for application. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    int all;
+    Container *containerPtr;
+    Tcl_DString dString;
+    char buffer[50];
+
+    if ((argc > 1) && (strcmp(argv[1], "all") == 0)) {
+	all = 1;
+    } else {
+	all = 0;
+    }
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&dString);
+    for (containerPtr = firstContainerPtr; containerPtr != NULL;
+	    containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr) {
+	Tcl_DStringStartSublist(&dString);
+	if (containerPtr->parent == None) {
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&dString, "");
+	} else {
+	    if (all) {
+		sprintf(buffer, "0x%x", (int) containerPtr->parent);
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&dString, buffer);
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&dString, "XXX");
+	    }
+	}
+	if (containerPtr->parentPtr == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&dString, "");
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&dString,
+		    containerPtr->parentPtr->pathName);
+	}
+	if (containerPtr->wrapper == None) {
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&dString, "");
+	} else {
+	    if (all) {
+		sprintf(buffer, "0x%x", (int) containerPtr->wrapper);
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&dString, buffer);
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&dString, "XXX");
+	    }
+	}
+	if (containerPtr->embeddedPtr == NULL) {
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&dString, "");
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&dString,
+		    containerPtr->embeddedPtr->pathName);
+	}
+	Tcl_DStringEndSublist(&dString);
+    }
+    Tcl_DStringResult(interp, &dString);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * EmbedWindowDeleted --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a window involved in embedding
+ *	(as either the container or the embedded application) is
+ *	destroyed.  It cleans up the Container structure for the window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A Container structure may be freed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+EmbedWindowDeleted(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Tk's information about window that
+				 * was deleted. */
+{
+    Container *containerPtr, *prevPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Find the Container structure for this window work.  Delete the
+     * information about the embedded application and free the container's
+     * record.
+     */
+
+    prevPtr = NULL;
+    containerPtr = firstContainerPtr;
+    while (1) {
+	if (containerPtr->embeddedPtr == winPtr) {
+	    containerPtr->wrapper = None;
+	    containerPtr->embeddedPtr = NULL;
+	    break;
+	}
+	if (containerPtr->parentPtr == winPtr) {
+	    containerPtr->parentPtr = NULL;
+	    break;
+	}
+	prevPtr = containerPtr;
+	containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr;
+    }
+    if ((containerPtr->embeddedPtr == NULL)
+	    && (containerPtr->parentPtr == NULL)) {
+	if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+	    firstContainerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr;
+	} else {
+	    prevPtr->nextPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr;
+	}
+	ckfree((char *) containerPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkUnixContainerId --
+ *
+ *	Given an embedded window, this procedure returns the X window
+ *	identifier for the associated container window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the X window identifier for winPtr's
+ *	container window.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Window
+TkUnixContainerId(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Tk's structure for an embedded window. */
+{
+    Container *containerPtr;
+
+    for (containerPtr = firstContainerPtr; containerPtr != NULL;
+	    containerPtr = containerPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (containerPtr->embeddedPtr == winPtr) {
+	    return containerPtr->parent;
+	}
+    }
+    panic("TkUnixContainerId couldn't find window");
+    return None;
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixEvent.c b/unix/tkUnixEvent.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ace4cc3
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixEvent.c
@@ -0,0 +1,498 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixEvent.c --
+ *
+ *	This file implements an event source for X displays for the
+ *	UNIX version of Tk.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixEvent.c 1.17 97/09/11 12:51:04
+ */
+
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#include "tkUnixInt.h"
+#include <signal.h>
+
+/*
+ * The following static indicates whether this module has been initialized.
+ */
+
+static int initialized = 0;
+
+/*
+ * Prototypes for procedures that are referenced only in this file:
+ */
+
+static void		DisplayCheckProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    int flags));
+static void		DisplayExitHandler _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    ClientData clientData));
+static void		DisplayFileProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    int flags));
+static void		DisplaySetupProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    int flags));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkCreateXEventSource --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called during Tk initialization to create
+ *	the event source for X Window events.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A new event source is created.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkCreateXEventSource()
+{
+    if (!initialized) {
+	initialized = 1;
+	Tcl_CreateEventSource(DisplaySetupProc, DisplayCheckProc, NULL);
+	Tcl_CreateExitHandler(DisplayExitHandler, NULL);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DisplayExitHandler --
+ *
+ *	This function is called during finalization to clean up the
+ *	display module.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DisplayExitHandler(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Not used. */
+{
+    Tcl_DeleteEventSource(DisplaySetupProc, DisplayCheckProc, NULL);
+    initialized = 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpOpenDisplay --
+ *
+ *	Allocates a new TkDisplay, opens the X display, and establishes
+ *	the file handler for the connection.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A pointer to a Tk display structure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Opens a display.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkDisplay *
+TkpOpenDisplay(display_name)
+    char *display_name;
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+    Display *display = XOpenDisplay(display_name);
+
+    if (display == NULL) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+    dispPtr = (TkDisplay *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkDisplay));
+    dispPtr->display = display;
+    Tcl_CreateFileHandler(ConnectionNumber(display), TCL_READABLE,
+	    DisplayFileProc, (ClientData) dispPtr);
+    return dispPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpCloseDisplay --
+ *
+ *	Cancels notifier callbacks and closes a display.  
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Deallocates the displayPtr.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpCloseDisplay(displayPtr)
+    TkDisplay *displayPtr;
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = (TkDisplay *) displayPtr;
+
+    if (dispPtr->display != 0) {
+        Tcl_DeleteFileHandler(ConnectionNumber(dispPtr->display));
+	
+        (void) XSync(dispPtr->display, False);
+        (void) XCloseDisplay(dispPtr->display);
+    }
+    
+    ckfree((char *) dispPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DisplaySetupProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure implements the setup part of the UNIX X display
+ *	event source.  It is invoked by Tcl_DoOneEvent before entering
+ *	the notifier to check for events on all displays.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If data is queued on a display inside Xlib, then the maximum
+ *	block time will be set to 0 to ensure that the notifier returns
+ *	control to Tcl even if there is no more data on the X connection.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DisplaySetupProc(clientData, flags)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Not used. */
+    int flags;
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+    static Tcl_Time blockTime = { 0, 0 };
+
+    if (!(flags & TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    for (dispPtr = tkDisplayList; dispPtr != NULL;
+	 dispPtr = dispPtr->nextPtr) {
+
+	/*
+	 * Flush the display. If data is pending on the X queue, set
+	 * the block time to zero.  This ensures that we won't block
+	 * in the notifier if there is data in the X queue, but not on
+	 * the server socket.
+	 */
+
+	XFlush(dispPtr->display);
+	if (XQLength(dispPtr->display) > 0) {
+	    Tcl_SetMaxBlockTime(&blockTime);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DisplayCheckProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure checks for events sitting in the X event
+ *	queue.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Moves queued events onto the Tcl event queue.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DisplayCheckProc(clientData, flags)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Not used. */
+    int flags;
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+    XEvent event;
+    int numFound;
+
+    if (!(flags & TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    for (dispPtr = tkDisplayList; dispPtr != NULL;
+	 dispPtr = dispPtr->nextPtr) {
+	XFlush(dispPtr->display);
+	numFound = XQLength(dispPtr->display);
+
+	/*
+	 * Transfer events from the X event queue to the Tk event queue.
+	 */
+
+	while (numFound > 0) {
+	    XNextEvent(dispPtr->display, &event);
+	    Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+	    numFound--;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DisplayFileProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure implements the file handler for the X connection.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Makes entries on the Tcl event queue for all the events available
+ *	from all the displays.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DisplayFileProc(clientData, flags)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* The display pointer. */
+    int flags;				/* Should be TCL_READABLE. */
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = (TkDisplay *) clientData;
+    Display *display = dispPtr->display;
+    XEvent event;
+    int numFound;
+
+    XFlush(display);
+    numFound = XEventsQueued(display, QueuedAfterReading);
+    if (numFound == 0) {
+	
+	/*
+	 * Things are very tricky if there aren't any events readable
+	 * at this point (after all, there was supposedly data
+	 * available on the connection).  A couple of things could
+	 * have occurred:
+	 * 
+	 * One possibility is that there were only error events in the
+	 * input from the server.  If this happens, we should return
+	 * (we don't want to go to sleep in XNextEvent below, since
+	 * this would block out other sources of input to the
+	 * process).
+	 *
+	 * Another possibility is that our connection to the server
+	 * has been closed.  This will not necessarily be detected in
+	 * XEventsQueued (!!), so if we just return then there will be
+	 * an infinite loop.  To detect such an error, generate a NoOp
+	 * protocol request to exercise the connection to the server,
+	 * then return.  However, must disable SIGPIPE while sending
+	 * the request, or else the process will die from the signal
+	 * and won't invoke the X error function to print a nice (?!)
+	 * message.
+	 */
+	
+	void (*oldHandler)();
+	
+	oldHandler = (void (*)()) signal(SIGPIPE, SIG_IGN);
+	XNoOp(display);
+	XFlush(display);
+	(void) signal(SIGPIPE, oldHandler);
+    }
+    
+    /*
+     * Transfer events from the X event queue to the Tk event queue.
+     */
+
+    while (numFound > 0) {
+	XNextEvent(display, &event);
+	Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+	numFound--;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkUnixDoOneXEvent --
+ *
+ *	This routine waits for an X event to be processed or for
+ *	a timeout to occur.  The timeout is specified as an absolute
+ *	time.  This routine is called when Tk needs to wait for a
+ *	particular X event without letting arbitrary events be
+ *	processed.  The caller will typically call Tk_RestrictEvents
+ *	to set up an event filter before calling this routine.  This
+ *	routine will service at most one event per invocation.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns 0 if the timeout has expired, otherwise returns 1.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Can invoke arbitrary Tcl scripts.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkUnixDoOneXEvent(timePtr)
+    Tcl_Time *timePtr;		/* Specifies the absolute time when the
+				 * call should time out. */
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+    static fd_mask readMask[MASK_SIZE];
+    struct timeval blockTime, *timeoutPtr;
+    Tcl_Time now;
+    int fd, index, bit, numFound, numFdBits = 0;
+
+    /*
+     * Look for queued events first. 
+     */
+
+    if (Tcl_ServiceEvent(TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS)) {
+	return 1;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the next block time and check to see if we have timed out.
+     * Note that HP-UX defines tv_sec to be unsigned so we have to be
+     * careful in our arithmetic.
+     */
+
+    if (timePtr) {
+	TclpGetTime(&now);
+	blockTime.tv_sec = timePtr->sec;
+	blockTime.tv_usec = timePtr->usec - now.usec;
+	if (blockTime.tv_usec < 0) {
+	    now.sec += 1;
+	    blockTime.tv_usec += 1000000;
+	}
+	if (blockTime.tv_sec < now.sec) {
+	    blockTime.tv_sec = 0;
+	    blockTime.tv_usec = 0;
+	} else {
+	    blockTime.tv_sec -= now.sec;
+	}
+	timeoutPtr = &blockTime;
+    } else {
+	timeoutPtr = NULL;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Set up the select mask for all of the displays.  If a display has
+     * data pending, then we want to poll instead of blocking.
+     */
+
+    memset((VOID *) readMask, 0, MASK_SIZE*sizeof(fd_mask));
+    for (dispPtr = tkDisplayList; dispPtr != NULL;
+	 dispPtr = dispPtr->nextPtr) {
+	XFlush(dispPtr->display);
+	if (XQLength(dispPtr->display) > 0) {
+	    blockTime.tv_sec = 0;
+	    blockTime.tv_usec = 0;
+	}
+	fd = ConnectionNumber(dispPtr->display);
+	index = fd/(NBBY*sizeof(fd_mask));
+	bit = 1 << (fd%(NBBY*sizeof(fd_mask)));
+	readMask[index] |= bit;
+	if (numFdBits <= fd) {
+	    numFdBits = fd+1;
+	}
+    }
+
+    numFound = select(numFdBits, (SELECT_MASK *) &readMask[0], NULL, NULL,
+	    timeoutPtr);
+    if (numFound <= 0) {
+	/*
+	 * Some systems don't clear the masks after an error, so
+	 * we have to do it here.
+	 */
+
+	memset((VOID *) readMask, 0, MASK_SIZE*sizeof(fd_mask));
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Process any new events on the display connections.
+     */
+
+    for (dispPtr = tkDisplayList; dispPtr != NULL;
+	 dispPtr = dispPtr->nextPtr) {
+	fd = ConnectionNumber(dispPtr->display);
+	index = fd/(NBBY*sizeof(fd_mask));
+	bit = 1 << (fd%(NBBY*sizeof(fd_mask)));
+	if ((readMask[index] & bit) || (XQLength(dispPtr->display) > 0)) {
+	    DisplayFileProc((ClientData)dispPtr, TCL_READABLE);
+	}
+    }
+    if (Tcl_ServiceEvent(TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS)) {
+	return 1;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Check to see if we timed out.
+     */
+
+    if (timePtr) {
+	TclpGetTime(&now);
+	if ((now.sec > timePtr->sec) || ((now.sec == timePtr->sec)
+		&& (now.usec > timePtr->usec))) {
+	    return 0;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * We had an event but we did not generate a Tcl event from it. Behave
+     * as though we dealt with it. (JYL&SS)
+     */
+
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpSync --
+ *
+ *	This routine ensures that all pending X requests have been
+ *	seen by the server, and that any pending X events have been
+ *	moved onto the Tk event queue.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Places new events on the Tk event queue.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpSync(display)
+    Display *display;		/* Display to sync. */
+{
+    int numFound = 0;
+    XEvent event;
+
+    XSync(display, False);
+
+    /*
+     * Transfer events from the X event queue to the Tk event queue.
+     */
+
+    numFound = XQLength(display);
+    while (numFound > 0) {
+	XNextEvent(display, &event);
+	Tk_QueueWindowEvent(&event, TCL_QUEUE_TAIL);
+	numFound--;
+    }
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixFocus.c b/unix/tkUnixFocus.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5c1a4f6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixFocus.c
@@ -0,0 +1,149 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixFocus.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains platform specific procedures that manage
+ *	focus for Tk.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixFocus.c 1.9 97/10/31 09:54:04
+ */
+
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkUnixInt.h"
+
+extern int tclFocusDebug;
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpChangeFocus --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to move the official X focus from
+ *	one window to another.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the serial number of the command that
+ *	changed the focus.  It may be needed by the caller to filter
+ *	out focus change events that were queued before the command.
+ *	If the procedure doesn't actually change the focus then
+ *	it returns 0.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The official X focus window changes;  the application's focus
+ *	window isn't changed by this procedure.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpChangeFocus(winPtr, force)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that is to receive the X focus. */
+    int force;			/* Non-zero means claim the focus even
+				 * if it didn't originally belong to
+				 * topLevelPtr's application. */
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler errHandler;
+    Window window, root, parent, *children; 
+    unsigned int numChildren, serial; 
+    TkWindow *winPtr2;
+    int dummy;
+
+    /*
+     * Don't set the X focus to a window that's marked
+     * override-redirect.  This is a hack to avoid problems with menus
+     * under olvwm: if we move the focus then the focus can get lost
+     * during keyboard traversal.  Fortunately, we don't really need to
+     * move the focus for menus: events will still find their way to the
+     * focus window, and menus aren't decorated anyway so the window
+     * manager doesn't need to hear about the focus change in order to
+     * redecorate the menu.
+     */
+
+    serial = 0;
+    if (winPtr->atts.override_redirect) {
+	return serial;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Check to make sure that the focus is still in one of the windows
+     * of this application or one of their descendants.  Furthermore,
+     * grab the server to make sure that the focus doesn't change in the
+     * middle of this operation.
+     */
+
+    XGrabServer(dispPtr->display);
+    if (!force) {
+	/*
+	 * Find the focus window, then see if it or one of its ancestors
+	 * is a window in our application (it's possible that the focus
+	 * window is in an embedded application, which may or may not be
+	 * in the same process.
+	 */
+
+	XGetInputFocus(dispPtr->display, &window, &dummy);
+	while (1) {
+	    winPtr2 = (TkWindow *) Tk_IdToWindow(dispPtr->display, window);
+	    if ((winPtr2 != NULL) && (winPtr2->mainPtr == winPtr->mainPtr)) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	    if ((window == PointerRoot) || (window == None)) {
+		goto done;
+	    }
+	    XQueryTree(dispPtr->display, window, &root, &parent, &children,
+		    &numChildren);
+	    if (children != NULL) {
+		XFree((void *) children);
+	    }
+	    if (parent == root) {
+		goto done;
+	    }
+	    window = parent;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Tell X to change the focus.  Ignore errors that occur when changing
+     * the focus:  it is still possible that the window we're focussing
+     * to could have gotten unmapped, which will generate an error.
+     */
+
+    errHandler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(dispPtr->display, -1, -1, -1,
+	    (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+    if (winPtr->window == None) {
+	panic("ChangeXFocus got null X window");
+    }
+    XSetInputFocus(dispPtr->display, winPtr->window, RevertToParent,
+	    CurrentTime);
+    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(errHandler);
+
+    /*
+     * Remember the current serial number for the X server and issue
+     * a dummy server request.  This marks the position at which we
+     * changed the focus, so we can distinguish FocusIn and FocusOut
+     * events on either side of the mark.
+     */
+
+    serial = NextRequest(winPtr->display);
+    XNoOp(winPtr->display);
+
+    done:
+    XUngrabServer(dispPtr->display);
+
+    /*
+     * After ungrabbing the server, it's important to flush the output
+     * immediately so that the server sees the ungrab command.  Otherwise
+     * we might do something else that needs to communicate with the
+     * server (such as invoking a subprocess that needs to do I/O to
+     * the screen); if the ungrab command is still sitting in our
+     * output buffer, we could deadlock.
+     */
+
+    XFlush(dispPtr->display);
+    return serial;
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixFont.c b/unix/tkUnixFont.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..d25f157
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixFont.c
@@ -0,0 +1,979 @@
+/*
+ * tkUnixFont.c --
+ *
+ *	Contains the Unix implementation of the platform-independant
+ *	font package interface.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixFont.c 1.16 97/10/23 12:47:53
+ */
+ 
+#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#include "tkUnixInt.h"
+
+#include "tkFont.h"
+
+#ifndef ABS
+#define ABS(n)	(((n) < 0) ? -(n) : (n))
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * The following structure represents Unix's implementation of a font.
+ */
+ 
+typedef struct UnixFont {
+    TkFont font;		/* Stuff used by generic font package.  Must
+				 * be first in structure. */
+    Display *display;		/* The display to which font belongs. */
+    XFontStruct *fontStructPtr;	/* X information about font. */
+    char types[256];		/* Array giving types of all characters in
+				 * the font, used when displaying control
+				 * characters.  See below for definition. */
+    int widths[256];		/* Array giving widths of all possible
+				 * characters in the font. */
+    int underlinePos;		/* Offset from baseline to origin of
+				 * underline bar (used for simulating a native
+				 * underlined font). */
+    int barHeight;		/* Height of underline or overstrike bar
+				 * (used for simulating a native underlined or
+				 * strikeout font). */
+} UnixFont;
+
+/*
+ * Possible values for entries in the "types" field in a UnixFont structure,
+ * which classifies the types of all characters in the given font.  This
+ * information is used when measuring and displaying characters.
+ *
+ * NORMAL:		Standard character.
+ * REPLACE:		This character doesn't print:  instead of
+ *			displaying character, display a replacement
+ *			sequence like "\n" (for those characters where
+ *			ANSI C defines such a sequence) or a sequence
+ *			of the form "\xdd" where dd is the hex equivalent
+ *			of the character.
+ * SKIP:		Don't display anything for this character.  This
+ *			is only used where the font doesn't contain
+ *			all the characters needed to generate
+ *			replacement sequences.
+ */ 
+
+#define NORMAL		0
+#define REPLACE		1
+#define SKIP		2
+
+/*
+ * Characters used when displaying control sequences.
+ */
+
+static char hexChars[] = "0123456789abcdefxtnvr\\";
+
+/*
+ * The following table maps some control characters to sequences like '\n'
+ * rather than '\x10'.  A zero entry in the table means no such mapping
+ * exists, and the table only maps characters less than 0x10.
+ */
+
+static char mapChars[] = {
+    0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0,
+    'a', 'b', 't', 'n', 'v', 'f', 'r',
+    0
+};
+
+
+static UnixFont *	AllocFont _ANSI_ARGS_((TkFont *tkFontPtr,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, XFontStruct *fontStructPtr,
+			    CONST char *fontName));
+static void		DrawChars _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
+			    Drawable drawable, GC gc, UnixFont *fontPtr,
+			    CONST char *source, int numChars, int x,
+			    int y));
+static int		GetControlCharSubst _ANSI_ARGS_((int c, char buf[4]));
+
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetNativeFont --
+ *
+ *	Map a platform-specific native font name to a TkFont.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ * 	The return value is a pointer to a TkFont that represents the
+ *	native font.  If a native font by the given name could not be
+ *	found, the return value is NULL.  
+ *
+ *	Every call to this procedure returns a new TkFont structure,
+ *	even if the name has already been seen before.  The caller should
+ *	call TkpDeleteFont() when the font is no longer needed.
+ *
+ *	The caller is responsible for initializing the memory associated
+ *	with the generic TkFont when this function returns and releasing
+ *	the contents of the generic TkFont before calling TkpDeleteFont().
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkFont *
+TkpGetNativeFont(tkwin, name)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For display where font will be used. */
+    CONST char *name;		/* Platform-specific font name. */
+{
+    XFontStruct *fontStructPtr;
+
+    fontStructPtr = XLoadQueryFont(Tk_Display(tkwin), name);
+    if (fontStructPtr == NULL) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    return (TkFont *) AllocFont(NULL, tkwin, fontStructPtr, name);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetFontFromAttributes -- 
+ *
+ *	Given a desired set of attributes for a font, find a font with
+ *	the closest matching attributes.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ * 	The return value is a pointer to a TkFont that represents the
+ *	font with the desired attributes.  If a font with the desired
+ *	attributes could not be constructed, some other font will be
+ *	substituted automatically.
+ *
+ *	Every call to this procedure returns a new TkFont structure,
+ *	even if the specified attributes have already been seen before.
+ *	The caller should call TkpDeleteFont() to free the platform-
+ *	specific data when the font is no longer needed.  
+ *
+ *	The caller is responsible for initializing the memory associated
+ *	with the generic TkFont when this function returns and releasing
+ *	the contents of the generic TkFont before calling TkpDeleteFont().
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+TkFont *
+TkpGetFontFromAttributes(tkFontPtr, tkwin, faPtr)
+    TkFont *tkFontPtr;		/* If non-NULL, store the information in
+				 * this existing TkFont structure, rather than
+				 * allocating a new structure to hold the
+				 * font; the existing contents of the font
+				 * will be released.  If NULL, a new TkFont
+				 * structure is allocated. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For display where font will be used. */
+    CONST TkFontAttributes *faPtr;  /* Set of attributes to match. */
+{
+    int numNames, score, i, scaleable, pixelsize, xaPixelsize;
+    int bestIdx, bestScore, bestScaleableIdx, bestScaleableScore;
+    TkXLFDAttributes xa;    
+    char buf[256];
+    UnixFont *fontPtr;
+    char **nameList;
+    XFontStruct *fontStructPtr;
+    CONST char *fmt, *family;
+    double d;
+
+    family = faPtr->family;
+    if (family == NULL) {
+	family = "*";
+    }
+
+    pixelsize = -faPtr->pointsize;
+    if (pixelsize < 0) {
+        d = -pixelsize * 25.4 / 72;
+	d *= WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	d /= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	d += 0.5;
+        pixelsize = (int) d;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Replace the standard Windows and Mac family names with the names that
+     * X likes.
+     */
+
+    if ((strcasecmp("Times New Roman", family) == 0)
+	    || (strcasecmp("New York", family) == 0)) {
+	family = "Times";
+    } else if ((strcasecmp("Courier New", family) == 0)
+	    || (strcasecmp("Monaco", family) == 0)) {
+	family = "Courier";
+    } else if ((strcasecmp("Arial", family) == 0)
+	    || (strcasecmp("Geneva", family) == 0)) {
+	family = "Helvetica";
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * First try for the Q&D exact match.  
+     */
+
+#if 0
+    sprintf(buf, "-*-%.200s-%s-%c-normal-*-*-%d-*-*-*-*-iso8859-1", family,
+	    ((faPtr->weight > TK_FW_NORMAL) ? "bold" : "medium"),
+	    ((faPtr->slant == TK_FS_ROMAN) ? 'r' :
+		    (faPtr->slant == TK_FS_ITALIC) ? 'i' : 'o'),
+	    faPtr->pointsize * 10);
+    fontStructPtr = XLoadQueryFont(Tk_Display(tkwin), buf);
+#else
+    fontStructPtr = NULL;
+#endif
+
+    if (fontStructPtr != NULL) {
+	goto end;
+    }
+    /*
+     * Couldn't find exact match.  Now fall back to other available
+     * physical fonts.  
+     */
+
+    fmt = "-*-%.240s-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*-*";
+    sprintf(buf, fmt, family);
+    nameList = XListFonts(Tk_Display(tkwin), buf, 10000, &numNames);
+    if (numNames == 0) {
+	/*
+	 * Try getting some system font.
+	 */
+
+	sprintf(buf, fmt, "fixed");
+	nameList = XListFonts(Tk_Display(tkwin), buf, 10000, &numNames);
+	if (numNames == 0) {
+	    getsystem:
+	    fontStructPtr = XLoadQueryFont(Tk_Display(tkwin), "fixed");
+	    if (fontStructPtr == NULL) {
+		fontStructPtr = XLoadQueryFont(Tk_Display(tkwin), "*");
+		if (fontStructPtr == NULL) {
+		    panic("TkpGetFontFromAttributes: cannot get any font");
+		}
+	    }
+	    goto end;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Inspect each of the XLFDs and pick the one that most closely
+     * matches the desired attributes.
+     */
+
+    bestIdx = 0;
+    bestScore = INT_MAX;
+    bestScaleableIdx = 0;
+    bestScaleableScore = INT_MAX;
+
+    for (i = 0; i < numNames; i++) {
+	score = 0;
+	scaleable = 0;
+	if (TkParseXLFD(nameList[i], &xa) != TCL_OK) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+	xaPixelsize = -xa.fa.pointsize;
+	
+	/*
+	 * Since most people used to use -adobe-* in their XLFDs,
+	 * preserve the preference for "adobe" foundry.  Otherwise
+	 * some applications looks may change slightly if another foundry
+	 * is chosen.
+	 */
+	 
+	if (strcasecmp(xa.foundry, "adobe") != 0) {
+	    score += 3000;
+	}
+	if (xa.fa.pointsize == 0) {
+	    /*
+	     * A scaleable font is almost always acceptable, but the
+	     * corresponding bitmapped font would be better.
+	     */
+
+	    score += 10;
+	    scaleable = 1;
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * A font that is too small is better than one that is too
+	     * big.
+	     */
+
+	    if (xaPixelsize > pixelsize) {
+		score += (xaPixelsize - pixelsize) * 120;
+	    } else { 
+		score += (pixelsize - xaPixelsize) * 100;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	score += ABS(xa.fa.weight - faPtr->weight) * 30;
+	score += ABS(xa.fa.slant - faPtr->slant) * 25;
+	if (xa.slant == TK_FS_OBLIQUE) {
+	    /*
+	     * Italic fonts are preferred over oblique. */
+
+	    score += 4;
+	}
+
+	if (xa.setwidth != TK_SW_NORMAL) {
+	    /*
+	     * The normal setwidth is highly preferred.
+	     */
+	    score += 2000;
+	}
+	if (xa.charset == TK_CS_OTHER) {
+	    /*
+	     * The standard character set is highly preferred over
+	     * foreign languages charsets (because we don't support
+	     * other languages yet).
+	     */
+	    score += 11000;
+	}
+	if ((xa.charset == TK_CS_NORMAL) && (xa.encoding != 1)) {
+	    /*
+	     * The '1' encoding for the characters above 0x7f is highly
+	     * preferred over the other encodings.
+	     */
+	    score += 8000;
+	}
+
+	if (scaleable) {
+	    if (score < bestScaleableScore) {
+		bestScaleableIdx = i;
+		bestScaleableScore = score;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    if (score < bestScore) {
+		bestIdx = i;
+		bestScore = score;
+	    }
+	}
+	if (score == 0) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Now we know which is the closest matching scaleable font and the
+     * closest matching bitmapped font.  If the scaleable font was a
+     * better match, try getting the scaleable font; however, if the
+     * scalable font was not actually available in the desired
+     * pointsize, fall back to the closest bitmapped font.
+     */
+
+    fontStructPtr = NULL;
+    if (bestScaleableScore < bestScore) {
+	char *str, *rest;
+	
+	/*
+	 * Fill in the desired pointsize info for this font.
+	 */
+
+	tryscale:
+	str = nameList[bestScaleableIdx];
+	for (i = 0; i < XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE - 1; i++) {
+	    str = strchr(str + 1, '-');
+	}
+	rest = str;
+	for (i = XLFD_PIXEL_SIZE - 1; i < XLFD_REGISTRY; i++) {
+	    rest = strchr(rest + 1, '-');
+	}
+	*str = '\0';
+	sprintf(buf, "%.240s-*-%d-*-*-*-*-*%s", nameList[bestScaleableIdx],
+		pixelsize, rest);
+	*str = '-';
+	fontStructPtr = XLoadQueryFont(Tk_Display(tkwin), buf);
+	bestScaleableScore = INT_MAX;
+    }
+    if (fontStructPtr == NULL) {
+	strcpy(buf, nameList[bestIdx]);
+	fontStructPtr = XLoadQueryFont(Tk_Display(tkwin), buf);
+	if (fontStructPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * This shouldn't happen because the font name is one of the
+	     * names that X gave us to use, but it does anyhow.
+	     */
+
+	    if (bestScaleableScore < INT_MAX) {
+		goto tryscale;
+	    } else {
+		XFreeFontNames(nameList);
+		goto getsystem;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    XFreeFontNames(nameList);
+
+    end:
+    fontPtr = AllocFont(tkFontPtr, tkwin, fontStructPtr, buf);
+    fontPtr->font.fa.underline  = faPtr->underline;
+    fontPtr->font.fa.overstrike = faPtr->overstrike;
+
+    return (TkFont *) fontPtr;
+}
+
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDeleteFont --
+ *
+ *	Called to release a font allocated by TkpGetNativeFont() or
+ *	TkpGetFontFromAttributes().  The caller should have already
+ *	released the fields of the TkFont that are used exclusively by
+ *	the generic TkFont code.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	TkFont is deallocated.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDeleteFont(tkFontPtr)
+    TkFont *tkFontPtr;		/* Token of font to be deleted. */
+{
+    UnixFont *fontPtr;
+
+    fontPtr = (UnixFont *) tkFontPtr;
+
+    XFreeFont(fontPtr->display, fontPtr->fontStructPtr);
+    ckfree((char *) fontPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetFontFamilies --
+ *
+ *	Return information about the font families that are available
+ *	on the display of the given window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	interp->result is modified to hold a list of all the available
+ *	font families.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+ 
+void
+TkpGetFontFamilies(interp, tkwin)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+{
+    int i, new, numNames;
+    char *family, *end, *p;
+    Tcl_HashTable familyTable;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+    Tcl_HashSearch search;
+    char **nameList;
+
+    Tcl_InitHashTable(&familyTable, TCL_STRING_KEYS);
+
+    nameList = XListFonts(Tk_Display(tkwin), "*", 10000, &numNames);
+    for (i = 0; i < numNames; i++) {
+	if (nameList[i][0] != '-') {
+	    continue;
+	}
+	family = strchr(nameList[i] + 1, '-');
+	if (family == NULL) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+	family++;
+	end = strchr(family, '-');
+	if (end == NULL) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+	*end = '\0';
+	for (p = family; *p != '\0'; p++) {
+	    if (isupper(UCHAR(*p))) {
+		*p = tolower(UCHAR(*p));
+	    }
+	}
+	Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&familyTable, family, &new);
+    }
+
+    hPtr = Tcl_FirstHashEntry(&familyTable, &search);
+    while (hPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_AppendElement(interp, Tcl_GetHashKey(&familyTable, hPtr));
+	hPtr = Tcl_NextHashEntry(&search);
+    }
+
+    Tcl_DeleteHashTable(&familyTable);
+    XFreeFontNames(nameList);
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ *  Tk_MeasureChars --
+ *
+ *	Determine the number of characters from the string that will fit
+ *	in the given horizontal span.  The measurement is done under the
+ *	assumption that Tk_DrawChars() will be used to actually display
+ *	the characters.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the number of characters from source that
+ *	fit into the span that extends from 0 to maxLength.  *lengthPtr is
+ *	filled with the x-coordinate of the right edge of the last
+ *	character that did fit.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+int
+Tk_MeasureChars(tkfont, source, numChars, maxLength, flags, lengthPtr)
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font in which characters will be drawn. */
+    CONST char *source;		/* Characters to be displayed.  Need not be
+				 * '\0' terminated. */
+    int numChars;		/* Maximum number of characters to consider
+				 * from source string. */
+    int maxLength;		/* If > 0, maxLength specifies the longest
+				 * permissible line length; don't consider any
+				 * character that would cross this
+				 * x-position.  If <= 0, then line length is
+				 * unbounded and the flags argument is
+				 * ignored. */
+    int flags;			/* Various flag bits OR-ed together:
+				 * TK_PARTIAL_OK means include the last char
+				 * which only partially fit on this line.
+				 * TK_WHOLE_WORDS means stop on a word
+				 * boundary, if possible.
+				 * TK_AT_LEAST_ONE means return at least one
+				 * character even if no characters fit. */
+    int *lengthPtr;		/* Filled with x-location just after the
+				 * terminating character. */
+{
+    UnixFont *fontPtr;
+    CONST char *p;		/* Current character. */
+    CONST char *term;		/* Pointer to most recent character that
+				 * may legally be a terminating character. */
+    int termX;			/* X-position just after term. */
+    int curX;			/* X-position corresponding to p. */
+    int newX;			/* X-position corresponding to p+1. */
+    int c, sawNonSpace;
+
+    fontPtr = (UnixFont *) tkfont;
+
+    if (numChars == 0) {
+	*lengthPtr = 0;
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    if (maxLength <= 0) {
+	maxLength = INT_MAX;
+    }
+
+    newX = curX = termX = 0;
+    p = term = source;
+    sawNonSpace = !isspace(UCHAR(*p));
+
+    /*
+     * Scan the input string one character at a time, calculating width.
+     */
+
+    for (c = UCHAR(*p); ; ) {
+	newX += fontPtr->widths[c];
+	if (newX > maxLength) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	curX = newX;
+	numChars--;
+	p++;
+	if (numChars == 0) {
+	    term = p;
+	    termX = curX;
+	    break;
+	}
+
+	c = UCHAR(*p);
+	if (isspace(c)) {
+	    if (sawNonSpace) {
+		term = p;
+		termX = curX;
+		sawNonSpace = 0;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    sawNonSpace = 1;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * P points to the first character that doesn't fit in the desired
+     * span.  Use the flags to figure out what to return.
+     */
+
+    if ((flags & TK_PARTIAL_OK) && (numChars > 0) && (curX < maxLength)) {
+	/*
+	 * Include the first character that didn't quite fit in the desired
+	 * span.  The width returned will include the width of that extra
+	 * character.
+	 */
+
+	numChars--;
+	curX = newX;
+	p++;
+    }
+    if ((flags & TK_AT_LEAST_ONE) && (term == source) && (numChars > 0)) {
+	term = p;
+	termX = curX;
+	if (term == source) {
+	    term++;
+	    termX = newX;
+	}
+    } else if ((numChars == 0) || !(flags & TK_WHOLE_WORDS)) {
+	term = p;
+	termX = curX;
+    }
+
+    *lengthPtr = termX;
+    return term-source;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_DrawChars, DrawChars --
+ *
+ *	Draw a string of characters on the screen.  Tk_DrawChars()
+ *	expands control characters that occur in the string to \X or
+ *	\xXX sequences.  DrawChars() just draws the strings.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Information gets drawn on the screen.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_DrawChars(display, drawable, gc, tkfont, source, numChars, x, y)
+    Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw. */
+    Drawable drawable;		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    GC gc;			/* Graphics context for drawing characters. */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* Font in which characters will be drawn;
+				 * must be the same as font used in GC. */
+    CONST char *source;		/* Characters to be displayed.  Need not be
+				 * '\0' terminated.  All Tk meta-characters
+				 * (tabs, control characters, and newlines)
+				 * should be stripped out of the string that
+				 * is passed to this function.  If they are
+				 * not stripped out, they will be displayed as
+				 * regular printing characters. */
+    int numChars;		/* Number of characters in string. */
+    int x, y;			/* Coordinates at which to place origin of
+				 * string when drawing. */
+{
+    UnixFont *fontPtr;
+    CONST char *p;
+    int i, type;
+    char buf[4];
+
+    fontPtr = (UnixFont *) tkfont;
+
+    p = source;
+    for (i = 0; i < numChars; i++) {
+	type = fontPtr->types[UCHAR(*p)];
+	if (type != NORMAL) {
+	    DrawChars(display, drawable, gc, fontPtr, source, p - source, x, y);
+	    x += XTextWidth(fontPtr->fontStructPtr, source, p - source);
+	    if (type == REPLACE) {
+		DrawChars(display, drawable, gc, fontPtr, buf,
+			GetControlCharSubst(UCHAR(*p), buf), x, y);
+		x += fontPtr->widths[UCHAR(*p)];
+	    }
+	    source = p + 1;
+	}
+	p++;
+    }
+
+    DrawChars(display, drawable, gc, fontPtr, source, p - source, x, y);
+}
+
+static void
+DrawChars(display, drawable, gc, fontPtr, source, numChars, x, y)
+    Display *display;		/* Display on which to draw. */
+    Drawable drawable;		/* Window or pixmap in which to draw. */
+    GC gc;			/* Graphics context for drawing characters. */
+    UnixFont *fontPtr;		/* Font in which characters will be drawn;
+				 * must be the same as font used in GC. */
+    CONST char *source;		/* Characters to be displayed.  Need not be
+				 * '\0' terminated.  All Tk meta-characters
+				 * (tabs, control characters, and newlines)
+				 * should be stripped out of the string that
+				 * is passed to this function.  If they are
+				 * not stripped out, they will be displayed as
+				 * regular printing characters. */
+    int numChars;		/* Number of characters in string. */
+    int x, y;			/* Coordinates at which to place origin of
+				 * string when drawing. */
+{		
+    XDrawString(display, drawable, gc, x, y, source, numChars);
+
+    if (fontPtr->font.fa.underline != 0) {
+	XFillRectangle(display, drawable, gc, x,
+		y + fontPtr->underlinePos,
+		(unsigned) XTextWidth(fontPtr->fontStructPtr, source, numChars),
+		(unsigned) fontPtr->barHeight);
+    }
+    if (fontPtr->font.fa.overstrike != 0) {
+	y -= fontPtr->font.fm.descent + (fontPtr->font.fm.ascent) / 10;
+	XFillRectangle(display, drawable, gc, x, y,
+		(unsigned) XTextWidth(fontPtr->fontStructPtr, source, numChars),
+		(unsigned) fontPtr->barHeight);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * AllocFont --
+ *
+ *	Helper for TkpGetNativeFont() and TkpGetFontFromAttributes().
+ *	Allocates and intializes the memory for a new TkFont that
+ *	wraps the platform-specific data.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns pointer to newly constructed TkFont.  
+ *
+ *	The caller is responsible for initializing the fields of the
+ *	TkFont that are used exclusively by the generic TkFont code, and
+ *	for releasing those fields before calling TkpDeleteFont().
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Memory allocated.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */ 
+
+static UnixFont *
+AllocFont(tkFontPtr, tkwin, fontStructPtr, fontName)
+    TkFont *tkFontPtr;		/* If non-NULL, store the information in
+				 * this existing TkFont structure, rather than
+				 * allocating a new structure to hold the
+				 * font; the existing contents of the font
+				 * will be released.  If NULL, a new TkFont
+				 * structure is allocated. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* For display where font will be used. */
+    XFontStruct *fontStructPtr;	/* X information about font. */
+    CONST char *fontName;	/* The string passed to XLoadQueryFont() to
+				 * construct the fontStructPtr. */
+{
+    UnixFont *fontPtr;
+    unsigned long value;
+    int i, width, firstChar, lastChar, n, replaceOK;
+    char *name, *p;
+    char buf[4];
+    TkXLFDAttributes xa;
+    double d;
+    
+    if (tkFontPtr != NULL) {
+	fontPtr = (UnixFont *) tkFontPtr;
+	XFreeFont(fontPtr->display, fontPtr->fontStructPtr);
+    } else {
+        fontPtr = (UnixFont *) ckalloc(sizeof(UnixFont));
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Encapsulate the generic stuff in the TkFont. 
+     */
+
+    fontPtr->font.fid		= fontStructPtr->fid;
+
+    if (XGetFontProperty(fontStructPtr, XA_FONT, &value) && (value != 0)) {
+	name = Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, (Atom) value);
+	TkInitFontAttributes(&xa.fa);
+	if (TkParseXLFD(name, &xa) == TCL_OK) {
+	    goto ok;
+	}
+    }
+    TkInitFontAttributes(&xa.fa);
+    if (TkParseXLFD(fontName, &xa) != TCL_OK) {
+	TkInitFontAttributes(&fontPtr->font.fa);
+	fontPtr->font.fa.family = Tk_GetUid(fontName);
+    } else {
+	ok:
+	fontPtr->font.fa = xa.fa;
+    }
+
+    if (fontPtr->font.fa.pointsize < 0) {
+	d = -fontPtr->font.fa.pointsize * 72 / 25.4;
+	d *= WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	d /= WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+	d += 0.5;
+	fontPtr->font.fa.pointsize = (int) d;
+    }
+	
+    fontPtr->font.fm.ascent	= fontStructPtr->ascent;
+    fontPtr->font.fm.descent	= fontStructPtr->descent;
+    fontPtr->font.fm.maxWidth	= fontStructPtr->max_bounds.width;
+    fontPtr->font.fm.fixed	= 1;
+    fontPtr->display		= Tk_Display(tkwin);
+    fontPtr->fontStructPtr	= fontStructPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Classify the characters.
+     */
+
+    firstChar = fontStructPtr->min_char_or_byte2;
+    lastChar = fontStructPtr->max_char_or_byte2;
+    for (i = 0; i < 256; i++) {
+	if ((i == 0177) || (i < firstChar) || (i > lastChar)) {
+	    fontPtr->types[i] = REPLACE;
+	} else {
+	    fontPtr->types[i] = NORMAL;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the widths for all the normal characters.  Any other
+     * characters are given an initial width of 0.  Also, this determines
+     * if this is a fixed or variable width font, by comparing the widths
+     * of all the normal characters.
+     */
+
+    width = 0;
+    for (i = 0; i < 256; i++) {
+	if (fontPtr->types[i] != NORMAL) {
+	    n = 0;
+	} else if (fontStructPtr->per_char == NULL) {
+	    n = fontStructPtr->max_bounds.width;
+	} else {
+	    n = fontStructPtr->per_char[i - firstChar].width;
+	}
+	fontPtr->widths[i] = n;
+	if (n != 0) {
+	    if (width == 0) {
+		width = n;
+	    } else if (width != n) {
+		fontPtr->font.fm.fixed = 0;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the widths of the characters that should be replaced with
+     * control character expansions.  If the appropriate chars are not
+     * available in this font, then control character expansions will not
+     * be used; control chars will be invisible & zero-width.
+     */
+
+    replaceOK = 1;
+    for (p = hexChars; *p != '\0'; p++) {
+	if ((UCHAR(*p) < firstChar) || (UCHAR(*p) > lastChar)) {
+	    replaceOK = 0;
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    for (i = 0; i < 256; i++) {
+	if (fontPtr->types[i] == REPLACE) {
+	    if (replaceOK) {
+		n = GetControlCharSubst(i, buf);
+		for ( ; --n >= 0; ) {
+		    fontPtr->widths[i] += fontPtr->widths[UCHAR(buf[n])];
+		}
+	    } else {
+		fontPtr->types[i] = SKIP;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (XGetFontProperty(fontStructPtr, XA_UNDERLINE_POSITION, &value)) {
+	fontPtr->underlinePos = value;
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * If the XA_UNDERLINE_POSITION property does not exist, the X
+	 * manual recommends using the following value:
+	 */
+
+	fontPtr->underlinePos = fontStructPtr->descent / 2;
+    }
+    fontPtr->barHeight = 0;
+    if (XGetFontProperty(fontStructPtr, XA_UNDERLINE_THICKNESS, &value)) {
+	/*
+	 * Sometimes this is 0 even though it shouldn't be.
+	 */
+	fontPtr->barHeight = value;
+    }
+    if (fontPtr->barHeight == 0) {
+	/*
+	 * If the XA_UNDERLINE_THICKNESS property does not exist, the X
+	 * manual recommends using the width of the stem on a capital
+	 * letter.  I don't know of a way to get the stem width of a letter,
+	 * so guess and use 1/3 the width of a capital I.
+	 */
+
+	fontPtr->barHeight = fontPtr->widths['I'] / 3;
+	if (fontPtr->barHeight == 0) {
+	    fontPtr->barHeight = 1;
+	}
+    }
+    if (fontPtr->underlinePos + fontPtr->barHeight > fontStructPtr->descent) {
+	/*
+	 * If this set of cobbled together values would cause the bottom of
+	 * the underline bar to stick below the descent of the font, jack
+	 * the underline up a bit higher.
+	 */
+
+	fontPtr->barHeight = fontStructPtr->descent - fontPtr->underlinePos;
+	if (fontPtr->barHeight == 0) {
+	    fontPtr->underlinePos--;
+	    fontPtr->barHeight = 1;
+	}
+    }
+
+    return fontPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetControlCharSubst --
+ *
+ *	When displaying text in a widget, a backslashed escape sequence
+ *	is substituted for control characters that occur in the text.
+ *	Given a control character, fill in a buffer with the replacement
+ *	string that should be displayed.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the length of the substitute string.  buf is
+ *	filled with the substitute string; it is not '\0' terminated.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *---------------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+GetControlCharSubst(c, buf)
+    int		c;		/* The control character to be replaced. */
+    char	buf[4];		/* Buffer that gets replacement string.  It
+				 * only needs to be 4 characters long. */
+{
+    buf[0] = '\\';
+    if ((c < sizeof(mapChars)) && (mapChars[c] != 0)) {
+	buf[1] = mapChars[c];
+	return 2;
+    } else {
+	buf[1] = 'x';
+	buf[2] = hexChars[(c >> 4) & 0xf];
+	buf[3] = hexChars[c & 0xf];
+	return 4;
+    }
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixInit.c b/unix/tkUnixInit.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..acfd8de
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixInit.c
@@ -0,0 +1,130 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixInit.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains Unix-specific interpreter initialization
+ *	functions.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixInit.c 1.24 97/07/24 14:46:09
+ */
+
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#include "tkUnixInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * The Init script (common to Windows and Unix platforms) is
+ * defined in tkInitScript.h
+ */
+#include "tkInitScript.h"
+
+
+/*
+ * Default directory in which to look for libraries:
+ */
+
+static char defaultLibraryDir[200] = TK_LIBRARY;
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpInit --
+ *
+ *	Performs Unix-specific interpreter initialization related to the
+ *      tk_library variable.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a standard Tcl result.  Leaves an error message or result
+ *	in interp->result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sets "tk_library" Tcl variable, runs "tk.tcl" script.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpInit(interp)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+{
+    char *libDir;
+
+    libDir = Tcl_GetVar(interp, "tk_library", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    if (libDir == NULL) {
+	Tcl_SetVar(interp, "tk_library", defaultLibraryDir, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    }
+    TkCreateXEventSource();
+    return Tcl_Eval(interp, initScript);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetAppName --
+ *
+ *	Retrieves the name of the current application from a platform
+ *	specific location.  For Unix, the application name is the tail
+ *	of the path contained in the tcl variable argv0.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns the application name in the given Tcl_DString.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpGetAppName(interp, namePtr)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+    Tcl_DString *namePtr;	/* A previously initialized Tcl_DString. */
+{
+    char *p, *name;
+
+    name = Tcl_GetVar(interp, "argv0", TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+    if ((name == NULL) || (*name == 0)) {
+	name = "tk";
+    } else {
+	p = strrchr(name, '/');
+	if (p != NULL) {
+	    name = p+1;
+	}
+    }
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(namePtr, name, -1);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDisplayWarning --
+ *
+ *	This routines is called from Tk_Main to display warning
+ *	messages that occur during startup.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Generates messages on stdout.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDisplayWarning(msg, title)
+    char *msg;			/* Message to be displayed. */
+    char *title;		/* Title of warning. */
+{
+    Tcl_Channel errChannel = Tcl_GetStdChannel(TCL_STDERR);
+    if (errChannel) {
+	Tcl_Write(errChannel, title, -1);
+	Tcl_Write(errChannel, ": ", 2);
+	Tcl_Write(errChannel, msg, -1);
+	Tcl_Write(errChannel, "\n", 1);
+    }
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixInt.h b/unix/tkUnixInt.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..41bbb66
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixInt.h
@@ -0,0 +1,32 @@
+/*
+ * tkUnixInt.h --
+ *
+ *	This file contains declarations that are shared among the
+ *	UNIX-specific parts of Tk but aren't used by the rest of
+ *	Tk.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixInt.h 1.9 97/05/08 11:20:12
+ */
+
+#ifndef _TKUNIXINT
+#define _TKUNIXINT
+
+/*
+ * Prototypes for procedures that are referenced in files other
+ * than the ones they're defined in.
+ */
+
+EXTERN void		TkCreateXEventSource _ANSI_ARGS_((void));
+EXTERN TkWindow *	TkpGetContainer _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *embeddedPtr));
+EXTERN TkWindow *	TkpGetWrapperWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN Window		TkUnixContainerId _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+EXTERN int		TkUnixDoOneXEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Time *timePtr));
+EXTERN void		TkUnixSetMenubar _ANSI_ARGS_((Tk_Window tkwin,
+				Tk_Window menubar));
+
+#endif /* _TKUNIXINT */
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixMenu.c b/unix/tkUnixMenu.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..3179a31
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixMenu.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1603 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixMenu.c --
+ *
+ *	This module implements the UNIX platform-specific features of menus.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixMenu.c 1.76 97/11/05 09:08:22
+ */
+
+#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "default.h"
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#include "tkUnixInt.h"
+#include "tkMenu.h"
+
+/*
+ * Constants used for menu drawing.
+ */
+
+#define MENU_MARGIN_WIDTH	2
+#define MENU_DIVIDER_HEIGHT	2
+
+/*
+ * Platform specific flags for Unix.
+ */
+
+#define ENTRY_HELP_MENU		ENTRY_PLATFORM_FLAG1
+
+/*
+ * Procedures used internally.
+ */
+
+static void		SetHelpMenu _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr));
+static void		DrawMenuEntryAccelerator _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr, 
+			    Drawable d, GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
+			    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int height, int drawArrow));
+static void		DrawMenuEntryBackground _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    Drawable d, Tk_3DBorder activeBorder,
+			    Tk_3DBorder bgBorder, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int heigth));
+static void		DrawMenuEntryIndicator _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    Drawable d, GC gc, GC indicatorGC, 
+			    Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int height));
+static void		DrawMenuEntryLabel _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu * menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d,
+			    GC gc, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int x, int y,
+			    int width, int height));
+static void		DrawMenuSeparator _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d, GC gc, 
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, 
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
+static void		DrawTearoffEntry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d, GC gc, 
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, 
+			    int x, int y, int width, int height));
+static void		DrawMenuUnderline _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Drawable d, GC gc,
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int x,
+			    int y, int width, int height));
+static void		GetMenuAccelGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int *widthPtr,
+			    int *heightPtr));
+static void		GetMenuLabelGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+static void		GetMenuIndicatorGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr, 
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, 
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+static void		GetMenuSeparatorGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    TkMenu *menuPtr, TkMenuEntry *mePtr,
+			    Tk_Font tkfont, CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr,
+			    int *widthPtr, int *heightPtr));
+static void		GetTearoffEntryGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((TkMenu *menuPtr,
+			    TkMenuEntry *mePtr, Tk_Font tkfont,
+			    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr, int *widthPtr,
+			    int *heightPtr));
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpNewMenu --
+ *
+ *	Gets the platform-specific piece of the menu. Invoked during idle
+ *	after the generic part of the menu has been created.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Standard TCL error.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Allocates any platform specific allocations and places them
+ *	in the platformData field of the menuPtr.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpNewMenu(menuPtr)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+{
+    SetHelpMenu(menuPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDestroyMenu --
+ *
+ *	Destroys platform-specific menu structures. Called when the
+ *	generic menu structure is destroyed for the menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	All platform-specific allocations are freed up.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDestroyMenu(menuPtr)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+{
+    /*
+     * Nothing to do.
+     */
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDestroyMenuEntry --
+ *
+ *	Cleans up platform-specific menu entry items. Called when entry
+ *	is destroyed in the generic code.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	All platform specific allocations are freed up.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDestroyMenuEntry(mEntryPtr)
+    TkMenuEntry *mEntryPtr;
+{
+    /*
+     * Nothing to do.
+     */
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpConfigureMenuEntry --
+ *
+ *	Processes configuration options for menu entries. Called when
+ *	the generic options are processed for the menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns standard TCL result. If TCL_ERROR is returned, then
+ *	interp->result contains an error message.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Configuration information get set for mePtr; old resources
+ *	get freed, if any need it.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpConfigureMenuEntry(mePtr)
+    register TkMenuEntry *mePtr;	/* Information about menu entry;  may
+					 * or may not already have values for
+					 * some fields. */
+{
+    /*
+     * If this is a cascade menu, and the child menu exists, check to
+     * see if the child menu is a help menu.
+     */
+
+    if ((mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) && (mePtr->name != NULL)) {
+	TkMenuReferences *menuRefPtr;
+
+	menuRefPtr = TkFindMenuReferences(mePtr->menuPtr->interp,
+		mePtr->name);
+	if ((menuRefPtr != NULL) && (menuRefPtr->menuPtr != NULL)) {
+	    SetHelpMenu(menuRefPtr->menuPtr);
+	}
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpMenuNewEntry --
+ *
+ *	Called when a new entry is created in a menu. Fills in platform
+ *	specific data for the entry. The platformEntryData field
+ *	is used to store the indicator diameter for radio button
+ *	and check box entries.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ * 	Standard TCL error.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None on Unix.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpMenuNewEntry(mePtr)
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
+{
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpSetWindowMenuBar --
+ *
+ *	Sets up the menu as a menubar in the given window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Recomputes geometry of given window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpSetWindowMenuBar(tkwin, menuPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* The window we are setting */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are setting */
+{
+    if (menuPtr == NULL) {
+	TkUnixSetMenubar(tkwin, NULL);
+    } else {
+	TkUnixSetMenubar(tkwin, menuPtr->tkwin);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpSetMainMenuBar --
+ *
+ *	Called when a toplevel widget is brought to front. On the
+ *	Macintosh, sets up the menubar that goes accross the top
+ *	of the main monitor. On other platforms, nothing is necessary.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Recompute geometry of given window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpSetMainMenubar(interp, tkwin, menuName)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+    char *menuName;
+{
+    /*
+     * Nothing to do.
+     */
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetMenuIndicatorGeometry --
+ *
+ *	Fills out the geometry of the indicator in a menu item. Note
+ *	that the mePtr->height field must have already been filled in
+ *	by GetMenuLabelGeometry since this height depends on the label
+ *	height.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	widthPtr and heightPtr point to the new geometry values.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+GetMenuIndicatorGeometry(menuPtr, mePtr, tkfont, fmPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing. */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are interested in. */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The precalculated metrics */
+    int *widthPtr;			/* The resulting width */
+    int *heightPtr;			/* The resulting height */
+{
+    if (!mePtr->hideMargin && mePtr->indicatorOn &&
+	    ((mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY)
+	    || (mePtr->type == RADIO_BUTTON_ENTRY))) {
+        if ((mePtr->image != NULL) || (mePtr->bitmap != None)) {
+            *widthPtr = (14 * mePtr->height) / 10;
+            *heightPtr = mePtr->height;
+            if (mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY) {
+    		mePtr->platformEntryData = 
+			(TkMenuPlatformEntryData) ((65 * mePtr->height) / 100);
+	    } else {
+    	    	mePtr->platformEntryData = 
+			(TkMenuPlatformEntryData) ((75 * mePtr->height) / 100);
+    	    }	            
+        } else {
+            *widthPtr = *heightPtr = mePtr->height;
+	    if (mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY) {
+		mePtr->platformEntryData = (TkMenuPlatformEntryData)
+			((80 * mePtr->height) / 100);
+	    } else {
+		mePtr->platformEntryData = (TkMenuPlatformEntryData)
+			mePtr->height;
+	    }
+	}
+    } else {
+        *heightPtr = 0;
+        *widthPtr = menuPtr->borderWidth;
+    }
+}
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetMenuAccelGeometry --
+ *
+ *	Get the geometry of the accelerator area of a menu item.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	heightPtr and widthPtr are set.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+GetMenuAccelGeometry(menuPtr, mePtr, tkfont, fmPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu was are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The entry we are getting the geometry for */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int *widthPtr;		/* The width of the acclerator area */
+    int *heightPtr;		/* The height of the accelerator area */
+{
+    *heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
+    if (mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) {
+    	*widthPtr = 2 * CASCADE_ARROW_WIDTH;
+    } else if ((menuPtr->menuType != MENUBAR) && (mePtr->accel != NULL)) {
+    	*widthPtr = Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, mePtr->accel, mePtr->accelLength);
+    } else {
+    	*widthPtr = 0;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawMenuEntryBackground --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws the background part of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DrawMenuEntryBackground(menuPtr, mePtr, d, activeBorder, bgBorder, x, y,
+	width, height)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		/* The entry we are drawing. */
+    Drawable d;			/* The drawable we are drawing into */
+    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;	/* The border for an active item */
+    Tk_3DBorder bgBorder;	/* The background border */
+    int x;			/* Left coordinate of entry rect */
+    int y;			/* Right coordinate of entry rect */
+    int width;			/* Width of entry rect */
+    int height;			/* Height of entry rect */
+{
+    if (mePtr->state == tkActiveUid) {
+	int relief;
+    	bgBorder = activeBorder;
+
+	if ((menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR)
+		&& ((menuPtr->postedCascade == NULL)
+		|| (menuPtr->postedCascade != mePtr))) {
+	    relief = TK_RELIEF_FLAT;
+	} else {
+	    relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+	}
+	
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(menuPtr->tkwin, d, bgBorder, x, y, width, height,
+		menuPtr->activeBorderWidth, relief);
+    } else {
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(menuPtr->tkwin, d, bgBorder, x, y, width, height,
+		0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawMenuEntryAccelerator --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws the background part of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DrawMenuEntryAccelerator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, activeBorder,
+	x, y, width, height, drawArrow)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;				/* The drawable we are drawing into */
+    GC gc;				/* The precalculated gc to draw with */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The precalculated metrics */
+    Tk_3DBorder activeBorder;		/* The border for an active item */
+    int x;				/* Left coordinate of entry rect */
+    int y;				/* Top coordinate of entry rect */
+    int width;				/* Width of entry */
+    int height;				/* Height of entry */
+    int drawArrow;			/* Whether or not to draw arrow. */
+{
+    XPoint points[3];
+    
+    /*
+     * Draw accelerator or cascade arrow.
+     */
+
+    if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if ((mePtr->type == CASCADE_ENTRY) && drawArrow) {
+    	points[0].x = x + width - menuPtr->borderWidth
+	        - menuPtr->activeBorderWidth - CASCADE_ARROW_WIDTH;
+    	points[0].y = y + (height - CASCADE_ARROW_HEIGHT)/2;
+    	points[1].x = points[0].x;
+    	points[1].y = points[0].y + CASCADE_ARROW_HEIGHT;
+    	points[2].x = points[0].x + CASCADE_ARROW_WIDTH;
+    	points[2].y = points[0].y + CASCADE_ARROW_HEIGHT/2;
+    	Tk_Fill3DPolygon(menuPtr->tkwin, d, activeBorder, points, 3,
+		DECORATION_BORDER_WIDTH,
+	    	(menuPtr->postedCascade == mePtr)
+	    	? TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN : TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+    } else if (mePtr->accel != NULL) {
+	int left = x + mePtr->labelWidth + menuPtr->activeBorderWidth
+	        + mePtr->indicatorSpace;
+	if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) {
+	    left += 5;
+	}
+    	Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, mePtr->accel,
+		mePtr->accelLength, left,
+		(y + (height + fmPtr->ascent - fmPtr->descent) / 2));
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawMenuEntryIndicator --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws the background part of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DrawMenuEntryIndicator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, indicatorGC, tkfont, fmPtr,
+	x, y, width, height)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;				/* The drawable to draw into */
+    GC gc;				/* The gc to draw with */
+    GC indicatorGC;			/* The gc that indicators draw with */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The font to draw with */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The font metrics of the font */
+    int x;				/* The left of the entry rect */
+    int y;				/* The top of the entry rect */
+    int width;				/* Width of menu entry */
+    int height;				/* Height of menu entry */
+{
+
+    /*
+     * Draw check-button indicator.
+     */
+
+    if ((mePtr->type == CHECK_BUTTON_ENTRY)
+	    && mePtr->indicatorOn) {
+    	int dim, top, left;
+	
+	dim = (int) mePtr->platformEntryData;
+    	left = x + menuPtr->activeBorderWidth
+		+ (mePtr->indicatorSpace - dim)/2;
+	if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) {
+	    left += 5;
+	}
+    	top = y + (height - dim)/2;
+    	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(menuPtr->tkwin, d, menuPtr->border, left, top, dim,
+		dim, DECORATION_BORDER_WIDTH, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+    	left += DECORATION_BORDER_WIDTH;
+    	top += DECORATION_BORDER_WIDTH;
+    	dim -= 2*DECORATION_BORDER_WIDTH;
+    	if ((dim > 0) && (mePtr->entryFlags
+	    	& ENTRY_SELECTED)) {
+	    XFillRectangle(menuPtr->display, d, indicatorGC, left, top,
+		    (unsigned int) dim, (unsigned int) dim);
+    	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Draw radio-button indicator.
+     */
+
+    if ((mePtr->type == RADIO_BUTTON_ENTRY)
+	    && mePtr->indicatorOn) {
+    	XPoint points[4];
+    	int radius;
+
+	radius = ((int) mePtr->platformEntryData)/2;
+    	points[0].x = x + (mePtr->indicatorSpace
+		- (int) mePtr->platformEntryData)/2;
+	points[0].y = y + (height)/2;
+    	points[1].x = points[0].x + radius;
+    	points[1].y = points[0].y + radius;
+    	points[2].x = points[1].x + radius;
+    	points[2].y = points[0].y;
+    	points[3].x = points[1].x;
+    	points[3].y = points[0].y - radius;
+    	if (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED) {
+	    XFillPolygon(menuPtr->display, d, indicatorGC, points, 4, Convex,
+		    CoordModeOrigin);
+    	} else {
+	    Tk_Fill3DPolygon(menuPtr->tkwin, d, menuPtr->border, points, 4,
+		    DECORATION_BORDER_WIDTH, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    	}
+        Tk_Draw3DPolygon(menuPtr->tkwin, d, menuPtr->border, points, 4,
+	        DECORATION_BORDER_WIDTH, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawMenuSeparator --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws a separator menu item.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DrawMenuSeparator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y, width, height)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;				/* The drawable we are using */
+    GC gc;				/* The gc to draw into */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The font to draw with */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The font metrics from the font */
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    int width;
+    int height;
+{
+    XPoint points[2];
+    int margin;
+
+    if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) {
+	return;
+    }
+    
+    margin = (fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent)/2;
+    points[0].x = x;
+    points[0].y = y + height/2;
+    points[1].x = width - 1;
+    points[1].y = points[0].y;
+    Tk_Draw3DPolygon(menuPtr->tkwin, d, menuPtr->border, points, 2, 1,
+	    TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawMenuEntryLabel --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws the label part of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DrawMenuEntryLabel(
+    menuPtr,			/* The menu we are drawing */
+    mePtr,			/* The entry we are drawing */
+    d,				/* What we are drawing into */
+    gc,				/* The gc we are drawing into */
+    tkfont,			/* The precalculated font */
+    fmPtr,			/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    x,				/* left edge */
+    y,				/* right edge */
+    width,			/* width of entry */
+    height)			/* height of entry */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
+    Drawable d;
+    GC gc;
+    Tk_Font tkfont;
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;
+    int x, y, width, height;
+{
+    int baseline;
+    int indicatorSpace =  mePtr->indicatorSpace;
+    int leftEdge = x + indicatorSpace + menuPtr->activeBorderWidth;
+    int imageHeight, imageWidth;
+
+    if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) {
+	leftEdge += 5;
+    }
+    
+    /*
+     * Draw label or bitmap or image for entry.
+     */
+
+    baseline = y + (height + fmPtr->ascent - fmPtr->descent) / 2;
+    if (mePtr->image != NULL) {
+    	Tk_SizeOfImage(mePtr->image, &imageWidth, &imageHeight);
+    	if ((mePtr->selectImage != NULL)
+	    	&& (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_SELECTED)) {
+	    Tk_RedrawImage(mePtr->selectImage, 0, 0,
+		    imageWidth, imageHeight, d, leftEdge,
+	            (int) (y + (mePtr->height - imageHeight)/2));
+    	} else {
+	    Tk_RedrawImage(mePtr->image, 0, 0, imageWidth,
+		    imageHeight, d, leftEdge,
+		    (int) (y + (mePtr->height - imageHeight)/2));
+    	}
+    } else if (mePtr->bitmap != None) {
+    	int width, height;
+
+        Tk_SizeOfBitmap(menuPtr->display,
+	        mePtr->bitmap, &width, &height);
+    	XCopyPlane(menuPtr->display,
+	    	mePtr->bitmap, d,
+	    	gc, 0, 0, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height, leftEdge,
+	    	(int) (y + (mePtr->height - height)/2), 1);
+    } else {
+    	if (mePtr->labelLength > 0) {
+	    Tk_DrawChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc,
+		    tkfont, mePtr->label, mePtr->labelLength,
+		    leftEdge, baseline);
+	    DrawMenuUnderline(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y,
+		    width, height);
+    	}
+    }
+
+    if (mePtr->state == tkDisabledUid) {
+	if (menuPtr->disabledFg == NULL) {
+	    XFillRectangle(menuPtr->display, d, menuPtr->disabledGC, x, y,
+		    (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
+	} else if ((mePtr->image != NULL) 
+		&& (menuPtr->disabledImageGC != None)) {
+	    XFillRectangle(menuPtr->display, d, menuPtr->disabledImageGC,
+		    leftEdge,
+		    (int) (y + (mePtr->height - imageHeight)/2),
+		    (unsigned) imageWidth, (unsigned) imageHeight);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawMenuUnderline --
+ *
+ *	On appropriate platforms, draw the underline character for the
+ *	menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DrawMenuUnderline(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y, width, height)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu to draw into */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;				/* What we are drawing into */
+    GC gc;				/* The gc to draw into */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    int width;
+    int height;
+{
+    int indicatorSpace = mePtr->indicatorSpace;
+    if (mePtr->underline >= 0) {
+	int leftEdge = x + indicatorSpace + menuPtr->activeBorderWidth;
+	if (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) {
+	    leftEdge += 5;
+	}
+	
+    	Tk_UnderlineChars(menuPtr->display, d, gc, tkfont, mePtr->label,
+    		leftEdge, y + (height + fmPtr->ascent - fmPtr->descent) / 2,
+		mePtr->underline, mePtr->underline + 1);
+    }		
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpPostMenu --
+ *
+ *	Posts a menu on the screen
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The menu is posted and handled.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpPostMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+    int x;
+    int y;
+{
+    return TkPostTearoffMenu(interp, menuPtr, x, y);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetMenuSeparatorGeometry --
+ *
+ *	Gets the width and height of the indicator area of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	widthPtr and heightPtr are set.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+GetMenuSeparatorGeometry(menuPtr, mePtr, tkfont, fmPtr, widthPtr,
+	heightPtr) 
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are measuring */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are measuring */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The precalcualted font metrics */
+    int *widthPtr;			/* The resulting width */
+    int *heightPtr;			/* The resulting height */
+{
+    *widthPtr = 0;
+    *heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetTearoffEntryGeometry --
+ *
+ *	Gets the width and height of the indicator area of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	widthPtr and heightPtr are set.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+GetTearoffEntryGeometry(menuPtr, mePtr, tkfont, fmPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are measuring */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The precalculated font metrics */
+    int *widthPtr;			/* The resulting width */
+    int *heightPtr;			/* The resulting height */
+{
+    if (menuPtr->menuType != MASTER_MENU) {
+	*heightPtr = 0;
+	*widthPtr = 0;
+    } else {
+	*heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
+	*widthPtr = Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, "W", -1);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpComputeMenubarGeometry --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to recompute the size and
+ *	layout of a menu that is a menubar clone.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Fields of menu entries are changed to reflect their
+ *	current positions, and the size of the menu window
+ *	itself may be changed.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpComputeMenubarGeometry(menuPtr)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* Structure describing menu. */
+{
+    Tk_Font tkfont;
+    Tk_FontMetrics menuMetrics, entryMetrics, *fmPtr;
+    int width, height;
+    int i, j;
+    int x, y, currentRowHeight, currentRowWidth, maxWidth;
+    int maxWindowWidth;
+    int lastRowBreak;
+    int helpMenuIndex = -1;
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
+    int lastEntry;
+    
+    if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    maxWidth = 0;
+    if (menuPtr->numEntries == 0) {
+	height = 0;
+    } else {
+	maxWindowWidth = Tk_Width(menuPtr->tkwin);
+	if (maxWindowWidth == 1) {
+	    maxWindowWidth = 0x7ffffff;
+	}
+	currentRowHeight = 0;
+	x = y = menuPtr->borderWidth;
+	lastRowBreak = 0;
+	currentRowWidth = 0;
+	
+	/*
+	 * On the Mac especially, getting font metrics can be quite slow,
+	 * so we want to do it intelligently. We are going to precalculate
+	 * them and pass them down to all of the measureing and drawing
+	 * routines. We will measure the font metrics of the menu once,
+	 * and if an entry has a font set, we will measure it as we come
+	 * to it, and then we decide which set to give the geometry routines.
+	 */
+	
+	Tk_GetFontMetrics(menuPtr->tkfont, &menuMetrics);
+	
+	for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
+	    mePtr = menuPtr->entries[i];
+	    mePtr->entryFlags &= ~ENTRY_LAST_COLUMN;
+	    tkfont = mePtr->tkfont;
+	    if (tkfont == NULL) {
+		tkfont = menuPtr->tkfont;
+		fmPtr = &menuMetrics;
+	    } else {
+		Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, &entryMetrics);
+		fmPtr = &entryMetrics;
+	    }
+	    
+	    /*
+	     * For every entry, we need to check to see whether or not we
+	     * wrap. If we do wrap, then we have to adjust all of the previous
+	     * entries' height and y position, because when we see them
+	     * the first time, we don't know how big its neighbor might
+	     * be.
+	     */
+	    
+	    if ((mePtr->type == SEPARATOR_ENTRY)
+		    || (mePtr->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY)) {
+		mePtr->height = mePtr->width = 0;
+	    } else {
+		
+		GetMenuLabelGeometry(mePtr, tkfont, fmPtr,
+			&width, &height);
+		mePtr->height = height + 2 * menuPtr->activeBorderWidth + 10;
+		mePtr->width = width;
+		
+		GetMenuIndicatorGeometry(menuPtr, mePtr,
+			tkfont, fmPtr, &width, &height);
+		mePtr->indicatorSpace = width;
+		if (width > 0) {
+		    mePtr->width += width;
+		}
+		mePtr->width += 2 * menuPtr->activeBorderWidth + 10;
+	    }
+	    if (mePtr->entryFlags & ENTRY_HELP_MENU) {
+		helpMenuIndex = i;
+	    } else if (x + mePtr->width + menuPtr->borderWidth
+		    > maxWindowWidth) {
+
+		if (i == lastRowBreak) {
+		    mePtr->y = y;
+		    mePtr->x = x;
+		    lastRowBreak++;
+		    y += mePtr->height;
+		    currentRowHeight = 0;
+		} else {
+		    x = menuPtr->borderWidth;
+		    for (j = lastRowBreak; j < i; j++) {
+			menuPtr->entries[j]->y = y + currentRowHeight
+			        - menuPtr->entries[j]->height;
+			menuPtr->entries[j]->x = x;
+			x += menuPtr->entries[j]->width;
+		    }
+		    lastRowBreak = i;
+		    y += currentRowHeight;
+		    currentRowHeight = mePtr->height;
+		}
+		if (x > maxWidth) {
+		    maxWidth = x;
+		}
+		x = menuPtr->borderWidth;
+	    } else {
+		x += mePtr->width;
+		if (mePtr->height > currentRowHeight) {
+		    currentRowHeight = mePtr->height;
+		}
+	    } 
+	}
+
+	lastEntry = menuPtr->numEntries - 1;
+	if (helpMenuIndex == lastEntry) {
+	    lastEntry--;
+	}
+	if ((lastEntry >= 0) && (x + menuPtr->entries[lastEntry]->width
+		+ menuPtr->borderWidth > maxWidth)) {
+	    maxWidth = x + menuPtr->entries[lastEntry]->width
+		    + menuPtr->borderWidth;
+	}
+	x = menuPtr->borderWidth;
+	for (j = lastRowBreak; j < menuPtr->numEntries; j++) {
+	    if (j == helpMenuIndex) {
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    menuPtr->entries[j]->y = y + currentRowHeight
+		    - menuPtr->entries[j]->height;
+	    menuPtr->entries[j]->x = x;
+	    x += menuPtr->entries[j]->width;
+	}
+	
+
+	if (helpMenuIndex != -1) {
+	    mePtr = menuPtr->entries[helpMenuIndex];
+	    if (x + mePtr->width + menuPtr->borderWidth > maxWindowWidth) {
+		y += currentRowHeight;
+		currentRowHeight = mePtr->height;
+		x = menuPtr->borderWidth;
+	    } else if (mePtr->height > currentRowHeight) {
+		currentRowHeight = mePtr->height;
+	    }
+	    mePtr->x = maxWindowWidth - menuPtr->borderWidth - mePtr->width;
+	    mePtr->y = y + currentRowHeight - mePtr->height;
+	}
+	height = y + currentRowHeight + menuPtr->borderWidth;
+    }
+    width = Tk_Width(menuPtr->tkwin);    
+
+    /*
+     * The X server doesn't like zero dimensions, so round up to at least
+     * 1 (a zero-sized menu should never really occur, anyway).
+     */
+
+    if (width <= 0) {
+	width = 1;
+    }
+    if (height <= 0) {
+	height = 1;
+    }
+    menuPtr->totalWidth = maxWidth;
+    menuPtr->totalHeight = height;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DrawTearoffEntry --
+ *
+ *	This procedure draws the background part of a menu.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menu in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DrawTearoffEntry(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, y, width, height)
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;			/* The menu we are drawing */
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are drawing */
+    Drawable d;				/* The drawable we are drawing into */
+    GC gc;				/* The gc we are drawing with */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The font we are drawing with */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The metrics we are drawing with */
+    int x;
+    int y;
+    int width;
+    int height;
+{
+    XPoint points[2];
+    int margin, segmentWidth, maxX;
+
+    if (menuPtr->menuType != MASTER_MENU) {
+	return;
+    }
+    
+    margin = (fmPtr->ascent + fmPtr->descent)/2;
+    points[0].x = x;
+    points[0].y = y + height/2;
+    points[1].y = points[0].y;
+    segmentWidth = 6;
+    maxX  = width - 1;
+
+    while (points[0].x < maxX) {
+	points[1].x = points[0].x + segmentWidth;
+	if (points[1].x > maxX) {
+	    points[1].x = maxX;
+	}
+	Tk_Draw3DPolygon(menuPtr->tkwin, d, menuPtr->border, points, 2, 1,
+		TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+	points[0].x += 2*segmentWidth;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpInitializeMenuBindings --
+ *
+ *	For every interp, initializes the bindings for Windows
+ *	menus. Does nothing on Mac or XWindows.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	C-level bindings are setup for the interp which will
+ *	handle Alt-key sequences for menus without beeping
+ *	or interfering with user-defined Alt-key bindings.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpInitializeMenuBindings(interp, bindingTable)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		    /* The interpreter to set. */
+    Tk_BindingTable bindingTable;   /* The table to add to. */
+{
+    /*
+     * Nothing to do.
+     */
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SetHelpMenu --
+ *
+ *	Given a menu, check to see whether or not it is a help menu
+ *	cascade in a menubar. If it is, the entry that points to
+ *	this menu will be marked.
+ *
+ * RESULTS:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Will set the ENTRY_HELP_MENU flag appropriately.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+SetHelpMenu(menuPtr)
+     TkMenu *menuPtr;		/* The menu we are checking */
+{
+    TkMenuEntry *cascadeEntryPtr;
+
+    for (cascadeEntryPtr = menuPtr->menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr;
+	    cascadeEntryPtr != NULL;
+	    cascadeEntryPtr = cascadeEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr) {
+	if ((cascadeEntryPtr->menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR)
+		&& (cascadeEntryPtr->menuPtr->masterMenuPtr->tkwin != NULL)
+		&& (menuPtr->masterMenuPtr->tkwin != NULL)) {
+	    TkMenu *masterMenuPtr = cascadeEntryPtr->menuPtr->masterMenuPtr;
+	    char *helpMenuName = ckalloc(strlen(Tk_PathName(
+		    masterMenuPtr->tkwin)) + strlen(".help") + 1);
+
+	    strcpy(helpMenuName, Tk_PathName(masterMenuPtr->tkwin));
+	    strcat(helpMenuName, ".help");
+	    if (strcmp(helpMenuName,
+		    Tk_PathName(menuPtr->masterMenuPtr->tkwin)) == 0) {
+		cascadeEntryPtr->entryFlags |= ENTRY_HELP_MENU;
+	    } else {
+		cascadeEntryPtr->entryFlags &= ~ENTRY_HELP_MENU;
+	    }
+	    ckfree(helpMenuName);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDrawMenuEntry --
+ *
+ *	Draws the given menu entry at the given coordinates with the
+ *	given attributes.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	X Server commands are executed to display the menu entry.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDrawMenuEntry(mePtr, d, tkfont, menuMetricsPtr, x, y, width, height, 
+	strictMotif, drawArrow)
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;		    /* The entry to draw */
+    Drawable d;			    /* What to draw into */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;		    /* Precalculated font for menu */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *menuMetricsPtr;
+				    /* Precalculated metrics for menu */
+    int x;			    /* X-coordinate of topleft of entry */
+    int y;			    /* Y-coordinate of topleft of entry */
+    int width;			    /* Width of the entry rectangle */
+    int height;			    /* Height of the current rectangle */
+    int strictMotif;		    /* Boolean flag */
+    int drawArrow;		    /* Whether or not to draw the cascade
+				     * arrow for cascade items. Only applies
+				     * to Windows. */
+{
+    GC gc, indicatorGC;
+    TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
+    Tk_3DBorder bgBorder, activeBorder;
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;
+    Tk_FontMetrics entryMetrics;
+    int padY = (menuPtr->menuType == MENUBAR) ? 3 : 0;
+    int adjustedY = y + padY;
+    int adjustedHeight = height - 2 * padY;
+
+    /*
+     * Choose the gc for drawing the foreground part of the entry.
+     */
+
+    if ((mePtr->state == tkActiveUid)
+	    && !strictMotif) {
+	gc = mePtr->activeGC;
+	if (gc == NULL) {
+	    gc = menuPtr->activeGC;
+	}
+    } else {
+    	TkMenuEntry *cascadeEntryPtr;
+    	int parentDisabled = 0;
+    	
+    	for (cascadeEntryPtr = menuPtr->menuRefPtr->parentEntryPtr;
+    		cascadeEntryPtr != NULL;
+    		cascadeEntryPtr = cascadeEntryPtr->nextCascadePtr) {
+    	    if (strcmp(cascadeEntryPtr->name, 
+    	    	    Tk_PathName(menuPtr->tkwin)) == 0) {
+    	    	if (cascadeEntryPtr->state == tkDisabledUid) {
+    	    	    parentDisabled = 1;
+    	    	}
+    	    	break;
+    	    }
+    	}
+
+	if (((parentDisabled || (mePtr->state == tkDisabledUid)))
+		&& (menuPtr->disabledFg != NULL)) {
+	    gc = mePtr->disabledGC;
+	    if (gc == NULL) {
+		gc = menuPtr->disabledGC;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    gc = mePtr->textGC;
+	    if (gc == NULL) {
+		gc = menuPtr->textGC;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    indicatorGC = mePtr->indicatorGC;
+    if (indicatorGC == NULL) {
+	indicatorGC = menuPtr->indicatorGC;
+    }
+	    
+    bgBorder = mePtr->border;
+    if (bgBorder == NULL) {
+	bgBorder = menuPtr->border;
+    }
+    if (strictMotif) {
+	activeBorder = bgBorder;
+    } else {
+	activeBorder = mePtr->activeBorder;
+	if (activeBorder == NULL) {
+	    activeBorder = menuPtr->activeBorder;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (mePtr->tkfont == NULL) {
+	fmPtr = menuMetricsPtr;
+    } else {
+	tkfont = mePtr->tkfont;
+	Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, &entryMetrics);
+	fmPtr = &entryMetrics;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Need to draw the entire background, including padding. On Unix,
+     * for menubars, we have to draw the rest of the entry taking
+     * into account the padding.
+     */
+    
+    DrawMenuEntryBackground(menuPtr, mePtr, d, activeBorder, 
+	    bgBorder, x, y, width, height);
+    
+    if (mePtr->type == SEPARATOR_ENTRY) {
+	DrawMenuSeparator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, 
+		fmPtr, x, adjustedY, width, adjustedHeight);
+    } else if (mePtr->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY) {
+	DrawTearoffEntry(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, adjustedY,
+		width, adjustedHeight);
+    } else {
+	DrawMenuEntryLabel(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr, x, adjustedY,
+		width, adjustedHeight);
+	DrawMenuEntryAccelerator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, tkfont, fmPtr,
+		activeBorder, x, adjustedY, width, adjustedHeight, drawArrow);
+	if (!mePtr->hideMargin) {
+	    DrawMenuEntryIndicator(menuPtr, mePtr, d, gc, indicatorGC, tkfont,
+		    fmPtr, x, adjustedY, width, adjustedHeight);
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetMenuLabelGeometry --
+ *
+ *	Figures out the size of the label portion of a menu item.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	widthPtr and heightPtr are filled in with the correct geometry
+ *	information.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+GetMenuLabelGeometry(mePtr, tkfont, fmPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;			/* The entry we are computing */
+    Tk_Font tkfont;			/* The precalculated font */
+    CONST Tk_FontMetrics *fmPtr;	/* The precalculated metrics */
+    int *widthPtr;			/* The resulting width of the label
+					 * portion */
+    int *heightPtr;			/* The resulting height of the label
+					 * portion */
+{
+    TkMenu *menuPtr = mePtr->menuPtr;
+ 
+    if (mePtr->image != NULL) {
+    	Tk_SizeOfImage(mePtr->image, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    } else if (mePtr->bitmap != (Pixmap) NULL) {
+    	Tk_SizeOfBitmap(menuPtr->display, mePtr->bitmap, widthPtr, heightPtr);
+    } else {
+    	*heightPtr = fmPtr->linespace;
+    	
+    	if (mePtr->label != NULL) {
+    	    *widthPtr = Tk_TextWidth(tkfont, mePtr->label, mePtr->labelLength);
+    	} else {
+    	    *widthPtr = 0;
+    	}
+    }
+    *heightPtr += 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to recompute the size and
+ *	layout of a menu that is not a menubar clone.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Fields of menu entries are changed to reflect their
+ *	current positions, and the size of the menu window
+ *	itself may be changed.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpComputeStandardMenuGeometry(
+    menuPtr)		/* Structure describing menu. */
+    TkMenu *menuPtr;
+{
+    Tk_Font tkfont;
+    Tk_FontMetrics menuMetrics, entryMetrics, *fmPtr;
+    int x, y, height, width, indicatorSpace, labelWidth, accelWidth;
+    int windowWidth, windowHeight, accelSpace;
+    int i, j, lastColumnBreak = 0;
+    TkMenuEntry *mePtr;
+    
+    if (menuPtr->tkwin == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    x = y = menuPtr->borderWidth;
+    indicatorSpace = labelWidth = accelWidth = 0;
+    windowHeight = windowWidth = 0;
+
+    /*
+     * On the Mac especially, getting font metrics can be quite slow,
+     * so we want to do it intelligently. We are going to precalculate
+     * them and pass them down to all of the measuring and drawing
+     * routines. We will measure the font metrics of the menu once.
+     * If an entry does not have its own font set, then we give
+     * the geometry/drawing routines the menu's font and metrics.
+     * If an entry has its own font, we will measure that font and
+     * give all of the geometry/drawing the entry's font and metrics.
+     */
+
+    Tk_GetFontMetrics(menuPtr->tkfont, &menuMetrics);
+    accelSpace = Tk_TextWidth(menuPtr->tkfont, "M", 1);
+
+    for (i = 0; i < menuPtr->numEntries; i++) {
+	mePtr = menuPtr->entries[i];
+    	tkfont = mePtr->tkfont;
+    	if (tkfont == NULL) {
+    	    tkfont = menuPtr->tkfont;
+    	    fmPtr = &menuMetrics;
+    	} else {
+    	    Tk_GetFontMetrics(tkfont, &entryMetrics);
+    	    fmPtr = &entryMetrics;
+    	}
+    	
+	if ((i > 0) && mePtr->columnBreak) {
+	    if (accelWidth != 0) {
+		labelWidth += accelSpace;
+	    }
+	    for (j = lastColumnBreak; j < i; j++) {
+		menuPtr->entries[j]->indicatorSpace = indicatorSpace;
+		menuPtr->entries[j]->labelWidth = labelWidth;
+		menuPtr->entries[j]->width = indicatorSpace + labelWidth
+			+ accelWidth + 2 * menuPtr->activeBorderWidth;
+		menuPtr->entries[j]->x = x;
+		menuPtr->entries[j]->entryFlags &= ~ENTRY_LAST_COLUMN;
+	    }
+	    x += indicatorSpace + labelWidth + accelWidth
+		    + 2 * menuPtr->activeBorderWidth;
+	    windowWidth = x;
+	    indicatorSpace = labelWidth = accelWidth = 0;
+	    lastColumnBreak = i;
+	    y = menuPtr->borderWidth;
+	}
+
+	if (mePtr->type == SEPARATOR_ENTRY) {
+	    GetMenuSeparatorGeometry(menuPtr, mePtr, tkfont,
+	    	    fmPtr, &width, &height);
+	    mePtr->height = height;
+	} else if (mePtr->type == TEAROFF_ENTRY) {
+	    GetTearoffEntryGeometry(menuPtr, mePtr, tkfont, 
+	    	    fmPtr, &width, &height);
+	    mePtr->height = height;
+	    labelWidth = width;
+	} else {
+	    
+	    /*
+	     * For each entry, compute the height required by that
+	     * particular entry, plus three widths:  the width of the
+	     * label, the width to allow for an indicator to be displayed
+	     * to the left of the label (if any), and the width of the
+	     * accelerator to be displayed to the right of the label
+	     * (if any).  These sizes depend, of course, on the type
+	     * of the entry.
+	     */
+	    
+	    GetMenuLabelGeometry(mePtr, tkfont, fmPtr, &width,
+	    	    &height);
+	    mePtr->height = height;
+	    if (!mePtr->hideMargin) {
+		width += MENU_MARGIN_WIDTH;
+	    }
+	    if (width > labelWidth) {
+	    	labelWidth = width;
+	    }
+	
+	    GetMenuAccelGeometry(menuPtr, mePtr, tkfont,
+		    fmPtr, &width, &height);
+	    if (height > mePtr->height) {
+	    	mePtr->height = height;
+	    }
+	    if (!mePtr->hideMargin) {
+		width += MENU_MARGIN_WIDTH;
+	    }
+	    if (width > accelWidth) {
+	    	accelWidth = width;
+	    }
+
+	    GetMenuIndicatorGeometry(menuPtr, mePtr, tkfont, 
+	    	    fmPtr, &width, &height);
+	    if (height > mePtr->height) {
+	    	mePtr->height = height;
+	    }
+	    if (!mePtr->hideMargin) {
+		width += MENU_MARGIN_WIDTH;
+	    }
+	    if (width > indicatorSpace) {
+	    	indicatorSpace = width;
+	    }
+
+	    mePtr->height += 2 * menuPtr->activeBorderWidth + 
+	    	    MENU_DIVIDER_HEIGHT;
+    	}
+        mePtr->y = y;
+	y += mePtr->height;
+	if (y > windowHeight) {
+	    windowHeight = y;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (accelWidth != 0) {
+	labelWidth += accelSpace;
+    }
+    for (j = lastColumnBreak; j < menuPtr->numEntries; j++) {
+	menuPtr->entries[j]->indicatorSpace = indicatorSpace;
+	menuPtr->entries[j]->labelWidth = labelWidth;
+	menuPtr->entries[j]->width = indicatorSpace + labelWidth
+		+ accelWidth + 2 * menuPtr->activeBorderWidth;
+	menuPtr->entries[j]->x = x;
+	menuPtr->entries[j]->entryFlags |= ENTRY_LAST_COLUMN;
+    }
+    windowWidth = x + indicatorSpace + labelWidth + accelWidth
+	    + 2 * menuPtr->activeBorderWidth + 2 * menuPtr->borderWidth;
+
+
+    windowHeight += menuPtr->borderWidth;
+    
+    /*
+     * The X server doesn't like zero dimensions, so round up to at least
+     * 1 (a zero-sized menu should never really occur, anyway).
+     */
+
+    if (windowWidth <= 0) {
+	windowWidth = 1;
+    }
+    if (windowHeight <= 0) {
+	windowHeight = 1;
+    }
+    menuPtr->totalWidth = windowWidth;
+    menuPtr->totalHeight = windowHeight;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate --
+ *
+ *	This routine reconfigures the menu and the clones indicated by
+ *	menuName becuase a toplevel has been created and any system
+ *	menus need to be created. Not applicable to UNIX.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	An idle handler is set up to do the reconfiguration.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpMenuNotifyToplevelCreate(interp, menuName)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* The interp the menu lives in. */
+    char *menuName;			/* The name of the menu to 
+					 * reconfigure. */
+{
+    /*
+     * Nothing to do.
+     */
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpMenuInit --
+ *
+ *	Does platform-specific initialization of menus.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpMenuInit()
+{
+    /*
+     * Nothing to do.
+     */
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixMenubu.c b/unix/tkUnixMenubu.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b5f4fd5
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixMenubu.c
@@ -0,0 +1,307 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixMenubu.c --
+ *
+ *	This file implements the Unix specific portion of the
+ *	menubutton widget.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996-1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixMenubu.c 1.9 97/05/23 16:25:01
+ */
+
+#include "tkMenubutton.h"
+
+/*
+ * The structure below defines menubutton class behavior by means of
+ * procedures that can be invoked from generic window code.
+ */
+
+TkClassProcs tkpMenubuttonClass = {
+    NULL,			/* createProc. */
+    TkMenuButtonWorldChanged,	/* geometryProc. */
+    NULL			/* modalProc. */
+};
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpCreateMenuButton --
+ *
+ *	Allocate a new TkMenuButton structure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated TkMenuButton structure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Registers an event handler for the widget.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkMenuButton *
+TkpCreateMenuButton(tkwin)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+{
+    return (TkMenuButton *)ckalloc(sizeof(TkMenuButton));
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDisplayMenuButton --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to display a menubutton widget.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Commands are output to X to display the menubutton in its
+ *	current mode.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDisplayMenuButton(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about widget. */
+{
+    register TkMenuButton *mbPtr = (TkMenuButton *) clientData;
+    GC gc;
+    Tk_3DBorder border;
+    Pixmap pixmap;
+    int x = 0;			/* Initialization needed only to stop
+				 * compiler warning. */
+    int y;
+    register Tk_Window tkwin = mbPtr->tkwin;
+    int width, height;
+
+    mbPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
+    if ((mbPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if ((mbPtr->state == tkDisabledUid) && (mbPtr->disabledFg != NULL)) {
+	gc = mbPtr->disabledGC;
+	border = mbPtr->normalBorder;
+    } else if ((mbPtr->state == tkActiveUid) && !Tk_StrictMotif(mbPtr->tkwin)) {
+	gc = mbPtr->activeTextGC;
+	border = mbPtr->activeBorder;
+    } else {
+	gc = mbPtr->normalTextGC;
+	border = mbPtr->normalBorder;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * In order to avoid screen flashes, this procedure redraws
+     * the menu button in a pixmap, then copies the pixmap to the
+     * screen in a single operation.  This means that there's no
+     * point in time where the on-sreen image has been cleared.
+     */
+
+    pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(mbPtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+	    Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin));
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin),
+	    Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+
+    /*
+     * Display image or bitmap or text for button.
+     */
+
+    if (mbPtr->image != None) {
+	Tk_SizeOfImage(mbPtr->image, &width, &height);
+
+	imageOrBitmap:
+	TkComputeAnchor(mbPtr->anchor, tkwin, 0, 0, 
+		width + mbPtr->indicatorWidth, height, &x, &y);
+	if (mbPtr->image != NULL) {
+	    Tk_RedrawImage(mbPtr->image, 0, 0, width, height, pixmap,
+		    x, y);
+	} else {
+	    XCopyPlane(mbPtr->display, mbPtr->bitmap, pixmap,
+		    gc, 0, 0, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height, x, y, 1);
+	}
+    } else if (mbPtr->bitmap != None) {
+	Tk_SizeOfBitmap(mbPtr->display, mbPtr->bitmap, &width, &height);
+	goto imageOrBitmap;
+    } else {
+	TkComputeAnchor(mbPtr->anchor, tkwin, mbPtr->padX, mbPtr->padY,
+		mbPtr->textWidth + mbPtr->indicatorWidth,
+		mbPtr->textHeight, &x, &y);
+	Tk_DrawTextLayout(mbPtr->display, pixmap, gc, mbPtr->textLayout, x, y,
+		0, -1);
+	Tk_UnderlineTextLayout(mbPtr->display, pixmap, gc, mbPtr->textLayout,
+		x, y, mbPtr->underline);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If the menu button is disabled with a stipple rather than a special
+     * foreground color, generate the stippled effect.
+     */
+
+    if ((mbPtr->state == tkDisabledUid)
+	    && ((mbPtr->disabledFg == NULL) || (mbPtr->image != NULL))) {
+	XFillRectangle(mbPtr->display, pixmap, mbPtr->disabledGC,
+		mbPtr->inset, mbPtr->inset,
+		(unsigned) (Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*mbPtr->inset),
+		(unsigned) (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*mbPtr->inset));
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Draw the cascade indicator for the menu button on the
+     * right side of the window, if desired.
+     */
+
+    if (mbPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	int borderWidth;
+
+	borderWidth = (mbPtr->indicatorHeight+1)/3;
+	if (borderWidth < 1) {
+	    borderWidth = 1;
+	}
+	/*y += mbPtr->textHeight / 2;*/
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border,
+		Tk_Width(tkwin) - mbPtr->inset - mbPtr->indicatorWidth
+		+ mbPtr->indicatorHeight,
+		((int) (Tk_Height(tkwin) - mbPtr->indicatorHeight))/2,
+		mbPtr->indicatorWidth - 2*mbPtr->indicatorHeight,
+		mbPtr->indicatorHeight, borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_RAISED);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Draw the border and traversal highlight last.  This way, if the
+     * menu button's contents overflow onto the border they'll be covered
+     * up by the border.
+     */
+
+    if (mbPtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
+	Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border,
+		mbPtr->highlightWidth, mbPtr->highlightWidth,
+		Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*mbPtr->highlightWidth,
+		Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*mbPtr->highlightWidth,
+		mbPtr->borderWidth, mbPtr->relief);
+    }
+    if (mbPtr->highlightWidth != 0) {
+	GC gc;
+
+	if (mbPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
+	    gc = Tk_GCForColor(mbPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap);
+	} else {
+	    gc = Tk_GCForColor(mbPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, pixmap);
+	}
+	Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, mbPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen,
+     * then delete the pixmap.
+     */
+
+    XCopyArea(mbPtr->display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+	    mbPtr->normalTextGC, 0, 0, (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin),
+	    (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, 0);
+    Tk_FreePixmap(mbPtr->display, pixmap);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDestroyMenuButton --
+ *
+ *	Free data structures associated with the menubutton control.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Restores the default control state.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDestroyMenuButton(mbPtr)
+    TkMenuButton *mbPtr;
+{
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry --
+ *
+ *	After changes in a menu button's text or bitmap, this procedure
+ *	recomputes the menu button's geometry and passes this information
+ *	along to the geometry manager for the window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The menu button's window may change size.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpComputeMenuButtonGeometry(mbPtr)
+    register TkMenuButton *mbPtr;	/* Widget record for menu button. */
+{
+    int width, height, mm, pixels;
+
+    mbPtr->inset = mbPtr->highlightWidth + mbPtr->borderWidth;
+    if (mbPtr->image != None) {
+	Tk_SizeOfImage(mbPtr->image, &width, &height);
+	if (mbPtr->width > 0) {
+	    width = mbPtr->width;
+	}
+	if (mbPtr->height > 0) {
+	    height = mbPtr->height;
+	}
+    } else if (mbPtr->bitmap != None) {
+	Tk_SizeOfBitmap(mbPtr->display, mbPtr->bitmap, &width, &height);
+	if (mbPtr->width > 0) {
+	    width = mbPtr->width;
+	}
+	if (mbPtr->height > 0) {
+	    height = mbPtr->height;
+	}
+    } else {
+	Tk_FreeTextLayout(mbPtr->textLayout);
+	mbPtr->textLayout = Tk_ComputeTextLayout(mbPtr->tkfont, mbPtr->text,
+		-1, mbPtr->wrapLength, mbPtr->justify, 0, &mbPtr->textWidth,
+		&mbPtr->textHeight);
+	width = mbPtr->textWidth;
+	height = mbPtr->textHeight;
+	if (mbPtr->width > 0) {
+	    width = mbPtr->width * Tk_TextWidth(mbPtr->tkfont, "0", 1);
+	}
+	if (mbPtr->height > 0) {
+	    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+
+	    Tk_GetFontMetrics(mbPtr->tkfont, &fm);
+	    height = mbPtr->height * fm.linespace;
+	}
+	width += 2*mbPtr->padX;
+	height += 2*mbPtr->padY;
+    }
+
+    if (mbPtr->indicatorOn) {
+	mm = WidthMMOfScreen(Tk_Screen(mbPtr->tkwin));
+	pixels = WidthOfScreen(Tk_Screen(mbPtr->tkwin));
+	mbPtr->indicatorHeight= (INDICATOR_HEIGHT * pixels)/(10*mm);
+	mbPtr->indicatorWidth = (INDICATOR_WIDTH * pixels)/(10*mm)
+		+ 2*mbPtr->indicatorHeight;
+	width += mbPtr->indicatorWidth;
+    } else {
+	mbPtr->indicatorHeight = 0;
+	mbPtr->indicatorWidth = 0;
+    }
+
+    Tk_GeometryRequest(mbPtr->tkwin, (int) (width + 2*mbPtr->inset),
+	    (int) (height + 2*mbPtr->inset));
+    Tk_SetInternalBorder(mbPtr->tkwin, mbPtr->inset);
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixPort.h b/unix/tkUnixPort.h
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..146e60d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixPort.h
@@ -0,0 +1,235 @@
+/*
+ * tkUnixPort.h --
+ *
+ *	This file is included by all of the Tk C files.  It contains
+ *	information that may be configuration-dependent, such as
+ *	#includes for system include files and a few other things.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1991-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixPort.h 1.38 97/05/17 16:48:19
+ */
+
+#ifndef _UNIXPORT
+#define _UNIXPORT
+
+#define __UNIX__ 1
+
+/*
+ * Macro to use instead of "void" for arguments that must have
+ * type "void *" in ANSI C;  maps them to type "char *" in
+ * non-ANSI systems.  This macro may be used in some of the include
+ * files below, which is why it is defined here.
+ */
+
+#ifndef VOID
+#   ifdef __STDC__
+#       define VOID void
+#   else
+#       define VOID char
+#   endif
+#endif
+
+#include <stdio.h>
+#include <ctype.h>
+#include <fcntl.h>
+#ifdef HAVE_LIMITS_H
+#   include <limits.h>
+#else
+#   include "../compat/limits.h"
+#endif
+#include <math.h>
+#include <pwd.h>
+#ifdef NO_STDLIB_H
+#   include "../compat/stdlib.h"
+#else
+#   include <stdlib.h>
+#endif
+#include <string.h>
+#include <sys/types.h>
+#include <sys/file.h>
+#ifdef HAVE_SYS_SELECT_H
+#   include <sys/select.h>
+#endif
+#include <sys/stat.h>
+#ifndef _TCL
+#   include <tcl.h>
+#endif
+#if TIME_WITH_SYS_TIME
+#   include <sys/time.h>
+#   include <time.h>
+#else
+#   if HAVE_SYS_TIME_H
+#       include <sys/time.h>
+#   else
+#       include <time.h>
+#   endif
+#endif
+#ifdef HAVE_UNISTD_H
+#   include <unistd.h>
+#else
+#   include "../compat/unistd.h"
+#endif
+#include <X11/Xlib.h>
+#include <X11/cursorfont.h>
+#include <X11/keysym.h>
+#include <X11/Xatom.h>
+#include <X11/Xproto.h>
+#include <X11/Xresource.h>
+#include <X11/Xutil.h>
+
+/*
+ * The following macro defines the type of the mask arguments to
+ * select:
+ */
+
+#ifndef NO_FD_SET
+#   define SELECT_MASK fd_set
+#else
+#   ifndef _AIX
+	typedef long fd_mask;
+#   endif
+#   if defined(_IBMR2)
+#	define SELECT_MASK void
+#   else
+#	define SELECT_MASK int
+#   endif
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * The following macro defines the number of fd_masks in an fd_set:
+ */
+
+#ifndef FD_SETSIZE
+#   ifdef OPEN_MAX
+#	define FD_SETSIZE OPEN_MAX
+#   else
+#	define FD_SETSIZE 256
+#   endif
+#endif
+#if !defined(howmany)
+#   define howmany(x, y) (((x)+((y)-1))/(y))
+#endif
+#ifndef NFDBITS
+#   define NFDBITS NBBY*sizeof(fd_mask)
+#endif
+#define MASK_SIZE howmany(FD_SETSIZE, NFDBITS)
+
+/*
+ * Not all systems declare the errno variable in errno.h. so this
+ * file does it explicitly.
+ */
+
+extern int errno;
+
+/*
+ * Define "NBBY" (number of bits per byte) if it's not already defined.
+ */
+
+#ifndef NBBY
+#   define NBBY 8
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * These macros are just wrappers for the equivalent X Region calls.
+ */
+
+#define TkClipBox(rgn, rect) XClipBox((Region) rgn, rect)
+#define TkCreateRegion() (TkRegion) XCreateRegion()
+#define TkDestroyRegion(rgn) XDestroyRegion((Region) rgn)
+#define TkIntersectRegion(a, b, r) XIntersectRegion((Region) a, \
+	(Region) b, (Region) r)
+#define TkRectInRegion(r, x, y, w, h) XRectInRegion((Region) r, x, y, w, h)
+#define TkSetRegion(d, gc, rgn) XSetRegion(d, gc, (Region) rgn)
+#define TkUnionRectWithRegion(rect, src, ret) XUnionRectWithRegion(rect, \
+	(Region) src, (Region) ret)
+
+/*
+ * The TkPutImage macro strips off the color table information, which isn't
+ * needed for X.
+ */
+
+#define TkPutImage(colors, ncolors, display, pixels, gc, image, destx, desty, srcx, srcy, width, height) \
+	XPutImage(display, pixels, gc, image, destx, desty, srcx, \
+	srcy, width, height);
+
+/*
+ * The following Tk functions are implemented as macros under Windows.
+ */
+
+#define TkGetNativeProlog(interp) TkGetProlog(interp)
+
+/*
+ * Supply macros for seek offsets, if they're not already provided by
+ * an include file.
+ */
+
+#ifndef SEEK_SET
+#   define SEEK_SET 0
+#endif
+
+#ifndef SEEK_CUR
+#   define SEEK_CUR 1
+#endif
+
+#ifndef SEEK_END
+#   define SEEK_END 2
+#endif
+
+/*
+ * Declarations for various library procedures that may not be declared
+ * in any other header file.
+ */
+
+extern void		panic _ANSI_ARGS_(TCL_VARARGS(char *, string));
+
+/*
+ * These functions do nothing under Unix, so we just eliminate calls to them.
+ */
+
+#define TkpDestroyButton(butPtr) {}
+#define TkSelUpdateClipboard(a,b) {}
+#define TkSetPixmapColormap(p,c) {}
+
+/*
+ * These calls implement native bitmaps which are not supported under
+ * UNIX.  The macros eliminate the calls.
+ */
+
+#define TkpDefineNativeBitmaps()
+#define TkpCreateNativeBitmap(display, source) None
+#define TkpGetNativeAppBitmap(display, name, w, h) None
+
+/*
+ * This macro stores a representation of the window handle in a string.
+ */
+
+#define TkpPrintWindowId(buf,w) \
+	sprintf((buf), "0x%x", (unsigned int) (w))
+	    
+/*
+ * TkpScanWindowId is just an alias for Tcl_GetInt on Unix.
+ */
+
+#define TkpScanWindowId(i,s,wp) \
+	Tcl_GetInt((i),(s),(wp))
+	    
+/*
+ * This macro indicates that entry and text widgets should display
+ * the selection highlight regardless of which window has the focus.
+ */
+
+#define ALWAYS_SHOW_SELECTION
+
+/*
+ * The following declaration is used to get access to a private Tcl interface
+ * that is needed for portability reasons.
+ */
+
+EXTERN void		TclpGetTime _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Time *time));
+
+#endif /* _UNIXPORT */
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixScale.c b/unix/tkUnixScale.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..05b2a19
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixScale.c
@@ -0,0 +1,828 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixScale.c --
+ *
+ *	This file implements the X specific portion of the scrollbar
+ *	widget.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixScale.c 1.5 96/07/31 14:22:29
+ */
+
+#include "tkScale.h"
+#include "tkInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ */
+
+static void		DisplayHorizontalScale _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
+			    Drawable drawable, XRectangle *drawnAreaPtr));
+static void		DisplayHorizontalValue _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
+			    Drawable drawable, double value, int top));
+static void		DisplayVerticalScale _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
+			    Drawable drawable, XRectangle *drawnAreaPtr));
+static void		DisplayVerticalValue _ANSI_ARGS_((TkScale *scalePtr,
+			    Drawable drawable, double value, int rightEdge));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpCreateScale --
+ *
+ *	Allocate a new TkScale structure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated TkScale structure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkScale *
+TkpCreateScale(tkwin)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+{
+    return (TkScale *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkScale));
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDestroyScale --
+ *
+ *	Destroy a TkScale structure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Memory is freed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDestroyScale(scalePtr)
+    TkScale *scalePtr;
+{
+    ckfree((char *) scalePtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DisplayVerticalScale --
+ *
+ *	This procedure redraws the contents of a vertical scale
+ *	window.  It is invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only
+ *	runs when there's nothing else for the application to do.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	There is no return value.  If only a part of the scale needs
+ *	to be redrawn, then drawnAreaPtr is modified to reflect the
+ *	area that was actually modified.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Information appears on the screen.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DisplayVerticalScale(scalePtr, drawable, drawnAreaPtr)
+    TkScale *scalePtr;			/* Widget record for scale. */
+    Drawable drawable;			/* Where to display scale (window
+					 * or pixmap). */
+    XRectangle *drawnAreaPtr;		/* Initally contains area of window;
+					 * if only a part of the scale is
+					 * redrawn, gets modified to reflect
+					 * the part of the window that was
+					 * redrawn. */
+{
+    Tk_Window tkwin = scalePtr->tkwin;
+    int x, y, width, height, shadowWidth;
+    double tickValue;
+    Tk_3DBorder sliderBorder;
+
+    /*
+     * Display the information from left to right across the window.
+     */
+
+    if (!(scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER)) {
+	drawnAreaPtr->x = scalePtr->vertTickRightX;
+	drawnAreaPtr->y = scalePtr->inset;
+	drawnAreaPtr->width = scalePtr->vertTroughX + scalePtr->width
+		+ 2*scalePtr->borderWidth - scalePtr->vertTickRightX;
+	drawnAreaPtr->height -= 2*scalePtr->inset;
+    }
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, scalePtr->bgBorder,
+	    drawnAreaPtr->x, drawnAreaPtr->y, drawnAreaPtr->width,
+	    drawnAreaPtr->height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    if (scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER) {
+	/*
+	 * Display the tick marks.
+	 */
+
+	if (scalePtr->tickInterval != 0) {
+	    for (tickValue = scalePtr->fromValue; ;
+		    tickValue += scalePtr->tickInterval) {
+		/*
+		 * The TkRoundToResolution call gets rid of accumulated
+		 * round-off errors, if any.
+		 */
+
+		tickValue = TkRoundToResolution(scalePtr, tickValue);
+		if (scalePtr->toValue >= scalePtr->fromValue) {
+		    if (tickValue > scalePtr->toValue) {
+			break;
+		    }
+		} else {
+		    if (tickValue < scalePtr->toValue) {
+			break;
+		    }
+		}
+		DisplayVerticalValue(scalePtr, drawable, tickValue,
+			scalePtr->vertTickRightX);
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Display the value, if it is desired.
+     */
+
+    if (scalePtr->showValue) {
+	DisplayVerticalValue(scalePtr, drawable, scalePtr->value,
+		scalePtr->vertValueRightX);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Display the trough and the slider.
+     */
+
+    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable,
+	    scalePtr->bgBorder, scalePtr->vertTroughX, scalePtr->inset,
+	    scalePtr->width + 2*scalePtr->borderWidth,
+	    Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*scalePtr->inset, scalePtr->borderWidth,
+	    TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+    XFillRectangle(scalePtr->display, drawable, scalePtr->troughGC,
+	    scalePtr->vertTroughX + scalePtr->borderWidth,
+	    scalePtr->inset + scalePtr->borderWidth,
+	    (unsigned) scalePtr->width,
+	    (unsigned) (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*scalePtr->inset
+		- 2*scalePtr->borderWidth));
+    if (scalePtr->state == tkActiveUid) {
+	sliderBorder = scalePtr->activeBorder;
+    } else {
+	sliderBorder = scalePtr->bgBorder;
+    }
+    width = scalePtr->width;
+    height = scalePtr->sliderLength/2;
+    x = scalePtr->vertTroughX + scalePtr->borderWidth;
+    y = TkpValueToPixel(scalePtr, scalePtr->value) - height;
+    shadowWidth = scalePtr->borderWidth/2;
+    if (shadowWidth == 0) {
+	shadowWidth = 1;
+    }
+    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, sliderBorder, x, y, width,
+	    2*height, shadowWidth, scalePtr->sliderRelief);
+    x += shadowWidth;
+    y += shadowWidth;
+    width -= 2*shadowWidth;
+    height -= shadowWidth;
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, sliderBorder, x, y, width,
+	    height, shadowWidth, scalePtr->sliderRelief);
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, sliderBorder, x, y+height,
+	    width, height, shadowWidth, scalePtr->sliderRelief);
+
+    /*
+     * Draw the label to the right of the scale.
+     */
+
+    if ((scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER) && (scalePtr->labelLength != 0)) {
+	Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+
+	Tk_GetFontMetrics(scalePtr->tkfont, &fm);
+	Tk_DrawChars(scalePtr->display, drawable, scalePtr->textGC,
+		scalePtr->tkfont, scalePtr->label, scalePtr->labelLength,
+		scalePtr->vertLabelX, scalePtr->inset + (3*fm.ascent)/2);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DisplayVerticalValue --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to display values (scale readings)
+ *	for vertically-oriented scales.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The numerical value corresponding to value is displayed with
+ *	its right edge at "rightEdge", and at a vertical position in
+ *	the scale that corresponds to "value".
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DisplayVerticalValue(scalePtr, drawable, value, rightEdge)
+    register TkScale *scalePtr;	/* Information about widget in which to
+				 * display value. */
+    Drawable drawable;		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
+				 * the value. */
+    double value;		/* Y-coordinate of number to display,
+				 * specified in application coords, not
+				 * in pixels (we'll compute pixels). */
+    int rightEdge;		/* X-coordinate of right edge of text,
+				 * specified in pixels. */
+{
+    register Tk_Window tkwin = scalePtr->tkwin;
+    int y, width, length;
+    char valueString[PRINT_CHARS];
+    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+
+    Tk_GetFontMetrics(scalePtr->tkfont, &fm);
+    y = TkpValueToPixel(scalePtr, value) + fm.ascent/2;
+    sprintf(valueString, scalePtr->format, value);
+    length = strlen(valueString);
+    width = Tk_TextWidth(scalePtr->tkfont, valueString, length);
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust the y-coordinate if necessary to keep the text entirely
+     * inside the window.
+     */
+
+    if ((y - fm.ascent) < (scalePtr->inset + SPACING)) {
+	y = scalePtr->inset + SPACING + fm.ascent;
+    }
+    if ((y + fm.descent) > (Tk_Height(tkwin) - scalePtr->inset - SPACING)) {
+	y = Tk_Height(tkwin) - scalePtr->inset - SPACING - fm.descent;
+    }
+    Tk_DrawChars(scalePtr->display, drawable, scalePtr->textGC,
+	    scalePtr->tkfont, valueString, length, rightEdge - width, y);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DisplayHorizontalScale --
+ *
+ *	This procedure redraws the contents of a horizontal scale
+ *	window.  It is invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only
+ *	runs when there's nothing else for the application to do.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	There is no return value.  If only a part of the scale needs
+ *	to be redrawn, then drawnAreaPtr is modified to reflect the
+ *	area that was actually modified.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Information appears on the screen.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DisplayHorizontalScale(scalePtr, drawable, drawnAreaPtr)
+    TkScale *scalePtr;			/* Widget record for scale. */
+    Drawable drawable;			/* Where to display scale (window
+					 * or pixmap). */
+    XRectangle *drawnAreaPtr;		/* Initally contains area of window;
+					 * if only a part of the scale is
+					 * redrawn, gets modified to reflect
+					 * the part of the window that was
+					 * redrawn. */
+{
+    register Tk_Window tkwin = scalePtr->tkwin;
+    int x, y, width, height, shadowWidth;
+    double tickValue;
+    Tk_3DBorder sliderBorder;
+
+    /*
+     * Display the information from bottom to top across the window.
+     */
+
+    if (!(scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER)) {
+	drawnAreaPtr->x = scalePtr->inset;
+	drawnAreaPtr->y = scalePtr->horizValueY;
+	drawnAreaPtr->width -= 2*scalePtr->inset;
+	drawnAreaPtr->height = scalePtr->horizTroughY + scalePtr->width
+		+ 2*scalePtr->borderWidth - scalePtr->horizValueY;
+    }
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, scalePtr->bgBorder,
+	    drawnAreaPtr->x, drawnAreaPtr->y, drawnAreaPtr->width,
+	    drawnAreaPtr->height, 0, TK_RELIEF_FLAT);
+    if (scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER) {
+	/*
+	 * Display the tick marks.
+	 */
+
+	if (scalePtr->tickInterval != 0) {
+	    for (tickValue = scalePtr->fromValue; ;
+		    tickValue += scalePtr->tickInterval) {
+		/*
+		 * The TkRoundToResolution call gets rid of accumulated
+		 * round-off errors, if any.
+		 */
+
+		tickValue = TkRoundToResolution(scalePtr, tickValue);
+		if (scalePtr->toValue >= scalePtr->fromValue) {
+		    if (tickValue > scalePtr->toValue) {
+			break;
+		    }
+		} else {
+		    if (tickValue < scalePtr->toValue) {
+			break;
+		    }
+		}
+		DisplayHorizontalValue(scalePtr, drawable, tickValue,
+			scalePtr->horizTickY);
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Display the value, if it is desired.
+     */
+
+    if (scalePtr->showValue) {
+	DisplayHorizontalValue(scalePtr, drawable, scalePtr->value,
+		scalePtr->horizValueY);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Display the trough and the slider.
+     */
+
+    y = scalePtr->horizTroughY;
+    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable,
+	    scalePtr->bgBorder, scalePtr->inset, y,
+	    Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*scalePtr->inset,
+	    scalePtr->width + 2*scalePtr->borderWidth,
+	    scalePtr->borderWidth, TK_RELIEF_SUNKEN);
+    XFillRectangle(scalePtr->display, drawable, scalePtr->troughGC,
+	    scalePtr->inset + scalePtr->borderWidth,
+	    y + scalePtr->borderWidth,
+	    (unsigned) (Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*scalePtr->inset
+		- 2*scalePtr->borderWidth),
+	    (unsigned) scalePtr->width);
+    if (scalePtr->state == tkActiveUid) {
+	sliderBorder = scalePtr->activeBorder;
+    } else {
+	sliderBorder = scalePtr->bgBorder;
+    }
+    width = scalePtr->sliderLength/2;
+    height = scalePtr->width;
+    x = TkpValueToPixel(scalePtr, scalePtr->value) - width;
+    y += scalePtr->borderWidth;
+    shadowWidth = scalePtr->borderWidth/2;
+    if (shadowWidth == 0) {
+	shadowWidth = 1;
+    }
+    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, sliderBorder,
+	    x, y, 2*width, height, shadowWidth, scalePtr->sliderRelief);
+    x += shadowWidth;
+    y += shadowWidth;
+    width -= shadowWidth;
+    height -= 2*shadowWidth;
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, sliderBorder, x, y, width, height,
+	    shadowWidth, scalePtr->sliderRelief);
+    Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, drawable, sliderBorder, x+width, y,
+	    width, height, shadowWidth, scalePtr->sliderRelief);
+
+    /*
+     * Draw the label at the top of the scale.
+     */
+
+    if ((scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER) && (scalePtr->labelLength != 0)) {
+	Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+
+	Tk_GetFontMetrics(scalePtr->tkfont, &fm);
+	Tk_DrawChars(scalePtr->display, drawable, scalePtr->textGC,
+		scalePtr->tkfont, scalePtr->label, scalePtr->labelLength,
+		scalePtr->inset + fm.ascent/2, scalePtr->horizLabelY + fm.ascent);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DisplayHorizontalValue --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to display values (scale readings)
+ *	for horizontally-oriented scales.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The numerical value corresponding to value is displayed with
+ *	its bottom edge at "bottom", and at a horizontal position in
+ *	the scale that corresponds to "value".
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DisplayHorizontalValue(scalePtr, drawable, value, top)
+    register TkScale *scalePtr;	/* Information about widget in which to
+				 * display value. */
+    Drawable drawable;		/* Pixmap or window in which to draw
+				 * the value. */
+    double value;		/* X-coordinate of number to display,
+				 * specified in application coords, not
+				 * in pixels (we'll compute pixels). */
+    int top;			/* Y-coordinate of top edge of text,
+				 * specified in pixels. */
+{
+    register Tk_Window tkwin = scalePtr->tkwin;
+    int x, y, length, width;
+    char valueString[PRINT_CHARS];
+    Tk_FontMetrics fm;
+
+    x = TkpValueToPixel(scalePtr, value);
+    Tk_GetFontMetrics(scalePtr->tkfont, &fm);
+    y = top + fm.ascent;
+    sprintf(valueString, scalePtr->format, value);
+    length = strlen(valueString);
+    width = Tk_TextWidth(scalePtr->tkfont, valueString, length);
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust the x-coordinate if necessary to keep the text entirely
+     * inside the window.
+     */
+
+    x -= (width)/2;
+    if (x < (scalePtr->inset + SPACING)) {
+	x = scalePtr->inset + SPACING;
+    }
+    if (x > (Tk_Width(tkwin) - scalePtr->inset)) {
+	x = Tk_Width(tkwin) - scalePtr->inset - SPACING - width;
+    }
+    Tk_DrawChars(scalePtr->display, drawable, scalePtr->textGC,
+	    scalePtr->tkfont, valueString, length, x, y);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDisplayScale --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked as an idle handler to redisplay
+ *	the contents of a scale widget.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The scale gets redisplayed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDisplayScale(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Widget record for scale. */
+{
+    TkScale *scalePtr = (TkScale *) clientData;
+    Tk_Window tkwin = scalePtr->tkwin;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp = scalePtr->interp;
+    Pixmap pixmap;
+    int result;
+    char string[PRINT_CHARS];
+    XRectangle drawnArea;
+
+    if ((scalePtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(scalePtr->tkwin)) {
+	goto done;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Invoke the scale's command if needed.
+     */
+
+    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) scalePtr);
+    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
+    if ((scalePtr->flags & INVOKE_COMMAND) && (scalePtr->command != NULL)) {
+	sprintf(string, scalePtr->format, scalePtr->value);
+	result = Tcl_VarEval(interp, scalePtr->command,	" ", string,
+                             (char *) NULL);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (command executed by scale)");
+	    Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+	}
+    }
+    Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+    scalePtr->flags &= ~INVOKE_COMMAND;
+    if (scalePtr->tkwin == NULL) {
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) scalePtr);
+	return;
+    }
+    Tcl_Release((ClientData) scalePtr);
+
+    /*
+     * In order to avoid screen flashes, this procedure redraws
+     * the scale in a pixmap, then copies the pixmap to the
+     * screen in a single operation.  This means that there's no
+     * point in time where the on-sreen image has been cleared.
+     */
+
+    pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(scalePtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+	    Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin));
+    drawnArea.x = 0;
+    drawnArea.y = 0;
+    drawnArea.width = Tk_Width(tkwin);
+    drawnArea.height = Tk_Height(tkwin);
+
+    /*
+     * Much of the redisplay is done totally differently for
+     * horizontal and vertical scales.  Handle the part that's
+     * different.
+     */
+
+    if (scalePtr->vertical) {
+	DisplayVerticalScale(scalePtr, pixmap, &drawnArea);
+    } else {
+	DisplayHorizontalScale(scalePtr, pixmap, &drawnArea);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Now handle the part of redisplay that is the same for
+     * horizontal and vertical scales:  border and traversal
+     * highlight.
+     */
+
+    if (scalePtr->flags & REDRAW_OTHER) {
+	if (scalePtr->relief != TK_RELIEF_FLAT) {
+	    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, scalePtr->bgBorder,
+		    scalePtr->highlightWidth, scalePtr->highlightWidth,
+		    Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*scalePtr->highlightWidth,
+		    Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*scalePtr->highlightWidth,
+		    scalePtr->borderWidth, scalePtr->relief);
+	}
+	if (scalePtr->highlightWidth != 0) {
+	    GC gc;
+    
+	    if (scalePtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
+		gc = Tk_GCForColor(scalePtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap);
+	    } else {
+		gc = Tk_GCForColor(scalePtr->highlightBgColorPtr, pixmap);
+	    }
+	    Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, scalePtr->highlightWidth, pixmap);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen,
+     * then delete the pixmap.
+     */
+
+    XCopyArea(scalePtr->display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+	    scalePtr->copyGC, drawnArea.x, drawnArea.y, drawnArea.width,
+	    drawnArea.height, drawnArea.x, drawnArea.y);
+    Tk_FreePixmap(scalePtr->display, pixmap);
+
+    done:
+    scalePtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_ALL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpScaleElement --
+ *
+ *	Determine which part of a scale widget lies under a given
+ *	point.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is either TROUGH1, SLIDER, TROUGH2, or
+ *	OTHER, depending on which of the scale's active elements
+ *	(if any) is under the point at (x,y).
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpScaleElement(scalePtr, x, y)
+    TkScale *scalePtr;		/* Widget record for scale. */
+    int x, y;			/* Coordinates within scalePtr's window. */
+{
+    int sliderFirst;
+
+    if (scalePtr->vertical) {
+	if ((x < scalePtr->vertTroughX)
+		|| (x >= (scalePtr->vertTroughX + 2*scalePtr->borderWidth +
+		scalePtr->width))) {
+	    return OTHER;
+	}
+	if ((y < scalePtr->inset)
+		|| (y >= (Tk_Height(scalePtr->tkwin) - scalePtr->inset))) {
+	    return OTHER;
+	}
+	sliderFirst = TkpValueToPixel(scalePtr, scalePtr->value)
+		- scalePtr->sliderLength/2;
+	if (y < sliderFirst) {
+	    return TROUGH1;
+	}
+	if (y < (sliderFirst+scalePtr->sliderLength)) {
+	    return SLIDER;
+	}
+	return TROUGH2;
+    }
+
+    if ((y < scalePtr->horizTroughY)
+	    || (y >= (scalePtr->horizTroughY + 2*scalePtr->borderWidth +
+	    scalePtr->width))) {
+	return OTHER;
+    }
+    if ((x < scalePtr->inset)
+	    || (x >= (Tk_Width(scalePtr->tkwin) - scalePtr->inset))) {
+	return OTHER;
+    }
+    sliderFirst = TkpValueToPixel(scalePtr, scalePtr->value)
+	    - scalePtr->sliderLength/2;
+    if (x < sliderFirst) {
+	return TROUGH1;
+    }
+    if (x < (sliderFirst+scalePtr->sliderLength)) {
+	return SLIDER;
+    }
+    return TROUGH2;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpSetScaleValue --
+ *
+ *	This procedure changes the value of a scale and invokes
+ *	a Tcl command to reflect the current position of a scale
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A Tcl command is invoked, and an additional error-processing
+ *	command may also be invoked.  The scale's slider is redrawn.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpSetScaleValue(scalePtr, value, setVar, invokeCommand)
+    register TkScale *scalePtr;	/* Info about widget. */
+    double value;		/* New value for scale.  Gets adjusted
+				 * if it's off the scale. */
+    int setVar;			/* Non-zero means reflect new value through
+				 * to associated variable, if any. */
+    int invokeCommand;		/* Non-zero means invoked -command option
+				 * to notify of new value, 0 means don't. */
+{
+    char string[PRINT_CHARS];
+
+    value = TkRoundToResolution(scalePtr, value);
+    if ((value < scalePtr->fromValue)
+	    ^ (scalePtr->toValue < scalePtr->fromValue)) {
+	value = scalePtr->fromValue;
+    }
+    if ((value > scalePtr->toValue)
+	    ^ (scalePtr->toValue < scalePtr->fromValue)) {
+	value = scalePtr->toValue;
+    }
+    if (scalePtr->flags & NEVER_SET) {
+	scalePtr->flags &= ~NEVER_SET;
+    } else if (scalePtr->value == value) {
+	return;
+    }
+    scalePtr->value = value;
+    if (invokeCommand) {
+	scalePtr->flags |= INVOKE_COMMAND;
+    }
+    TkEventuallyRedrawScale(scalePtr, REDRAW_SLIDER);
+
+    if (setVar && (scalePtr->varName != NULL)) {
+	sprintf(string, scalePtr->format, scalePtr->value);
+	scalePtr->flags |= SETTING_VAR;
+	Tcl_SetVar(scalePtr->interp, scalePtr->varName, string,
+	       TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	scalePtr->flags &= ~SETTING_VAR;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpPixelToValue --
+ *
+ *	Given a pixel within a scale window, return the scale
+ *	reading corresponding to that pixel.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A double-precision scale reading.  If the value is outside
+ *	the legal range for the scale then it's rounded to the nearest
+ *	end of the scale.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+double
+TkpPixelToValue(scalePtr, x, y)
+    register TkScale *scalePtr;		/* Information about widget. */
+    int x, y;				/* Coordinates of point within
+					 * window. */
+{
+    double value, pixelRange;
+
+    if (scalePtr->vertical) {
+	pixelRange = Tk_Height(scalePtr->tkwin) - scalePtr->sliderLength
+		- 2*scalePtr->inset - 2*scalePtr->borderWidth;
+	value = y;
+    } else {
+	pixelRange = Tk_Width(scalePtr->tkwin) - scalePtr->sliderLength
+		- 2*scalePtr->inset - 2*scalePtr->borderWidth;
+	value = x;
+    }
+
+    if (pixelRange <= 0) {
+	/*
+	 * Not enough room for the slider to actually slide:  just return
+	 * the scale's current value.
+	 */
+
+	return scalePtr->value;
+    }
+    value -= scalePtr->sliderLength/2 + scalePtr->inset
+		+ scalePtr->borderWidth;
+    value /= pixelRange;
+    if (value < 0) {
+	value = 0;
+    }
+    if (value > 1) {
+	value = 1;
+    }
+    value = scalePtr->fromValue +
+		value * (scalePtr->toValue - scalePtr->fromValue);
+    return TkRoundToResolution(scalePtr, value);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpValueToPixel --
+ *
+ *	Given a reading of the scale, return the x-coordinate or
+ *	y-coordinate corresponding to that reading, depending on
+ *	whether the scale is vertical or horizontal, respectively.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	An integer value giving the pixel location corresponding
+ *	to reading.  The value is restricted to lie within the
+ *	defined range for the scale.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpValueToPixel(scalePtr, value)
+    register TkScale *scalePtr;		/* Information about widget. */
+    double value;			/* Reading of the widget. */
+{
+    int y, pixelRange;
+    double valueRange;
+
+    valueRange = scalePtr->toValue - scalePtr->fromValue;
+    pixelRange = (scalePtr->vertical ? Tk_Height(scalePtr->tkwin)
+	    : Tk_Width(scalePtr->tkwin)) - scalePtr->sliderLength
+	    - 2*scalePtr->inset - 2*scalePtr->borderWidth;
+    if (valueRange == 0) {
+	y = 0;
+    } else {
+	y = (int) ((value - scalePtr->fromValue) * pixelRange
+		  / valueRange + 0.5);
+	if (y < 0) {
+	    y = 0;
+	} else if (y > pixelRange) {
+	    y = pixelRange;
+	}
+    }
+    y += scalePtr->sliderLength/2 + scalePtr->inset + scalePtr->borderWidth;
+    return y;
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixScrlbr.c b/unix/tkUnixScrlbr.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74b46e8
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixScrlbr.c
@@ -0,0 +1,476 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixScrollbar.c --
+ *
+ *	This file implements the Unix specific portion of the scrollbar
+ *	widget.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1996 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixScrlbr.c 1.8 96/12/10 20:05:07
+ */
+
+#include "tkScrollbar.h"
+
+/*
+ * Minimum slider length, in pixels (designed to make sure that the slider
+ * is always easy to grab with the mouse).
+ */
+
+#define MIN_SLIDER_LENGTH	5
+
+/*
+ * Declaration of Unix specific scrollbar structure.
+ */
+
+typedef struct UnixScrollbar {
+    TkScrollbar info;		/* Generic scrollbar info. */
+    GC troughGC;		/* For drawing trough. */
+    GC copyGC;			/* Used for copying from pixmap onto screen. */
+} UnixScrollbar;
+
+/*
+ * The class procedure table for the scrollbar widget.
+ */
+
+TkClassProcs tkpScrollbarProcs = { 
+    NULL,			/* createProc. */
+    NULL,			/* geometryProc. */
+    NULL			/* modalProc. */
+};
+
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpCreateScrollbar --
+ *
+ *	Allocate a new TkScrollbar structure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a newly allocated TkScrollbar structure.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Registers an event handler for the widget.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkScrollbar *
+TkpCreateScrollbar(tkwin)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;
+{
+    UnixScrollbar *scrollPtr = (UnixScrollbar *)ckalloc(sizeof(UnixScrollbar));
+    scrollPtr->troughGC = None;
+    scrollPtr->copyGC = None;
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin,
+	    ExposureMask|StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask,
+	    TkScrollbarEventProc, (ClientData) scrollPtr);
+
+    return (TkScrollbar *) scrollPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDisplayScrollbar --
+ *
+ *	This procedure redraws the contents of a scrollbar window.
+ *	It is invoked as a do-when-idle handler, so it only runs
+ *	when there's nothing else for the application to do.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Information appears on the screen.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDisplayScrollbar(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Information about window. */
+{
+    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr = (TkScrollbar *) clientData;
+    register Tk_Window tkwin = scrollPtr->tkwin;
+    XPoint points[7];
+    Tk_3DBorder border;
+    int relief, width, elementBorderWidth;
+    Pixmap pixmap;
+
+    if ((scrollPtr->tkwin == NULL) || !Tk_IsMapped(tkwin)) {
+	goto done;
+    }
+
+    if (scrollPtr->vertical) {
+	width = Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->inset;
+    } else {
+	width = Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->inset;
+    }
+    elementBorderWidth = scrollPtr->elementBorderWidth;
+    if (elementBorderWidth < 0) {
+	elementBorderWidth = scrollPtr->borderWidth;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * In order to avoid screen flashes, this procedure redraws
+     * the scrollbar in a pixmap, then copies the pixmap to the
+     * screen in a single operation.  This means that there's no
+     * point in time where the on-sreen image has been cleared.
+     */
+
+    pixmap = Tk_GetPixmap(scrollPtr->display, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+	    Tk_Width(tkwin), Tk_Height(tkwin), Tk_Depth(tkwin));
+
+    if (scrollPtr->highlightWidth != 0) {
+	GC gc;
+
+	if (scrollPtr->flags & GOT_FOCUS) {
+	    gc = Tk_GCForColor(scrollPtr->highlightColorPtr, pixmap);
+	} else {
+	    gc = Tk_GCForColor(scrollPtr->highlightBgColorPtr, pixmap);
+	}
+	Tk_DrawFocusHighlight(tkwin, gc, scrollPtr->highlightWidth, pixmap);
+    }
+    Tk_Draw3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, scrollPtr->bgBorder,
+	    scrollPtr->highlightWidth, scrollPtr->highlightWidth,
+	    Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->highlightWidth,
+	    Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->highlightWidth,
+	    scrollPtr->borderWidth, scrollPtr->relief);
+    XFillRectangle(scrollPtr->display, pixmap,
+	    ((UnixScrollbar*)scrollPtr)->troughGC,
+	    scrollPtr->inset, scrollPtr->inset,
+	    (unsigned) (Tk_Width(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->inset),
+	    (unsigned) (Tk_Height(tkwin) - 2*scrollPtr->inset));
+
+    /*
+     * Draw the top or left arrow.  The coordinates of the polygon
+     * points probably seem odd, but they were carefully chosen with
+     * respect to X's rules for filling polygons.  These point choices
+     * cause the arrows to just fill the narrow dimension of the
+     * scrollbar and be properly centered.
+     */
+
+    if (scrollPtr->activeField == TOP_ARROW) {
+	border = scrollPtr->activeBorder;
+	relief = scrollPtr->activeField == TOP_ARROW ? scrollPtr->activeRelief
+		: TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    } else {
+	border = scrollPtr->bgBorder;
+	relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    }
+    if (scrollPtr->vertical) {
+	points[0].x = scrollPtr->inset - 1;
+	points[0].y = scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->inset - 1;
+	points[1].x = width + scrollPtr->inset;
+	points[1].y = points[0].y;
+	points[2].x = width/2 + scrollPtr->inset;
+	points[2].y = scrollPtr->inset - 1;
+	Tk_Fill3DPolygon(tkwin, pixmap, border, points, 3,
+		elementBorderWidth, relief);
+    } else {
+	points[0].x = scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->inset - 1;
+	points[0].y = scrollPtr->inset - 1;
+	points[1].x = scrollPtr->inset;
+	points[1].y = width/2 + scrollPtr->inset;
+	points[2].x = points[0].x;
+	points[2].y = width + scrollPtr->inset;
+	Tk_Fill3DPolygon(tkwin, pixmap, border, points, 3,
+		elementBorderWidth, relief);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Display the bottom or right arrow.
+     */
+
+    if (scrollPtr->activeField == BOTTOM_ARROW) {
+	border = scrollPtr->activeBorder;
+	relief = scrollPtr->activeField == BOTTOM_ARROW
+		? scrollPtr->activeRelief : TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    } else {
+	border = scrollPtr->bgBorder;
+	relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    }
+    if (scrollPtr->vertical) {
+	points[0].x = scrollPtr->inset;
+	points[0].y = Tk_Height(tkwin) - scrollPtr->arrowLength
+		- scrollPtr->inset + 1;
+	points[1].x = width/2 + scrollPtr->inset;
+	points[1].y = Tk_Height(tkwin) - scrollPtr->inset;
+	points[2].x = width + scrollPtr->inset;
+	points[2].y = points[0].y;
+	Tk_Fill3DPolygon(tkwin, pixmap, border,
+		points, 3, elementBorderWidth, relief);
+    } else {
+	points[0].x = Tk_Width(tkwin) - scrollPtr->arrowLength
+		- scrollPtr->inset + 1;
+	points[0].y = scrollPtr->inset - 1;
+	points[1].x = points[0].x;
+	points[1].y = width + scrollPtr->inset;
+	points[2].x = Tk_Width(tkwin) - scrollPtr->inset;
+	points[2].y = width/2 + scrollPtr->inset;
+	Tk_Fill3DPolygon(tkwin, pixmap, border,
+		points, 3, elementBorderWidth, relief);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Display the slider.
+     */
+
+    if (scrollPtr->activeField == SLIDER) {
+	border = scrollPtr->activeBorder;
+	relief = scrollPtr->activeField == SLIDER ? scrollPtr->activeRelief
+		: TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    } else {
+	border = scrollPtr->bgBorder;
+	relief = TK_RELIEF_RAISED;
+    }
+    if (scrollPtr->vertical) {
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border,
+		scrollPtr->inset, scrollPtr->sliderFirst,
+		width, scrollPtr->sliderLast - scrollPtr->sliderFirst,
+		elementBorderWidth, relief);
+    } else {
+	Tk_Fill3DRectangle(tkwin, pixmap, border,
+		scrollPtr->sliderFirst, scrollPtr->inset,
+		scrollPtr->sliderLast - scrollPtr->sliderFirst, width,
+		elementBorderWidth, relief);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Copy the information from the off-screen pixmap onto the screen,
+     * then delete the pixmap.
+     */
+
+    XCopyArea(scrollPtr->display, pixmap, Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+	    ((UnixScrollbar*)scrollPtr)->copyGC, 0, 0,
+	    (unsigned) Tk_Width(tkwin), (unsigned) Tk_Height(tkwin), 0, 0);
+    Tk_FreePixmap(scrollPtr->display, pixmap);
+
+    done:
+    scrollPtr->flags &= ~REDRAW_PENDING;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry --
+ *
+ *	After changes in a scrollbar's size or configuration, this
+ *	procedure recomputes various geometry information used in
+ *	displaying the scrollbar.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The scrollbar will be displayed differently.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+extern void
+TkpComputeScrollbarGeometry(scrollPtr)
+    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;	/* Scrollbar whose geometry may
+					 * have changed. */
+{
+    int width, fieldLength;
+
+    if (scrollPtr->highlightWidth < 0) {
+	scrollPtr->highlightWidth = 0;
+    }
+    scrollPtr->inset = scrollPtr->highlightWidth + scrollPtr->borderWidth;
+    width = (scrollPtr->vertical) ? Tk_Width(scrollPtr->tkwin)
+	    : Tk_Height(scrollPtr->tkwin);
+    scrollPtr->arrowLength = width - 2*scrollPtr->inset + 1;
+    fieldLength = (scrollPtr->vertical ? Tk_Height(scrollPtr->tkwin)
+	    : Tk_Width(scrollPtr->tkwin))
+	    - 2*(scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->inset);
+    if (fieldLength < 0) {
+	fieldLength = 0;
+    }
+    scrollPtr->sliderFirst = fieldLength*scrollPtr->firstFraction;
+    scrollPtr->sliderLast = fieldLength*scrollPtr->lastFraction;
+
+    /*
+     * Adjust the slider so that some piece of it is always
+     * displayed in the scrollbar and so that it has at least
+     * a minimal width (so it can be grabbed with the mouse).
+     */
+
+    if (scrollPtr->sliderFirst > (fieldLength - 2*scrollPtr->borderWidth)) {
+	scrollPtr->sliderFirst = fieldLength - 2*scrollPtr->borderWidth;
+    }
+    if (scrollPtr->sliderFirst < 0) {
+	scrollPtr->sliderFirst = 0;
+    }
+    if (scrollPtr->sliderLast < (scrollPtr->sliderFirst
+	    + MIN_SLIDER_LENGTH)) {
+	scrollPtr->sliderLast = scrollPtr->sliderFirst + MIN_SLIDER_LENGTH;
+    }
+    if (scrollPtr->sliderLast > fieldLength) {
+	scrollPtr->sliderLast = fieldLength;
+    }
+    scrollPtr->sliderFirst += scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->inset;
+    scrollPtr->sliderLast += scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->inset;
+
+    /*
+     * Register the desired geometry for the window (leave enough space
+     * for the two arrows plus a minimum-size slider, plus border around
+     * the whole window, if any).  Then arrange for the window to be
+     * redisplayed.
+     */
+
+    if (scrollPtr->vertical) {
+	Tk_GeometryRequest(scrollPtr->tkwin,
+		scrollPtr->width + 2*scrollPtr->inset,
+		2*(scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->borderWidth
+		+ scrollPtr->inset));
+    } else {
+	Tk_GeometryRequest(scrollPtr->tkwin,
+		2*(scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->borderWidth
+		+ scrollPtr->inset), scrollPtr->width + 2*scrollPtr->inset);
+    }
+    Tk_SetInternalBorder(scrollPtr->tkwin, scrollPtr->inset);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpDestroyScrollbar --
+ *
+ *	Free data structures associated with the scrollbar control.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Frees the GCs associated with the scrollbar.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpDestroyScrollbar(scrollPtr)
+    TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;
+{
+    UnixScrollbar *unixScrollPtr = (UnixScrollbar *)scrollPtr;
+
+    if (unixScrollPtr->troughGC != None) {
+	Tk_FreeGC(scrollPtr->display, unixScrollPtr->troughGC);
+    }
+    if (unixScrollPtr->copyGC != None) {
+	Tk_FreeGC(scrollPtr->display, unixScrollPtr->copyGC);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpConfigureScrollbar --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called after the generic code has finished
+ *	processing configuration options, in order to configure
+ *	platform specific options.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Configuration info may get changed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpConfigureScrollbar(scrollPtr)
+    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;	/* Information about widget;  may or
+					 * may not already have values for
+					 * some fields. */
+{
+    XGCValues gcValues;
+    GC new;
+    UnixScrollbar *unixScrollPtr = (UnixScrollbar *) scrollPtr;
+
+    Tk_SetBackgroundFromBorder(scrollPtr->tkwin, scrollPtr->bgBorder);
+
+    gcValues.foreground = scrollPtr->troughColorPtr->pixel;
+    new = Tk_GetGC(scrollPtr->tkwin, GCForeground, &gcValues);
+    if (unixScrollPtr->troughGC != None) {
+	Tk_FreeGC(scrollPtr->display, unixScrollPtr->troughGC);
+    }
+    unixScrollPtr->troughGC = new;
+    if (unixScrollPtr->copyGC == None) {
+	gcValues.graphics_exposures = False;
+	unixScrollPtr->copyGC = Tk_GetGC(scrollPtr->tkwin, GCGraphicsExposures,
+	    &gcValues);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpScrollbarPosition --
+ *
+ *	Determine the scrollbar element corresponding to a
+ *	given position.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	One of TOP_ARROW, TOP_GAP, etc., indicating which element
+ *	of the scrollbar covers the position given by (x, y).  If
+ *	(x,y) is outside the scrollbar entirely, then OUTSIDE is
+ *	returned.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpScrollbarPosition(scrollPtr, x, y)
+    register TkScrollbar *scrollPtr;	/* Scrollbar widget record. */
+    int x, y;				/* Coordinates within scrollPtr's
+					 * window. */
+{
+    int length, width, tmp;
+
+    if (scrollPtr->vertical) {
+	length = Tk_Height(scrollPtr->tkwin);
+	width = Tk_Width(scrollPtr->tkwin);
+    } else {
+	tmp = x;
+	x = y;
+	y = tmp;
+	length = Tk_Width(scrollPtr->tkwin);
+	width = Tk_Height(scrollPtr->tkwin);
+    }
+
+    if ((x < scrollPtr->inset) || (x >= (width - scrollPtr->inset))
+	    || (y < scrollPtr->inset) || (y >= (length - scrollPtr->inset))) {
+	return OUTSIDE;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * All of the calculations in this procedure mirror those in
+     * TkpDisplayScrollbar.  Be sure to keep the two consistent.
+     */
+
+    if (y < (scrollPtr->inset + scrollPtr->arrowLength)) {
+	return TOP_ARROW;
+    }
+    if (y < scrollPtr->sliderFirst) {
+	return TOP_GAP;
+    }
+    if (y < scrollPtr->sliderLast) {
+	return SLIDER;
+    }
+    if (y >= (length - (scrollPtr->arrowLength + scrollPtr->inset))) {
+	return BOTTOM_ARROW;
+    }
+    return BOTTOM_GAP;
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixSelect.c b/unix/tkUnixSelect.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..404631e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixSelect.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1189 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixSelect.c --
+ *
+ *	This file contains X specific routines for manipulating 
+ *	selections.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixSelect.c 1.5 96/03/29 14:14:31
+ */
+
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#include "tkSelect.h"
+
+/*
+ * When handling INCR-style selection retrievals, the selection owner
+ * uses the following data structure to communicate between the
+ * ConvertSelection procedure and TkSelPropProc.
+ */
+
+typedef struct IncrInfo {
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that owns selection. */
+    Atom selection;		/* Selection that is being retrieved. */
+    Atom *multAtoms;		/* Information about conversions to
+				 * perform:  one or more pairs of
+				 * (target, property).  This either
+				 * points to a retrieved  property (for
+				 * MULTIPLE retrievals) or to a static
+				 * array. */
+    unsigned long numConversions;
+				/* Number of entries in offsets (same as
+				 * # of pairs in multAtoms). */
+    int *offsets;		/* One entry for each pair in
+				 * multAtoms;  -1 means all data has
+				 * been transferred for this
+				 * conversion.  -2 means only the
+				 * final zero-length transfer still
+				 * has to be done.  Otherwise it is the
+				 * offset of the next chunk of data
+				 * to transfer.  This array is malloc-ed. */
+    int numIncrs;		/* Number of entries in offsets that
+				 * aren't -1 (i.e. # of INCR-mode transfers
+				 * not yet completed). */
+    Tcl_TimerToken timeout;	/* Token for timer procedure. */
+    int idleTime;		/* Number of seconds since we heard
+				 * anything from the selection
+				 * requestor. */
+    Window reqWindow;		/* Requestor's window id. */
+    Time time;			/* Timestamp corresponding to
+				 * selection at beginning of request;
+				 * used to abort transfer if selection
+				 * changes. */
+    struct IncrInfo *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all INCR-style
+				 * retrievals currently pending. */
+} IncrInfo;
+
+static IncrInfo *pendingIncrs = NULL;
+				/* List of all incr structures
+				 * currently active. */
+
+/*
+ * Largest property that we'll accept when sending or receiving the
+ * selection:
+ */
+
+#define MAX_PROP_WORDS 100000
+
+static TkSelRetrievalInfo *pendingRetrievals = NULL;
+				/* List of all retrievals currently
+				 * being waited for. */
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ */
+
+static void		ConvertSelection _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    XSelectionRequestEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		IncrTimeoutProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+static char *		SelCvtFromX _ANSI_ARGS_((long *propPtr, int numValues,
+			    Atom type, Tk_Window tkwin));
+static long *		SelCvtToX _ANSI_ARGS_((char *string, Atom type,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin, int *numLongsPtr));
+static int		SelectionSize _ANSI_ARGS_((TkSelHandler *selPtr));
+static void		SelRcvIncrProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		SelTimeoutProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkSelGetSelection --
+ *
+ *	Retrieve the specified selection from another process.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is a standard Tcl return value.
+ *	If an error occurs (such as no selection exists)
+ *	then an error message is left in interp->result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkSelGetSelection(interp, tkwin, selection, target, proc, clientData)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for reporting
+				 * errors. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window on whose behalf to retrieve
+				 * the selection (determines display
+				 * from which to retrieve). */
+    Atom selection;		/* Selection to retrieve. */
+    Atom target;		/* Desired form in which selection
+				 * is to be returned. */
+    Tk_GetSelProc *proc;	/* Procedure to call to process the
+				 * selection, once it has been retrieved. */
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Arbitrary value to pass to proc. */
+{
+    TkSelRetrievalInfo retr;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * The selection is owned by some other process.  To
+     * retrieve it, first record information about the retrieval
+     * in progress.  Use an internal window as the requestor.
+     */
+
+    retr.interp = interp;
+    if (dispPtr->clipWindow == NULL) {
+	int result;
+
+	result = TkClipInit(interp, dispPtr);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    return result;
+	}
+    }
+    retr.winPtr = (TkWindow *) dispPtr->clipWindow;
+    retr.selection = selection;
+    retr.property = selection;
+    retr.target = target;
+    retr.proc = proc;
+    retr.clientData = clientData;
+    retr.result = -1;
+    retr.idleTime = 0;
+    retr.nextPtr = pendingRetrievals;
+    pendingRetrievals = &retr;
+
+    /*
+     * Initiate the request for the selection.  Note:  can't use
+     * TkCurrentTime for the time.  If we do, and this application hasn't
+     * received any X events in a long time, the current time will be way
+     * in the past and could even predate the time when the selection was
+     * made;  if this happens, the request will be rejected.
+     */
+
+    XConvertSelection(winPtr->display, retr.selection, retr.target,
+	    retr.property, retr.winPtr->window, CurrentTime);
+
+    /*
+     * Enter a loop processing X events until the selection
+     * has been retrieved and processed.  If no response is
+     * received within a few seconds, then timeout.
+     */
+
+    retr.timeout = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(1000, SelTimeoutProc,
+	    (ClientData) &retr);
+    while (retr.result == -1) {
+	Tcl_DoOneEvent(0);
+    }
+    Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(retr.timeout);
+
+    /*
+     * Unregister the information about the selection retrieval
+     * in progress.
+     */
+
+    if (pendingRetrievals == &retr) {
+	pendingRetrievals = retr.nextPtr;
+    } else {
+	TkSelRetrievalInfo *retrPtr;
+
+	for (retrPtr = pendingRetrievals; retrPtr != NULL;
+		retrPtr = retrPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (retrPtr->nextPtr == &retr) {
+		retrPtr->nextPtr = retr.nextPtr;
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    return retr.result;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkSelPropProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when property-change events
+ *	occur on windows not known to the toolkit.  Its function
+ *	is to implement the sending side of the INCR selection
+ *	retrieval protocol when the selection requestor deletes
+ *	the property containing a part of the selection.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If the property that is receiving the selection was just
+ *	deleted, then a new piece of the selection is fetched and
+ *	placed in the property, until eventually there's no more
+ *	selection to fetch.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkSelPropProc(eventPtr)
+    register XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X PropertyChange event. */
+{
+    register IncrInfo *incrPtr;
+    int i, format;
+    Atom target, formatType;
+    register TkSelHandler *selPtr;
+    long buffer[TK_SEL_WORDS_AT_ONCE];
+    int numItems;
+    char *propPtr;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler errorHandler;
+
+    /*
+     * See if this event announces the deletion of a property being
+     * used for an INCR transfer.  If so, then add the next chunk of
+     * data to the property.
+     */
+
+    if (eventPtr->xproperty.state != PropertyDelete) {
+	return;
+    }
+    for (incrPtr = pendingIncrs; incrPtr != NULL;
+	    incrPtr = incrPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (incrPtr->reqWindow != eventPtr->xproperty.window) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+	for (i = 0; i < incrPtr->numConversions; i++) {
+	    if ((eventPtr->xproperty.atom != incrPtr->multAtoms[2*i + 1])
+		    || (incrPtr->offsets[i] == -1)){
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    target = incrPtr->multAtoms[2*i];
+	    incrPtr->idleTime = 0;
+	    for (selPtr = incrPtr->winPtr->selHandlerList; ;
+		    selPtr = selPtr->nextPtr) {
+		if (selPtr == NULL) {
+		    incrPtr->multAtoms[2*i + 1] = None;
+		    incrPtr->offsets[i] = -1;
+		    incrPtr->numIncrs --;
+		    return;
+		}
+		if ((selPtr->target == target)
+			&& (selPtr->selection == incrPtr->selection)) {
+		    formatType = selPtr->format;
+		    if (incrPtr->offsets[i] == -2) {
+			numItems = 0;
+			((char *) buffer)[0] = 0;
+		    } else {
+			TkSelInProgress ip;
+			ip.selPtr = selPtr;
+			ip.nextPtr = pendingPtr;
+			pendingPtr = &ip;
+			numItems = (*selPtr->proc)(selPtr->clientData,
+				incrPtr->offsets[i], (char *) buffer,
+				TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE);
+			pendingPtr = ip.nextPtr;
+			if (ip.selPtr == NULL) {
+			    /*
+			     * The selection handler deleted itself.
+			     */
+
+			    return;
+			}
+			if (numItems > TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE) {
+			    panic("selection handler returned too many bytes");
+			} else {
+			    if (numItems < 0) {
+				numItems = 0;
+			    }
+			}
+			((char *) buffer)[numItems] = '\0';
+		    }
+		    if (numItems < TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE) {
+			if (numItems <= 0) {
+			    incrPtr->offsets[i] = -1;
+			    incrPtr->numIncrs--;
+			} else {
+			    incrPtr->offsets[i] = -2;
+			}
+		    } else {
+			incrPtr->offsets[i] += numItems;
+		    }
+		    if (formatType == XA_STRING) {
+			propPtr = (char *) buffer;
+			format = 8;
+		    } else {
+			propPtr = (char *) SelCvtToX((char *) buffer,
+				formatType, (Tk_Window) incrPtr->winPtr,
+				&numItems);
+			format = 32;
+		    }
+		    errorHandler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(
+			    eventPtr->xproperty.display, -1, -1, -1,
+			    (int (*)()) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+		    XChangeProperty(eventPtr->xproperty.display,
+			    eventPtr->xproperty.window,
+			    eventPtr->xproperty.atom, formatType,
+			    format, PropModeReplace,
+			    (unsigned char *) propPtr, numItems);
+		    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(errorHandler);
+		    if (propPtr != (char *) buffer) {
+			ckfree(propPtr);
+		    }
+		    return;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkSelEventProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked whenever a selection-related
+ *	event occurs.  It does the lion's share of the work
+ *	in implementing the selection protocol.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Lots:  depends on the type of event.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkSelEventProc(tkwin, eventPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window for which event was
+				 * targeted. */
+    register XEvent *eventPtr;	/* X event:  either SelectionClear,
+				 * SelectionRequest, or
+				 * SelectionNotify. */
+{
+    register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+
+    /*
+     * Case #1: SelectionClear events.
+     */
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == SelectionClear) {
+	TkSelClearSelection(tkwin, eventPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Case #2: SelectionNotify events.  Call the relevant procedure
+     * to handle the incoming selection.
+     */
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == SelectionNotify) {
+	register TkSelRetrievalInfo *retrPtr;
+	char *propInfo;
+	Atom type;
+	int format, result;
+	unsigned long numItems, bytesAfter;
+
+	for (retrPtr = pendingRetrievals; ; retrPtr = retrPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (retrPtr == NULL) {
+		return;
+	    }
+	    if ((retrPtr->winPtr == winPtr)
+		    && (retrPtr->selection == eventPtr->xselection.selection)
+		    && (retrPtr->target == eventPtr->xselection.target)
+		    && (retrPtr->result == -1)) {
+		if (retrPtr->property == eventPtr->xselection.property) {
+		    break;
+		}
+		if (eventPtr->xselection.property == None) {
+		    Tcl_SetResult(retrPtr->interp, (char *) NULL, TCL_STATIC);
+		    Tcl_AppendResult(retrPtr->interp,
+			    Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, retrPtr->selection),
+			    " selection doesn't exist or form \"",
+			    Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, retrPtr->target),
+			    "\" not defined", (char *) NULL);
+		    retrPtr->result = TCL_ERROR;
+		    return;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+
+	propInfo = NULL;
+	result = XGetWindowProperty(eventPtr->xselection.display,
+		eventPtr->xselection.requestor, retrPtr->property,
+		0, MAX_PROP_WORDS, False, (Atom) AnyPropertyType,
+		&type, &format, &numItems, &bytesAfter,
+		(unsigned char **) &propInfo);
+	if ((result != Success) || (type == None)) {
+	    return;
+	}
+	if (bytesAfter != 0) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(retrPtr->interp, "selection property too large",
+		TCL_STATIC);
+	    retrPtr->result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    XFree(propInfo);
+	    return;
+	}
+	if ((type == XA_STRING) || (type == dispPtr->textAtom)
+		|| (type == dispPtr->compoundTextAtom)) {
+	    if (format != 8) {
+		sprintf(retrPtr->interp->result,
+		    "bad format for string selection: wanted \"8\", got \"%d\"",
+		    format);
+		retrPtr->result = TCL_ERROR;
+		return;
+	    }
+            interp = retrPtr->interp;
+            Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
+	    retrPtr->result = (*retrPtr->proc)(retrPtr->clientData,
+		    interp, propInfo);
+            Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+	} else if (type == dispPtr->incrAtom) {
+
+	    /*
+	     * It's a !?#@!?!! INCR-style reception.  Arrange to receive
+	     * the selection in pieces, using the ICCCM protocol, then
+	     * hang around until either the selection is all here or a
+	     * timeout occurs.
+	     */
+
+	    retrPtr->idleTime = 0;
+	    Tk_CreateEventHandler(tkwin, PropertyChangeMask, SelRcvIncrProc,
+		    (ClientData) retrPtr);
+	    XDeleteProperty(Tk_Display(tkwin), Tk_WindowId(tkwin),
+		    retrPtr->property);
+	    while (retrPtr->result == -1) {
+		Tcl_DoOneEvent(0);
+	    }
+	    Tk_DeleteEventHandler(tkwin, PropertyChangeMask, SelRcvIncrProc,
+		    (ClientData) retrPtr);
+	} else {
+	    char *string;
+
+	    if (format != 32) {
+		sprintf(retrPtr->interp->result,
+		    "bad format for selection: wanted \"32\", got \"%d\"",
+		    format);
+		retrPtr->result = TCL_ERROR;
+		return;
+	    }
+	    string = SelCvtFromX((long *) propInfo, (int) numItems, type,
+		    (Tk_Window) winPtr);
+            interp = retrPtr->interp;
+            Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
+	    retrPtr->result = (*retrPtr->proc)(retrPtr->clientData,
+		    interp, string);
+            Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+	    ckfree(string);
+	}
+	XFree(propInfo);
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Case #3: SelectionRequest events.  Call ConvertSelection to
+     * do the dirty work.
+     */
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == SelectionRequest) {
+	ConvertSelection(winPtr, &eventPtr->xselectionrequest);
+	return;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SelTimeoutProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked once every second while waiting for
+ *	the selection to be returned.  After a while it gives up and
+ *	aborts the selection retrieval.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A new timer callback is created to call us again in another
+ *	second, unless time has expired, in which case an error is
+ *	recorded for the retrieval.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+SelTimeoutProc(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about retrieval
+					 * in progress. */
+{
+    register TkSelRetrievalInfo *retrPtr = (TkSelRetrievalInfo *) clientData;
+
+    /*
+     * Make sure that the retrieval is still in progress.  Then
+     * see how long it's been since any sort of response was received
+     * from the other side.
+     */
+
+    if (retrPtr->result != -1) {
+	return;
+    }
+    retrPtr->idleTime++;
+    if (retrPtr->idleTime >= 5) {
+
+	/*
+	 * Use a careful procedure to store the error message, because
+	 * the result could already be partially filled in with a partial
+	 * selection return.
+	 */
+
+	Tcl_SetResult(retrPtr->interp, "selection owner didn't respond",
+		TCL_STATIC);
+	retrPtr->result = TCL_ERROR;
+    } else {
+	retrPtr->timeout = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(1000, SelTimeoutProc,
+	    (ClientData) retrPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ConvertSelection --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to handle SelectionRequest events.
+ *	It responds to the requests, obeying the ICCCM protocols.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Properties are created for the selection requestor, and a
+ *	SelectionNotify event is generated for the selection
+ *	requestor.  In the event of long selections, this procedure
+ *	implements INCR-mode transfers, using the ICCCM protocol.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ConvertSelection(winPtr, eventPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;			/* Window that received the
+					 * conversion request;  may not be
+					 * selection's current owner, be we
+					 * set it to the current owner. */
+    register XSelectionRequestEvent *eventPtr;
+					/* Event describing request. */
+{
+    XSelectionEvent reply;		/* Used to notify requestor that
+					 * selection info is ready. */
+    int multiple;			/* Non-zero means a MULTIPLE request
+					 * is being handled. */
+    IncrInfo incr;			/* State of selection conversion. */
+    Atom singleInfo[2];			/* incr.multAtoms points here except
+					 * for multiple conversions. */
+    int i;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler errorHandler;
+    TkSelectionInfo *infoPtr;
+    TkSelInProgress ip;
+
+    errorHandler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(eventPtr->display, -1, -1,-1,
+	    (int (*)()) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+
+    /*
+     * Initialize the reply event.
+     */
+
+    reply.type = SelectionNotify;
+    reply.serial = 0;
+    reply.send_event = True;
+    reply.display = eventPtr->display;
+    reply.requestor = eventPtr->requestor;
+    reply.selection = eventPtr->selection;
+    reply.target = eventPtr->target;
+    reply.property = eventPtr->property;
+    if (reply.property == None) {
+	reply.property = reply.target;
+    }
+    reply.time = eventPtr->time;
+
+    for (infoPtr = winPtr->dispPtr->selectionInfoPtr; infoPtr != NULL;
+	    infoPtr = infoPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (infoPtr->selection == eventPtr->selection)
+	    break;
+    }
+    if (infoPtr == NULL) {
+	goto refuse;
+    }
+    winPtr = (TkWindow *) infoPtr->owner;
+
+    /*
+     * Figure out which kind(s) of conversion to perform.  If handling
+     * a MULTIPLE conversion, then read the property describing which
+     * conversions to perform.
+     */
+
+    incr.winPtr = winPtr;
+    incr.selection = eventPtr->selection;
+    if (eventPtr->target != winPtr->dispPtr->multipleAtom) {
+	multiple = 0;
+	singleInfo[0] = reply.target;
+	singleInfo[1] = reply.property;
+	incr.multAtoms = singleInfo;
+	incr.numConversions = 1;
+    } else {
+	Atom type;
+	int format, result;
+	unsigned long bytesAfter;
+
+	multiple = 1;
+	incr.multAtoms = NULL;
+	if (eventPtr->property == None) {
+	    goto refuse;
+	}
+	result = XGetWindowProperty(eventPtr->display,
+		eventPtr->requestor, eventPtr->property,
+		0, MAX_PROP_WORDS, False, XA_ATOM,
+		&type, &format, &incr.numConversions, &bytesAfter,
+		(unsigned char **) &incr.multAtoms);
+	if ((result != Success) || (bytesAfter != 0) || (format != 32)
+		|| (type == None)) {
+	    if (incr.multAtoms != NULL) {
+		XFree((char *) incr.multAtoms);
+	    }
+	    goto refuse;
+	}
+	incr.numConversions /= 2;		/* Two atoms per conversion. */
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Loop through all of the requested conversions, and either return
+     * the entire converted selection, if it can be returned in a single
+     * bunch, or return INCR information only (the actual selection will
+     * be returned below).
+     */
+
+    incr.offsets = (int *) ckalloc((unsigned)
+	    (incr.numConversions*sizeof(int)));
+    incr.numIncrs = 0;
+    for (i = 0; i < incr.numConversions; i++) {
+	Atom target, property, type;
+	long buffer[TK_SEL_WORDS_AT_ONCE];
+	register TkSelHandler *selPtr;
+	int numItems, format;
+	char *propPtr;
+
+	target = incr.multAtoms[2*i];
+	property = incr.multAtoms[2*i + 1];
+	incr.offsets[i] = -1;
+
+	for (selPtr = winPtr->selHandlerList; selPtr != NULL;
+		selPtr = selPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if ((selPtr->target == target)
+		    && (selPtr->selection == eventPtr->selection)) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	if (selPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Nobody seems to know about this kind of request.  If
+	     * it's of a sort that we can handle without any help, do
+	     * it.  Otherwise mark the request as an errror.
+	     */
+
+	    numItems = TkSelDefaultSelection(infoPtr, target, (char *) buffer,
+		    TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE, &type);
+	    if (numItems < 0) {
+		incr.multAtoms[2*i + 1] = None;
+		continue;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    ip.selPtr = selPtr;
+	    ip.nextPtr = pendingPtr;
+	    pendingPtr = &ip;
+	    type = selPtr->format;
+	    numItems = (*selPtr->proc)(selPtr->clientData, 0,
+		    (char *) buffer, TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE);
+	    pendingPtr = ip.nextPtr;
+	    if ((ip.selPtr == NULL) || (numItems < 0)) {
+		incr.multAtoms[2*i + 1] = None;
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    if (numItems > TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE) {
+		panic("selection handler returned too many bytes");
+	    }
+	    ((char *) buffer)[numItems] = '\0';
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Got the selection;  store it back on the requestor's property.
+	 */
+
+	if (numItems == TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE) {
+	    /*
+	     * Selection is too big to send at once;  start an
+	     * INCR-mode transfer.
+	     */
+
+	    incr.numIncrs++;
+	    type = winPtr->dispPtr->incrAtom;
+	    buffer[0] = SelectionSize(selPtr);
+	    if (buffer[0] == 0) {
+		incr.multAtoms[2*i + 1] = None;
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    numItems = 1;
+	    propPtr = (char *) buffer;
+	    format = 32;
+	    incr.offsets[i] = 0;
+	} else if (type == XA_STRING) {
+	    propPtr = (char *) buffer;
+	    format = 8;
+	} else {
+	    propPtr = (char *) SelCvtToX((char *) buffer,
+		    type, (Tk_Window) winPtr, &numItems);
+	    format = 32;
+	}
+	XChangeProperty(reply.display, reply.requestor,
+		property, type, format, PropModeReplace,
+		(unsigned char *) propPtr, numItems);
+	if (propPtr != (char *) buffer) {
+	    ckfree(propPtr);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Send an event back to the requestor to indicate that the
+     * first stage of conversion is complete (everything is done
+     * except for long conversions that have to be done in INCR
+     * mode).
+     */
+
+    if (incr.numIncrs > 0) {
+	XSelectInput(reply.display, reply.requestor, PropertyChangeMask);
+	incr.timeout = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(1000, IncrTimeoutProc,
+	    (ClientData) &incr);
+	incr.idleTime = 0;
+	incr.reqWindow = reply.requestor;
+	incr.time = infoPtr->time;
+	incr.nextPtr = pendingIncrs;
+	pendingIncrs = &incr;
+    }
+    if (multiple) {
+	XChangeProperty(reply.display, reply.requestor, reply.property,
+		XA_ATOM, 32, PropModeReplace,
+		(unsigned char *) incr.multAtoms,
+		(int) incr.numConversions*2);
+    } else {
+
+	/*
+	 * Not a MULTIPLE request.  The first property in "multAtoms"
+	 * got set to None if there was an error in conversion.
+	 */
+
+	reply.property = incr.multAtoms[1];
+    }
+    XSendEvent(reply.display, reply.requestor, False, 0, (XEvent *) &reply);
+    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(errorHandler);
+
+    /*
+     * Handle any remaining INCR-mode transfers.  This all happens
+     * in callbacks to TkSelPropProc, so just wait until the number
+     * of uncompleted INCR transfers drops to zero.
+     */
+
+    if (incr.numIncrs > 0) {
+	IncrInfo *incrPtr2;
+
+	while (incr.numIncrs > 0) {
+	    Tcl_DoOneEvent(0);
+	}
+	Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler(incr.timeout);
+	errorHandler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(winPtr->display,
+		-1, -1,-1, (int (*)()) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	XSelectInput(reply.display, reply.requestor, 0L);
+	Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(errorHandler);
+	if (pendingIncrs == &incr) {
+	    pendingIncrs = incr.nextPtr;
+	} else {
+	    for (incrPtr2 = pendingIncrs; incrPtr2 != NULL;
+		    incrPtr2 = incrPtr2->nextPtr) {
+		if (incrPtr2->nextPtr == &incr) {
+		    incrPtr2->nextPtr = incr.nextPtr;
+		    break;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * All done.  Cleanup and return.
+     */
+
+    ckfree((char *) incr.offsets);
+    if (multiple) {
+	XFree((char *) incr.multAtoms);
+    }
+    return;
+
+    /*
+     * An error occurred.  Send back a refusal message.
+     */
+
+    refuse:
+    reply.property = None;
+    XSendEvent(reply.display, reply.requestor, False, 0, (XEvent *) &reply);
+    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(errorHandler);
+    return;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SelRcvIncrProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure handles the INCR protocol on the receiving
+ *	side.  It is invoked in response to property changes on
+ *	the requestor's window (which hopefully are because a new
+ *	chunk of the selection arrived).
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If a new piece of selection has arrived, a procedure is
+ *	invoked to deal with that piece.  When the whole selection
+ *	is here, a flag is left for the higher-level procedure that
+ *	initiated the selection retrieval.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+SelRcvIncrProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about retrieval. */
+    register XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X PropertyChange event. */
+{
+    register TkSelRetrievalInfo *retrPtr = (TkSelRetrievalInfo *) clientData;
+    char *propInfo;
+    Atom type;
+    int format, result;
+    unsigned long numItems, bytesAfter;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+
+    if ((eventPtr->xproperty.atom != retrPtr->property)
+	    || (eventPtr->xproperty.state != PropertyNewValue)
+	    || (retrPtr->result != -1)) {
+	return;
+    }
+    propInfo = NULL;
+    result = XGetWindowProperty(eventPtr->xproperty.display,
+	    eventPtr->xproperty.window, retrPtr->property, 0, MAX_PROP_WORDS,
+	    True, (Atom) AnyPropertyType, &type, &format, &numItems,
+	    &bytesAfter, (unsigned char **) &propInfo);
+    if ((result != Success) || (type == None)) {
+	return;
+    }
+    if (bytesAfter != 0) {
+	Tcl_SetResult(retrPtr->interp, "selection property too large",
+		TCL_STATIC);
+	retrPtr->result = TCL_ERROR;
+	goto done;
+    }
+    if (numItems == 0) {
+	retrPtr->result = TCL_OK;
+    } else if ((type == XA_STRING)
+	    || (type == retrPtr->winPtr->dispPtr->textAtom)
+	    || (type == retrPtr->winPtr->dispPtr->compoundTextAtom)) {
+	if (format != 8) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(retrPtr->interp, (char *) NULL, TCL_STATIC);
+	    sprintf(retrPtr->interp->result,
+		"bad format for string selection: wanted \"8\", got \"%d\"",
+		format);
+	    retrPtr->result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+        interp = retrPtr->interp;
+        Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
+	result = (*retrPtr->proc)(retrPtr->clientData, interp, propInfo);
+        Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    retrPtr->result = result;
+	}
+    } else {
+	char *string;
+
+	if (format != 32) {
+	    Tcl_SetResult(retrPtr->interp, (char *) NULL, TCL_STATIC);
+	    sprintf(retrPtr->interp->result,
+		"bad format for selection: wanted \"32\", got \"%d\"",
+		format);
+	    retrPtr->result = TCL_ERROR;
+	    goto done;
+	}
+	string = SelCvtFromX((long *) propInfo, (int) numItems, type,
+		(Tk_Window) retrPtr->winPtr);
+        interp = retrPtr->interp;
+        Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
+	result = (*retrPtr->proc)(retrPtr->clientData, interp, string);
+        Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+	if (result != TCL_OK) {
+	    retrPtr->result = result;
+	}
+	ckfree(string);
+    }
+
+    done:
+    XFree(propInfo);
+    retrPtr->idleTime = 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SelectionSize --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called when the selection is too large to
+ *	send in a single buffer;  it computes the total length of
+ *	the selection in bytes.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the number of bytes in the selection
+ *	given by selPtr.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The selection is retrieved from its current owner (this is
+ *	the only way to compute its size).
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+SelectionSize(selPtr)
+    TkSelHandler *selPtr;	/* Information about how to retrieve
+				 * the selection whose size is wanted. */
+{
+    char buffer[TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE+1];
+    int size, chunkSize;
+    TkSelInProgress ip;
+
+    size = TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE;
+    ip.selPtr = selPtr;
+    ip.nextPtr = pendingPtr;
+    pendingPtr = &ip;
+    do {
+	chunkSize = (*selPtr->proc)(selPtr->clientData, size,
+			(char *) buffer, TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE);
+	if (ip.selPtr == NULL) {
+	    size = 0;
+	    break;
+	}
+	size += chunkSize;
+    } while (chunkSize == TK_SEL_BYTES_AT_ONCE);
+    pendingPtr = ip.nextPtr;
+    return size;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * IncrTimeoutProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked once a second while sending the
+ *	selection to a requestor in INCR mode.  After a while it
+ *	gives up and aborts the selection operation.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A new timeout gets registered so that this procedure gets
+ *	called again in another second, unless too many seconds
+ *	have elapsed, in which case incrPtr is marked as "all done".
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+IncrTimeoutProc(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about INCR-mode
+					 * selection retrieval for which
+					 * we are selection owner. */
+{
+    register IncrInfo *incrPtr = (IncrInfo *) clientData;
+
+    incrPtr->idleTime++;
+    if (incrPtr->idleTime >= 5) {
+	incrPtr->numIncrs = 0;
+    } else {
+	incrPtr->timeout = Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(1000, IncrTimeoutProc,
+		(ClientData) incrPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SelCvtToX --
+ *
+ *	Given a selection represented as a string (the normal Tcl form),
+ *	convert it to the ICCCM-mandated format for X, depending on
+ *	the type argument.  This procedure and SelCvtFromX are inverses.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is a malloc'ed buffer holding a value
+ *	equivalent to "string", but formatted as for "type".  It is
+ *	the caller's responsibility to free the string when done with
+ *	it.  The word at *numLongsPtr is filled in with the number of
+ *	32-bit words returned in the result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static long *
+SelCvtToX(string, type, tkwin, numLongsPtr)
+    char *string;		/* String representation of selection. */
+    Atom type;			/* Atom specifying the X format that is
+				 * desired for the selection.  Should not
+				 * be XA_STRING (if so, don't bother calling
+				 * this procedure at all). */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window that governs atom conversion. */
+    int *numLongsPtr;		/* Number of 32-bit words contained in the
+				 * result. */
+{
+    register char *p;
+    char *field;
+    int numFields;
+    long *propPtr, *longPtr;
+#define MAX_ATOM_NAME_LENGTH 100
+    char atomName[MAX_ATOM_NAME_LENGTH+1];
+
+    /*
+     * The string is assumed to consist of fields separated by spaces.
+     * The property gets generated by converting each field to an
+     * integer number, in one of two ways:
+     * 1. If type is XA_ATOM, convert each field to its corresponding
+     *	  atom.
+     * 2. If type is anything else, convert each field from an ASCII number
+     *    to a 32-bit binary number.
+     */
+
+    numFields = 1;
+    for (p = string; *p != 0; p++) {
+	if (isspace(UCHAR(*p))) {
+	    numFields++;
+	}
+    }
+    propPtr = (long *) ckalloc((unsigned) numFields*sizeof(long));
+
+    /*
+     * Convert the fields one-by-one.
+     */
+
+    for (longPtr = propPtr, *numLongsPtr = 0, p = string;
+	    ; longPtr++, (*numLongsPtr)++) {
+	while (isspace(UCHAR(*p))) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	if (*p == 0) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	field = p;
+	while ((*p != 0) && !isspace(UCHAR(*p))) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	if (type == XA_ATOM) {
+	    int length;
+
+	    length = p - field;
+	    if (length > MAX_ATOM_NAME_LENGTH) {
+		length = MAX_ATOM_NAME_LENGTH;
+	    }
+	    strncpy(atomName, field, (unsigned) length);
+	    atomName[length] = 0;
+	    *longPtr = (long) Tk_InternAtom(tkwin, atomName);
+	} else {
+	    char *dummy;
+
+	    *longPtr = strtol(field, &dummy, 0);
+	}
+    }
+    return propPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SelCvtFromX --
+ *
+ *	Given an X property value, formatted as a collection of 32-bit
+ *	values according to "type" and the ICCCM conventions, convert
+ *	the value to a string suitable for manipulation by Tcl.  This
+ *	procedure is the inverse of SelCvtToX.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the string equivalent of "property".  It is
+ *	malloc-ed and should be freed by the caller when no longer
+ *	needed.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static char *
+SelCvtFromX(propPtr, numValues, type, tkwin)
+    register long *propPtr;	/* Property value from X. */
+    int numValues;		/* Number of 32-bit values in property. */
+    Atom type;			/* Type of property  Should not be
+				 * XA_STRING (if so, don't bother calling
+				 * this procedure at all). */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to use for atom conversion. */
+{
+    char *result;
+    int resultSpace, curSize, fieldSize;
+    char *atomName;
+
+    /*
+     * Convert each long in the property to a string value, which is
+     * either the name of an atom (if type is XA_ATOM) or a hexadecimal
+     * string.  Make an initial guess about the size of the result, but
+     * be prepared to enlarge the result if necessary.
+     */
+
+    resultSpace = 12*numValues+1;
+    curSize = 0;
+    atomName = "";	/* Not needed, but eliminates compiler warning. */
+    result = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) resultSpace);
+    *result  = '\0';
+    for ( ; numValues > 0; propPtr++, numValues--) {
+	if (type == XA_ATOM) {
+	    atomName = Tk_GetAtomName(tkwin, (Atom) *propPtr);
+	    fieldSize = strlen(atomName) + 1;
+	} else {
+	    fieldSize = 12;
+	}
+	if (curSize+fieldSize >= resultSpace) {
+	    char *newResult;
+
+	    resultSpace *= 2;
+	    if (curSize+fieldSize >= resultSpace) {
+		resultSpace = curSize + fieldSize + 1;
+	    }
+	    newResult = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) resultSpace);
+	    strncpy(newResult, result, (unsigned) curSize);
+	    ckfree(result);
+	    result = newResult;
+	}
+	if (curSize != 0) {
+	    result[curSize] = ' ';
+	    curSize++;
+	}
+	if (type == XA_ATOM) {
+	    strcpy(result+curSize, atomName);
+	} else {
+	    sprintf(result+curSize, "0x%x", (unsigned int) *propPtr);
+	}
+	curSize += strlen(result+curSize);
+    }
+    return result;
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixSend.c b/unix/tkUnixSend.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f07c59b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixSend.c
@@ -0,0 +1,1851 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixSend.c --
+ *
+ *	This file provides procedures that implement the "send"
+ *	command, allowing commands to be passed from interpreter
+ *	to interpreter.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1989-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixSend.c 1.74 97/11/04 17:12:18
+ */
+
+#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#include "tkUnixInt.h"
+
+/* 
+ * The following structure is used to keep track of the interpreters
+ * registered by this process.
+ */
+
+typedef struct RegisteredInterp {
+    char *name;			/* Interpreter's name (malloc-ed). */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter associated with name.  NULL
+				 * means that the application was unregistered
+				 * or deleted while a send was in progress
+				 * to it. */
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display for the application.  Needed
+				 * because we may need to unregister the
+				 * interpreter after its main window has
+				 * been deleted. */
+    struct RegisteredInterp *nextPtr;
+				/* Next in list of names associated
+				 * with interps in this process.
+				 * NULL means end of list. */
+} RegisteredInterp;
+
+static RegisteredInterp *registry = NULL;
+				/* List of all interpreters
+				 * registered by this process. */
+
+/*
+ * A registry of all interpreters for a display is kept in a
+ * property "InterpRegistry" on the root window of the display.
+ * It is organized as a series of zero or more concatenated strings
+ * (in no particular order), each of the form
+ * 	window space name '\0'
+ * where "window" is the hex id of the comm. window to use to talk
+ * to an interpreter named "name".
+ *
+ * When the registry is being manipulated by an application (e.g. to
+ * add or remove an entry), it is loaded into memory using a structure
+ * of the following type:
+ */
+
+typedef struct NameRegistry {
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display from which the registry was
+				 * read. */
+    int locked;			/* Non-zero means that the display was
+				 * locked when the property was read in. */
+    int modified;		/* Non-zero means that the property has
+				 * been modified, so it needs to be written
+				 * out when the NameRegistry is closed. */
+    unsigned long propLength;	/* Length of the property, in bytes. */
+    char *property;		/* The contents of the property, or NULL
+				 * if none.  See format description above;
+				 * this is *not* terminated by the first
+				 * null character.  Dynamically allocated. */
+    int allocedByX;		/* Non-zero means must free property with
+				 * XFree;  zero means use ckfree. */
+} NameRegistry;
+
+/*
+ * When a result is being awaited from a sent command, one of
+ * the following structures is present on a list of all outstanding
+ * sent commands.  The information in the structure is used to
+ * process the result when it arrives.  You're probably wondering
+ * how there could ever be multiple outstanding sent commands.
+ * This could happen if interpreters invoke each other recursively.
+ * It's unlikely, but possible.
+ */
+
+typedef struct PendingCommand {
+    int serial;			/* Serial number expected in
+				 * result. */
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display being used for communication. */
+    char *target;		/* Name of interpreter command is
+				 * being sent to. */
+    Window commWindow;		/* Target's communication window. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter from which the send
+				 * was invoked. */
+    int code;			/* Tcl return code for command
+				 * will be stored here. */
+    char *result;		/* String result for command (malloc'ed),
+				 * or NULL. */
+    char *errorInfo;		/* Information for "errorInfo" variable,
+				 * or NULL (malloc'ed). */
+    char *errorCode;		/* Information for "errorCode" variable,
+				 * or NULL (malloc'ed). */
+    int gotResponse;		/* 1 means a response has been received,
+				 * 0 means the command is still outstanding. */
+    struct PendingCommand *nextPtr;
+				/* Next in list of all outstanding
+				 * commands.  NULL means end of
+				 * list. */
+} PendingCommand;
+
+static PendingCommand *pendingCommands = NULL;
+				/* List of all commands currently
+				 * being waited for. */
+
+/*
+ * The information below is used for communication between processes
+ * during "send" commands.  Each process keeps a private window, never
+ * even mapped, with one property, "Comm".  When a command is sent to
+ * an interpreter, the command is appended to the comm property of the
+ * communication window associated with the interp's process.  Similarly,
+ * when a result is returned from a sent command, it is also appended
+ * to the comm property.
+ *
+ * Each command and each result takes the form of ASCII text.  For a
+ * command, the text consists of a zero character followed by several
+ * null-terminated ASCII strings.  The first string consists of the
+ * single letter "c".  Subsequent strings have the form "option value"
+ * where the following options are supported:
+ *
+ * -r commWindow serial
+ *
+ *	This option means that a response should be sent to the window
+ *	whose X identifier is "commWindow" (in hex), and the response should
+ *	be identified with the serial number given by "serial" (in decimal).
+ *	If this option isn't specified then the send is asynchronous and
+ *	no response is sent.
+ *
+ * -n name
+ *	"Name" gives the name of the application for which the command is
+ *	intended.  This option must be present.
+ *
+ * -s script
+ *
+ *	"Script" is the script to be executed.  This option must be present.
+ *
+ * The options may appear in any order.  The -n and -s options must be
+ * present, but -r may be omitted for asynchronous RPCs.  For compatibility
+ * with future releases that may add new features, there may be additional
+ * options present;  as long as they start with a "-" character, they will
+ * be ignored.
+ *
+ * A result also consists of a zero character followed by several null-
+ * terminated ASCII strings.  The first string consists of the single
+ * letter "r".  Subsequent strings have the form "option value" where
+ * the following options are supported:
+ *
+ * -s serial
+ *
+ *	Identifies the command for which this is the result.  It is the
+ *	same as the "serial" field from the -s option in the command.  This
+ *	option must be present.
+ *
+ * -c code
+ *
+ *	"Code" is the completion code for the script, in decimal.  If the
+ *	code is omitted it defaults to TCL_OK.
+ *
+ * -r result
+ *
+ *	"Result" is the result string for the script, which may be either
+ *	a result or an error message.  If this field is omitted then it
+ *	defaults to an empty string.
+ *
+ * -i errorInfo
+ *
+ *	"ErrorInfo" gives a string with which to initialize the errorInfo
+ *	variable.  This option may be omitted;  it is ignored unless the
+ *	completion code is TCL_ERROR.
+ *
+ * -e errorCode
+ *
+ *	"ErrorCode" gives a string with with to initialize the errorCode
+ *	variable.  This option may be omitted;  it is ignored  unless the
+ *	completion code is TCL_ERROR.
+ *
+ * Options may appear in any order, and only the -s option must be
+ * present.  As with commands, there may be additional options besides
+ * these;  unknown options are ignored.
+ */
+
+/*
+ * The following variable is the serial number that was used in the
+ * last "send" command.  It is exported only for testing purposes.
+ */
+
+int tkSendSerial = 0;
+
+/*
+ * Maximum size property that can be read at one time by
+ * this module:
+ */
+
+#define MAX_PROP_WORDS 100000
+
+/*
+ * The following variable can be set while debugging to do things like
+ * skip locking the server.
+ */
+
+static int sendDebug = 0;
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for procedures defined later in this file:
+ */
+
+static int		AppendErrorProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+				XErrorEvent *errorPtr));
+static void		AppendPropCarefully _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
+			    Window window, Atom property, char *value,
+			    int length, PendingCommand *pendingPtr));
+static void		DeleteProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+static void		RegAddName _ANSI_ARGS_((NameRegistry *regPtr,
+			    char *name, Window commWindow));
+static void		RegClose _ANSI_ARGS_((NameRegistry *regPtr));
+static void		RegDeleteName _ANSI_ARGS_((NameRegistry *regPtr,
+			    char *name));
+static Window		RegFindName _ANSI_ARGS_((NameRegistry *regPtr,
+			    char *name));
+static NameRegistry *	RegOpen _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkDisplay *dispPtr, int lock));
+static void		SendEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+static int		SendInit _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+static Tk_RestrictAction SendRestrictProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+static int		ServerSecure _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+static void		UpdateCommWindow _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr));
+static int		ValidateName _ANSI_ARGS_((TkDisplay *dispPtr,
+			    char *name, Window commWindow, int oldOK));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * RegOpen --
+ *
+ *	This procedure loads the name registry for a display into
+ *	memory so that it can be manipulated.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is a pointer to the loaded registry.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If "lock" is set then the server will be locked.  It is the
+ *	caller's responsibility to call RegClose when finished with
+ *	the registry, so that we can write back the registry if
+ *	neeeded, unlock the server if needed, and free memory.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static NameRegistry *
+RegOpen(interp, dispPtr, lock)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting
+				 * (errors cause a panic so in fact no
+				 * error is ever returned, but the interpreter
+				 * is needed anyway). */
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display whose name registry is to be
+				 * opened. */
+    int lock;			/* Non-zero means lock the window server
+				 * when opening the registry, so no-one
+				 * else can use the registry until we
+				 * close it. */
+{
+    NameRegistry *regPtr;
+    int result, actualFormat;
+    unsigned long bytesAfter;
+    Atom actualType;
+
+    if (dispPtr->commTkwin == NULL) {
+	SendInit(interp, dispPtr);
+    }
+
+    regPtr = (NameRegistry *) ckalloc(sizeof(NameRegistry));
+    regPtr->dispPtr = dispPtr;
+    regPtr->locked = 0;
+    regPtr->modified = 0;
+    regPtr->allocedByX = 1;
+
+    if (lock && !sendDebug) {
+	XGrabServer(dispPtr->display);
+	regPtr->locked = 1;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Read the registry property.
+     */
+
+    result = XGetWindowProperty(dispPtr->display,
+	    RootWindow(dispPtr->display, 0),
+	    dispPtr->registryProperty, 0, MAX_PROP_WORDS,
+	    False, XA_STRING, &actualType, &actualFormat,
+	    &regPtr->propLength, &bytesAfter,
+	    (unsigned char **) &regPtr->property);
+
+    if (actualType == None) {
+	regPtr->propLength = 0;
+	regPtr->property = NULL;
+    } else if ((result != Success) || (actualFormat != 8)
+	    || (actualType != XA_STRING)) {
+	/*
+	 * The property is improperly formed;  delete it.
+	 */
+
+	if (regPtr->property != NULL) {
+	    XFree(regPtr->property);
+	    regPtr->propLength = 0;
+	    regPtr->property = NULL;
+	}
+	XDeleteProperty(dispPtr->display,
+		RootWindow(dispPtr->display, 0),
+		dispPtr->registryProperty);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Xlib placed an extra null byte after the end of the property, just
+     * to make sure that it is always NULL-terminated.  Be sure to include
+     * this byte in our count if it's needed to ensure null termination
+     * (note: as of 8/95 I'm no longer sure why this code is needed;  seems
+     * like it shouldn't be).
+     */
+
+    if ((regPtr->propLength > 0)
+	    && (regPtr->property[regPtr->propLength-1] != 0)) {
+	regPtr->propLength++;
+    }
+    return regPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * RegFindName --
+ *
+ *	Given an open name registry, this procedure finds an entry
+ *	with a given name, if there is one, and returns information
+ *	about that entry.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the X identifier for the comm window for
+ *	the application named "name", or None if there is no such
+ *	entry in the registry.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static Window
+RegFindName(regPtr, name)
+    NameRegistry *regPtr;	/* Pointer to a registry opened with a
+				 * previous call to RegOpen. */
+    char *name;			/* Name of an application. */
+{
+    char *p, *entry;
+    unsigned int id;
+
+    for (p = regPtr->property; (p-regPtr->property) < (int) regPtr->propLength; ) {
+	entry = p;
+	while ((*p != 0) && (!isspace(UCHAR(*p)))) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	if ((*p != 0) && (strcmp(name, p+1) == 0)) {
+	    if (sscanf(entry, "%x", &id) == 1) {
+		/*
+		 * Must cast from an unsigned int to a Window in case we
+		 * are on a 64-bit architecture.
+		 */
+
+		return (Window) id;
+	    }
+	}
+	while (*p != 0) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	p++;
+    }
+    return None;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * RegDeleteName --
+ *
+ *	This procedure deletes the entry for a given name from
+ *	an open registry.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If there used to be an entry named "name" in the registry,
+ *	then it is deleted and the registry is marked as modified
+ *	so it will be written back when closed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+RegDeleteName(regPtr, name)
+    NameRegistry *regPtr;	/* Pointer to a registry opened with a
+				 * previous call to RegOpen. */
+    char *name;			/* Name of an application. */
+{
+    char *p, *entry, *entryName;
+    int count;
+
+    for (p = regPtr->property; (p-regPtr->property) < (int) regPtr->propLength; ) {
+	entry = p;
+	while ((*p != 0) && (!isspace(UCHAR(*p)))) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	if (*p != 0) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	entryName = p;
+	while (*p != 0) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	p++;
+	if ((strcmp(name, entryName) == 0)) {
+	    /*
+	     * Found the matching entry.  Copy everything after it
+	     * down on top of it.
+	     */
+
+	    count = regPtr->propLength - (p - regPtr->property);
+	    if (count > 0)  {
+		char *src, *dst;
+
+		for (src = p, dst = entry; count > 0; src++, dst++, count--) {
+		    *dst = *src;
+		}
+	    }
+	    regPtr->propLength -=  p - entry;
+	    regPtr->modified = 1;
+	    return;
+	}
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * RegAddName --
+ *
+ *	Add a new entry to an open registry.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The open registry is expanded;  it is marked as modified so that
+ *	it will be written back when closed.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+RegAddName(regPtr, name, commWindow)
+    NameRegistry *regPtr;	/* Pointer to a registry opened with a
+				 * previous call to RegOpen. */
+    char *name;			/* Name of an application.  The caller
+				 * must ensure that this name isn't
+				 * already registered. */
+    Window commWindow;		/* X identifier for comm. window of
+				 * application.  */
+{
+    char id[30];
+    char *newProp;
+    int idLength, newBytes;
+
+    sprintf(id, "%x ", (unsigned int) commWindow);
+    idLength = strlen(id);
+    newBytes = idLength + strlen(name) + 1;
+    newProp = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (regPtr->propLength + newBytes));
+    strcpy(newProp, id);
+    strcpy(newProp+idLength, name);
+    if (regPtr->property != NULL) {
+	memcpy((VOID *) (newProp + newBytes), (VOID *) regPtr->property,
+		regPtr->propLength);
+	if (regPtr->allocedByX) {
+	    XFree(regPtr->property);
+	} else {
+	    ckfree(regPtr->property);
+	}
+    }
+    regPtr->modified = 1;
+    regPtr->propLength += newBytes;
+    regPtr->property = newProp;
+    regPtr->allocedByX = 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * RegClose --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to end a series of operations on
+ *	a name registry.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The registry is written back if it has been modified, and the
+ *	X server is unlocked if it was locked.  Memory for the
+ *	registry is freed, so the caller should never use regPtr
+ *	again.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+RegClose(regPtr)
+    NameRegistry *regPtr;	/* Pointer to a registry opened with a
+				 * previous call to RegOpen. */
+{
+    if (regPtr->modified) {
+	if (!regPtr->locked && !sendDebug) {
+	    panic("The name registry was modified without being locked!");
+	}
+	XChangeProperty(regPtr->dispPtr->display,
+		RootWindow(regPtr->dispPtr->display, 0),
+		regPtr->dispPtr->registryProperty, XA_STRING, 8,
+		PropModeReplace, (unsigned char *) regPtr->property,
+		(int) regPtr->propLength);
+    }
+
+    if (regPtr->locked) {
+	XUngrabServer(regPtr->dispPtr->display);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * After ungrabbing the server, it's important to flush the output
+     * immediately so that the server sees the ungrab command.  Otherwise
+     * we might do something else that needs to communicate with the
+     * server (such as invoking a subprocess that needs to do I/O to
+     * the screen); if the ungrab command is still sitting in our
+     * output buffer, we could deadlock.
+     */
+
+    XFlush(regPtr->dispPtr->display);
+
+    if (regPtr->property != NULL) {
+	if (regPtr->allocedByX) {
+	    XFree(regPtr->property);
+	} else {
+	    ckfree(regPtr->property);
+	}
+    }
+    ckfree((char *) regPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ValidateName --
+ *
+ *	This procedure checks to see if an entry in the registry
+ *	is still valid.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is 1 if the given commWindow exists and its
+ *	name is "name".  Otherwise 0 is returned.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+ValidateName(dispPtr, name, commWindow, oldOK)
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display for which to perform the
+				 * validation. */
+    char *name;			/* The name of an application. */
+    Window commWindow;		/* X identifier for the application's
+				 * comm. window. */
+    int oldOK;			/* Non-zero means that we should consider
+				 * an application to be valid even if it
+				 * looks like an old-style (pre-4.0) one;
+				 * 0 means consider these invalid. */
+{
+    int result, actualFormat, argc, i;
+    unsigned long length, bytesAfter;
+    Atom actualType;
+    char *property;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
+    char **argv;
+
+    property = NULL;
+
+    /*
+     * Ignore X errors when reading the property (e.g., the window
+     * might not exist).  If an error occurs, result will be some
+     * value other than Success.
+     */
+
+    handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(dispPtr->display, -1, -1, -1,
+	    (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+    result = XGetWindowProperty(dispPtr->display, commWindow,
+	    dispPtr->appNameProperty, 0, MAX_PROP_WORDS,
+	    False, XA_STRING, &actualType, &actualFormat,
+	    &length, &bytesAfter, (unsigned char **) &property);
+
+    if ((result == Success) && (actualType == None)) {
+	XWindowAttributes atts;
+
+	/*
+	 * The comm. window exists but the property we're looking for
+	 * doesn't exist.  This probably means that the application
+	 * comes from an older version of Tk (< 4.0) that didn't set the
+	 * property;  if this is the case, then assume for compatibility's
+	 * sake that everything's OK.  However, it's also possible that
+	 * some random application has re-used the window id for something
+	 * totally unrelated.  Check a few characteristics of the window,
+	 * such as its dimensions and mapped state, to be sure that it
+	 * still "smells" like a commWindow.
+	 */
+
+	if (!oldOK
+		|| !XGetWindowAttributes(dispPtr->display, commWindow, &atts)
+		|| (atts.width != 1) || (atts.height != 1)
+		|| (atts.map_state != IsUnmapped)) {
+	    result = 0;
+	} else {
+	    result = 1;
+	}
+    } else if ((result == Success) && (actualFormat == 8)
+	   && (actualType == XA_STRING)) {
+	result = 0;
+	if (Tcl_SplitList((Tcl_Interp *) NULL, property, &argc, &argv)
+		== TCL_OK) {
+	    for (i = 0; i < argc; i++) {
+		if (strcmp(argv[i], name) == 0) {
+		    result = 1;
+		    break;
+		}
+	    }
+	    ckfree((char *) argv);
+	}
+    } else {
+       result = 0;
+    }
+    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+    if (property != NULL) {
+	XFree(property);
+    }
+    return result;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ServerSecure --
+ *
+ *	Check whether a server is secure enough for us to trust
+ *	Tcl scripts arriving via that server.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is 1 if the server is secure, which means
+ *	that host-style authentication is turned on but there are
+ *	no hosts in the enabled list.  This means that some other
+ *	form of authorization (presumably more secure, such as xauth)
+ *	is in use.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+ServerSecure(dispPtr)
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display to check. */
+{
+#ifdef TK_NO_SECURITY
+    return 1;
+#else
+    XHostAddress *addrPtr;
+    int numHosts, secure;
+    Bool enabled;
+
+    secure = 0;
+    addrPtr = XListHosts(dispPtr->display, &numHosts, &enabled);
+    if (enabled && (numHosts == 0)) {
+	secure = 1;
+    }
+    if (addrPtr != NULL) {
+	XFree((char *) addrPtr);
+    }
+    return secure;
+#endif /* TK_NO_SECURITY */
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_SetAppName --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to associate an ASCII name with a Tk
+ *	application.  If the application has already been named, the
+ *	name replaces the old one.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is the name actually given to the application.
+ *	This will normally be the same as name, but if name was already
+ *	in use for an application then a name of the form "name #2" will
+ *	be chosen,  with a high enough number to make the name unique.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Registration info is saved, thereby allowing the "send" command
+ *	to be used later to invoke commands in the application.  In
+ *	addition, the "send" command is created in the application's
+ *	interpreter.  The registration will be removed automatically
+ *	if the interpreter is deleted or the "send" command is removed.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+char *
+Tk_SetAppName(tkwin, name)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for any window in the application
+				 * to be named:  it is just used to identify
+				 * the application and the display.  */
+    char *name;			/* The name that will be used to
+				 * refer to the interpreter in later
+				 * "send" commands.  Must be globally
+				 * unique. */
+{
+    RegisteredInterp *riPtr, *riPtr2;
+    Window w;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+    NameRegistry *regPtr;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+    char *actualName;
+    Tcl_DString dString;
+    int offset, i;
+
+#ifdef __WIN32__
+    return name;
+#endif /* __WIN32__ */
+    
+    dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
+    interp = winPtr->mainPtr->interp;
+    if (dispPtr->commTkwin == NULL) {
+	SendInit(interp, winPtr->dispPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * See if the application is already registered;  if so, remove its
+     * current name from the registry.
+     */
+
+    regPtr = RegOpen(interp, winPtr->dispPtr, 1);
+    for (riPtr = registry; ; riPtr = riPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (riPtr == NULL) {
+
+	    /*
+	     * This interpreter isn't currently registered;  create
+	     * the data structure that will be used to register it locally,
+	     * plus add the "send" command to the interpreter.
+	     */
+
+	    riPtr = (RegisteredInterp *) ckalloc(sizeof(RegisteredInterp));
+	    riPtr->interp = interp;
+	    riPtr->dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
+	    riPtr->nextPtr = registry;
+	    registry = riPtr;
+	    Tcl_CreateCommand(interp, "send", Tk_SendCmd, (ClientData) riPtr,
+		    DeleteProc);
+            if (Tcl_IsSafe(interp)) {
+                Tcl_HideCommand(interp, "send", "send");
+            }
+	    break;
+	}
+	if (riPtr->interp == interp) {
+	    /*
+	     * The interpreter is currently registered;  remove it from
+	     * the name registry.
+	     */
+
+	    RegDeleteName(regPtr, riPtr->name);
+	    ckfree(riPtr->name);
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Pick a name to use for the application.  Use "name" if it's not
+     * already in use.  Otherwise add a suffix such as " #2", trying
+     * larger and larger numbers until we eventually find one that is
+     * unique.
+     */
+
+    actualName = name;
+    offset = 0;				/* Needed only to avoid "used before
+					 * set" compiler warnings. */
+    for (i = 1; ; i++) {
+	if (i > 1) {
+	    if (i == 2) {
+		Tcl_DStringInit(&dString);
+		Tcl_DStringAppend(&dString, name, -1);
+		Tcl_DStringAppend(&dString, " #", 2);
+		offset = Tcl_DStringLength(&dString);
+		Tcl_DStringSetLength(&dString, offset+10);
+		actualName = Tcl_DStringValue(&dString);
+	    }
+	    sprintf(actualName + offset, "%d", i);
+	}
+	w = RegFindName(regPtr, actualName);
+	if (w == None) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    
+	/*
+	 * The name appears to be in use already, but double-check to
+	 * be sure (perhaps the application died without removing its
+	 * name from the registry?).
+	 */
+
+	if (w == Tk_WindowId(dispPtr->commTkwin)) {
+	    for (riPtr2 = registry; riPtr2 != NULL; riPtr2 = riPtr2->nextPtr) {
+		if ((riPtr2->interp != interp) &&
+			(strcmp(riPtr2->name, actualName) == 0)) {
+		    goto nextSuffix;
+		}
+	    }
+	    RegDeleteName(regPtr, actualName);
+	    break;
+	} else if (!ValidateName(winPtr->dispPtr, actualName, w, 1)) {
+	    RegDeleteName(regPtr, actualName);
+	    break;
+	}
+	nextSuffix:
+	continue;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * We've now got a name to use.  Store it in the name registry and
+     * in the local entry for this application, plus put it in a property
+     * on the commWindow.
+     */
+
+    RegAddName(regPtr, actualName, Tk_WindowId(dispPtr->commTkwin));
+    RegClose(regPtr);
+    riPtr->name = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(actualName) + 1));
+    strcpy(riPtr->name, actualName);
+    if (actualName != name) {
+	Tcl_DStringFree(&dString);
+    }
+    UpdateCommWindow(dispPtr);
+
+    return riPtr->name;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_SendCmd --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the "send" Tcl command.
+ *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	See the user documentation.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+Tk_SendCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about sender (only
+					 * dispPtr field is used). */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;			/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;				/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;			/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+    Window commWindow;
+    PendingCommand pending;
+    register RegisteredInterp *riPtr;
+    char *destName, buffer[30];
+    int result, c, async, i, firstArg;
+    size_t length;
+    Tk_RestrictProc *prevRestrictProc;
+    ClientData prevArg;
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+    Tcl_Time timeout;
+    NameRegistry *regPtr;
+    Tcl_DString request;
+    Tcl_Interp *localInterp;		/* Used when the interpreter to
+                                         * send the command to is within
+                                         * the same process. */
+
+    /*
+     * Process options, if any.
+     */
+
+    async = 0;
+    winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_MainWindow(interp);
+    if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    for (i = 1; i < (argc-1); ) {
+	if (argv[i][0] != '-') {
+	    break;
+	}
+	c = argv[i][1];
+	length = strlen(argv[i]);
+	if ((c == 'a') && (strncmp(argv[i], "-async", length) == 0)) {
+	    async = 1;
+	    i++;
+	} else if ((c == 'd') && (strncmp(argv[i], "-displayof",
+		length) == 0)) {
+	    winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[i+1],
+		    (Tk_Window) winPtr);
+	    if (winPtr == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    i += 2;
+	} else if (strcmp(argv[i], "--") == 0) {
+	    i++;
+	    break;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad option \"", argv[i],
+		    "\": must be -async, -displayof, or --", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+    }
+
+    if (argc < (i+2)) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"", argv[0],
+		" ?options? interpName arg ?arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    destName = argv[i];
+    firstArg = i+1;
+
+    dispPtr = winPtr->dispPtr;
+    if (dispPtr->commTkwin == NULL) {
+	SendInit(interp, winPtr->dispPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * See if the target interpreter is local.  If so, execute
+     * the command directly without going through the X server.
+     * The only tricky thing is passing the result from the target
+     * interpreter to the invoking interpreter.  Watch out:  they
+     * could be the same!
+     */
+
+    for (riPtr = registry; riPtr != NULL; riPtr = riPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if ((riPtr->dispPtr != dispPtr)
+		|| (strcmp(riPtr->name, destName) != 0)) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+	Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) riPtr);
+        localInterp = riPtr->interp;
+        Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) localInterp);
+	if (firstArg == (argc-1)) {
+	    result = Tcl_GlobalEval(localInterp, argv[firstArg]);
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_DStringInit(&request);
+	    Tcl_DStringAppend(&request, argv[firstArg], -1);
+	    for (i = firstArg+1; i < argc; i++) {
+		Tcl_DStringAppend(&request, " ", 1);
+		Tcl_DStringAppend(&request, argv[i], -1);
+	    }
+	    result = Tcl_GlobalEval(localInterp, Tcl_DStringValue(&request));
+	    Tcl_DStringFree(&request);
+	}
+	if (interp != localInterp) {
+	    if (result == TCL_ERROR) {
+
+		/*
+		 * An error occurred, so transfer error information from the
+		 * destination interpreter back to our interpreter.  Must clear
+		 * interp's result before calling Tcl_AddErrorInfo, since
+		 * Tcl_AddErrorInfo will store the interp's result in errorInfo
+		 * before appending riPtr's $errorInfo;  we've already got
+		 * everything we need in riPtr's $errorInfo.
+		 */
+
+		Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, Tcl_GetVar2(localInterp,
+			"errorInfo", (char *) NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY));
+		Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "errorCode", (char *) NULL,
+			Tcl_GetVar2(localInterp, "errorCode", (char *) NULL,
+			TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY), TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	    }
+            if (localInterp->freeProc != TCL_STATIC) {
+                interp->result = localInterp->result;
+                interp->freeProc = localInterp->freeProc;
+                localInterp->freeProc = TCL_STATIC;
+            } else {
+                Tcl_SetResult(interp, localInterp->result, TCL_VOLATILE);
+            }
+            Tcl_ResetResult(localInterp);
+	}
+	Tcl_Release((ClientData) riPtr);
+        Tcl_Release((ClientData) localInterp);
+	return result;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Bind the interpreter name to a communication window.
+     */
+
+    regPtr = RegOpen(interp, winPtr->dispPtr, 0);
+    commWindow = RegFindName(regPtr, destName);
+    RegClose(regPtr);
+    if (commWindow == None) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "no application named \"",
+		destName, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Send the command to the target interpreter by appending it to the
+     * comm window in the communication window.
+     */
+
+    tkSendSerial++;
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&request);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&request, "\0c\0-n ", 6);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&request, destName, -1);
+    if (!async) {
+	sprintf(buffer, "%x %d",
+		(unsigned int) Tk_WindowId(dispPtr->commTkwin),
+		tkSendSerial);
+	Tcl_DStringAppend(&request, "\0-r ", 4);
+	Tcl_DStringAppend(&request, buffer, -1);
+    }
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&request, "\0-s ", 4);
+    Tcl_DStringAppend(&request, argv[firstArg], -1);
+    for (i = firstArg+1; i < argc; i++) {
+	Tcl_DStringAppend(&request, " ", 1);
+	Tcl_DStringAppend(&request, argv[i], -1);
+    }
+    (void) AppendPropCarefully(dispPtr->display, commWindow,
+	    dispPtr->commProperty, Tcl_DStringValue(&request),
+	    Tcl_DStringLength(&request) + 1,
+	    (async) ? (PendingCommand *) NULL : &pending);
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&request);
+    if (async) {
+	/*
+	 * This is an asynchronous send:  return immediately without
+	 * waiting for a response.
+	 */
+
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Register the fact that we're waiting for a command to complete
+     * (this is needed by SendEventProc and by AppendErrorProc to pass
+     * back the command's results).  Set up a timeout handler so that
+     * we can check during long sends to make sure that the destination
+     * application is still alive.
+     */
+
+    pending.serial = tkSendSerial;
+    pending.dispPtr = dispPtr;
+    pending.target = destName;
+    pending.commWindow = commWindow;
+    pending.interp = interp;
+    pending.result = NULL;
+    pending.errorInfo = NULL;
+    pending.errorCode = NULL;
+    pending.gotResponse = 0;
+    pending.nextPtr = pendingCommands;
+    pendingCommands = &pending;
+
+    /*
+     * Enter a loop processing X events until the result comes
+     * in or the target is declared to be dead.  While waiting
+     * for a result, look only at send-related events so that
+     * the send is synchronous with respect to other events in
+     * the application.
+     */
+
+    prevRestrictProc = Tk_RestrictEvents(SendRestrictProc,
+	    (ClientData) NULL, &prevArg);
+    TclpGetTime(&timeout);
+    timeout.sec += 2;
+    while (!pending.gotResponse) {
+	if (!TkUnixDoOneXEvent(&timeout)) {
+	    /*
+	     * An unusually long amount of time has elapsed during the
+	     * processing of a sent command.  Check to make sure that the
+	     * target application still exists.  If it does, reset the timeout.
+	     */
+
+	    if (!ValidateName(pending.dispPtr, pending.target,
+		    pending.commWindow, 0)) {
+		char *msg;
+		if (ValidateName(pending.dispPtr, pending.target,
+			pending.commWindow, 1)) {
+		    msg = "target application died or uses a Tk version before 4.0";
+		} else {
+		    msg = "target application died";
+		}
+		pending.code = TCL_ERROR;
+		pending.result = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(msg) + 1));
+		strcpy(pending.result, msg);
+		pending.gotResponse = 1;
+	    } else {
+		TclpGetTime(&timeout);
+		timeout.sec += 2;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    (void) Tk_RestrictEvents(prevRestrictProc, prevArg, &prevArg);
+
+    /*
+     * Unregister the information about the pending command
+     * and return the result.
+     */
+
+    if (pendingCommands != &pending) {
+	panic("Tk_SendCmd: corrupted send stack");
+    }
+    pendingCommands = pending.nextPtr;
+    if (pending.errorInfo != NULL) {
+	/*
+	 * Special trick: must clear the interp's result before calling
+	 * Tcl_AddErrorInfo, since Tcl_AddErrorInfo will store the interp's
+	 * result in errorInfo before appending pending.errorInfo;  we've
+	 * already got everything we need in pending.errorInfo.
+	 */
+
+	Tcl_ResetResult(interp);
+	Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, pending.errorInfo);
+	ckfree(pending.errorInfo);
+    }
+    if (pending.errorCode != NULL) {
+	Tcl_SetVar2(interp, "errorCode", (char *) NULL, pending.errorCode,
+		TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+	ckfree(pending.errorCode);
+    }
+    Tcl_SetResult(interp, pending.result, TCL_DYNAMIC);
+    return pending.code;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkGetInterpNames --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to fetch a list of all the
+ *	interpreter names currently registered for the display
+ *	of a particular window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl return value.  Interp->result will be set
+ *	to hold a list of all the interpreter names defined for
+ *	tkwin's display.  If an error occurs, then TCL_ERROR
+ *	is returned and interp->result will hold an error message.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkGetInterpNames(interp, tkwin)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter for returning a result. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose display is to be used
+				 * for the lookup. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    char *p, *entry, *entryName;
+    NameRegistry *regPtr;
+    Window commWindow;
+    int count;
+    unsigned int id;
+
+    /*
+     * Read the registry property, then scan through all of its entries.
+     * Validate each entry to be sure that its application still exists.
+     */
+
+    regPtr = RegOpen(interp, winPtr->dispPtr, 1);
+    for (p = regPtr->property; (p-regPtr->property) < (int) regPtr->propLength; ) {
+	entry = p;
+	if (sscanf(p,  "%x",(unsigned int *) &id) != 1) {
+	    commWindow =  None;
+	} else {
+	    commWindow = id;
+	}
+	while ((*p != 0) && (!isspace(UCHAR(*p)))) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	if (*p != 0) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	entryName = p;
+	while (*p != 0) {
+	    p++;
+	}
+	p++;
+	if (ValidateName(winPtr->dispPtr, entryName, commWindow, 1)) {
+	    /*
+	     * The application still exists; add its name to the result.
+	     */
+
+	    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, entryName);
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * This name is bogus (perhaps the application died without
+	     * cleaning up its entry in the registry?).  Delete the name.
+	     */
+
+	    count = regPtr->propLength - (p - regPtr->property);
+	    if (count > 0)  {
+		char *src, *dst;
+
+		for (src = p, dst = entry; count > 0; src++, dst++, count--) {
+		    *dst = *src;
+		}
+	    }
+	    regPtr->propLength -= p - entry;
+	    regPtr->modified = 1;
+	    p = entry;
+	}
+    }
+    RegClose(regPtr);
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SendInit --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to initialize the
+ *	communication channels for sending commands and
+ *	receiving results.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Sets up various data structures and windows.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+SendInit(interp, dispPtr)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter to use for error reporting
+				 * (no errors are ever returned, but the
+				 * interpreter is needed anyway). */
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display to initialize. */
+{
+    XSetWindowAttributes atts;
+
+    /*
+     * Create the window used for communication, and set up an
+     * event handler for it.
+     */
+
+    dispPtr->commTkwin = Tk_CreateWindow(interp, (Tk_Window) NULL,
+	    "_comm", DisplayString(dispPtr->display));
+    if (dispPtr->commTkwin == NULL) {
+	panic("Tk_CreateWindow failed in SendInit!");
+    }
+    atts.override_redirect = True;
+    Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(dispPtr->commTkwin,
+	    CWOverrideRedirect, &atts);
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler(dispPtr->commTkwin, PropertyChangeMask,
+	    SendEventProc, (ClientData) dispPtr);
+    Tk_MakeWindowExist(dispPtr->commTkwin);
+
+    /*
+     * Get atoms used as property names.
+     */
+
+    dispPtr->commProperty = Tk_InternAtom(dispPtr->commTkwin, "Comm");
+    dispPtr->registryProperty = Tk_InternAtom(dispPtr->commTkwin,
+	    "InterpRegistry");
+    dispPtr->appNameProperty = Tk_InternAtom(dispPtr->commTkwin,
+	    "TK_APPLICATION");
+
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SendEventProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked automatically by the toolkit
+ *	event manager when a property changes on the communication
+ *	window.  This procedure reads the property and handles
+ *	command requests and responses.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If there are command requests in the property, they
+ *	are executed.  If there are responses in the property,
+ *	their information is saved for the (ostensibly waiting)
+ *	"send" commands. The property is deleted.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+SendEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Display information. */	
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Information about event. */
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = (TkDisplay *) clientData;
+    char *propInfo;
+    register char *p;
+    int result, actualFormat;
+    unsigned long numItems, bytesAfter;
+    Atom actualType;
+    Tcl_Interp *remoteInterp;	/* Interp in which to execute the command. */
+
+    if ((eventPtr->xproperty.atom != dispPtr->commProperty)
+	    || (eventPtr->xproperty.state != PropertyNewValue)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Read the comm property and delete it.
+     */
+
+    propInfo = NULL;
+    result = XGetWindowProperty(dispPtr->display,
+	    Tk_WindowId(dispPtr->commTkwin),
+	    dispPtr->commProperty, 0, MAX_PROP_WORDS, True,
+	    XA_STRING, &actualType, &actualFormat,
+	    &numItems, &bytesAfter, (unsigned char **) &propInfo);
+
+    /*
+     * If the property doesn't exist or is improperly formed
+     * then ignore it.
+     */
+
+    if ((result != Success) || (actualType != XA_STRING)
+	    || (actualFormat != 8)) {
+	if (propInfo != NULL) {
+	    XFree(propInfo);
+	}
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Several commands and results could arrive in the property at
+     * one time;  each iteration through the outer loop handles a
+     * single command or result.
+     */
+
+    for (p = propInfo; (p-propInfo) < (int) numItems; ) {
+	/*
+	 * Ignore leading NULLs; each command or result starts with a
+	 * NULL so that no matter how badly formed a preceding command
+	 * is, we'll be able to tell that a new command/result is
+	 * starting.
+	 */
+
+	if (*p == 0) {
+	    p++;
+	    continue;
+	}
+
+	if ((*p == 'c') && (p[1] == 0)) {
+	    Window commWindow;
+	    char *interpName, *script, *serial, *end;
+	    Tcl_DString reply;
+	    RegisteredInterp *riPtr;
+
+	    /*
+	     *----------------------------------------------------------
+	     * This is an incoming command from some other application.
+	     * Iterate over all of its options.  Stop when we reach
+	     * the end of the property or something that doesn't look
+	     * like an option.
+	     *----------------------------------------------------------
+	     */
+
+	    p += 2;
+	    interpName = NULL;
+	    commWindow = None;
+	    serial = "";
+	    script = NULL;
+	    while (((p-propInfo) < (int) numItems) && (*p == '-')) {
+		switch (p[1]) {
+		    case 'r':
+			commWindow = (Window) strtoul(p+2, &end, 16);
+			if ((end == p+2) || (*end != ' ')) {
+			    commWindow = None;
+			} else {
+			    p = serial = end+1;
+			}
+			break;
+		    case 'n':
+			if (p[2] == ' ') {
+			    interpName = p+3;
+			}
+			break;
+		    case 's':
+			if (p[2] == ' ') {
+			    script = p+3;
+			}
+			break;
+		}
+		while (*p != 0) {
+		    p++;
+		}
+		p++;
+	    }
+
+	    if ((script == NULL) || (interpName == NULL)) {
+		continue;
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * Initialize the result property, so that we're ready at any
+	     * time if we need to return an error.
+	     */
+
+	    if (commWindow != None) {
+		Tcl_DStringInit(&reply);
+		Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, "\0r\0-s ", 6);
+		Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, serial, -1);
+		Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, "\0-r ", 4);
+	    }
+
+	    if (!ServerSecure(dispPtr)) {
+		if (commWindow != None) {
+		    Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, "X server insecure (must use xauth-style authorization); command ignored", -1);
+		}
+		result = TCL_ERROR;
+		goto returnResult;
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * Locate the application, then execute the script.
+	     */
+
+	    for (riPtr = registry; ; riPtr = riPtr->nextPtr) {
+		if (riPtr == NULL) {
+		    if (commWindow != None) {
+			Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply,
+				"receiver never heard of interpreter \"", -1);
+			Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, interpName, -1);
+			Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, "\"", 1);
+		    }
+		    result = TCL_ERROR;
+		    goto returnResult;
+		}
+		if (strcmp(riPtr->name, interpName) == 0) {
+		    break;
+		}
+	    }
+	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) riPtr);
+
+            /*
+             * We must protect the interpreter because the script may
+             * enter another event loop, which might call Tcl_DeleteInterp.
+             */
+
+            remoteInterp = riPtr->interp;
+            Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) remoteInterp);
+
+            result = Tcl_GlobalEval(remoteInterp, script);
+
+            /*
+             * The call to Tcl_Release may have released the interpreter
+             * which will cause the "send" command for that interpreter
+             * to be deleted. The command deletion callback will set the
+             * riPtr->interp field to NULL, hence the check below for NULL.
+             */
+
+	    if (commWindow != None) {
+		Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, remoteInterp->result, -1);
+		if (result == TCL_ERROR) {
+		    char *varValue;
+    
+		    varValue = Tcl_GetVar2(remoteInterp, "errorInfo",
+			    (char *) NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+		    if (varValue != NULL) {
+			Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, "\0-i ", 4);
+			Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, varValue, -1);
+		    }
+		    varValue = Tcl_GetVar2(remoteInterp, "errorCode",
+			    (char *) NULL, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY);
+		    if (varValue != NULL) {
+			Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, "\0-e ", 4);
+			Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, varValue, -1);
+		    }
+		}
+	    }
+            Tcl_Release((ClientData) remoteInterp);
+	    Tcl_Release((ClientData) riPtr);
+
+	    /*
+	     * Return the result to the sender if a commWindow was
+	     * specified (if none was specified then this is an asynchronous
+	     * call).  Right now reply has everything but the completion
+	     * code, but it needs the NULL to terminate the current option.
+	     */
+
+	    returnResult:
+	    if (commWindow != None) {
+		if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		    char buffer[20];
+    
+		    sprintf(buffer, "%d", result);
+		    Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, "\0-c ", 4);
+		    Tcl_DStringAppend(&reply, buffer, -1);
+		}
+		(void) AppendPropCarefully(dispPtr->display, commWindow,
+			dispPtr->commProperty, Tcl_DStringValue(&reply),
+			Tcl_DStringLength(&reply) + 1,
+			(PendingCommand *) NULL);
+		XFlush(dispPtr->display);
+		Tcl_DStringFree(&reply);
+	    }
+	} else if ((*p == 'r') && (p[1] == 0)) {
+	    int serial, code, gotSerial;
+	    char *errorInfo, *errorCode, *resultString;
+	    PendingCommand *pcPtr;
+
+	    /*
+	     *----------------------------------------------------------
+	     * This is a reply to some command that we sent out.  Iterate
+	     * over all of its options.  Stop when we reach the end of the
+	     * property or something that doesn't look like an option.
+	     *----------------------------------------------------------
+	     */
+
+	    p += 2;
+	    code = TCL_OK;
+	    gotSerial = 0;
+	    errorInfo = NULL;
+	    errorCode = NULL;
+	    resultString = "";
+	    while (((p-propInfo) < (int) numItems) && (*p == '-')) {
+		switch (p[1]) {
+		    case 'c':
+			if (sscanf(p+2, " %d", &code) != 1) {
+			    code = TCL_OK;
+			}
+			break;
+		    case 'e':
+			if (p[2] == ' ') {
+			    errorCode = p+3;
+			}
+			break;
+		    case 'i':
+			if (p[2] == ' ') {
+			    errorInfo = p+3;
+			}
+			break;
+		    case 'r':
+			if (p[2] == ' ') {
+			    resultString = p+3;
+			}
+			break;
+		    case 's':
+			if (sscanf(p+2, " %d", &serial) == 1) {
+			    gotSerial = 1;
+			}
+			break;
+		}
+		while (*p != 0) {
+		    p++;
+		}
+		p++;
+	    }
+
+	    if (!gotSerial) {
+		continue;
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * Give the result information to anyone who's
+	     * waiting for it.
+	     */
+
+	    for (pcPtr = pendingCommands; pcPtr != NULL;
+		    pcPtr = pcPtr->nextPtr) {
+		if ((serial != pcPtr->serial) || (pcPtr->result != NULL)) {
+		    continue;
+		}
+		pcPtr->code = code;
+		if (resultString != NULL) {
+		    pcPtr->result = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned)
+			    (strlen(resultString) + 1));
+		    strcpy(pcPtr->result, resultString);
+		}
+		if (code == TCL_ERROR) {
+		    if (errorInfo != NULL) {
+			pcPtr->errorInfo = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned)
+				(strlen(errorInfo) + 1));
+			strcpy(pcPtr->errorInfo, errorInfo);
+		    }
+		    if (errorCode != NULL) {
+			pcPtr->errorCode = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned)
+				(strlen(errorCode) + 1));
+			strcpy(pcPtr->errorCode, errorCode);
+		    }
+		}
+		pcPtr->gotResponse = 1;
+		break;
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * Didn't recognize this thing.  Just skip through the next
+	     * null character and try again.
+	     */
+
+	    while (*p != 0) {
+		p++;
+	    }
+	    p++;
+	}
+    }
+    XFree(propInfo);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * AppendPropCarefully --
+ *
+ *	Append a given property to a given window, but set up
+ *	an X error handler so that if the append fails this
+ *	procedure can return an error code rather than having
+ *	Xlib panic.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The given property on the given window is appended to.
+ *	If this operation fails and if pendingPtr is non-NULL,
+ *	then the pending operation is marked as complete with
+ *	an error.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+AppendPropCarefully(display, window, property, value, length, pendingPtr)
+    Display *display;		/* Display on which to operate. */
+    Window window;		/* Window whose property is to
+				 * be modified. */
+    Atom property;		/* Name of property. */
+    char *value;		/* Characters to append to property. */
+    int length;			/* Number of bytes to append. */
+    PendingCommand *pendingPtr;	/* Pending command to mark complete
+				 * if an error occurs during the
+				 * property op.  NULL means just
+				 * ignore the error. */
+{
+    Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
+
+    handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(display, -1, -1, -1, AppendErrorProc,
+	(ClientData) pendingPtr);
+    XChangeProperty(display, window, property, XA_STRING, 8,
+	    PropModeAppend, (unsigned char *) value, length);
+    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+}
+
+/*
+ * The procedure below is invoked if an error occurs during
+ * the XChangeProperty operation above.
+ */
+
+	/* ARGSUSED */
+static int
+AppendErrorProc(clientData, errorPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Command to mark complete, or NULL. */
+    XErrorEvent *errorPtr;	/* Information about error. */
+{
+    PendingCommand *pendingPtr = (PendingCommand *) clientData;
+    register PendingCommand *pcPtr;
+
+    if (pendingPtr == NULL) {
+	return 0;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Make sure this command is still pending.
+     */
+
+    for (pcPtr = pendingCommands; pcPtr != NULL;
+	    pcPtr = pcPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if ((pcPtr == pendingPtr) && (pcPtr->result == NULL)) {
+	    pcPtr->result = (char *) ckalloc((unsigned)
+		    (strlen(pcPtr->target) + 50));
+	    sprintf(pcPtr->result, "no application named \"%s\"",
+		    pcPtr->target);
+	    pcPtr->code = TCL_ERROR;
+	    pcPtr->gotResponse = 1;
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    return 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * DeleteProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Tcl when the "send" command
+ *	is deleted in an interpreter.  It unregisters the interpreter.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The interpreter given by riPtr is unregistered.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+DeleteProc(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Info about registration, passed
+				 * as ClientData. */
+{
+    RegisteredInterp *riPtr = (RegisteredInterp *) clientData;
+    register RegisteredInterp *riPtr2;
+    NameRegistry *regPtr;
+
+    regPtr = RegOpen(riPtr->interp, riPtr->dispPtr, 1);
+    RegDeleteName(regPtr, riPtr->name);
+    RegClose(regPtr);
+
+    if (registry == riPtr) {
+	registry = riPtr->nextPtr;
+    } else {
+	for (riPtr2 = registry; riPtr2 != NULL;
+		riPtr2 = riPtr2->nextPtr) {
+	    if (riPtr2->nextPtr == riPtr) {
+		riPtr2->nextPtr = riPtr->nextPtr;
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    ckfree((char *) riPtr->name);
+    riPtr->interp = NULL;
+    UpdateCommWindow(riPtr->dispPtr);
+    Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData) riPtr, TCL_DYNAMIC);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * SendRestrictProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure filters incoming events when a "send" command
+ *	is outstanding.  It defers all events except those containing
+ *	send commands and results.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	False is returned except for property-change events on a
+ *	commWindow.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+    /* ARGSUSED */
+static Tk_RestrictAction
+SendRestrictProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Not used. */
+    register XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Event that just arrived. */
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type != PropertyNotify) {
+	return TK_DEFER_EVENT;
+    }
+    for (dispPtr = tkDisplayList; dispPtr != NULL; dispPtr = dispPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if ((eventPtr->xany.display == dispPtr->display)
+		&& (eventPtr->xproperty.window
+		== Tk_WindowId(dispPtr->commTkwin))) {
+	    return TK_PROCESS_EVENT;
+	}
+    }
+    return TK_DEFER_EVENT;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateCommWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure updates the list of application names stored
+ *	on our commWindow.  It is typically called when interpreters
+ *	are registered and unregistered.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The TK_APPLICATION property on the comm window is updated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+UpdateCommWindow(dispPtr)
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display whose commWindow is to be
+				 * updated. */
+{
+    Tcl_DString names;
+    RegisteredInterp *riPtr;
+
+    Tcl_DStringInit(&names);
+    for (riPtr = registry; riPtr != NULL; riPtr = riPtr->nextPtr) {
+	Tcl_DStringAppendElement(&names, riPtr->name);
+    }
+    XChangeProperty(dispPtr->display, Tk_WindowId(dispPtr->commTkwin),
+	    dispPtr->appNameProperty, XA_STRING, 8, PropModeReplace,
+	    (unsigned char *) Tcl_DStringValue(&names),
+	    Tcl_DStringLength(&names));
+    Tcl_DStringFree(&names);
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixWm.c b/unix/tkUnixWm.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..0c26c9b
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixWm.c
@@ -0,0 +1,4813 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixWm.c --
+ *
+ *	This module takes care of the interactions between a Tk-based
+ *	application and the window manager.  Among other things, it
+ *	implements the "wm" command and passes geometry information
+ *	to the window manager.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1991-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixWm.c 1.155 97/10/28 08:35:19
+ */
+
+#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#include "tkUnixInt.h"
+#include <errno.h>
+
+/*
+ * A data structure of the following type holds information for
+ * each window manager protocol (such as WM_DELETE_WINDOW) for
+ * which a handler (i.e. a Tcl command) has been defined for a
+ * particular top-level window.
+ */
+
+typedef struct ProtocolHandler {
+    Atom protocol;		/* Identifies the protocol. */
+    struct ProtocolHandler *nextPtr;
+				/* Next in list of protocol handlers for
+				 * the same top-level window, or NULL for
+				 * end of list. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Interpreter in which to invoke command. */
+    char command[4];		/* Tcl command to invoke when a client
+				 * message for this protocol arrives. 
+				 * The actual size of the structure varies
+				 * to accommodate the needs of the actual
+				 * command. THIS MUST BE THE LAST FIELD OF
+				 * THE STRUCTURE. */
+} ProtocolHandler;
+
+#define HANDLER_SIZE(cmdLength) \
+    ((unsigned) (sizeof(ProtocolHandler) - 3 + cmdLength))
+
+/*
+ * A data structure of the following type holds window-manager-related
+ * information for each top-level window in an application.
+ */
+
+typedef struct TkWmInfo {
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Pointer to main Tk information for
+				 * this window. */
+    Window reparent;		/* If the window has been reparented, this
+				 * gives the ID of the ancestor of the window
+				 * that is a child of the root window (may
+				 * not be window's immediate parent).  If
+				 * the window isn't reparented, this has the
+				 * value None. */
+    char *title;		/* Title to display in window caption.  If
+				 * NULL, use name of widget.  Malloced. */
+    char *iconName;		/* Name to display in icon.  Malloced. */
+    Window master;		/* Master window for TRANSIENT_FOR property,
+				 * or None. */
+    XWMHints hints;		/* Various pieces of information for
+				 * window manager. */
+    char *leaderName;		/* Path name of leader of window group
+				 * (corresponds to hints.window_group).
+				 * Malloc-ed.  Note:  this field doesn't
+				 * get updated if leader is destroyed. */
+    char *masterWindowName;	/* Path name of window specified as master
+				 * in "wm transient" command, or NULL.
+				 * Malloc-ed. Note:  this field doesn't
+				 * get updated if masterWindowName is
+				 * destroyed. */
+    Tk_Window icon;		/* Window to use as icon for this window,
+				 * or NULL. */
+    Tk_Window iconFor;		/* Window for which this window is icon, or
+				 * NULL if this isn't an icon for anyone. */
+    int withdrawn;		/* Non-zero means window has been withdrawn. */
+
+    /*
+     * In order to support menubars transparently under X, each toplevel
+     * window is encased in an additional window, called the wrapper,
+     * that holds the toplevel and the menubar, if any.  The information
+     * below is used to keep track of the wrapper and the menubar.
+     */
+
+    TkWindow *wrapperPtr;	/* Pointer to information about the wrapper.
+				 * This is the "real" toplevel window as
+				 * seen by the window manager. Although
+				 * this is an official Tk window, it
+				 * doesn't appear in the application's
+				 * window hierarchy.  NULL means that
+				 * the wrapper hasn't been created yet. */
+    Tk_Window menubar;		/* Pointer to information about the
+				 * menubar, or NULL if there is no
+				 * menubar for this toplevel. */
+    int menuHeight;		/* Amount of vertical space needed for
+				 * menubar, measured in pixels.  If
+				 * menubar is non-NULL, this is >= 1 (X
+				 * servers don't like dimensions of 0). */
+
+    /*
+     * Information used to construct an XSizeHints structure for
+     * the window manager:
+     */
+
+    int sizeHintsFlags;		/* Flags word for XSizeHints structure.
+				 * If the PBaseSize flag is set then the
+				 * window is gridded;  otherwise it isn't
+				 * gridded. */
+    int minWidth, minHeight;	/* Minimum dimensions of window, in
+				 * grid units, not pixels. */
+    int maxWidth, maxHeight;	/* Maximum dimensions of window, in
+				 * grid units, not pixels. */
+    Tk_Window gridWin;		/* Identifies the window that controls
+				 * gridding for this top-level, or NULL if
+				 * the top-level isn't currently gridded. */
+    int widthInc, heightInc;	/* Increments for size changes (# pixels
+				 * per step). */
+    struct {
+	int x;	/* numerator */
+	int y;  /* denominator */
+    } minAspect, maxAspect;	/* Min/max aspect ratios for window. */
+    int reqGridWidth, reqGridHeight;
+				/* The dimensions of the window (in
+				 * grid units) requested through
+				 * the geometry manager. */
+    int gravity;		/* Desired window gravity. */
+
+    /*
+     * Information used to manage the size and location of a window.
+     */
+
+    int width, height;		/* Desired dimensions of window, specified
+				 * in grid units.  These values are
+				 * set by the "wm geometry" command and by
+				 * ConfigureNotify events (for when wm
+				 * resizes window).  -1 means user hasn't
+				 * requested dimensions. */
+    int x, y;			/* Desired X and Y coordinates for window.
+				 * These values are set by "wm geometry",
+				 * plus by ConfigureNotify events (when wm
+				 * moves window).  These numbers are
+				 * different than the numbers stored in
+				 * winPtr->changes because (a) they could be
+				 * measured from the right or bottom edge
+				 * of the screen (see WM_NEGATIVE_X and
+				 * WM_NEGATIVE_Y flags) and (b) if the window
+				 * has been reparented then they refer to the
+				 * parent rather than the window itself. */
+    int parentWidth, parentHeight;
+				/* Width and height of reparent, in pixels
+				 * *including border*.  If window hasn't been
+				 * reparented then these will be the outer
+				 * dimensions of the window, including
+				 * border. */
+    int xInParent, yInParent;	/* Offset of wrapperPtr within reparent,
+				 * measured in pixels from upper-left outer
+				 * corner of reparent's border to upper-left
+				 * outer corner of wrapperPtr's border.  If
+				 * not reparented then these are zero. */
+    int configWidth, configHeight;
+				/* Dimensions passed to last request that we
+				 * issued to change geometry of the wrapper.
+				 * Used to eliminate redundant resize
+				 * operations. */
+
+    /*
+     * Information about the virtual root window for this top-level,
+     * if there is one.
+     */
+
+    Window vRoot;		/* Virtual root window for this top-level,
+				 * or None if there is no virtual root
+				 * window (i.e. just use the screen's root). */
+    int vRootX, vRootY;		/* Position of the virtual root inside the
+				 * root window.  If the WM_VROOT_OFFSET_STALE
+				 * flag is set then this information may be
+				 * incorrect and needs to be refreshed from
+				 * the X server.  If vRoot is None then these
+				 * values are both 0. */
+    int vRootWidth, vRootHeight;/* Dimensions of the virtual root window.
+				 * If vRoot is None, gives the dimensions
+				 * of the containing screen.  This information
+				 * is never stale, even though vRootX and
+				 * vRootY can be. */
+
+    /*
+     * Miscellaneous information.
+     */
+
+    ProtocolHandler *protPtr;	/* First in list of protocol handlers for
+				 * this window (NULL means none). */
+    int cmdArgc;		/* Number of elements in cmdArgv below. */
+    char **cmdArgv;		/* Array of strings to store in the
+				 * WM_COMMAND property.  NULL means nothing
+				 * available. */
+    char *clientMachine;	/* String to store in WM_CLIENT_MACHINE
+				 * property, or NULL. */
+    int flags;			/* Miscellaneous flags, defined below. */
+    struct TkWmInfo *nextPtr;	/* Next in list of all top-level windows. */
+} WmInfo;
+
+/*
+ * Flag values for WmInfo structures:
+ *
+ * WM_NEVER_MAPPED -		non-zero means window has never been
+ *				mapped;  need to update all info when
+ *				window is first mapped.
+ * WM_UPDATE_PENDING -		non-zero means a call to UpdateGeometryInfo
+ *				has already been scheduled for this
+ *				window;  no need to schedule another one.
+ * WM_NEGATIVE_X -		non-zero means x-coordinate is measured in
+ *				pixels from right edge of screen, rather
+ *				than from left edge.
+ * WM_NEGATIVE_Y -		non-zero means y-coordinate is measured in
+ *				pixels up from bottom of screen, rather than
+ *				down from top.
+ * WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS -	non-zero means that new size hints need to be
+ *				propagated to window manager.
+ * WM_SYNC_PENDING -		set to non-zero while waiting for the window
+ *				manager to respond to some state change.
+ * WM_VROOT_OFFSET_STALE -	non-zero means that (x,y) offset information
+ *				about the virtual root window is stale and
+ *				needs to be fetched fresh from the X server.
+ * WM_ABOUT_TO_MAP -		non-zero means that the window is about to
+ *				be mapped by TkWmMapWindow.  This is used
+ *				by UpdateGeometryInfo to modify its behavior.
+ * WM_MOVE_PENDING -		non-zero means the application has requested
+ *				a new position for the window, but it hasn't
+ *				been reflected through the window manager
+ *				yet.
+ * WM_COLORMAPS_EXPLICIT -	non-zero means the colormap windows were
+ *				set explicitly via "wm colormapwindows".
+ * WM_ADDED_TOPLEVEL_COLORMAP - non-zero means that when "wm colormapwindows"
+ *				was called the top-level itself wasn't
+ *				specified, so we added it implicitly at
+ *				the end of the list.
+ * WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE -	non-zero means that we're not supposed to
+ *				allow the user to change the width of the
+ *				window (controlled by "wm resizable"
+ *				command).
+ * WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE -	non-zero means that we're not supposed to
+ *				allow the user to change the height of the
+ *				window (controlled by "wm resizable"
+ *				command).
+ */
+
+#define WM_NEVER_MAPPED			1
+#define WM_UPDATE_PENDING		2
+#define WM_NEGATIVE_X			4
+#define WM_NEGATIVE_Y			8
+#define WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS		0x10
+#define WM_SYNC_PENDING			0x20
+#define WM_VROOT_OFFSET_STALE		0x40
+#define WM_ABOUT_TO_MAP			0x100
+#define WM_MOVE_PENDING			0x200
+#define WM_COLORMAPS_EXPLICIT		0x400
+#define WM_ADDED_TOPLEVEL_COLORMAP	0x800
+#define WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE		0x1000
+#define WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE		0x2000
+
+/*
+ * This module keeps a list of all top-level windows, primarily to
+ * simplify the job of Tk_CoordsToWindow.
+ */
+
+static WmInfo *firstWmPtr = NULL;	/* Points to first top-level window. */
+
+
+/*
+ * The variable below is used to enable or disable tracing in this
+ * module.  If tracing is enabled, then information is printed on
+ * standard output about interesting interactions with the window
+ * manager.
+ */
+
+static int wmTracing = 0;
+
+/*
+ * The following structures are the official type records for geometry
+ * management of top-level and menubar windows.
+ */
+
+static void		TopLevelReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin));
+
+static Tk_GeomMgr wmMgrType = {
+    "wm",				/* name */
+    TopLevelReqProc,			/* requestProc */
+    (Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc *) NULL,	/* lostSlaveProc */
+};
+
+static void		MenubarReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin));
+
+static Tk_GeomMgr menubarMgrType = {
+    "menubar",				/* name */
+    MenubarReqProc,			/* requestProc */
+    (Tk_GeomLostSlaveProc *) NULL,	/* lostSlaveProc */
+};
+
+/*
+ * Structures of the following type are used for communication between
+ * WaitForEvent, WaitRestrictProc, and WaitTimeoutProc.
+ */
+
+typedef struct WaitRestrictInfo {
+    Display *display;		/* Window belongs to this display. */
+    Window window;		/* We're waiting for events on this window. */
+    int type;			/* We only care about this type of event. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Where to store the event when it's found. */
+    int foundEvent;		/* Non-zero means that an event of the
+				 * desired type has been found. */
+} WaitRestrictInfo;
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ */
+
+static int		ComputeReparentGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((WmInfo *wmPtr));
+static void		ConfigureEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((WmInfo *wmPtr,
+			    XConfigureEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		CreateWrapper _ANSI_ARGS_((WmInfo *wmPtr));
+static void		GetMaxSize _ANSI_ARGS_((WmInfo *wmPtr,
+			    int *maxWidthPtr, int *maxHeightPtr));
+static void		MenubarDestroyProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+static int		ParseGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((Tcl_Interp *interp,
+			    char *string, TkWindow *winPtr));
+static void		ReparentEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((WmInfo *wmPtr,
+			    XReparentEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		TopLevelReqProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData dummy,
+			    Tk_Window tkwin));
+static void		UpdateGeometryInfo _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    ClientData clientData));
+static void		UpdateHints _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+static void		UpdateSizeHints _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr));
+static void		UpdateVRootGeometry _ANSI_ARGS_((WmInfo *wmPtr));
+static void		UpdateWmProtocols _ANSI_ARGS_((WmInfo *wmPtr));
+static void		WaitForConfigureNotify _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    unsigned long serial));
+static int		WaitForEvent _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display,
+			    Window window, int type, XEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		WaitForMapNotify _ANSI_ARGS_((TkWindow *winPtr,
+			    int mapped));
+static Tk_RestrictAction
+			WaitRestrictProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		WrapperEventProc _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData,
+			    XEvent *eventPtr));
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmNewWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked whenever a new top-level
+ *	window is created.  Its job is to initialize the WmInfo
+ *	structure for the window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A WmInfo structure gets allocated and initialized.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmNewWindow(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Newly-created top-level window. */
+{
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr;
+
+    wmPtr = (WmInfo *) ckalloc(sizeof(WmInfo));
+    wmPtr->winPtr = winPtr;
+    wmPtr->reparent = None;
+    wmPtr->title = NULL;
+    wmPtr->iconName = NULL;
+    wmPtr->master = None;
+    wmPtr->hints.flags = InputHint | StateHint;
+    wmPtr->hints.input = True;
+    wmPtr->hints.initial_state = NormalState;
+    wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap = None;
+    wmPtr->hints.icon_window = None;
+    wmPtr->hints.icon_x = wmPtr->hints.icon_y = 0;
+    wmPtr->hints.icon_mask = None;
+    wmPtr->hints.window_group = None;
+    wmPtr->leaderName = NULL;
+    wmPtr->masterWindowName = NULL;
+    wmPtr->icon = NULL;
+    wmPtr->iconFor = NULL;
+    wmPtr->withdrawn = 0;
+    wmPtr->wrapperPtr = NULL;
+    wmPtr->menubar = NULL;
+    wmPtr->menuHeight = 0;
+    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags = 0;
+    wmPtr->minWidth = wmPtr->minHeight = 1;
+
+    /*
+     * Default the maximum dimensions to the size of the display, minus
+     * a guess about how space is needed for window manager decorations.
+     */
+
+    wmPtr->maxWidth = 0;
+    wmPtr->maxHeight = 0;
+    wmPtr->gridWin = NULL;
+    wmPtr->widthInc = wmPtr->heightInc = 1;
+    wmPtr->minAspect.x = wmPtr->minAspect.y = 1;
+    wmPtr->maxAspect.x = wmPtr->maxAspect.y = 1;
+    wmPtr->reqGridWidth = wmPtr->reqGridHeight = -1;
+    wmPtr->gravity = NorthWestGravity;
+    wmPtr->width = -1;
+    wmPtr->height = -1;
+    wmPtr->x = winPtr->changes.x;
+    wmPtr->y = winPtr->changes.y;
+    wmPtr->parentWidth = winPtr->changes.width
+	    + 2*winPtr->changes.border_width;
+    wmPtr->parentHeight = winPtr->changes.height
+	    + 2*winPtr->changes.border_width;
+    wmPtr->xInParent = wmPtr->yInParent = 0;
+    wmPtr->configWidth = -1;
+    wmPtr->configHeight = -1;
+    wmPtr->vRoot = None;
+    wmPtr->protPtr = NULL;
+    wmPtr->cmdArgv = NULL;
+    wmPtr->clientMachine = NULL;
+    wmPtr->flags = WM_NEVER_MAPPED;
+    wmPtr->nextPtr = firstWmPtr;
+    firstWmPtr = wmPtr;
+    winPtr->wmInfoPtr = wmPtr;
+
+    UpdateVRootGeometry(wmPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * Arrange for geometry requests to be reflected from the window
+     * to the window manager.
+     */
+
+    Tk_ManageGeometry((Tk_Window) winPtr, &wmMgrType, (ClientData) 0);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmMapWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to map a top-level window.  This
+ *	module gets a chance to update all window-manager-related
+ *	information in properties before the window manager sees
+ *	the map event and checks the properties.  It also gets to
+ *	decide whether or not to even map the window after all.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Properties of winPtr may get updated to provide up-to-date
+ *	information to the window manager.  The window may also get
+ *	mapped, but it may not be if this procedure decides that
+ *	isn't appropriate (e.g. because the window is withdrawn).
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmMapWindow(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window that's about to
+				 * be mapped. */
+{
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    XTextProperty textProp;
+    char *string;
+
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) {
+	wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_NEVER_MAPPED;
+
+	/*
+	 * This is the first time this window has ever been mapped.
+	 * First create the wrapper window that provides space for a
+	 * menubar.
+	 */
+
+	if (wmPtr->wrapperPtr == NULL) {
+	    CreateWrapper(wmPtr);
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Store all the window-manager-related information for the
+	 * window.
+	 */
+
+	string = (wmPtr->title != NULL) ? wmPtr->title : winPtr->nameUid;
+	if (XStringListToTextProperty(&string, 1, &textProp)  != 0) {
+	    XSetWMName(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window, &textProp);
+	    XFree((char *) textProp.value);
+	}
+    
+	TkWmSetClass(winPtr);
+
+	if (wmPtr->iconName != NULL) {
+	    XSetIconName(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		    wmPtr->iconName);
+	}
+    
+	if (wmPtr->master != None) {
+	    XSetTransientForHint(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		    wmPtr->master);
+	}
+    
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+	UpdateHints(winPtr);
+	UpdateWmProtocols(wmPtr);
+	if (wmPtr->cmdArgv != NULL) {
+	    XSetCommand(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		    wmPtr->cmdArgv, wmPtr->cmdArgc);
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->clientMachine != NULL) {
+	    if (XStringListToTextProperty(&wmPtr->clientMachine, 1, &textProp)
+		    != 0) {
+		XSetWMClientMachine(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+			&textProp);
+		XFree((char *) textProp.value);
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->hints.initial_state == WithdrawnState) {
+	return;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
+	/*
+	 * This window is an icon for somebody else.  Make sure that
+	 * the geometry is up-to-date, then return without mapping
+	 * the window.
+	 */
+
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_UPDATE_PENDING) {
+	    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	}
+	UpdateGeometryInfo((ClientData) winPtr);
+	return;
+    }
+    wmPtr->flags |= WM_ABOUT_TO_MAP;
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_UPDATE_PENDING) {
+	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+    }
+    UpdateGeometryInfo((ClientData) winPtr);
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_ABOUT_TO_MAP;
+
+    /*
+     * Map the window, then wait to be sure that the window manager has
+     * processed the map operation.
+     */
+
+    XMapWindow(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window);
+    if (wmPtr->hints.initial_state == NormalState) {
+	WaitForMapNotify(winPtr, 1);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmUnmapWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to unmap a top-level window.  The
+ *	only thing it does special is to wait for the window actually
+ *	to be unmapped.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Unmaps the window.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmUnmapWindow(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window that's about to
+				 * be mapped. */
+{
+    /*
+     * It seems to be important to wait after unmapping a top-level
+     * window until the window really gets unmapped.  I don't completely
+     * understand all the interactions with the window manager, but if
+     * we go on without waiting, and if the window is then mapped again
+     * quickly, events seem to get lost so that we think the window isn't
+     * mapped when in fact it is mapped.  I suspect that this has something
+     * to do with the window manager filtering Map events (and possily not
+     * filtering Unmap events?).
+     */ 
+    XUnmapWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapperPtr->window);
+    WaitForMapNotify(winPtr, 0);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmDeadWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a top-level window is
+ *	about to be deleted.  It cleans up the wm-related data
+ *	structures for the window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The WmInfo structure for winPtr gets freed up.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmDeadWindow(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window that's being deleted. */
+{
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    WmInfo *wmPtr2;
+
+    if (wmPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+    if (firstWmPtr == wmPtr) {
+	firstWmPtr = wmPtr->nextPtr;
+    } else {
+	register WmInfo *prevPtr;
+
+	for (prevPtr = firstWmPtr; ; prevPtr = prevPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+		panic("couldn't unlink window in TkWmDeadWindow");
+	    }
+	    if (prevPtr->nextPtr == wmPtr) {
+		prevPtr->nextPtr = wmPtr->nextPtr;
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->title != NULL) {
+	ckfree(wmPtr->title);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->iconName != NULL) {
+	ckfree(wmPtr->iconName);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->hints.flags & IconPixmapHint) {
+	Tk_FreeBitmap(winPtr->display, wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->hints.flags & IconMaskHint) {
+	Tk_FreeBitmap(winPtr->display, wmPtr->hints.icon_mask);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->leaderName != NULL) {
+	ckfree(wmPtr->leaderName);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->masterWindowName != NULL) {
+	ckfree(wmPtr->masterWindowName);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->icon != NULL) {
+	wmPtr2 = ((TkWindow *) wmPtr->icon)->wmInfoPtr;
+	wmPtr2->iconFor = NULL;
+	wmPtr2->withdrawn = 1;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
+	wmPtr2 = ((TkWindow *) wmPtr->iconFor)->wmInfoPtr;
+	wmPtr2->icon = NULL;
+	wmPtr2->hints.flags &= ~IconWindowHint;
+	UpdateHints((TkWindow *) wmPtr->iconFor);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->menubar != NULL) {
+	Tk_DestroyWindow(wmPtr->menubar);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->wrapperPtr != NULL) {
+	/*
+	 * The rest of Tk doesn't know that we reparent the toplevel
+	 * inside the wrapper, so reparent it back out again before
+	 * deleting the wrapper; otherwise the toplevel will get deleted
+	 * twice (once implicitly by the deletion of the wrapper).
+	 */
+
+	XUnmapWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window);
+	XReparentWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window,
+		XRootWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum), 0, 0);
+	Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) wmPtr->wrapperPtr);
+    }
+    while (wmPtr->protPtr != NULL) {
+	ProtocolHandler *protPtr;
+
+	protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr;
+	wmPtr->protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr;
+	Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData) protPtr, TCL_DYNAMIC);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->cmdArgv != NULL) {
+	ckfree((char *) wmPtr->cmdArgv);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->clientMachine != NULL) {
+	ckfree((char *) wmPtr->clientMachine);
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_UPDATE_PENDING) {
+	Tcl_CancelIdleCall(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+    }
+    ckfree((char *) wmPtr);
+    winPtr->wmInfoPtr = NULL;
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmSetClass --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked whenever a top-level window's
+ *	class is changed.  If the window has been mapped then this
+ *	procedure updates the window manager property for the
+ *	class.  If the window hasn't been mapped, the update is
+ *	deferred until just before the first mapping.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	A window property may get updated.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmSetClass(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Newly-created top-level window. */
+{
+    if (winPtr->wmInfoPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if (winPtr->classUid != NULL) {
+	XClassHint *classPtr;
+
+	classPtr = XAllocClassHint();
+	classPtr->res_name = winPtr->nameUid;
+	classPtr->res_class = winPtr->classUid;
+	XSetClassHint(winPtr->display, winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		classPtr);
+	XFree((char *) classPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_WmCmd --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to process the "wm" Tcl command.
+ *	See the user documentation for details on what it does.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl result.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	See the user documentation.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+	/* ARGSUSED */
+int
+Tk_WmCmd(clientData, interp, argc, argv)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Main window associated with
+				 * interpreter. */
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Current interpreter. */
+    int argc;			/* Number of arguments. */
+    char **argv;		/* Argument strings. */
+{
+    Tk_Window tkwin = (Tk_Window) clientData;
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr;
+    int c;
+    size_t length;
+
+    if (argc < 2) {
+	wrongNumArgs:
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # args: should be \"",
+		argv[0], " option window ?arg ...?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    c = argv[1][0];
+    length = strlen(argv[1]);
+    if ((c == 't') && (strncmp(argv[1], "tracing", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	if ((argc != 2) && (argc != 3)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " tracing ?boolean?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 2) {
+	    interp->result = (wmTracing) ? "on" : "off";
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	return Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, argv[2], &wmTracing);
+    }
+
+    if (argc < 3) {
+	goto wrongNumArgs;
+    }
+    winPtr = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[2], tkwin);
+    if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "window \"", winPtr->pathName,
+		"\" isn't a top-level window", (char *) NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    if ((c == 'a') && (strncmp(argv[1], "aspect", length) == 0)) {
+	int numer1, denom1, numer2, denom2;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 7)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " aspect window ?minNumer minDenom ",
+		    "maxNumer maxDenom?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & PAspect) {
+		sprintf(interp->result, "%d %d %d %d", wmPtr->minAspect.x,
+			wmPtr->minAspect.y, wmPtr->maxAspect.x,
+			wmPtr->maxAspect.y);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~PAspect;
+	} else {
+	    if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &numer1) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &denom1) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[5], &numer2) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[6], &denom2) != TCL_OK)) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if ((numer1 <= 0) || (denom1 <= 0) || (numer2 <= 0) ||
+		    (denom2 <= 0)) {
+		interp->result = "aspect number can't be <= 0";
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->minAspect.x = numer1;
+	    wmPtr->minAspect.y = denom1;
+	    wmPtr->maxAspect.x = numer2;
+	    wmPtr->maxAspect.y = denom2;
+	    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= PAspect;
+	}
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[1], "client", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " client window ?name?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->clientMachine != NULL) {
+		interp->result = wmPtr->clientMachine;
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (argv[3][0] == 0) {
+	    if (wmPtr->clientMachine != NULL) {
+		ckfree((char *) wmPtr->clientMachine);
+		wmPtr->clientMachine = NULL;
+		if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+		    XDeleteProperty(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+			    Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr,
+			    "WM_CLIENT_MACHINE"));
+		}
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->clientMachine != NULL) {
+	    ckfree((char *) wmPtr->clientMachine);
+	}
+	wmPtr->clientMachine = (char *)
+		ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(argv[3]) + 1));
+	strcpy(wmPtr->clientMachine, argv[3]);
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	    XTextProperty textProp;
+	    if (XStringListToTextProperty(&wmPtr->clientMachine, 1, &textProp)
+		    != 0) {
+		XSetWMClientMachine(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+			&textProp);
+		XFree((char *) textProp.value);
+	    }
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[1], "colormapwindows", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	Window *cmapList;
+	TkWindow *winPtr2;
+	int count, i, windowArgc, gotToplevel;
+	char buffer[20], **windowArgv;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " colormapwindows window ?windowList?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	Tk_MakeWindowExist((Tk_Window) winPtr);
+	if (wmPtr->wrapperPtr == NULL) {
+	    CreateWrapper(wmPtr);
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (XGetWMColormapWindows(winPtr->display,
+		    wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window, &cmapList, &count) == 0) {
+		return TCL_OK;
+	    }
+	    for (i = 0; i < count; i++) {
+		if ((i == (count-1))
+			&& (wmPtr->flags & WM_ADDED_TOPLEVEL_COLORMAP)) {
+		    break;
+		}
+	        winPtr2  = (TkWindow *) Tk_IdToWindow(winPtr->display,
+			cmapList[i]);
+		if (winPtr2 == NULL) {
+		    sprintf(buffer, "0x%lx", cmapList[i]);
+		    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, buffer);
+		} else {
+		    Tcl_AppendElement(interp, winPtr2->pathName);
+		}
+	    }
+	    XFree((char *) cmapList);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, argv[3], &windowArgc, &windowArgv)
+		!= TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	cmapList = (Window *) ckalloc((unsigned)
+		((windowArgc+1)*sizeof(Window)));
+	gotToplevel = 0;
+	for (i = 0; i < windowArgc; i++) {
+	    winPtr2 = (TkWindow *) Tk_NameToWindow(interp, windowArgv[i],
+		    tkwin);
+	    if (winPtr2 == NULL) {
+		ckfree((char *) cmapList);
+		ckfree((char *) windowArgv);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (winPtr2 == winPtr) {
+		gotToplevel = 1;
+	    }
+	    if (winPtr2->window == None) {
+		Tk_MakeWindowExist((Tk_Window) winPtr2);
+	    }
+	    cmapList[i] = winPtr2->window;
+	}
+	if (!gotToplevel) {
+	    wmPtr->flags |= WM_ADDED_TOPLEVEL_COLORMAP;
+	    cmapList[windowArgc] = wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window;
+	    windowArgc++;
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_ADDED_TOPLEVEL_COLORMAP;
+	}
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_COLORMAPS_EXPLICIT;
+	XSetWMColormapWindows(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		cmapList, windowArgc);
+	ckfree((char *) cmapList);
+	ckfree((char *) windowArgv);
+	return TCL_OK;
+    } else if ((c == 'c') && (strncmp(argv[1], "command", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	int cmdArgc;
+	char **cmdArgv;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " command window ?value?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->cmdArgv != NULL) {
+		interp->result = Tcl_Merge(wmPtr->cmdArgc, wmPtr->cmdArgv);
+		interp->freeProc = TCL_DYNAMIC;
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (argv[3][0] == 0) {
+	    if (wmPtr->cmdArgv != NULL) {
+		ckfree((char *) wmPtr->cmdArgv);
+		wmPtr->cmdArgv = NULL;
+		if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+		    XDeleteProperty(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+			    Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, "WM_COMMAND"));
+		}
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_SplitList(interp, argv[3], &cmdArgc, &cmdArgv) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->cmdArgv != NULL) {
+	    ckfree((char *) wmPtr->cmdArgv);
+	}
+	wmPtr->cmdArgc = cmdArgc;
+	wmPtr->cmdArgv = cmdArgv;
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	    XSetCommand(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		    cmdArgv, cmdArgc);
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'd') && (strncmp(argv[1], "deiconify", length) == 0)) {
+	if (argc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " deiconify window\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't deiconify ", argv[2],
+		    ": it is an icon for ", Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor),
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	wmPtr->hints.initial_state = NormalState;
+	wmPtr->withdrawn = 0;
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) {
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	UpdateHints(winPtr);
+	Tk_MapWindow((Tk_Window) winPtr);
+    } else if ((c == 'f') && (strncmp(argv[1], "focusmodel", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " focusmodel window ?active|passive?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    interp->result = wmPtr->hints.input ? "passive" : "active";
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	c = argv[3][0];
+	length = strlen(argv[3]);
+	if ((c == 'a') && (strncmp(argv[3], "active", length) == 0)) {
+	    wmPtr->hints.input = False;
+	} else if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(argv[3], "passive", length) == 0)) {
+	    wmPtr->hints.input = True;
+	} else {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", argv[3],
+		    "\": must be active or passive", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	UpdateHints(winPtr);
+    } else if ((c == 'f') && (strncmp(argv[1], "frame", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	Window window;
+
+	if (argc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " frame window\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	window = wmPtr->reparent;
+	if (window == None) {
+	    window = Tk_WindowId((Tk_Window) winPtr);
+	}
+	sprintf(interp->result, "0x%x", (unsigned int) window);
+    } else if ((c == 'g') && (strncmp(argv[1], "geometry", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	char xSign, ySign;
+	int width, height;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " geometry window ?newGeometry?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    xSign = (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_X) ? '-' : '+';
+	    ySign = (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_Y) ? '-' : '+';
+	    if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+		width = wmPtr->reqGridWidth + (winPtr->changes.width
+			- winPtr->reqWidth)/wmPtr->widthInc;
+		height = wmPtr->reqGridHeight + (winPtr->changes.height
+			- winPtr->reqHeight)/wmPtr->heightInc;
+	    } else {
+		width = winPtr->changes.width;
+		height = winPtr->changes.height;
+	    }
+	    sprintf(interp->result, "%dx%d%c%d%c%d", width, height,
+		    xSign, wmPtr->x, ySign, wmPtr->y);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->width = -1;
+	    wmPtr->height = -1;
+	    goto updateGeom;
+	}
+	return ParseGeometry(interp, argv[3], winPtr);
+    } else if ((c == 'g') && (strncmp(argv[1], "grid", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	int reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 7)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " grid window ?baseWidth baseHeight ",
+		    "widthInc heightInc?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & PBaseSize) {
+		sprintf(interp->result, "%d %d %d %d", wmPtr->reqGridWidth,
+			wmPtr->reqGridHeight, wmPtr->widthInc,
+			wmPtr->heightInc);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    /*
+	     * Turn off gridding and reset the width and height
+	     * to make sense as ungridded numbers.
+	     */
+
+	    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~(PBaseSize|PResizeInc);
+	    if (wmPtr->width != -1) {
+		wmPtr->width = winPtr->reqWidth + (wmPtr->width
+			- wmPtr->reqGridWidth)*wmPtr->widthInc;
+		wmPtr->height = winPtr->reqHeight + (wmPtr->height
+			- wmPtr->reqGridHeight)*wmPtr->heightInc;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->widthInc = 1;
+	    wmPtr->heightInc = 1;
+	} else {
+	    if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &reqWidth) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &reqHeight) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[5], &widthInc) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[6], &heightInc) != TCL_OK)) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (reqWidth < 0) {
+		interp->result = "baseWidth can't be < 0";
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (reqHeight < 0) {
+		interp->result = "baseHeight can't be < 0";
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (widthInc < 0) {
+		interp->result = "widthInc can't be < 0";
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (heightInc < 0) {
+		interp->result = "heightInc can't be < 0";
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    Tk_SetGrid((Tk_Window) winPtr, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc,
+		    heightInc);
+	}
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 'g') && (strncmp(argv[1], "group", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	Tk_Window tkwin2;
+	WmInfo *wmPtr2;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " group window ?pathName?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->hints.flags & WindowGroupHint) {
+		interp->result = wmPtr->leaderName;
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags &= ~WindowGroupHint;
+	    if (wmPtr->leaderName != NULL) {
+		ckfree(wmPtr->leaderName);
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->leaderName = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    tkwin2 = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[3], tkwin);
+	    if (tkwin2 == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    while (!Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin2)) {
+		/*
+		 * Ensure that the group leader is actually a Tk toplevel.
+		 */
+
+		tkwin2 = Tk_Parent(tkwin2);
+	    }
+	    Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin2);
+	    wmPtr2 = ((TkWindow *) tkwin2)->wmInfoPtr;
+	    if (wmPtr2->wrapperPtr == NULL) {
+		CreateWrapper(wmPtr2);
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->hints.window_group = Tk_WindowId(wmPtr2->wrapperPtr);
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags |= WindowGroupHint;
+	    wmPtr->leaderName = ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(argv[3])+1));
+	    strcpy(wmPtr->leaderName, argv[3]);
+	}
+	UpdateHints(winPtr);
+    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "iconbitmap", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 5)) {
+	Pixmap pixmap;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " iconbitmap window ?bitmap?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->hints.flags & IconPixmapHint) {
+		interp->result = Tk_NameOfBitmap(winPtr->display,
+			wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    if (wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap != None) {
+		Tk_FreeBitmap(winPtr->display, wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap);
+		wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap = None;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags &= ~IconPixmapHint;
+	} else {
+	    pixmap = Tk_GetBitmap(interp, (Tk_Window) winPtr,
+		    Tk_GetUid(argv[3]));
+	    if (pixmap == None) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->hints.icon_pixmap = pixmap;
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags |= IconPixmapHint;
+	}
+	UpdateHints(winPtr);
+    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "iconify", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 5)) {
+	if (argc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " iconify window\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (Tk_Attributes((Tk_Window) winPtr)->override_redirect) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify \"", winPtr->pathName,
+		    "\": override-redirect flag is set", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->master != None) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify \"", winPtr->pathName,
+		    "\": it is a transient", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't iconify ", argv[2],
+		    ": it is an icon for ", Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor),
+		   (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	wmPtr->hints.initial_state = IconicState;
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) {
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->withdrawn) {
+	    UpdateHints(winPtr);
+	    Tk_MapWindow((Tk_Window) winPtr);
+	    wmPtr->withdrawn = 0;
+	} else {
+	    if (XIconifyWindow(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		    winPtr->screenNum) == 0) {
+		interp->result =
+			"couldn't send iconify message to window manager";
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    WaitForMapNotify(winPtr, 0);
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "iconmask", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 5)) {
+	Pixmap pixmap;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " iconmask window ?bitmap?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->hints.flags & IconMaskHint) {
+		interp->result = Tk_NameOfBitmap(winPtr->display,
+			wmPtr->hints.icon_mask);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    if (wmPtr->hints.icon_mask != None) {
+		Tk_FreeBitmap(winPtr->display, wmPtr->hints.icon_mask);
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags &= ~IconMaskHint;
+	} else {
+	    pixmap = Tk_GetBitmap(interp, tkwin, Tk_GetUid(argv[3]));
+	    if (pixmap == None) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->hints.icon_mask = pixmap;
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags |= IconMaskHint;
+	}
+	UpdateHints(winPtr);
+    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "iconname", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 5)) {
+	if (argc > 4) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " iconname window ?newName?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    interp->result = (wmPtr->iconName != NULL) ? wmPtr->iconName : "";
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->iconName = ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(argv[3]) + 1));
+	    strcpy(wmPtr->iconName, argv[3]);
+	    if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+		XSetIconName(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+			wmPtr->iconName);
+	    }
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "iconposition", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 5)) {
+	int x, y;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " iconposition window ?x y?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->hints.flags & IconPositionHint) {
+		sprintf(interp->result, "%d %d", wmPtr->hints.icon_x,
+			wmPtr->hints.icon_y);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags &= ~IconPositionHint;
+	} else {
+	    if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &x) != TCL_OK)
+		    || (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &y) != TCL_OK)){
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->hints.icon_x = x;
+	    wmPtr->hints.icon_y = y;
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags |= IconPositionHint;
+	}
+	UpdateHints(winPtr);
+    } else if ((c == 'i') && (strncmp(argv[1], "iconwindow", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 5)) {
+	Tk_Window tkwin2;
+	WmInfo *wmPtr2;
+	XSetWindowAttributes atts;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " iconwindow window ?pathName?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->icon != NULL) {
+		interp->result = Tk_PathName(wmPtr->icon);
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags &= ~IconWindowHint;
+	    if (wmPtr->icon != NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * Remove the icon window relationship.  In principle we
+		 * should also re-enable button events for the window, but
+		 * this doesn't work in general because the window manager
+		 * is probably selecting on them (we'll get an error if
+		 * we try to re-enable the events).  So, just leave the
+		 * icon window event-challenged;  the user will have to
+		 * recreate it if they want button events.
+		 */
+
+		wmPtr2 = ((TkWindow *) wmPtr->icon)->wmInfoPtr;
+		wmPtr2->iconFor = NULL;
+		wmPtr2->withdrawn = 1;
+		wmPtr2->hints.initial_state = WithdrawnState;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->icon = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    tkwin2 = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[3], tkwin);
+	    if (tkwin2 == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (!Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin2)) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't use ", argv[3],
+			" as icon window: not at top level", (char *) NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    wmPtr2 = ((TkWindow *) tkwin2)->wmInfoPtr;
+	    if (wmPtr2->iconFor != NULL) {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, argv[3], " is already an icon for ",
+			Tk_PathName(wmPtr2->iconFor), (char *) NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    if (wmPtr->icon != NULL) {
+		WmInfo *wmPtr3 = ((TkWindow *) wmPtr->icon)->wmInfoPtr;
+		wmPtr3->iconFor = NULL;
+		wmPtr3->withdrawn = 1;
+		wmPtr3->hints.initial_state = WithdrawnState;
+	    }
+
+	    /*
+	     * Disable button events in the icon window:  some window
+	     * managers (like olvwm) want to get the events themselves,
+	     * but X only allows one application at a time to receive
+	     * button events for a window.
+	     */
+
+	    atts.event_mask = Tk_Attributes(tkwin2)->event_mask
+		    & ~ButtonPressMask;
+	    Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(tkwin2, CWEventMask, &atts);
+	    Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin2);
+	    if (wmPtr2->wrapperPtr == NULL) {
+		CreateWrapper(wmPtr2);
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->hints.icon_window = Tk_WindowId(wmPtr2->wrapperPtr);
+	    wmPtr->hints.flags |= IconWindowHint;
+	    wmPtr->icon = tkwin2;
+	    wmPtr2->iconFor = (Tk_Window) winPtr;
+	    if (!wmPtr2->withdrawn && !(wmPtr2->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+		wmPtr2->withdrawn = 0;
+		if (XWithdrawWindow(Tk_Display(tkwin2),
+			Tk_WindowId(wmPtr2->wrapperPtr),
+			Tk_ScreenNumber(tkwin2)) == 0) {
+		    interp->result =
+			    "couldn't send withdraw message to window manager";
+		    return TCL_ERROR;
+		}
+		WaitForMapNotify((TkWindow *) tkwin2, 0);
+	    }
+	}
+	UpdateHints(winPtr);
+    } else if ((c == 'm') && (strncmp(argv[1], "maxsize", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	int width, height;
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " maxsize window ?width height?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    GetMaxSize(wmPtr, &width, &height);
+	    sprintf(interp->result, "%d %d", width, height);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &width) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &height) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	wmPtr->maxWidth = width;
+	wmPtr->maxHeight = height;
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 'm') && (strncmp(argv[1], "minsize", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	int width, height;
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " minsize window ?width height?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    sprintf(interp->result, "%d %d", wmPtr->minWidth,
+		    wmPtr->minHeight);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if ((Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[3], &width) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetInt(interp, argv[4], &height) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	wmPtr->minWidth = width;
+	wmPtr->minHeight = height;
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 'o')
+	    && (strncmp(argv[1], "overrideredirect", length) == 0)) {
+	int boolean;
+	XSetWindowAttributes atts;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " overrideredirect window ?boolean?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (Tk_Attributes((Tk_Window) winPtr)->override_redirect) {
+		interp->result = "1";
+	    } else {
+		interp->result = "0";
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, argv[3], &boolean) != TCL_OK) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	atts.override_redirect = (boolean) ? True : False;
+	Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes((Tk_Window) winPtr, CWOverrideRedirect,
+		&atts);
+	if (winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapperPtr != NULL) {
+	    Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(
+		    (Tk_Window) winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapperPtr,
+		    CWOverrideRedirect, &atts);
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(argv[1], "positionfrom", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " positionfrom window ?user/program?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & USPosition) {
+		interp->result = "user";
+	    } else if (wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & PPosition) {
+		interp->result = "program";
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~(USPosition|PPosition);
+	} else {
+	    c = argv[3][0];
+	    length = strlen(argv[3]);
+	    if ((c == 'u') && (strncmp(argv[3], "user", length) == 0)) {
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~PPosition;
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= USPosition;
+	    } else if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(argv[3], "program", length) == 0)) {
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~USPosition;
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= PPosition;
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", argv[3],
+			"\": must be program or user", (char *) NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 'p') && (strncmp(argv[1], "protocol", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	register ProtocolHandler *protPtr, *prevPtr;
+	Atom protocol;
+	int cmdLength;
+
+	if ((argc < 3) || (argc > 5)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " protocol window ?name? ?command?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    /*
+	     * Return a list of all defined protocols for the window.
+	     */
+	    for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr; protPtr != NULL;
+		    protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
+		Tcl_AppendElement(interp,
+			Tk_GetAtomName((Tk_Window) winPtr, protPtr->protocol));
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	protocol = Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, argv[3]);
+	if (argc == 4) {
+	    /*
+	     * Return the command to handle a given protocol.
+	     */
+	    for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr; protPtr != NULL;
+		    protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
+		if (protPtr->protocol == protocol) {
+		    interp->result = protPtr->command;
+		    return TCL_OK;
+		}
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Delete any current protocol handler, then create a new
+	 * one with the specified command, unless the command is
+	 * empty.
+	 */
+
+	for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr, prevPtr = NULL; protPtr != NULL;
+		prevPtr = protPtr, protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (protPtr->protocol == protocol) {
+		if (prevPtr == NULL) {
+		    wmPtr->protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr;
+		} else {
+		    prevPtr->nextPtr = protPtr->nextPtr;
+		}
+		Tcl_EventuallyFree((ClientData) protPtr, TCL_DYNAMIC);
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+	cmdLength = strlen(argv[4]);
+	if (cmdLength > 0) {
+	    protPtr = (ProtocolHandler *) ckalloc(HANDLER_SIZE(cmdLength));
+	    protPtr->protocol = protocol;
+	    protPtr->nextPtr = wmPtr->protPtr;
+	    wmPtr->protPtr = protPtr;
+	    protPtr->interp = interp;
+	    strcpy(protPtr->command, argv[4]);
+	}
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	    UpdateWmProtocols(wmPtr);
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'r') && (strncmp(argv[1], "resizable", length) == 0)) {
+	int width, height;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 5)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " resizable window ?width height?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    sprintf(interp->result, "%d %d",
+		    (wmPtr->flags  & WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE) ? 0 : 1,
+		    (wmPtr->flags  & WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE) ? 0 : 1);
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if ((Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, argv[3], &width) != TCL_OK)
+		|| (Tcl_GetBoolean(interp, argv[4], &height) != TCL_OK)) {
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (width) {
+	    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE;
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->flags |= WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE;
+	}
+	if (height) {
+	    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE;
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->flags |= WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE;
+	}
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 's') && (strncmp(argv[1], "sizefrom", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " sizefrom window ?user|program?\"",
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & USSize) {
+		interp->result = "user";
+	    } else if (wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & PSize) {
+		interp->result = "program";
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (*argv[3] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~(USSize|PSize);
+	} else {
+	    c = argv[3][0];
+	    length = strlen(argv[3]);
+	    if ((c == 'u') && (strncmp(argv[3], "user", length) == 0)) {
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~PSize;
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= USSize;
+	    } else if ((c == 'p')
+		    && (strncmp(argv[3], "program", length) == 0)) {
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~USSize;
+		wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= PSize;
+	    } else {
+		Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad argument \"", argv[3],
+			"\": must be program or user", (char *) NULL);
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	}
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+	goto updateGeom;
+    } else if ((c == 's') && (strncmp(argv[1], "state", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if (argc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " state window\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
+	    interp->result = "icon";
+	} else if (wmPtr->withdrawn) {
+	    interp->result = "withdrawn";
+	} else if (Tk_IsMapped((Tk_Window) winPtr)
+		|| ((wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)
+		&& (wmPtr->hints.initial_state == NormalState))) {
+	    interp->result = "normal";
+	} else {
+	    interp->result = "iconic";
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 't') && (strncmp(argv[1], "title", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if (argc > 4) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " title window ?newTitle?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    interp->result = (wmPtr->title != NULL) ? wmPtr->title
+		    : winPtr->nameUid;
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	} else {
+	    wmPtr->title = ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(argv[3]) + 1));
+	    strcpy(wmPtr->title, argv[3]);
+	    if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+		XTextProperty textProp;
+
+		if (XStringListToTextProperty(&wmPtr->title, 1,
+			&textProp)  != 0) {
+		    XSetWMName(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+			    &textProp);
+		    XFree((char *) textProp.value);
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 't') && (strncmp(argv[1], "transient", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 3)) {
+	Tk_Window master;
+	WmInfo *wmPtr2;
+
+	if ((argc != 3) && (argc != 4)) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " transient window ?master?\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (argc == 3) {
+	    if (wmPtr->master != None) {
+		interp->result = wmPtr->masterWindowName;
+	    }
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (argv[3][0] == '\0') {
+	    wmPtr->master = None;
+	    if (wmPtr->masterWindowName != NULL) {
+		ckfree(wmPtr->masterWindowName);
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->masterWindowName = NULL;
+	} else {
+	    master = Tk_NameToWindow(interp, argv[3], tkwin);
+	    if (master == NULL) {
+		return TCL_ERROR;
+	    }
+	    while (!Tk_IsTopLevel(master)) {
+		/*
+		 * Ensure that the master window is actually a Tk toplevel.
+		 */
+
+		master = Tk_Parent(master);
+	    }
+	    Tk_MakeWindowExist(master);
+	    wmPtr2 = ((TkWindow *) master)->wmInfoPtr;
+	    if (wmPtr2->wrapperPtr == NULL) {
+		CreateWrapper(wmPtr2);
+	    }
+	    wmPtr->master = Tk_WindowId(wmPtr2->wrapperPtr);
+	    wmPtr->masterWindowName = ckalloc((unsigned) (strlen(argv[3])+1));
+	    strcpy(wmPtr->masterWindowName, argv[3]);
+	}
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	    XSetTransientForHint(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		    wmPtr->master);
+	}
+    } else if ((c == 'w') && (strncmp(argv[1], "withdraw", length) == 0)
+	    && (length >= 2)) {
+	if (argc != 3) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "wrong # arguments: must be \"",
+		    argv[0], " withdraw window\"", (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->iconFor != NULL) {
+	    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "can't withdraw ", argv[2],
+		    ": it is an icon for ", Tk_PathName(wmPtr->iconFor),
+		    (char *) NULL);
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	wmPtr->hints.initial_state = WithdrawnState;
+	wmPtr->withdrawn = 1;
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) {
+	    return TCL_OK;
+	}
+	if (XWithdrawWindow(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		winPtr->screenNum) == 0) {
+	    interp->result =
+		    "couldn't send withdraw message to window manager";
+	    return TCL_ERROR;
+	}
+	WaitForMapNotify(winPtr, 0);
+    } else {
+	Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "unknown or ambiguous option \"", argv[1],
+		"\": must be aspect, client, command, deiconify, ",
+		"focusmodel, frame, geometry, grid, group, iconbitmap, ",
+		"iconify, iconmask, iconname, iconposition, ",
+		"iconwindow, maxsize, minsize, overrideredirect, ",
+		"positionfrom, protocol, resizable, sizefrom, state, title, ",
+		"transient, or withdraw",
+		(char *) NULL);
+	return TCL_ERROR;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+    updateGeom:
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_SetGrid --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by a widget when it wishes to set a grid
+ *	coordinate system that controls the size of a top-level window.
+ *	It provides a C interface equivalent to the "wm grid" command and
+ *	is usually asscoiated with the -setgrid option.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Grid-related information will be passed to the window manager, so
+ *	that the top-level window associated with tkwin will resize on
+ *	even grid units.  If some other window already controls gridding
+ *	for the top-level window then this procedure call has no effect.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_SetGrid(tkwin, reqWidth, reqHeight, widthInc, heightInc)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window.  New window mgr info
+				 * will be posted for the top-level window
+				 * associated with this window. */
+    int reqWidth;		/* Width (in grid units) corresponding to
+				 * the requested geometry for tkwin. */
+    int reqHeight;		/* Height (in grid units) corresponding to
+				 * the requested geometry for tkwin. */
+    int widthInc, heightInc;	/* Pixel increments corresponding to a
+				 * change of one grid unit. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Find the top-level window for tkwin, plus the window manager
+     * information.
+     */
+
+    while (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr;
+	if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * The window is being deleted... just skip this operation.
+	     */
+
+	    return;
+	}
+    }
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    if ((wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) && (wmPtr->gridWin != tkwin)) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    if ((wmPtr->reqGridWidth == reqWidth)
+	    && (wmPtr->reqGridHeight == reqHeight)
+	    && (wmPtr->widthInc == widthInc)
+	    && (wmPtr->heightInc == heightInc)
+	    && ((wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & (PBaseSize|PResizeInc))
+		    == (PBaseSize|PResizeInc) )) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If gridding was previously off, then forget about any window
+     * size requests made by the user or via "wm geometry":  these are
+     * in pixel units and there's no easy way to translate them to
+     * grid units since the new requested size of the top-level window in
+     * pixels may not yet have been registered yet (it may filter up
+     * the hierarchy in DoWhenIdle handlers).  However, if the window
+     * has never been mapped yet then just leave the window size alone:
+     * assume that it is intended to be in grid units but just happened
+     * to have been specified before this procedure was called.
+     */
+
+    if ((wmPtr->gridWin == NULL) && !(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	wmPtr->width = -1;
+	wmPtr->height = -1;
+    }
+
+    /* 
+     * Set the new gridding information, and start the process of passing
+     * all of this information to the window manager.
+     */
+
+    wmPtr->gridWin = tkwin;
+    wmPtr->reqGridWidth = reqWidth;
+    wmPtr->reqGridHeight = reqHeight;
+    wmPtr->widthInc = widthInc;
+    wmPtr->heightInc = heightInc;
+    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= PBaseSize|PResizeInc;
+    wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_UnsetGrid --
+ *
+ *	This procedure cancels the effect of a previous call
+ *	to Tk_SetGrid.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If tkwin currently controls gridding for its top-level window,
+ *	gridding is cancelled for that top-level window;  if some other
+ *	window controls gridding then this procedure has no effect.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_UnsetGrid(tkwin)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window that is currently
+				 * controlling gridding. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Find the top-level window for tkwin, plus the window manager
+     * information.
+     */
+
+    while (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr;
+	if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * The window is being deleted... just skip this operation.
+	     */
+
+	    return;
+	}
+    }
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    if (tkwin != wmPtr->gridWin) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    wmPtr->gridWin = NULL;
+    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags &= ~(PBaseSize|PResizeInc);
+    if (wmPtr->width != -1) {
+	wmPtr->width = winPtr->reqWidth + (wmPtr->width
+		- wmPtr->reqGridWidth)*wmPtr->widthInc;
+	wmPtr->height = winPtr->reqHeight + (wmPtr->height
+		- wmPtr->reqGridHeight)*wmPtr->heightInc;
+    }
+    wmPtr->widthInc = 1;
+    wmPtr->heightInc = 1;
+
+    wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ConfigureEvent --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to handle ConfigureNotify events on
+ *	wrapper windows.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Information gets updated in the WmInfo structure for the window
+ *	and the toplevel itself gets repositioned within the wrapper.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ConfigureEvent(wmPtr, configEventPtr)
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;			/* Information about toplevel window. */
+    XConfigureEvent *configEventPtr;	/* Event that just occurred for
+					 * wmPtr->wrapperPtr. */
+{
+    TkWindow *wrapperPtr = wmPtr->wrapperPtr;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = wmPtr->winPtr;
+
+    /* 
+     * Update size information from the event.  There are a couple of
+     * tricky points here:
+     *
+     * 1. If the user changed the size externally then set wmPtr->width
+     *    and wmPtr->height just as if a "wm geometry" command had been
+     *    invoked with the same information.
+     * 2. However, if the size is changing in response to a request
+     *    coming from us (WM_SYNC_PENDING is set), then don't set wmPtr->width
+     *    or wmPtr->height if they were previously -1 (otherwise the
+     *    window will stop tracking geometry manager requests).
+     */
+
+    if (((wrapperPtr->changes.width != configEventPtr->width)
+	    || (wrapperPtr->changes.height != configEventPtr->height))
+	    && !(wmPtr->flags & WM_SYNC_PENDING)){
+	if (wmTracing) {
+	    printf("TopLevelEventProc: user changed %s size to %dx%d\n",
+		    winPtr->pathName, configEventPtr->width,
+		    configEventPtr->height);
+	}
+	if ((wmPtr->width == -1)
+		&& (configEventPtr->width == winPtr->reqWidth)) {
+	    /*
+	     * Don't set external width, since the user didn't change it
+	     * from what the widgets asked for.
+	     */
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * Note: if this window is embedded then don't set the external
+	     * size, since it came from the containing application, not the
+	     * user.  In this case we want to keep sending our size requests
+	     * to the containing application;  if the user fixes the size
+	     * of that application then it will still percolate down to us
+	     * in the right way.
+	     */
+
+	    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
+		if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+		    wmPtr->width = wmPtr->reqGridWidth
+			    + (configEventPtr->width
+			    - winPtr->reqWidth)/wmPtr->widthInc;
+		    if (wmPtr->width < 0) {
+			wmPtr->width = 0;
+		    }
+		} else {
+		    wmPtr->width = configEventPtr->width;
+		}
+	    }
+	}
+	if ((wmPtr->height == -1)
+		&& (configEventPtr->height ==
+			(winPtr->reqHeight + wmPtr->menuHeight))) {
+	    /*
+	     * Don't set external height, since the user didn't change it
+	     * from what the widgets asked for.
+	     */
+	} else {
+	    /*
+	     * See note for wmPtr->width about not setting external size
+	     * for embedded windows.
+	     */
+
+	    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
+		if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+		    wmPtr->height = wmPtr->reqGridHeight
+			    + (configEventPtr->height - wmPtr->menuHeight
+			    - winPtr->reqHeight)/wmPtr->heightInc;
+		    if (wmPtr->height < 0) {
+			wmPtr->height = 0;
+		    }
+		} else {
+		    wmPtr->height = configEventPtr->height - wmPtr->menuHeight;
+		}
+            }
+	}
+	wmPtr->configWidth = configEventPtr->width;
+	wmPtr->configHeight = configEventPtr->height;
+    }
+
+    if (wmTracing) {
+	printf("ConfigureEvent: %s x = %d y = %d, width = %d, height = %d",
+		winPtr->pathName, configEventPtr->x, configEventPtr->y,
+		configEventPtr->width, configEventPtr->height);
+	printf(" send_event = %d, serial = %ld\n", configEventPtr->send_event,
+		configEventPtr->serial);
+    }
+    wrapperPtr->changes.width = configEventPtr->width;
+    wrapperPtr->changes.height = configEventPtr->height;
+    wrapperPtr->changes.border_width = configEventPtr->border_width;
+    wrapperPtr->changes.sibling = configEventPtr->above;
+    wrapperPtr->changes.stack_mode = Above;
+
+    /*
+     * Reparenting window managers make life difficult.  If the
+     * window manager reparents a top-level window then the x and y
+     * information that comes in events for the window is wrong:
+     * it gives the location of the window inside its decorative
+     * parent, rather than the location of the window in root
+     * coordinates, which is what we want.  Window managers
+     * are supposed to send synthetic events with the correct
+     * information, but ICCCM doesn't require them to do this
+     * under all conditions, and the information provided doesn't
+     * include everything we need here.  So, the code below
+     * maintains a bunch of information about the parent window.
+     * If the window hasn't been reparented, we pretend that
+     * there is a parent shrink-wrapped around the window.
+     */
+
+    if ((wmPtr->reparent == None) || !ComputeReparentGeometry(wmPtr)) {
+	wmPtr->parentWidth = configEventPtr->width
+		+ 2*configEventPtr->border_width;
+	wmPtr->parentHeight = configEventPtr->height
+		+ 2*configEventPtr->border_width;
+	wrapperPtr->changes.x = wmPtr->x = configEventPtr->x;
+	wrapperPtr->changes.y = wmPtr->y = configEventPtr->y;
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_X) {
+	    wmPtr->x = wmPtr->vRootWidth - (wmPtr->x + wmPtr->parentWidth);
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_Y) {
+	    wmPtr->y = wmPtr->vRootHeight - (wmPtr->y + wmPtr->parentHeight);
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Make sure that the toplevel and menubar are properly positioned within
+     * the wrapper.
+     */
+
+    XMoveResizeWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->window, 0,
+	    wmPtr->menuHeight, (unsigned) wrapperPtr->changes.width,
+	    (unsigned) (wrapperPtr->changes.height - wmPtr->menuHeight));
+    if ((wmPtr->menubar != NULL)
+	    && ((Tk_Width(wmPtr->menubar) != wrapperPtr->changes.width)
+	    || (Tk_Height(wmPtr->menubar) != wmPtr->menuHeight))) {
+	Tk_MoveResizeWindow(wmPtr->menubar, 0, 0, wrapperPtr->changes.width,
+		wmPtr->menuHeight);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Update the coordinates in the toplevel (they should refer to the
+     * position in root window coordinates, not the coordinates of the
+     * wrapper window).  Then synthesize a ConfigureNotify event to tell
+     * the application about the change.
+     */
+
+    winPtr->changes.x = wrapperPtr->changes.x;
+    winPtr->changes.y = wrapperPtr->changes.y + wmPtr->menuHeight;
+    winPtr->changes.width = wrapperPtr->changes.width;
+    winPtr->changes.height = wrapperPtr->changes.height - wmPtr->menuHeight;
+    TkDoConfigureNotify(winPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ReparentEvent --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to handle ReparentNotify events on
+ *	wrapper windows.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Information gets updated in the WmInfo structure for the window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+ReparentEvent(wmPtr, reparentEventPtr)
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;			/* Information about toplevel window. */
+    XReparentEvent *reparentEventPtr;	/* Event that just occurred for
+					 * wmPtr->wrapperPtr. */
+{
+    TkWindow *wrapperPtr = wmPtr->wrapperPtr;
+    Window vRoot, ancestor, *children, dummy2, *virtualRootPtr;
+    Atom actualType;
+    int actualFormat;
+    unsigned long numItems, bytesAfter;
+    unsigned int dummy;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
+
+    /*
+     * Identify the root window for wrapperPtr.  This is tricky because of
+     * virtual root window managers like tvtwm.  If the window has a
+     * property named __SWM_ROOT or __WM_ROOT then this property gives
+     * the id for a virtual root window that should be used instead of
+     * the root window of the screen.
+     */
+
+    vRoot = RootWindow(wrapperPtr->display, wrapperPtr->screenNum);
+    wmPtr->vRoot = None;
+    handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(wrapperPtr->display, -1, -1, -1,
+	    (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+    if (((XGetWindowProperty(wrapperPtr->display, wrapperPtr->window,
+	    Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) wrapperPtr, "__WM_ROOT"), 0, (long) 1,
+	    False, XA_WINDOW, &actualType, &actualFormat, &numItems,
+	    &bytesAfter, (unsigned char **) &virtualRootPtr) == Success)
+	    && (actualType == XA_WINDOW))
+	    || ((XGetWindowProperty(wrapperPtr->display, wrapperPtr->window,
+	    Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) wrapperPtr, "__SWM_ROOT"), 0, (long) 1,
+	    False, XA_WINDOW, &actualType, &actualFormat, &numItems,
+	    &bytesAfter, (unsigned char **) &virtualRootPtr) == Success)
+	    && (actualType == XA_WINDOW))) {
+	if ((actualFormat == 32) && (numItems == 1)) {
+	    vRoot = wmPtr->vRoot = *virtualRootPtr;
+	} else if (wmTracing) {
+	    printf("%s format %d numItems %ld\n",
+		    "ReparentEvent got bogus VROOT property:", actualFormat,
+		    numItems);
+	}
+	XFree((char *) virtualRootPtr);
+    }
+    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+
+    if (wmTracing) {
+	printf("ReparentEvent: %s reparented to 0x%x, vRoot = 0x%x\n",
+		wmPtr->winPtr->pathName,
+		(unsigned int) reparentEventPtr->parent, (unsigned int) vRoot);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Fetch correct geometry information for the new virtual root.
+     */
+
+    UpdateVRootGeometry(wmPtr);
+
+    /*
+     * If the window's new parent is the root window, then mark it as
+     * no longer reparented.
+     */
+
+    if (reparentEventPtr->parent == vRoot) {
+	noReparent:
+	wmPtr->reparent = None;
+	wmPtr->parentWidth = wrapperPtr->changes.width;
+	wmPtr->parentHeight = wrapperPtr->changes.height;
+	wmPtr->xInParent = wmPtr->yInParent = 0;
+	wrapperPtr->changes.x = reparentEventPtr->x;
+	wrapperPtr->changes.y = reparentEventPtr->y;
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Search up the window hierarchy to find the ancestor of this
+     * window that is just below the (virtual) root.  This is tricky
+     * because it's possible that things have changed since the event
+     * was generated so that the ancestry indicated by the event no
+     * longer exists.  If this happens then an error will occur and
+     * we just discard the event (there will be a more up-to-date
+     * ReparentNotify event coming later).
+     */
+
+    handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(wrapperPtr->display, -1, -1, -1,
+	    (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+    wmPtr->reparent = reparentEventPtr->parent;
+    while (1) {
+	if (XQueryTree(wrapperPtr->display, wmPtr->reparent, &dummy2, &ancestor,
+		&children, &dummy) == 0) {
+	    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+	    goto noReparent;
+	}
+	XFree((char *) children);
+	if ((ancestor == vRoot) ||
+		(ancestor == RootWindow(wrapperPtr->display,
+		wrapperPtr->screenNum))) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	wmPtr->reparent = ancestor;
+    }
+    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+
+    if (!ComputeReparentGeometry(wmPtr)) {
+	goto noReparent;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ComputeReparentGeometry --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to recompute geometry information
+ *	related to a reparented top-level window, such as the position
+ *	and total size of the parent and the position within it of
+ *	the top-level window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is 1 if everything completed successfully
+ *	and 0 if an error occurred while querying information about
+ *	winPtr's parents.  In this case winPtr is marked as no longer
+ *	being reparented.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Geometry information in wmPtr, wmPtr->winPtr, and
+ *	wmPtr->wrapperPtr gets updated.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+ComputeReparentGeometry(wmPtr)
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;		/* Information about toplevel window
+				 * whose reparent info is to be recomputed. */
+{
+    TkWindow *wrapperPtr = wmPtr->wrapperPtr;
+    int width, height, bd;
+    unsigned int dummy;
+    int xOffset, yOffset, x, y;
+    Window dummy2;
+    Status status;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
+
+    handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(wrapperPtr->display, -1, -1, -1,
+	    (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+    (void) XTranslateCoordinates(wrapperPtr->display, wrapperPtr->window,
+	    wmPtr->reparent, 0, 0, &xOffset, &yOffset, &dummy2);
+    status = XGetGeometry(wrapperPtr->display, wmPtr->reparent,
+	    &dummy2, &x, &y, (unsigned int *) &width,
+	    (unsigned int *) &height, (unsigned int *) &bd, &dummy);
+    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+    if (status == 0) {
+	/*
+	 * It appears that the reparented parent went away and
+	 * no-one told us.  Reset the window to indicate that
+	 * it's not reparented.
+	 */
+	wmPtr->reparent = None;
+	wmPtr->xInParent = wmPtr->yInParent = 0;
+	return 0;
+    }
+    wmPtr->xInParent = xOffset + bd;
+    wmPtr->yInParent = yOffset + bd;
+    wmPtr->parentWidth = width + 2*bd;
+    wmPtr->parentHeight = height + 2*bd;
+
+    /*
+     * Some tricky issues in updating wmPtr->x and wmPtr->y:
+     *
+     * 1. Don't update them if the event occurred because of something
+     * we did (i.e. WM_SYNC_PENDING and WM_MOVE_PENDING are both set).
+     * This is because window managers treat coords differently than Tk,
+     * and no two window managers are alike. If the window manager moved
+     * the window because we told it to, remember the coordinates we told
+     * it, not the ones it actually moved it to.  This allows us to move
+     * the window back to the same coordinates later and get the same
+     * result. Without this check, windows can "walk" across the screen
+     * under some conditions.
+     *
+     * 2. Don't update wmPtr->x and wmPtr->y unless wrapperPtr->changes.x
+     * or wrapperPtr->changes.y has changed (otherwise a size change can
+     * spoof us into thinking that the position changed too and defeat
+     * the intent of (1) above.
+     *
+     * (As of 9/96 the above 2 comments appear to be stale.  They're
+     * being left in place as a reminder of what was once true (and
+     * perhaps should still be true?)).
+     *
+     * 3. Ignore size changes coming from the window system if we're
+     * about to change the size ourselves but haven't seen the event for
+     * it yet:  our size change is supposed to take priority.
+     */
+
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_MOVE_PENDING)
+	    && ((wmPtr->wrapperPtr->changes.x != (x + wmPtr->xInParent))
+	    || (wmPtr->wrapperPtr->changes.y != (y + wmPtr->yInParent)))) {
+	wmPtr->x = x;
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_X) {
+	    wmPtr->x = wmPtr->vRootWidth - (wmPtr->x + wmPtr->parentWidth);
+	}
+	wmPtr->y = y;
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_Y) {
+	    wmPtr->y = wmPtr->vRootHeight - (wmPtr->y + wmPtr->parentHeight);
+	}
+    }
+
+    wmPtr->wrapperPtr->changes.x = x + wmPtr->xInParent;
+    wmPtr->wrapperPtr->changes.y = y + wmPtr->yInParent;
+    if (wmTracing) {
+	printf("wrapperPtr coords %d,%d, wmPtr coords %d,%d, offsets %d %d\n",
+		wrapperPtr->changes.x, wrapperPtr->changes.y,
+		wmPtr->x, wmPtr->y, wmPtr->xInParent, wmPtr->yInParent);
+    }
+    return 1;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * WrapperEventProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the event loop when a wrapper window
+ *	is restructured.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Tk's internal data structures for the window get modified to
+ *	reflect the structural change.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+WrapperEventProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Information about toplevel window. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Event that just happened. */
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr = (WmInfo *) clientData;
+    XEvent mapEvent;
+
+    wmPtr->flags |= WM_VROOT_OFFSET_STALE;
+    if (eventPtr->type == DestroyNotify) {
+	Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
+
+	if (!(wmPtr->wrapperPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD)) {
+	    /*
+	     * A top-level window was deleted externally (e.g., by the window
+	     * manager).  This is probably not a good thing, but cleanup as
+	     * best we can.  The error handler is needed because
+	     * Tk_DestroyWindow will try to destroy the window, but of course
+	     * it's already gone.
+	     */
+    
+	    handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(wmPtr->winPtr->display, -1, -1, -1,
+		    (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	    Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) wmPtr->winPtr);
+	    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+	}
+	if (wmTracing) {
+	    printf("TopLevelEventProc: %s deleted\n", wmPtr->winPtr->pathName);
+	}
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
+	/*
+	 * Ignore the event if the window has never been mapped yet.
+	 * Such an event occurs only in weird cases like changing the
+	 * internal border width of a top-level window, which results
+	 * in a synthetic Configure event.  These events are not relevant
+	 * to us, and if we process them confusion may result (e.g. we
+	 * may conclude erroneously that the user repositioned or resized
+	 * the window).
+	 */
+
+	if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	    ConfigureEvent(wmPtr, &eventPtr->xconfigure);
+	}
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == MapNotify) {
+	wmPtr->wrapperPtr->flags |= TK_MAPPED;
+	wmPtr->winPtr->flags |= TK_MAPPED;
+	XMapWindow(wmPtr->winPtr->display, wmPtr->winPtr->window);
+	goto doMapEvent;
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == UnmapNotify) {
+	wmPtr->wrapperPtr->flags &= ~TK_MAPPED;
+	wmPtr->winPtr->flags &= ~TK_MAPPED;
+	XUnmapWindow(wmPtr->winPtr->display, wmPtr->winPtr->window);
+	goto doMapEvent;
+    } else if (eventPtr->type == ReparentNotify) {
+	ReparentEvent(wmPtr, &eventPtr->xreparent);
+    }
+    return;
+
+    doMapEvent:
+    mapEvent = *eventPtr;
+    mapEvent.xmap.event = wmPtr->winPtr->window;
+    mapEvent.xmap.window = wmPtr->winPtr->window;
+    Tk_HandleEvent(&mapEvent);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TopLevelReqProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the geometry manager whenever
+ *	the requested size for a top-level window is changed.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Arrange for the window to be resized to satisfy the request
+ *	(this happens as a when-idle action).
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+	/* ARGSUSED */
+static void
+TopLevelReqProc(dummy, tkwin)
+    ClientData dummy;			/* Not used. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;			/* Information about window. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;
+
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    if ((wmPtr->width >= 0) && (wmPtr->height >= 0)) {
+	/*
+	 * Explicit dimensions have been set for this window, so we
+	 * should ignore the geometry request.  It's actually important
+	 * to ignore the geometry request because, due to quirks in
+	 * window managers, invoking UpdateGeometryInfo may cause the
+	 * window to move.  For example, if "wm geometry -10-20" was
+	 * invoked, the window may be positioned incorrectly the first
+	 * time it appears (because we didn't know the proper width of
+	 * the window manager borders); if we invoke UpdateGeometryInfo
+	 * again, the window will be positioned correctly, which may
+	 * cause it to jump on the screen.
+	 */
+
+	return;
+    }
+
+    wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If the window isn't being positioned by its upper left corner
+     * then we have to move it as well.
+     */
+
+    if (wmPtr->flags & (WM_NEGATIVE_X | WM_NEGATIVE_Y)) {
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_MOVE_PENDING;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateGeometryInfo --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked when a top-level window is first
+ *	mapped, and also as a when-idle procedure, to bring the
+ *	geometry and/or position of a top-level window back into
+ *	line with what has been requested by the user and/or widgets.
+ *	This procedure doesn't return until the window manager has
+ *	responded to the geometry change.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The size and location of both the toplevel window and its wrapper
+ *	may change, unless the WM prevents that from happening.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+UpdateGeometryInfo(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* Pointer to the window's record. */
+{
+    register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) clientData;
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    int x, y, width, height;
+    unsigned long serial;
+
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the new size for the top-level window.  See the
+     * user documentation for details on this, but the size
+     * requested depends on (a) the size requested internally
+     * by the window's widgets, (b) the size requested by the
+     * user in a "wm geometry" command or via wm-based interactive
+     * resizing (if any), and (c) whether or not the window is
+     * gridded.  Don't permit sizes <= 0 because this upsets
+     * the X server.
+     */
+
+    if (wmPtr->width == -1) {
+	width = winPtr->reqWidth;
+    } else if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+	width = winPtr->reqWidth
+		+ (wmPtr->width - wmPtr->reqGridWidth)*wmPtr->widthInc;
+    } else {
+	width = wmPtr->width;
+    }
+    if (width <= 0) {
+	width = 1;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->height == -1) {
+	height = winPtr->reqHeight;
+    } else if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+	height = winPtr->reqHeight
+		+ (wmPtr->height - wmPtr->reqGridHeight)*wmPtr->heightInc;
+    } else {
+	height = wmPtr->height;
+    }
+    if (height <= 0) {
+	height = 1;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the new position for the upper-left pixel of the window's
+     * decorative frame.  This is tricky, because we need to include the
+     * border widths supplied by a reparented parent in this calculation,
+     * but can't use the parent's current overall size since that may
+     * change as a result of this code.
+     */
+
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_X) {
+	x = wmPtr->vRootWidth - wmPtr->x
+		- (width + (wmPtr->parentWidth - winPtr->changes.width));
+    } else {
+	x =  wmPtr->x;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEGATIVE_Y) {
+	y = wmPtr->vRootHeight - wmPtr->y
+		- (height + (wmPtr->parentHeight - winPtr->changes.height));
+    } else {
+	y =  wmPtr->y;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If the window's size is going to change and the window is
+     * supposed to not be resizable by the user, then we have to
+     * update the size hints.  There may also be a size-hint-update
+     * request pending from somewhere else, too.
+     */
+
+    if (((width != winPtr->changes.width)
+	    || (height != winPtr->changes.height))
+	    && (wmPtr->gridWin == NULL)
+	    && ((wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & (PMinSize|PMaxSize)) == 0)) {
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS) {
+	UpdateSizeHints(winPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Reconfigure the wrapper if it isn't already configured correctly.
+     * A few tricky points:
+     *
+     * 1. If the window is embeddedand the container is also in this
+     *    process, don't actually reconfigure the window; just pass the
+     *    desired size on to the container.  Also, zero out any position
+     *    information, since embedded windows are not allowed to move.
+     * 2. Sometimes the window manager will give us a different size
+     *    than we asked for (e.g. mwm has a minimum size for windows), so
+     *    base the size check on what we *asked for* last time, not what we
+     *    got.
+     * 3. Can't just reconfigure always, because we may not get a
+     *    ConfigureNotify event back if nothing changed, so
+     *    WaitForConfigureNotify will hang a long time.
+     * 4. Don't move window unless a new position has been requested for
+     *	  it.  This is because of "features" in some window managers (e.g.
+     *    twm, as of 4/24/91) where they don't interpret coordinates
+     *    according to ICCCM.  Moving a window to its current location may
+     *    cause it to shift position on the screen.
+     */
+
+    if ((winPtr->flags & (TK_EMBEDDED|TK_BOTH_HALVES))
+	    == (TK_EMBEDDED|TK_BOTH_HALVES)) {
+	/*
+	 * This window is embedded and the container is also in this
+	 * process, so we don't need to do anything special about the
+	 * geometry, except to make sure that the desired size is known
+	 * by the container.  Also, zero out any position information,
+	 * since embedded windows are not allowed to move.
+	 */
+
+	wmPtr->x = wmPtr->y = 0;
+	wmPtr->flags &= ~(WM_NEGATIVE_X|WM_NEGATIVE_Y);
+	height += wmPtr->menuHeight;
+	Tk_GeometryRequest((Tk_Window) TkpGetOtherWindow(winPtr),
+		width, height);
+	return;
+    }
+    serial = NextRequest(winPtr->display);
+    height += wmPtr->menuHeight;
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_MOVE_PENDING) {
+	if ((x == winPtr->changes.x) && (y == winPtr->changes.y)
+		&& (width == wmPtr->wrapperPtr->changes.width)
+		&& (height == wmPtr->wrapperPtr->changes.height)) {
+	    /*
+	     * The window already has the correct geometry, so don't bother
+	     * to configure it;  the X server appears to ignore these
+	     * requests, so we won't get back a ConfigureNotify and the
+	     * WaitForConfigureNotify call below will hang for a while.
+	     */
+
+	    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_MOVE_PENDING;
+	    return;
+	}
+	wmPtr->configWidth = width;
+	wmPtr->configHeight = height;
+	if (wmTracing) {
+	   printf("UpdateGeometryInfo moving to %d %d, resizing to %d x %d,\n",
+                   x, y, width, height);
+	}
+	XMoveResizeWindow(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window, x, y,
+		(unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
+    } else if ((width != wmPtr->configWidth)
+	    || (height != wmPtr->configHeight)) {
+	if ((width == wmPtr->wrapperPtr->changes.width)
+		&& (height == wmPtr->wrapperPtr->changes.height)) {
+	    /*
+	     * The window is already just the size we want, so don't bother
+	     * to configure it;  the X server appears to ignore these
+	     * requests, so we won't get back a ConfigureNotify and the
+	     * WaitForConfigureNotify call below will hang for a while.
+	     */
+
+	    return;
+	}
+	wmPtr->configWidth = width;
+	wmPtr->configHeight = height;
+	if (wmTracing) {
+	    printf("UpdateGeometryInfo resizing to %d x %d\n", width, height);
+	}
+	XResizeWindow(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		(unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
+    } else if ((wmPtr->menubar != NULL)
+	    && ((Tk_Width(wmPtr->menubar) != wmPtr->wrapperPtr->changes.width)
+	    || (Tk_Height(wmPtr->menubar) != wmPtr->menuHeight))) {
+	/*
+	 * It is possible that the window's overall size has not changed
+	 * but the menu size has.
+	 */
+	
+	Tk_MoveResizeWindow(wmPtr->menubar, 0, 0,
+		wmPtr->wrapperPtr->changes.width, wmPtr->menuHeight);
+	XResizeWindow(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		(unsigned) width, (unsigned) height);
+    } else {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Wait for the configure operation to complete.  Don't need to do
+     * this, however, if the window is about to be mapped:  it will be
+     * taken care of elsewhere.
+     */
+
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_ABOUT_TO_MAP)) {
+	WaitForConfigureNotify(winPtr, serial);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateSizeHints --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to update the window manager's
+ *	size hints information from the information in a WmInfo
+ *	structure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Properties get changed for winPtr.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+UpdateSizeHints(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+{
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    XSizeHints *hintsPtr;
+    int maxWidth, maxHeight;
+
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+
+    hintsPtr = XAllocSizeHints();
+    if (hintsPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Compute the pixel-based sizes for the various fields in the
+     * size hints structure, based on the grid-based sizes in
+     * our structure.
+     */
+
+    GetMaxSize(wmPtr, &maxWidth, &maxHeight);
+    if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+	hintsPtr->base_width = winPtr->reqWidth
+		- (wmPtr->reqGridWidth * wmPtr->widthInc);
+	if (hintsPtr->base_width < 0) {
+	    hintsPtr->base_width = 0;
+	}
+	hintsPtr->base_height = winPtr->reqHeight + wmPtr->menuHeight
+		- (wmPtr->reqGridHeight * wmPtr->heightInc);
+	if (hintsPtr->base_height < 0) {
+	    hintsPtr->base_height = 0;
+	}
+	hintsPtr->min_width = hintsPtr->base_width
+		+ (wmPtr->minWidth * wmPtr->widthInc);
+	hintsPtr->min_height = hintsPtr->base_height
+		+ (wmPtr->minHeight * wmPtr->heightInc);
+	hintsPtr->max_width = hintsPtr->base_width
+		+ (maxWidth * wmPtr->widthInc);
+	hintsPtr->max_height = hintsPtr->base_height
+		+ (maxHeight * wmPtr->heightInc);
+    } else {
+	hintsPtr->min_width = wmPtr->minWidth;
+	hintsPtr->min_height = wmPtr->minHeight;
+	hintsPtr->max_width = maxWidth;
+	hintsPtr->max_height = maxHeight;
+	hintsPtr->base_width = 0;
+	hintsPtr->base_height = 0;
+    }
+    hintsPtr->width_inc = wmPtr->widthInc;
+    hintsPtr->height_inc = wmPtr->heightInc;
+    hintsPtr->min_aspect.x = wmPtr->minAspect.x;
+    hintsPtr->min_aspect.y = wmPtr->minAspect.y;
+    hintsPtr->max_aspect.x = wmPtr->maxAspect.x;
+    hintsPtr->max_aspect.y = wmPtr->maxAspect.y;
+    hintsPtr->win_gravity = wmPtr->gravity;
+    hintsPtr->flags = wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags | PMinSize | PMaxSize;
+
+    /*
+     * If the window isn't supposed to be resizable, then set the
+     * minimum and maximum dimensions to be the same.
+     */
+
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_WIDTH_NOT_RESIZABLE) {
+	if (wmPtr->width >= 0) {
+	    hintsPtr->min_width = wmPtr->width;
+	} else {
+	    hintsPtr->min_width = winPtr->reqWidth;
+	}
+	hintsPtr->max_width = hintsPtr->min_width;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_HEIGHT_NOT_RESIZABLE) {
+	if (wmPtr->height >= 0) {
+	    hintsPtr->min_height = wmPtr->height;
+	} else {
+	    hintsPtr->min_height = winPtr->reqHeight + wmPtr->menuHeight;
+	}
+	hintsPtr->max_height = hintsPtr->min_height;
+    }
+
+    XSetWMNormalHints(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window, hintsPtr);
+
+    XFree((char *) hintsPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * WaitForConfigureNotify --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked in order to synchronize with the
+ *	window manager.  It waits for a ConfigureNotify event to
+ *	arrive, signalling that the window manager has seen an attempt
+ *	on our part to move or resize a top-level window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Delays the execution of the process until a ConfigureNotify event
+ *	arrives with serial number at least as great as serial.  This
+ *	is useful for two reasons:
+ *
+ *	1. It's important to distinguish ConfigureNotify events that are
+ *	   coming in response to a request we've made from those generated
+ *	   spontaneously by the user.  The reason for this is that if the
+ *	   user resizes the window we take that as an order to ignore
+ *	   geometry requests coming from inside the window hierarchy.  If
+ *	   we accidentally interpret a response to our request as a
+ *	   user-initiated action, the window will stop responding to
+ *	   new geometry requests.  To make this distinction, (a) this
+ *	   procedure sets a flag for TopLevelEventProc to indicate that
+ *	   we're waiting to sync with the wm, and (b) all changes to
+ *	   the size of a top-level window are followed by calls to this
+ *	   procedure.
+ *	2. Races and confusion can come about if there are multiple
+ *	   operations outstanding at a time (e.g. two different resizes
+ *	   of the top-level window:  it's hard to tell which of the
+ *	   ConfigureNotify events coming back is for which request).
+ *	While waiting, all events covered by StructureNotifyMask are
+ *	processed and all others are deferred.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+WaitForConfigureNotify(winPtr, serial)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window for which we want
+				 * to see a ConfigureNotify. */
+    unsigned long serial;	/* Serial number of resize request.  Want to
+				 * be sure wm has seen this. */
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    XEvent event;
+    int diff, code;
+    int gotConfig = 0;
+
+    /*
+     * One more tricky detail about this procedure.  In some cases the
+     * window manager will decide to ignore a configure request (e.g.
+     * because it thinks the window is already in the right place).
+     * To avoid hanging in this situation, only wait for a few seconds,
+     * then give up.
+     */
+
+    while (!gotConfig) {
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+	code = WaitForEvent(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		ConfigureNotify, &event);
+	wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+	if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	    if (wmTracing) {
+		printf("WaitForConfigureNotify giving up on %s\n",
+			winPtr->pathName);
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+	diff = event.xconfigure.serial - serial;
+	if (diff >= 0) {
+	    gotConfig = 1;
+	}
+    }
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_MOVE_PENDING;
+    if (wmTracing) {
+	printf("WaitForConfigureNotify finished with %s, serial %ld\n",
+		winPtr->pathName, serial);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * WaitForEvent --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is used by WaitForConfigureNotify and
+ *	WaitForMapNotify to wait for an event of a certain type
+ *	to arrive.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Under normal conditions, TCL_OK is returned and an event for
+ *	display and window that matches "mask" is stored in *eventPtr.
+ *	This event  has already been processed by Tk before this procedure
+ *	returns.  If a long time goes by with no event of the right type
+ *	arriving, or if an error occurs while waiting for the event to
+ *	arrive, then TCL_ERROR is returned.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	While waiting for the desired event to occur, Configurenotify
+ *	events for window are processed, as are all ReparentNotify events,
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+WaitForEvent(display, window, type, eventPtr)
+    Display *display;		/* Display event is coming from. */
+    Window window;		/* Window for which event is desired. */
+    int type;			/* Type of event that is wanted. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Place to store event. */
+{
+    WaitRestrictInfo info;
+    Tk_RestrictProc *oldRestrictProc;
+    ClientData oldRestrictData;
+    Tcl_Time timeout;
+
+    /*
+     * Set up an event filter to select just the events we want, and
+     * a timer handler, then wait for events until we get the event
+     * we want or a timeout happens.
+     */
+
+    info.display = display;
+    info.window = window;
+    info.type = type;
+    info.eventPtr = eventPtr;
+    info.foundEvent = 0;
+    oldRestrictProc = Tk_RestrictEvents(WaitRestrictProc, (ClientData) &info,
+	    &oldRestrictData);
+
+    TclpGetTime(&timeout);
+    timeout.sec += 2;
+
+    while (!info.foundEvent) {
+	if (!TkUnixDoOneXEvent(&timeout)) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    (void) Tk_RestrictEvents(oldRestrictProc, oldRestrictData,
+	    &oldRestrictData);
+    if (info.foundEvent) {
+	return TCL_OK;
+    }
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * WaitRestrictProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is a Tk_RestrictProc that is used to filter
+ *	events while WaitForEvent is active.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns TK_PROCESS_EVENT if the right event is found.  Also
+ *	returns TK_PROCESS_EVENT if any ReparentNotify event is found
+ *	for window or if the event is a ConfigureNotify for window.
+ *	Otherwise returns TK_DEFER_EVENT.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	An event may get stored in the area indicated by the caller
+ *	of WaitForEvent.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static Tk_RestrictAction
+WaitRestrictProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to WaitRestrictInfo structure. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Event that is about to be handled. */
+{
+    WaitRestrictInfo *infoPtr = (WaitRestrictInfo *) clientData;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type == ReparentNotify) {
+	return TK_PROCESS_EVENT;
+    }
+    if ((eventPtr->xany.window != infoPtr->window)
+	    || (eventPtr->xany.display != infoPtr->display)) {
+	return TK_DEFER_EVENT;
+    }
+    if (eventPtr->type == infoPtr->type) {
+	*infoPtr->eventPtr = *eventPtr;
+	infoPtr->foundEvent = 1;
+	return TK_PROCESS_EVENT;
+    }
+    if (eventPtr->type == ConfigureNotify) {
+	return TK_PROCESS_EVENT;
+    }
+    return TK_DEFER_EVENT;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * WaitForMapNotify --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked in order to synchronize with the
+ *	window manager.  It waits for the window's mapped state to
+ *	reach the value given by mapped.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Delays the execution of the process until winPtr becomes mapped
+ *	or unmapped, depending on the "mapped" argument.  This allows us
+ *	to synchronize with the window manager, and allows us to
+ *	identify changes in window size that come about when the window
+ *	manager first starts managing the window (as opposed to those
+ *	requested interactively by the user later).  See the comments
+ *	for WaitForConfigureNotify and WM_SYNC_PENDING.  While waiting,
+ *	all events covered by StructureNotifyMask are processed and all
+ *	others are deferred.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+WaitForMapNotify(winPtr, mapped)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Top-level window for which we want
+				 * to see a particular mapping state. */
+    int mapped;			/* If non-zero, wait for window to become
+				 * mapped, otherwise wait for it to become
+				 * unmapped. */
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    XEvent event;
+    int code;
+
+    while (1) {
+	if (mapped) {
+	    if (winPtr->flags & TK_MAPPED) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	} else if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_MAPPED)) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+	code = WaitForEvent(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+		mapped ? MapNotify : UnmapNotify, &event);
+	wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_SYNC_PENDING;
+	if (code != TCL_OK) {
+	    /*
+	     * There are some bizarre situations in which the window
+	     * manager can't respond or chooses not to (e.g. if we've
+	     * got a grab set it can't respond).  If this happens then
+	     * just quit.
+	     */
+
+	    if (wmTracing) {
+		printf("WaitForMapNotify giving up on %s\n", winPtr->pathName);
+	    }
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_MOVE_PENDING;
+    if (wmTracing) {
+	printf("WaitForMapNotify finished with %s\n", winPtr->pathName);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateHints --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to update the window manager's
+ *	hints information from the information in a WmInfo
+ *	structure.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Properties get changed for winPtr.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+UpdateHints(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) {
+	return;
+    }
+    XSetWMHints(winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window, &wmPtr->hints);
+}
+
+/*
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * ParseGeometry --
+ *
+ *	This procedure parses a geometry string and updates
+ *	information used to control the geometry of a top-level
+ *	window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	A standard Tcl return value, plus an error message in
+ *	interp->result if an error occurs.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The size and/or location of winPtr may change.
+ *
+ *--------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static int
+ParseGeometry(interp, string, winPtr)
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;		/* Used for error reporting. */
+    char *string;		/* String containing new geometry.  Has the
+				 * standard form "=wxh+x+y". */
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Pointer to top-level window whose
+				 * geometry is to be changed. */
+{
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    int x, y, width, height, flags;
+    char *end;
+    register char *p = string;
+
+    /*
+     * The leading "=" is optional.
+     */
+
+    if (*p == '=') {
+	p++;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Parse the width and height, if they are present.  Don't
+     * actually update any of the fields of wmPtr until we've
+     * successfully parsed the entire geometry string.
+     */
+
+    width = wmPtr->width;
+    height = wmPtr->height;
+    x = wmPtr->x;
+    y = wmPtr->y;
+    flags = wmPtr->flags;
+    if (isdigit(UCHAR(*p))) {
+	width = strtoul(p, &end, 10);
+	p = end;
+	if (*p != 'x') {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	p++;
+	if (!isdigit(UCHAR(*p))) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	height = strtoul(p, &end, 10);
+	p = end;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Parse the X and Y coordinates, if they are present.
+     */
+
+    if (*p != '\0') {
+	flags &= ~(WM_NEGATIVE_X | WM_NEGATIVE_Y);
+	if (*p == '-') {
+	    flags |= WM_NEGATIVE_X;
+	} else if (*p != '+') {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	p++;
+	if (!isdigit(UCHAR(*p)) && (*p != '-')) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	x = strtol(p, &end, 10);
+	p = end;
+	if (*p == '-') {
+	    flags |= WM_NEGATIVE_Y;
+	} else if (*p != '+') {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	p++;
+	if (!isdigit(UCHAR(*p)) && (*p != '-')) {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+	y = strtol(p, &end, 10);
+	if (*end != '\0') {
+	    goto error;
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Assume that the geometry information came from the user,
+	 * unless an explicit source has been specified.  Otherwise
+	 * most window managers assume that the size hints were
+	 * program-specified and they ignore them.
+	 */
+
+	if ((wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & (USPosition|PPosition)) == 0) {
+	    wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= USPosition;
+	    flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Everything was parsed OK.  Update the fields of *wmPtr and
+     * arrange for the appropriate information to be percolated out
+     * to the window manager at the next idle moment.
+     */
+
+    wmPtr->width = width;
+    wmPtr->height = height;
+    wmPtr->x = x;
+    wmPtr->y = y;
+    flags |= WM_MOVE_PENDING;
+    wmPtr->flags = flags;
+
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+    return TCL_OK;
+
+    error:
+    Tcl_AppendResult(interp, "bad geometry specifier \"",
+	    string, "\"", (char *) NULL);
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetRootCoords --
+ *
+ *	Given a token for a window, this procedure traces through the
+ *	window's lineage to find the (virtual) root-window coordinates
+ *	corresponding to point (0,0) in the window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The locations pointed to by xPtr and yPtr are filled in with
+ *	the root coordinates of the (0,0) point in tkwin.  If a virtual
+ *	root window is in effect for the window, then the coordinates
+ *	in the virtual root are returned.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_GetRootCoords(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for window. */
+    int *xPtr;			/* Where to store x-displacement of (0,0). */
+    int *yPtr;			/* Where to store y-displacement of (0,0). */
+{
+    int x, y;
+    register TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+
+    /*
+     * Search back through this window's parents all the way to a
+     * top-level window, combining the offsets of each window within
+     * its parent.
+     */
+
+    x = y = 0;
+    while (1) {
+	x += winPtr->changes.x + winPtr->changes.border_width;
+	y += winPtr->changes.y + winPtr->changes.border_width;
+	if ((winPtr->wmInfoPtr != NULL)
+		&& (winPtr->wmInfoPtr->menubar == (Tk_Window) winPtr)) {
+	    /*
+	     * This window is a special menubar; switch over to its
+	     * associated toplevel, compensate for their differences in
+	     * y coordinates, then continue with the toplevel (in case
+	     * it's embedded).
+	     */
+
+	    y -= winPtr->wmInfoPtr->menuHeight;
+	    winPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr->winPtr;
+	    continue;
+	}
+	if (winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL) {
+	    TkWindow *otherPtr;
+
+	    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED)) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	    otherPtr = TkpGetOtherWindow(winPtr);
+	    if (otherPtr == NULL) {
+		/*
+		 * The container window is not in the same application.
+		 * Query the X server.
+		 */
+
+		Window root, dummyChild;
+		int rootX, rootY;
+
+		root = winPtr->wmInfoPtr->vRoot;
+		if (root == None) {
+		    root = RootWindowOfScreen(Tk_Screen((Tk_Window)winPtr));
+		}
+		XTranslateCoordinates(winPtr->display, winPtr->window, 
+		    root, 0, 0, &rootX, &rootY, &dummyChild);
+		x += rootX;
+		y += rootY;
+		break;
+	    } else {
+		/*
+		 * The container window is in the same application.
+		 * Let's query its coordinates.
+		 */
+
+		winPtr = otherPtr;
+		continue;
+	    }
+	}
+	winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr;
+	if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    *xPtr = x;
+    *yPtr = y;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_CoordsToWindow --
+ *
+ *	Given the (virtual) root coordinates of a point, this procedure
+ *	returns the token for the top-most window covering that point,
+ *	if there exists such a window in this application.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return result is either a token for the window corresponding
+ *	to rootX and rootY, or else NULL to indicate that there is no such
+ *	window.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Tk_Window
+Tk_CoordsToWindow(rootX, rootY, tkwin)
+    int rootX, rootY;		/* Coordinates of point in root window.  If
+				 * a virtual-root window manager is in use,
+				 * these coordinates refer to the virtual
+				 * root, not the real root. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for any window in application;
+				 * used to identify the display. */
+{
+    Window window, parent, child;
+    int x, y, childX, childY, tmpx, tmpy, bd;
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;
+    TkWindow *winPtr, *childPtr, *nextPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Step 1: scan the list of toplevel windows to see if there is a
+     * virtual root for the screen we're interested in.  If so, we have
+     * to translate the coordinates from virtual root to root
+     * coordinates.
+     */
+
+    parent = window = RootWindowOfScreen(Tk_Screen(tkwin));
+    x = rootX;
+    y = rootY;
+    for (wmPtr = firstWmPtr; wmPtr != NULL; wmPtr = wmPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (Tk_Screen(wmPtr->winPtr) != Tk_Screen(tkwin)) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+	if (wmPtr->vRoot == None) {
+	    continue;
+	}
+	UpdateVRootGeometry(wmPtr);
+	parent = wmPtr->vRoot;
+	break;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Step 2: work down through the window hierarchy starting at the
+     * root. For each window, find the child that contains the given
+     * point and then see if this child is either a wrapper for one of
+     * our toplevel windows or a window manager decoration window for
+     * one of our toplevels.  This approach handles several tricky
+     * cases:
+     *
+     * 1. There may be a virtual root window between the root and one of
+     *    our toplevels.
+     * 2. If a toplevel is embedded, we may have to search through the
+     *    windows of the container application(s) before getting to
+     *    the toplevel.
+     */
+
+    while (1) {
+	if (XTranslateCoordinates(Tk_Display(tkwin), parent, window,
+		x, y, &childX, &childY, &child) == False) {
+	    panic("Tk_CoordsToWindow got False return from XTranslateCoordinates");
+	}
+	if (child == None) {
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+	for (wmPtr = firstWmPtr; wmPtr != NULL; wmPtr = wmPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (wmPtr->reparent == child) {
+		goto gotToplevel;
+	    }
+	    if (wmPtr->wrapperPtr != NULL) {
+		if (child == wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window) {
+		    goto gotToplevel;
+		}
+	    } else if (child == wmPtr->winPtr->window) {
+		goto gotToplevel;
+	    }
+	}
+	x = childX;
+	y = childY;
+	parent = window;
+	window = child;
+    }
+
+    gotToplevel:
+    winPtr = wmPtr->winPtr;
+    if (winPtr->mainPtr != ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->mainPtr) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Step 3: at this point winPtr and wmPtr refer to the toplevel that
+     * contains the given coordinates, and childX and childY give the
+     * translated coordinates in the *parent* of the toplevel.  Now
+     * decide whether the coordinates are in the menubar or the actual
+     * toplevel, and translate the coordinates into the coordinate
+     * system of that window.
+     */
+
+    x = childX - winPtr->changes.x;
+    y = childY - winPtr->changes.y;
+    if ((x < 0) || (x >= winPtr->changes.width)
+	    || (y >= winPtr->changes.height)) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+    if (y < 0) {
+	winPtr = (TkWindow *) wmPtr->menubar;
+	if (winPtr == NULL) {
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+	y += wmPtr->menuHeight;
+	if (y < 0) {
+	    return NULL;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Step 4: work down through the hierarchy underneath the current
+     * window. At each level, scan through all the children to find the
+     * highest one in the stacking order that contains the point.  Then
+     * repeat the whole process on that child.
+     */
+
+    while (1) {
+	nextPtr = NULL;
+	for (childPtr = winPtr->childList; childPtr != NULL;
+		childPtr = childPtr->nextPtr) {
+	    if (!Tk_IsMapped(childPtr) || (childPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    if (childPtr->flags & TK_REPARENTED) {
+		continue;
+	    }
+	    tmpx = x - childPtr->changes.x;
+	    tmpy = y - childPtr->changes.y;
+	    bd = childPtr->changes.border_width;
+	    if ((tmpx >= -bd) && (tmpy >= -bd)
+		    && (tmpx < (childPtr->changes.width + bd))
+		    && (tmpy < (childPtr->changes.height + bd))) {
+		nextPtr = childPtr;
+	    }
+	}
+	if (nextPtr == NULL) {
+	    break;
+	}
+	winPtr = nextPtr;
+	x -= winPtr->changes.x;
+	y -= winPtr->changes.y;
+	if ((winPtr->flags & TK_CONTAINER)
+		&& (winPtr->flags & TK_BOTH_HALVES)) {
+	    /*
+	     * The window containing the point is a container, and the
+	     * embedded application is in this same process.  Switch
+	     * over to the toplevel for the embedded application and
+	     * start processing that toplevel from scratch.
+	     */
+
+	    winPtr = TkpGetOtherWindow(winPtr);
+	    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+	    childX = x;
+	    childY = y;
+	    goto gotToplevel;
+	}
+    }
+    return (Tk_Window) winPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateVRootGeometry --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to update all the virtual root
+ *	geometry information in wmPtr.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The vRootX, vRootY, vRootWidth, and vRootHeight fields in
+ *	wmPtr are filled with the most up-to-date information.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+UpdateVRootGeometry(wmPtr)
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;		/* Window manager information to be
+				 * updated.  The wmPtr->vRoot field must
+				 * be valid. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = wmPtr->winPtr;
+    int bd;
+    unsigned int dummy;
+    Window dummy2;
+    Status status;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
+
+    /*
+     * If this isn't a virtual-root window manager, just return information
+     * about the screen.
+     */
+
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~WM_VROOT_OFFSET_STALE;
+    if (wmPtr->vRoot == None) {
+	noVRoot:
+	wmPtr->vRootX = wmPtr->vRootY = 0;
+	wmPtr->vRootWidth = DisplayWidth(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum);
+	wmPtr->vRootHeight = DisplayHeight(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum);
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Refresh the virtual root information if it's out of date.
+     */
+
+    handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(winPtr->display, -1, -1, -1,
+	    (Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+    status = XGetGeometry(winPtr->display, wmPtr->vRoot,
+	    &dummy2, &wmPtr->vRootX, &wmPtr->vRootY,
+	    (unsigned int *) &wmPtr->vRootWidth,
+	    (unsigned int *) &wmPtr->vRootHeight, (unsigned int *) &bd,
+	    &dummy);
+    if (wmTracing) {
+	printf("UpdateVRootGeometry: x = %d, y = %d, width = %d, ",
+		wmPtr->vRootX, wmPtr->vRootY, wmPtr->vRootWidth);
+	printf("height = %d, status = %d\n", wmPtr->vRootHeight, status);
+    }
+    Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+    if (status == 0) {
+	/*
+	 * The virtual root is gone!  Pretend that it never existed.
+	 */
+
+	wmPtr->vRoot = None;
+	goto noVRoot;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetVRootGeometry --
+ *
+ *	This procedure returns information about the virtual root
+ *	window corresponding to a particular Tk window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The values at xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, and heightPtr are set
+ *	with the offset and dimensions of the root window corresponding
+ *	to tkwin.  If tkwin is being managed by a virtual root window
+ *	manager these values correspond to the virtual root window being
+ *	used for tkwin;  otherwise the offsets will be 0 and the
+ *	dimensions will be those of the screen.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Vroot window information is refreshed if it is out of date.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_GetVRootGeometry(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr, widthPtr, heightPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window whose virtual root is to be
+				 * queried. */
+    int *xPtr, *yPtr;		/* Store x and y offsets of virtual root
+				 * here. */
+    int *widthPtr, *heightPtr;	/* Store dimensions of virtual root here. */
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+
+    /*
+     * Find the top-level window for tkwin, and locate the window manager
+     * information for that window.
+     */
+
+    while (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL) && (winPtr->parentPtr != NULL)) {
+	winPtr = winPtr->parentPtr;
+    }
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Make sure that the geometry information is up-to-date, then copy
+     * it out to the caller.
+     */
+
+    if (wmPtr->flags & WM_VROOT_OFFSET_STALE) {
+	UpdateVRootGeometry(wmPtr);
+    }
+    *xPtr = wmPtr->vRootX;
+    *yPtr = wmPtr->vRootY;
+    *widthPtr = wmPtr->vRootWidth;
+    *heightPtr = wmPtr->vRootHeight;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_MoveToplevelWindow --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called instead of Tk_MoveWindow to adjust
+ *	the x-y location of a top-level window.  It delays the actual
+ *	move to a later time and keeps window-manager information
+ *	up-to-date with the move
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The window is eventually moved so that its upper-left corner
+ *	(actually, the upper-left corner of the window's decorative
+ *	frame, if there is one) is at (x,y).
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_MoveToplevelWindow(tkwin, x, y)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Window to move. */
+    int x, y;			/* New location for window (within
+				 * parent). */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)) {
+	panic("Tk_MoveToplevelWindow called with non-toplevel window");
+    }
+    wmPtr->x = x;
+    wmPtr->y = y;
+    wmPtr->flags |= WM_MOVE_PENDING;
+    wmPtr->flags &= ~(WM_NEGATIVE_X|WM_NEGATIVE_Y);
+    if ((wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags & (USPosition|PPosition)) == 0) {
+	wmPtr->sizeHintsFlags |= USPosition;
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * If the window has already been mapped, must bring its geometry
+     * up-to-date immediately, otherwise an event might arrive from the
+     * server that would overwrite wmPtr->x and wmPtr->y and lose the
+     * new position.
+     */
+
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED)) {
+	if (wmPtr->flags & WM_UPDATE_PENDING) {
+	    Tcl_CancelIdleCall(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) winPtr);
+	}
+	UpdateGeometryInfo((ClientData) winPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * UpdateWmProtocols --
+ *
+ *	This procedure transfers the most up-to-date information about
+ *	window manager protocols from the WmInfo structure to the actual
+ *	property on the top-level window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The WM_PROTOCOLS property gets changed for wmPtr's window.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+UpdateWmProtocols(wmPtr)
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr;	/* Information about top-level window. */
+{
+    register ProtocolHandler *protPtr;
+    Atom deleteWindowAtom;
+    int count;
+    Atom *arrayPtr, *atomPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * There are only two tricky parts here.  First, there could be any
+     * number of atoms for the window, so count them and malloc an array
+     * to hold all of their atoms.  Second, we *always* want to respond
+     * to the WM_DELETE_WINDOW protocol, even if no-one's officially asked.
+     */
+
+    for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr, count = 1; protPtr != NULL;
+	    protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr, count++) {
+	/* Empty loop body;  we're just counting the handlers. */
+    }
+    arrayPtr = (Atom *) ckalloc((unsigned) (count * sizeof(Atom)));
+    deleteWindowAtom = Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) wmPtr->winPtr,
+	    "WM_DELETE_WINDOW");
+    arrayPtr[0] = deleteWindowAtom;
+    for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr, atomPtr = &arrayPtr[1];
+	    protPtr != NULL; protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (protPtr->protocol != deleteWindowAtom) {
+	    *atomPtr = protPtr->protocol;
+	    atomPtr++;
+	}
+    }
+    XChangeProperty(wmPtr->winPtr->display, wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window,
+	    Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) wmPtr->winPtr, "WM_PROTOCOLS"),
+	    XA_ATOM, 32, PropModeReplace, (unsigned char *) arrayPtr,
+	    atomPtr-arrayPtr);
+    ckfree((char *) arrayPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmProtocolEventProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called by the Tk_HandleEvent whenever a
+ *	ClientMessage event arrives whose type is "WM_PROTOCOLS".
+ *	This procedure handles the message from the window manager
+ *	in an appropriate fashion.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Depends on what sort of handler, if any, was set up for the
+ *	protocol.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmProtocolEventProc(winPtr, eventPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to which the event was sent. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* X event. */
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;
+    register ProtocolHandler *protPtr;
+    Atom protocol;
+    int result;
+    char *protocolName;
+    Tcl_Interp *interp;
+
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+    if (wmPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+    protocol = (Atom) eventPtr->xclient.data.l[0];
+
+    /*
+     * Note: it's very important to retrieve the protocol name now,
+     * before invoking the command, even though the name won't be used
+     * until after the command returns.  This is because the command
+     * could delete winPtr, making it impossible for us to use it
+     * later in the call to Tk_GetAtomName.
+     */
+
+    protocolName = Tk_GetAtomName((Tk_Window) winPtr, protocol);
+    for (protPtr = wmPtr->protPtr; protPtr != NULL;
+	    protPtr = protPtr->nextPtr) {
+	if (protocol == protPtr->protocol) {
+	    Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) protPtr);
+            interp = protPtr->interp;
+            Tcl_Preserve((ClientData) interp);
+	    result = Tcl_GlobalEval(interp, protPtr->command);
+	    if (result != TCL_OK) {
+		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, "\n    (command for \"");
+		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp, protocolName);
+		Tcl_AddErrorInfo(interp,
+			"\" window manager protocol)");
+		Tcl_BackgroundError(interp);
+	    }
+            Tcl_Release((ClientData) interp);
+	    Tcl_Release((ClientData) protPtr);
+	    return;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * No handler was present for this protocol.  If this is a
+     * WM_DELETE_WINDOW message then just destroy the window.
+     */
+
+    if (protocol == Tk_InternAtom((Tk_Window) winPtr, "WM_DELETE_WINDOW")) {
+	Tk_DestroyWindow((Tk_Window) wmPtr->winPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmRestackToplevel --
+ *
+ *	This procedure restacks a top-level window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	WinPtr gets restacked  as specified by aboveBelow and otherPtr.
+ *	This procedure doesn't return until the restack has taken
+ *	effect and the ConfigureNotify event for it has been received.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmRestackToplevel(winPtr, aboveBelow, otherPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window to restack. */
+    int aboveBelow;		/* Gives relative position for restacking;
+				 * must be Above or Below. */
+    TkWindow *otherPtr;		/* Window relative to which to restack;
+				 * if NULL, then winPtr gets restacked
+				 * above or below *all* siblings. */
+{
+    XWindowChanges changes;
+    XWindowAttributes atts;
+    unsigned int mask;
+    Window window, dummy1, dummy2, vRoot;
+    Window *children;
+    unsigned int numChildren;
+    int i;
+    int desiredIndex = 0;	/* Initialized to stop gcc warnings. */
+    int ourIndex = 0;		/* Initialized to stop gcc warnings. */
+    unsigned long serial;
+    XEvent event;
+    int diff;
+    Tk_ErrorHandler handler;
+    TkWindow *wrapperPtr;
+
+    changes.stack_mode = aboveBelow;
+    changes.sibling = None;
+    mask = CWStackMode;
+    if (winPtr->window == None) {
+	Tk_MakeWindowExist((Tk_Window) winPtr);
+    }
+    if (winPtr->wmInfoPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) {
+	/*
+	 * Can't set stacking order properly until the window is on the
+	 * screen (mapping it may give it a reparent window), so make sure
+	 * it's on the screen.
+	 */
+
+	TkWmMapWindow(winPtr);
+    }
+    wrapperPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapperPtr;
+    window = (winPtr->wmInfoPtr->reparent != None)
+	    ? winPtr->wmInfoPtr->reparent : wrapperPtr->window;
+    if (otherPtr != NULL) {
+	if (otherPtr->window == None) {
+	    Tk_MakeWindowExist((Tk_Window) otherPtr);
+	}
+	if (otherPtr->wmInfoPtr->flags & WM_NEVER_MAPPED) {
+	    TkWmMapWindow(otherPtr);
+	}
+	changes.sibling = (otherPtr->wmInfoPtr->reparent != None)
+		? otherPtr->wmInfoPtr->reparent
+		: otherPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapperPtr->window;
+	mask = CWStackMode|CWSibling;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Before actually reconfiguring the window, see if it's already
+     * in the right place.  If so then don't reconfigure it.  The
+     * reason for this extra work is that some window managers will
+     * ignore the reconfigure request if the window is already in
+     * the right place, causing a long delay in WaitForConfigureNotify
+     * while it times out.  Special note: if the window is almost in
+     * the right place, and the only windows between it and the right
+     * place aren't mapped, then we don't reconfigure it either, for
+     * the same reason.
+     */
+
+    vRoot = winPtr->wmInfoPtr->vRoot;
+    if (vRoot == None) {
+	vRoot = RootWindowOfScreen(Tk_Screen((Tk_Window) winPtr));
+    }
+    if (XQueryTree(winPtr->display, vRoot, &dummy1, &dummy2,
+	    &children, &numChildren) != 0) {
+	/*
+	 * Find where our window is in the stacking order, and
+	 * compute the desired location in the stacking order.
+	 */
+
+	for (i = 0; i < numChildren; i++) {
+	    if (children[i] == window) {
+		ourIndex = i;
+	    }
+	    if (children[i] == changes.sibling) {
+		desiredIndex = i;
+	    }
+	}
+	if (mask & CWSibling) {
+	    if (aboveBelow == Above) {
+		if (desiredIndex < ourIndex) {
+		    desiredIndex += 1;
+		}
+	    } else {
+		if (desiredIndex > ourIndex) {
+		    desiredIndex -= 1;
+		}
+	    }
+	} else {
+	    if (aboveBelow == Above) {
+		desiredIndex = numChildren-1;
+	    } else {
+		desiredIndex = 0;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * See if there are any mapped windows between where we are
+	 * and where we want to be.
+	 */
+
+	handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(winPtr->display, -1, -1, -1,
+		(Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	while (desiredIndex != ourIndex) {
+	    if ((XGetWindowAttributes(winPtr->display, children[desiredIndex],
+		    &atts) != 0) && (atts.map_state != IsUnmapped)) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	    if (desiredIndex < ourIndex) {
+		desiredIndex++;
+	    } else {
+		desiredIndex--;
+	    }
+	}
+	Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+	XFree((char *) children);
+	if (ourIndex == desiredIndex) {
+	    return;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Reconfigure the window.  This tricky because of two things:
+     * (a) Some window managers, like olvwm, insist that we raise
+     *     or lower the toplevel window itself, as opposed to its
+     *     decorative frame.  Attempts to raise or lower the frame
+     *     are ignored.
+     * (b) If the raise or lower is relative to a sibling, X will
+     *     generate an error unless we work with the frames (the
+     *     toplevels themselves aren't siblings).
+     * Fortunately, the procedure XReconfigureWMWindow is supposed
+     * to handle all of this stuff, so be careful to use it instead
+     * of XConfigureWindow.
+     */
+
+    serial = NextRequest(winPtr->display);
+    if (window != wrapperPtr->window) {
+	/*
+	 * We're going to have to wait for events on a window that
+	 * Tk doesn't own, so we have to tell X specially that we
+	 * want to get events on that window.  To make matters worse,
+	 * it's possible that the window doesn't exist anymore (e.g.
+	 * the toplevel could have been withdrawn) so ignore events
+	 * occurring during the request.
+	 */
+
+	handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(winPtr->display, -1, -1, -1,
+		(Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	XSelectInput(winPtr->display, window, StructureNotifyMask);
+	Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+    }
+    XReconfigureWMWindow(winPtr->display, wrapperPtr->window,
+	    Tk_ScreenNumber((Tk_Window) winPtr), mask,  &changes);
+
+    /*
+     * Wait for the reconfiguration to complete.  If we don't wait, then
+     * the window may not restack for a while and the application might
+     * observe it before it has restacked.  Waiting for the reconfiguration
+     * is tricky if winPtr has been reparented, since the window getting
+     * the event isn't one that Tk owns.
+     */
+
+    if (window == wrapperPtr->window) {
+	WaitForConfigureNotify(winPtr, serial);
+    } else {
+	while (1) {
+	    if (WaitForEvent(winPtr->display, window, ConfigureNotify,
+		    &event) != TCL_OK) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	    diff = event.xconfigure.serial - serial;
+	    if (diff >= 0) {
+		break;
+	    }
+	}
+
+	/*
+	 * Ignore errors that occur when we are de-selecting events on
+	 * window, since it's possible that the window doesn't exist
+	 * anymore (see comment above previous call to XSelectInput).
+	 */
+
+	handler = Tk_CreateErrorHandler(winPtr->display, -1, -1, -1,
+		(Tk_ErrorProc *) NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+	XSelectInput(winPtr->display, window, (long) 0);
+	Tk_DeleteErrorHandler(handler);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmAddToColormapWindows --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to add a given window to the
+ *	WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its top-level, if it
+ *	isn't already there.  It is invoked by the Tk code that
+ *	creates a new colormap, in order to make sure that colormap
+ *	information is propagated to the window manager by default.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	WinPtr's window gets added to the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS
+ *	property of its nearest top-level ancestor, unless the
+ *	colormaps have been set explicitly with the
+ *	"wm colormapwindows" command.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmAddToColormapWindows(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window with a non-default colormap.
+				 * Should not be a top-level window. */
+{
+    TkWindow *wrapperPtr;
+    TkWindow *topPtr;
+    Window *oldPtr, *newPtr;
+    int count, i;
+
+    if (winPtr->window == None) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    for (topPtr = winPtr->parentPtr; ; topPtr = topPtr->parentPtr) {
+	if (topPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Window is being deleted.  Skip the whole operation.
+	     */
+
+	    return;
+	}
+	if (topPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    if (topPtr->wmInfoPtr->flags & WM_COLORMAPS_EXPLICIT) {
+	return;
+    }
+    if (topPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapperPtr == NULL) {
+	CreateWrapper(topPtr->wmInfoPtr);
+    }
+    wrapperPtr = topPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapperPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Fetch the old value of the property.
+     */
+
+    if (XGetWMColormapWindows(topPtr->display, wrapperPtr->window,
+	    &oldPtr, &count) == 0) {
+	oldPtr = NULL;
+	count = 0;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Make sure that the window isn't already in the list.
+     */
+
+    for (i = 0; i < count; i++) {
+	if (oldPtr[i] == winPtr->window) {
+	    return;
+	}
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Make a new bigger array and use it to reset the property.
+     * Automatically add the toplevel itself as the last element
+     * of the list.
+     */
+
+    newPtr = (Window *) ckalloc((unsigned) ((count+2)*sizeof(Window)));
+    for (i = 0; i < count; i++) {
+	newPtr[i] = oldPtr[i];
+    }
+    if (count == 0) {
+	count++;
+    }
+    newPtr[count-1] = winPtr->window;
+    newPtr[count] = topPtr->window;
+    XSetWMColormapWindows(topPtr->display, wrapperPtr->window, newPtr,
+	    count+1);
+    ckfree((char *) newPtr);
+    if (oldPtr != NULL) {
+	XFree((char *) oldPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to remove a given window from the
+ *	WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its top-level.  It is invoked
+ *	when windows are deleted.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	WinPtr's window gets removed from the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS
+ *	property of its nearest top-level ancestor, unless the
+ *	top-level itself is being deleted too.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkWmRemoveFromColormapWindows(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that may be present in
+				 * WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property for its
+				 * top-level.  Should not be a top-level
+				 * window. */
+{
+    TkWindow *wrapperPtr;
+    TkWindow *topPtr;
+    Window *oldPtr;
+    int count, i, j;
+
+    if (winPtr->window == None) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    for (topPtr = winPtr->parentPtr; ; topPtr = topPtr->parentPtr) {
+	if (topPtr == NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Ancestors have been deleted, so skip the whole operation.
+	     * Seems like this can't ever happen?
+	     */
+
+	    return;
+	}
+	if (topPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL) {
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    if (topPtr->flags & TK_ALREADY_DEAD) {
+	/*
+	 * Top-level is being deleted, so there's no need to cleanup
+	 * the WM_COLORMAP_WINDOWS property.
+	 */
+
+	return;
+    }
+    if (topPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapperPtr == NULL) {
+	CreateWrapper(topPtr->wmInfoPtr);
+    }
+    wrapperPtr = topPtr->wmInfoPtr->wrapperPtr;
+    if (wrapperPtr == NULL) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Fetch the old value of the property.
+     */
+
+    if (XGetWMColormapWindows(topPtr->display, wrapperPtr->window,
+	    &oldPtr, &count) == 0) {
+	return;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Find the window and slide the following ones down to cover
+     * it up.
+     */
+
+    for (i = 0; i < count; i++) {
+	if (oldPtr[i] == winPtr->window) {
+	    for (j = i ; j < count-1; j++) {
+		oldPtr[j] = oldPtr[j+1];
+	    }
+	    XSetWMColormapWindows(topPtr->display, wrapperPtr->window,
+		    oldPtr, count-1);
+	    break;
+	}
+    }
+    XFree((char *) oldPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkGetPointerCoords --
+ *
+ *	Fetch the position of the mouse pointer.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	*xPtr and *yPtr are filled in with the (virtual) root coordinates
+ *	of the mouse pointer for tkwin's display.  If the pointer isn't
+ *	on tkwin's screen, then -1 values are returned for both
+ *	coordinates.  The argument tkwin must be a toplevel window.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkGetPointerCoords(tkwin, xPtr, yPtr)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Toplevel window that identifies screen
+				 * on which lookup is to be done. */
+    int *xPtr, *yPtr;		/* Store pointer coordinates here. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr = (TkWindow *) tkwin;
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;
+    Window w, root, child;
+    int rootX, rootY;
+    unsigned int mask;
+
+    wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    w = wmPtr->vRoot;
+    if (w == None) {
+	w = RootWindow(winPtr->display, winPtr->screenNum);
+    }
+    if (XQueryPointer(winPtr->display, w, &root, &child, &rootX, &rootY,
+	    xPtr, yPtr, &mask) != True) {
+	*xPtr = -1;
+	*yPtr = -1;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * GetMaxSize --
+ *
+ *	This procedure computes the current maxWidth and maxHeight
+ *	values for a window, taking into account the possibility
+ *	that they may be defaulted.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The values at *maxWidthPtr and *maxHeightPtr are filled
+ *	in with the maximum allowable dimensions of wmPtr's window,
+ *	in grid units.  If no maximum has been specified for the
+ *	window, then this procedure computes the largest sizes that
+ *	will fit on the screen.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+GetMaxSize(wmPtr, maxWidthPtr, maxHeightPtr)
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;		/* Window manager information for the
+				 * window. */
+    int *maxWidthPtr;		/* Where to store the current maximum
+				 * width of the window. */
+    int *maxHeightPtr;		/* Where to store the current maximum
+				 * height of the window. */
+{
+    int tmp;
+
+    if (wmPtr->maxWidth > 0) {
+	*maxWidthPtr = wmPtr->maxWidth;
+    } else {
+	/*
+	 * Must compute a default width.  Fill up the display, leaving a
+	 * bit of extra space for the window manager's borders.
+	 */
+
+	tmp = DisplayWidth(wmPtr->winPtr->display, wmPtr->winPtr->screenNum)
+	    - 15;
+	if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+	    /*
+	     * Gridding is turned on;  convert from pixels to grid units.
+	     */
+
+	    tmp = wmPtr->reqGridWidth
+		    + (tmp - wmPtr->winPtr->reqWidth)/wmPtr->widthInc;
+	}
+	*maxWidthPtr = tmp;
+    }
+    if (wmPtr->maxHeight > 0) {
+	*maxHeightPtr = wmPtr->maxHeight;
+    } else {
+	tmp = DisplayHeight(wmPtr->winPtr->display, wmPtr->winPtr->screenNum)
+	    - 30;
+	if (wmPtr->gridWin != NULL) {
+	    tmp = wmPtr->reqGridHeight
+		    + (tmp - wmPtr->winPtr->reqHeight)/wmPtr->heightInc;
+	}
+	*maxHeightPtr = tmp;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpMakeMenuWindow --
+ *
+ *	Configure the window to be either a pull-down (or pop-up)
+ *	menu, or as a toplevel (torn-off) menu or palette.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Changes the style bit used to create a new Mac toplevel.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkpMakeMenuWindow(tkwin, transient)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* New window. */
+    int transient;		/* 1 means menu is only posted briefly as
+				 * a popup or pulldown or cascade.  0 means
+				 * menu is always visible, e.g. as a torn-off
+				 * menu.  Determines whether save_under and
+				 * override_redirect should be set. */
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;
+    XSetWindowAttributes atts;
+    TkWindow *wrapperPtr;
+
+    if (!Tk_IsTopLevel(tkwin)) {
+	return;
+    }
+    wmPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->wmInfoPtr;
+    if (wmPtr->wrapperPtr == NULL) {
+	CreateWrapper(wmPtr);
+    }
+    wrapperPtr = wmPtr->wrapperPtr;
+    if (transient) {
+	atts.override_redirect = True;
+	atts.save_under = True;
+    } else {
+	atts.override_redirect = False;
+	atts.save_under = False;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * The override-redirect and save-under bits must be set on the
+     * wrapper window in order to have the desired effect.  However,
+     * also set the override-redirect bit on the window itself, so
+     * that the "wm overrideredirect" command will see it.
+     */
+
+    if ((atts.override_redirect != Tk_Attributes(wrapperPtr)->override_redirect)
+	    || (atts.save_under != Tk_Attributes(wrapperPtr)->save_under)) {
+	Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes((Tk_Window) wrapperPtr,
+		CWOverrideRedirect|CWSaveUnder, &atts);
+    }
+    if (atts.override_redirect != Tk_Attributes(tkwin)->override_redirect) {
+	Tk_ChangeWindowAttributes(tkwin, CWOverrideRedirect, &atts);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * CreateWrapper --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked to create the wrapper window for a
+ *	toplevel window.  It is called just before a toplevel is mapped
+ *	for the first time.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The wrapper is created and the toplevel is reparented inside it.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+CreateWrapper(wmPtr)
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;		/* Window manager information for the
+				 * window. */
+{
+    TkWindow *winPtr, *wrapperPtr;
+    Window parent;
+    Tcl_HashEntry *hPtr;
+    int new;
+
+    winPtr = wmPtr->winPtr;
+    if (winPtr->window == None) {
+	Tk_MakeWindowExist((Tk_Window) winPtr);
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * The code below is copied from CreateTopLevelWindow,
+     * Tk_MakeWindowExist, and TkpMakeWindow; The idea is to create an
+     * "official" Tk window (so that we can get events on it), but to
+     * hide the window outside the official Tk hierarchy so that it
+     * isn't visible to the application.  See the comments for the other
+     * procedures if you have questions about this code.
+     */
+
+    wmPtr->wrapperPtr = wrapperPtr = TkAllocWindow(winPtr->dispPtr,
+	    Tk_ScreenNumber((Tk_Window) winPtr), winPtr);
+    wrapperPtr->dirtyAtts |= CWBorderPixel;
+
+    /*
+     * Tk doesn't normally select for StructureNotifyMask events because
+     * the events are synthesized internally.  However, for wrapper
+     * windows we need to know when the window manager modifies the
+     * window configuration.  We also need to select on focus change
+     * events; these are the only windows for which we care about focus
+     * changes.
+     */
+
+    wrapperPtr->flags |= TK_WRAPPER;
+    wrapperPtr->atts.event_mask |= StructureNotifyMask|FocusChangeMask;
+    wrapperPtr->atts.override_redirect = winPtr->atts.override_redirect;
+    if (winPtr->flags & TK_EMBEDDED) {
+	parent = TkUnixContainerId(winPtr);
+    } else {
+	parent = XRootWindow(wrapperPtr->display, wrapperPtr->screenNum);
+    }
+    wrapperPtr->window = XCreateWindow(wrapperPtr->display,
+	    parent, wrapperPtr->changes.x, wrapperPtr->changes.y,
+	    (unsigned) wrapperPtr->changes.width,
+	    (unsigned) wrapperPtr->changes.height,
+	    (unsigned) wrapperPtr->changes.border_width, wrapperPtr->depth,
+	    InputOutput, wrapperPtr->visual,
+	    wrapperPtr->dirtyAtts|CWOverrideRedirect, &wrapperPtr->atts);
+    hPtr = Tcl_CreateHashEntry(&wrapperPtr->dispPtr->winTable,
+	    (char *) wrapperPtr->window, &new);
+    Tcl_SetHashValue(hPtr, wrapperPtr);
+    wrapperPtr->mainPtr = winPtr->mainPtr;
+    wrapperPtr->mainPtr->refCount++;
+    wrapperPtr->dirtyAtts = 0;
+    wrapperPtr->dirtyChanges = 0;
+#ifdef TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS
+    wrapperPtr->inputContext = NULL;
+#endif /* TK_USE_INPUT_METHODS */
+    wrapperPtr->wmInfoPtr = wmPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Reparent the toplevel window inside the wrapper.
+     */
+
+    XReparentWindow(wrapperPtr->display, winPtr->window, wrapperPtr->window,
+	    0, 0);
+
+    /*
+     * Tk must monitor structure events for wrapper windows in order
+     * to detect changes made by window managers such as resizing,
+     * mapping, unmapping, etc..
+     */
+
+    Tk_CreateEventHandler((Tk_Window) wmPtr->wrapperPtr, StructureNotifyMask,
+	    WrapperEventProc, (ClientData) wmPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkWmFocusToplevel --
+ *
+ *	This is a utility procedure invoked by focus-management code.
+ *	The focus code responds to externally generated focus-related
+ *	events on wrapper windows but ignores those events for any other
+ *	windows.  This procedure determines whether a given window is a
+ *	wrapper window and, if so, returns the toplevel window
+ *	corresponding to the wrapper.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	If winPtr is a wrapper window, returns a pointer to the
+ *	corresponding toplevel window; otherwise returns NULL.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkWindow *
+TkWmFocusToplevel(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* Window that received a focus-related
+				 * event. */
+{
+    if (!(winPtr->flags & TK_WRAPPER)) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+    return winPtr->wmInfoPtr->winPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkUnixSetMenubar --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by menu management code to specify the
+ *	window to use as a menubar for a given toplevel window.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The window given by menubar will be mapped and positioned inside
+ *	the wrapper for tkwin and above tkwin.  Menubar will
+ *	automatically be resized to maintain the height specified by
+ *	TkUnixSetMenuHeight the same width as tkwin.  Any previous
+ *	menubar specified for tkwin will be unmapped and ignored from
+ *	now on.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkUnixSetMenubar(tkwin, menubar)
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Token for toplevel window. */
+    Tk_Window menubar;		/* Token for window that is to serve as
+				 * menubar for tkwin.  Must not be a
+				 * toplevel window.  If NULL, any
+				 * existing menubar is canceled and the
+				 * menu height is reset to 0. */
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr = ((TkWindow *) tkwin)->wmInfoPtr;
+    Tk_Window parent;
+    TkWindow *menubarPtr = (TkWindow *) menubar;
+
+    if (wmPtr->menubar != NULL) {
+	/*
+	 * There's already a menubar for this toplevel.  If it isn't the
+	 * same as the new menubar, unmap it so that it is out of the
+	 * way, and reparent it back to its original parent.
+	 */
+
+	if (wmPtr->menubar == menubar) {
+	    return;
+	}
+	((TkWindow *) wmPtr->menubar)->wmInfoPtr = NULL;
+	((TkWindow *) wmPtr->menubar)->flags &= ~TK_REPARENTED;
+	Tk_UnmapWindow(wmPtr->menubar);
+	parent = Tk_Parent(wmPtr->menubar);
+	if (parent != NULL) {
+	    Tk_MakeWindowExist(parent);
+	    XReparentWindow(Tk_Display(wmPtr->menubar),
+		    Tk_WindowId(wmPtr->menubar), Tk_WindowId(parent), 0, 0);
+	}
+	Tk_DeleteEventHandler(wmPtr->menubar, StructureNotifyMask,
+		MenubarDestroyProc, (ClientData) wmPtr->menubar);
+	Tk_ManageGeometry(wmPtr->menubar, NULL, (ClientData) NULL);
+    }
+
+    wmPtr->menubar = menubar;
+    if (menubar == NULL) {
+	wmPtr->menuHeight = 0;
+    } else {
+	if ((menubarPtr->flags & TK_TOP_LEVEL)
+	     || (Tk_Screen(menubar) != Tk_Screen(tkwin))) {
+	    panic("TkUnixSetMenubar got bad menubar");
+	}
+	wmPtr->menuHeight = Tk_ReqHeight(menubar);
+	if (wmPtr->menuHeight == 0) {
+	    wmPtr->menuHeight = 1;
+	}
+	Tk_MakeWindowExist(tkwin);
+	Tk_MakeWindowExist(menubar);
+	if (wmPtr->wrapperPtr == NULL) {
+	    CreateWrapper(wmPtr);
+	}
+	XReparentWindow(Tk_Display(menubar), Tk_WindowId(menubar),
+		wmPtr->wrapperPtr->window, 0, 0);
+	menubarPtr->wmInfoPtr = wmPtr;
+	Tk_MoveResizeWindow(menubar, 0, 0, Tk_Width(tkwin), wmPtr->menuHeight);
+	Tk_MapWindow(menubar);
+	Tk_CreateEventHandler(menubar, StructureNotifyMask, MenubarDestroyProc,
+		(ClientData) menubar);
+	Tk_ManageGeometry(menubar, &menubarMgrType, (ClientData) wmPtr);
+	menubarPtr->flags |= TK_REPARENTED;
+    }
+    wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) tkwin);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * MenubarDestroyProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the event dispatcher whenever a
+ *	menubar window is destroyed (it's also invoked for a few other
+ *	kinds of events, but we ignore those).
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The association between the window and its toplevel is broken,
+ *	so that the window is no longer considered to be a menubar.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+MenubarDestroyProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;		/* TkWindow pointer for menubar. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;			/* Describes what just happened. */
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr;
+
+    if (eventPtr->type != DestroyNotify) {
+	return;
+    }
+    wmPtr = ((TkWindow *) clientData)->wmInfoPtr;
+    wmPtr->menubar = NULL;
+    wmPtr->menuHeight = 0;
+    wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) wmPtr->winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * MenubarReqProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by the Tk geometry management code
+ *	whenever a menubar calls Tk_GeometryRequest to request a new
+ *	size.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+MenubarReqProc(clientData, tkwin)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to the window manager
+				 * information for tkwin's toplevel. */
+    Tk_Window tkwin;		/* Handle for menubar window. */
+{
+    WmInfo *wmPtr = (WmInfo *) clientData;
+
+    wmPtr->menuHeight = Tk_ReqHeight(tkwin);
+    if (wmPtr->menuHeight <= 0) {
+	wmPtr->menuHeight = 1;
+    }
+    wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_SIZE_HINTS;
+    if (!(wmPtr->flags & (WM_UPDATE_PENDING|WM_NEVER_MAPPED))) {
+	Tcl_DoWhenIdle(UpdateGeometryInfo, (ClientData) wmPtr->winPtr);
+	wmPtr->flags |= WM_UPDATE_PENDING;
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpGetWrapperWindow --
+ *
+ *	Given a toplevel window return the hidden wrapper window for
+ *	the toplevel window if available.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The wrapper window.  NULL is we were not passed a toplevel
+ *	window or the wrapper has yet to be created.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+TkWindow *
+TkpGetWrapperWindow(winPtr)
+    TkWindow *winPtr;		/* A toplevel window pointer. */
+{
+    register WmInfo *wmPtr = winPtr->wmInfoPtr;
+
+    if ((winPtr == NULL) || (wmPtr == NULL)) {
+	return NULL;
+    }
+
+    return wmPtr->wrapperPtr;
+}
diff --git a/unix/tkUnixXId.c b/unix/tkUnixXId.c
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f67c35c
--- /dev/null
+++ b/unix/tkUnixXId.c
@@ -0,0 +1,537 @@
+/* 
+ * tkUnixXId.c --
+ *
+ *	This file provides a replacement function for the default X
+ *	resource allocator (_XAllocID).  The problem with the default
+ *	allocator is that it never re-uses ids, which causes long-lived
+ *	applications to crash when X resource identifiers wrap around.
+ *	The replacement functions in this file re-use old identifiers
+ *	to prevent this problem.
+ *
+ *	The code in this file is based on similar implementations by
+ *	George C. Kaplan and Michael Hoegeman.
+ *
+ * Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+ * Copyright (c) 1994-1995 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+ *
+ * See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+ * of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+ *
+ * SCCS: @(#) tkUnixXId.c 1.22 97/06/25 13:16:47
+ */
+
+/*
+ * The definition below is needed on some systems so that we can access
+ * the resource_alloc field of Display structures in order to replace
+ * the resource allocator.
+ */
+
+#define XLIB_ILLEGAL_ACCESS 1
+
+#include "tkInt.h"
+#include "tkPort.h"
+#include "tkUnixInt.h"
+
+/*
+ * A structure of the following type is used to hold one or more
+ * available resource identifiers.  There is a list of these structures
+ * for each display.
+ */
+
+#define IDS_PER_STACK 10
+typedef struct TkIdStack {
+    XID ids[IDS_PER_STACK];		/* Array of free identifiers. */
+    int numUsed;			/* Indicates how many of the entries
+					 * in ids are currently in use. */
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;			/* Display to which ids belong. */
+    struct TkIdStack *nextPtr;		/* Next bunch of free identifiers
+					 * for the same display. */
+} TkIdStack;
+
+/*
+ * Forward declarations for procedures defined in this file:
+ */
+
+static XID		AllocXId _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display));
+static Tk_RestrictAction CheckRestrictProc _ANSI_ARGS_((
+			    ClientData clientData, XEvent *eventPtr));
+static void		WindowIdCleanup _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+static void		WindowIdCleanup2 _ANSI_ARGS_((ClientData clientData));
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkInitXId --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to initialize the id allocator for
+ *	a given display.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The official allocator for the display is set up to be Tk_AllocXID.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkInitXId(dispPtr)
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;			/* Tk's information about the
+					 * display. */
+{
+    dispPtr->idStackPtr = NULL;
+    dispPtr->defaultAllocProc = (XID (*) _ANSI_ARGS_((Display *display))) 
+            dispPtr->display->resource_alloc;
+    dispPtr->display->resource_alloc = AllocXId;
+    dispPtr->windowStackPtr = NULL;
+    dispPtr->idCleanupScheduled = 0;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * AllocXId --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked by Xlib as the resource allocator
+ *	for a display.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	The return value is an X resource identifier that isn't currently
+ *	in use.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The identifier is removed from the stack of free identifiers,
+ *	if it was previously on the stack.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static XID
+AllocXId(display)
+    Display *display;			/* Display for which to allocate. */
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+    TkIdStack *stackPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Find Tk's information about the display.
+     */
+
+    dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
+    
+    /*
+     * If the topmost chunk on the stack is empty then free it.  Then
+     * check for a free id on the stack and return it if it exists.
+     */
+
+    stackPtr = dispPtr->idStackPtr;
+    if (stackPtr != NULL) {
+	while (stackPtr->numUsed == 0) {
+	    dispPtr->idStackPtr = stackPtr->nextPtr;
+	    ckfree((char *) stackPtr);
+	    stackPtr = dispPtr->idStackPtr;
+	    if (stackPtr == NULL) {
+		goto defAlloc;
+	    }
+	}
+	stackPtr->numUsed--;
+	return stackPtr->ids[stackPtr->numUsed];
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * No free ids in the stack:  just get one from the default
+     * allocator.
+     */
+
+    defAlloc:
+    return (*dispPtr->defaultAllocProc)(display);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_FreeXId --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is called to indicate that an X resource identifier
+ *	is now free.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The identifier is added to the stack of free identifiers for its
+ *	display, so that it can be re-used.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_FreeXId(display, xid)
+    Display *display;			/* Display for which xid was
+					 * allocated. */
+    XID xid;				/* Identifier that is no longer
+					 * in use. */
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;
+    TkIdStack *stackPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Find Tk's information about the display.
+     */
+
+    dispPtr = TkGetDisplay(display);
+
+    /*
+     * Add a new chunk to the stack if the current chunk is full.
+     */
+    
+    stackPtr = dispPtr->idStackPtr;
+    if ((stackPtr == NULL) || (stackPtr->numUsed >= IDS_PER_STACK)) {
+	stackPtr = (TkIdStack *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkIdStack));
+	stackPtr->numUsed = 0;
+	stackPtr->dispPtr = dispPtr;
+	stackPtr->nextPtr = dispPtr->idStackPtr;
+	dispPtr->idStackPtr = stackPtr;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Add the id to the current chunk.
+     */
+
+    stackPtr->ids[stackPtr->numUsed] = xid;
+    stackPtr->numUsed++;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkFreeWindowId --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is invoked instead of TkFreeXId for window ids.
+ *	See below for the reason why.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The id given by w will eventually be freed, so that it can be
+ *	reused for other resources.
+ *
+ * Design:
+ *	Freeing window ids is very tricky because there could still be
+ *	events pending for a window in the event queue (or even in the
+ *	server) at the time the window is destroyed.  If the window
+ *	id were to get reused immediately for another window, old
+ *	events could "drop in" on the new window, causing unexpected
+ *	behavior.
+ *
+ *	Thus we have to wait to re-use a window id until we know that
+ *	there are no events left for it.  Right now this is done in
+ *	two steps.  First, we wait until we know that the server
+ *	has seen the XDestroyWindow request, so we can be sure that
+ *	it won't generate more events for the window and that any
+ *	existing events are in our queue.  Second, we make sure that
+ *	there are no events whatsoever in our queue (this is conservative
+ *	but safe).
+ *
+ * 	The first step is done by remembering the request id of the
+ *	XDestroyWindow request and using LastKnownRequestProcessed to
+ *	see what events the server has processed.  If multiple windows
+ *	get destroyed at about the same time, we just remember the
+ *	most recent request number for any of them (again, conservative
+ *	but safe).
+ *
+ *	There are a few other complications as well.  When Tk destroys a
+ *	sub-tree of windows, it only issues a single XDestroyWindow call,
+ *	at the very end for the root of the subtree.  We can't free any of
+ *	the window ids until the final XDestroyWindow call.  To make sure
+ *	that this happens, we have to keep track of deletions in progress,
+ *	hence the need for the "destroyCount" field of the display.
+ *
+ *	One final problem.  Some servers, like Sun X11/News servers still
+ *	seem to have problems with ids getting reused too quickly.  I'm
+ *	not completely sure why this is a problem, but delaying the
+ *	recycling of ids appears to eliminate it.  Therefore, we wait
+ *	an additional few seconds, even after "the coast is clear"
+ *	before reusing the ids.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+TkFreeWindowId(dispPtr, w)
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;		/* Display that w belongs to. */
+    Window w;			/* X identifier for window on dispPtr. */
+{
+    TkIdStack *stackPtr;
+
+    /*
+     * Put the window id on a separate stack of window ids, rather
+     * than the main stack, so it won't get reused right away.  Add
+     * a new chunk to the stack if the current chunk is full.
+     */
+
+    stackPtr = dispPtr->windowStackPtr;
+    if ((stackPtr == NULL) || (stackPtr->numUsed >= IDS_PER_STACK)) {
+	stackPtr = (TkIdStack *) ckalloc(sizeof(TkIdStack));
+	stackPtr->numUsed = 0;
+	stackPtr->dispPtr = dispPtr;
+	stackPtr->nextPtr = dispPtr->windowStackPtr;
+	dispPtr->windowStackPtr = stackPtr;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * Add the id to the current chunk.
+     */
+
+    stackPtr->ids[stackPtr->numUsed] = w;
+    stackPtr->numUsed++;
+
+    /*
+     * Schedule a call to WindowIdCleanup if one isn't already
+     * scheduled.
+     */
+
+    if (!dispPtr->idCleanupScheduled) {
+	dispPtr->idCleanupScheduled = 1;
+	Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(100, WindowIdCleanup, (ClientData) dispPtr);
+    }
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * WindowIdCleanup --
+ *
+ *	See if we can now free up all the accumulated ids of
+ *	deleted windows.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	If it's safe to move the window ids back to the main free
+ *	list, we schedule this to happen after a few mores seconds
+ *	of delay.  If it's not safe to move them yet, a timer handler
+ *	gets invoked to try again later.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+WindowIdCleanup(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to TkDisplay for display */
+{
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr = (TkDisplay *) clientData;
+    int anyEvents, delta;
+    Tk_RestrictProc *oldProc;
+    ClientData oldData;
+    static Tcl_Time timeout = {0, 0};
+
+    dispPtr->idCleanupScheduled = 0;
+
+    /*
+     * See if it's safe to recycle the window ids.  It's safe if:
+     * (a) no deletions are in progress.
+     * (b) the server has seen all of the requests up to the last
+     *     XDestroyWindow request.
+     * (c) there are no events in the event queue; the only way to
+     *     test for this right now is to create a restrict proc that
+     *     will filter the events, then call Tcl_DoOneEvent to see if
+     *	   the procedure gets invoked.
+     */
+
+    if (dispPtr->destroyCount > 0) {
+	goto tryAgain;
+    }
+    delta = LastKnownRequestProcessed(dispPtr->display)
+	    - dispPtr->lastDestroyRequest;
+    if (delta < 0) {
+	XSync(dispPtr->display, False);
+    }
+    anyEvents = 0;
+    oldProc = Tk_RestrictEvents(CheckRestrictProc, (ClientData) &anyEvents,
+	    &oldData);
+    TkUnixDoOneXEvent(&timeout);
+    Tk_RestrictEvents(oldProc, oldData, &oldData);
+    if (anyEvents) {
+	goto tryAgain;
+    }
+
+    /*
+     * These ids look safe to recycle, but we still need to delay a bit
+     * more (see comments for TkFreeWindowId).  Schedule the final freeing.
+     */
+
+    if (dispPtr->windowStackPtr != NULL) {
+	Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(5000, WindowIdCleanup2,
+		(ClientData) dispPtr->windowStackPtr);
+	dispPtr->windowStackPtr = NULL;
+    }
+    return;
+
+    /*
+     * It's still not safe to free up the ids.  Try again a bit later.
+     */
+
+    tryAgain:
+    dispPtr->idCleanupScheduled = 1;
+    Tcl_CreateTimerHandler(500, WindowIdCleanup, (ClientData) dispPtr);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * WindowIdCleanup2 --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is the last one in the chain that recycles
+ *	window ids.  It takes all of the ids indicated by its
+ *	argument and adds them back to the main id free list.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	Window ids get added to the main free list for their display.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static void
+WindowIdCleanup2(clientData)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to TkIdStack list. */
+{
+    TkIdStack *stackPtr = (TkIdStack *) clientData;
+    TkIdStack *lastPtr;
+
+    lastPtr = stackPtr;
+    while (lastPtr->nextPtr != NULL) {
+	lastPtr = lastPtr->nextPtr;
+    }
+    lastPtr->nextPtr = stackPtr->dispPtr->idStackPtr;
+    stackPtr->dispPtr->idStackPtr = stackPtr;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * CheckRestrictProc --
+ *
+ *	This procedure is a restrict procedure, called by Tcl_DoOneEvent
+ *	to filter X events.  All it does is to set a flag to indicate
+ *	that there are X events present.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Sets the integer pointed to by the argument, then returns
+ *	TK_DEFER_EVENT.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+static Tk_RestrictAction
+CheckRestrictProc(clientData, eventPtr)
+    ClientData clientData;	/* Pointer to flag to set. */
+    XEvent *eventPtr;		/* Event to filter;  not used. */
+{
+    int *flag = (int *) clientData;
+    *flag = 1;
+    return TK_DEFER_EVENT;
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_GetPixmap --
+ *
+ *	Same as the XCreatePixmap procedure except that it manages
+ *	resource identifiers better.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	Returns a new pixmap.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+Pixmap
+Tk_GetPixmap(display, d, width, height, depth)
+    Display *display;		/* Display for new pixmap. */
+    Drawable d;			/* Drawable where pixmap will be used. */
+    int width, height;		/* Dimensions of pixmap. */
+    int depth;			/* Bits per pixel for pixmap. */
+{
+    return XCreatePixmap(display, d, (unsigned) width, (unsigned) height,
+	    (unsigned) depth);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * Tk_FreePixmap --
+ *
+ *	Same as the XFreePixmap procedure except that it also marks
+ *	the resource identifier as free.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	The pixmap is freed in the X server and its resource identifier
+ *	is saved for re-use.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+void
+Tk_FreePixmap(display, pixmap)
+    Display *display;		/* Display for which pixmap was allocated. */
+    Pixmap pixmap;		/* Identifier for pixmap. */
+{
+    XFreePixmap(display, pixmap);
+    Tk_FreeXId(display, (XID) pixmap);
+}
+
+/*
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ *
+ * TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted --
+ *
+ *	Checks whether the window was recently deleted. This is called
+ *	by the generic error handler to detect asynchronous notification
+ *	of errors due to operations by Tk on a window that was already
+ *	deleted by the server.
+ *
+ * Results:
+ *	1 if the window was deleted recently, 0 otherwise.
+ *
+ * Side effects:
+ *	None.
+ *
+ *----------------------------------------------------------------------
+ */
+
+int
+TkpWindowWasRecentlyDeleted(win, dispPtr)
+    Window win;		/* The window to check for. */
+    TkDisplay *dispPtr;	/* The window belongs to this display. */
+{
+    TkIdStack *stackPtr;
+    int i;
+
+    for (stackPtr = dispPtr->windowStackPtr;
+         stackPtr != NULL;
+         stackPtr = stackPtr->nextPtr) {
+        for (i = 0; i < stackPtr->numUsed; i++) {
+            if ((Window) stackPtr->ids[i] == win) {
+                return 1;
+            }
+        }
+    }
+    return 0;
+}